PWGSC Ontario Section 00 00 00 Region Project

PWGSC Ontario Section 00 00 00 Region Project
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
PROJECT TITLE
Section 00 00 00
Page 1
2016-01-13
CANADA CENTRE FOR INLAND WATERS
867 LAKESHORE ROAD
BURLINGTON, ONTARIO
L7R 4A6
SPACE FIT-UP AT CCIW FOR DFO
PROJECT NUMBER
R.069124.001
PROJECT DATE
2016-01-13
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 01 10
Page 1
2016-01-13
Division 0 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements
Section 00 00 00 - SPECIFICATION TITLE SHEET ................................................................................. 1
Section 00 01 10 - TABLE OF CONTENTS ............................................................................................... 3
Section 00 31 26 - EXISTING HAZARDOUS MATERIAL INFORMATION .......................................... 2
Division 1 - General Requirements
Section 01 11 00 - SUMMARY OF WORK ................................................................................................ 3
Section 01 14 00 - WORK RESTRICTIONS ............................................................................................... 3
Section 01 29 83 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES FOR TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES ................ 2
Section 01 31 13 - PROJECT COORDINATION ........................................................................................ 4
Section 01 31 19 - PROJECT MEETINGS .................................................................................................. 3
Section 01 32 00 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION ................................................ 1
Section 01 32 16 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE BAR (GANTT) CHART ...................... 3
Section 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ...................................................................................... 5
Section 01 35 29 - HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS ............................................................... 5
Section 01 35 36 - FIRE SAFETY REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................ 4
Section 01 41 00 - REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................. 2
Section 01 45 00 - QUALITY CONTROL ................................................................................................... 3
Section 01 51 00 - TEMPORARY UTILITIES ............................................................................................ 3
Section 01 52 00 - CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES ................................................................................... 4
Section 01 56 00 - TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES ....................................................... 2
Section 01 61 00 - COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS .................................................................. 5
Section 01 73 00 - EXECUTION ................................................................................................................. 2
Section 01 74 11 - CLEANING .................................................................................................................... 2
Section 01 74 20 - CONSTRUCTION/DEMOLITION ............................................................................... 2
Section 01 77 00 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES......................................................................................... 2
Section 01 78 00 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS ......................................................................................... 6
Section 01 79 00 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING ........................................................................ 2
Section 01 91 51 - BUILDING MANAGEMENT MANUAL ..................................................................... 4
Division 2 - Existing Conditions
Section 02 41 99 - DEMOLITION ............................................................................................................... 2
Division 4 - Masonry
Section 04 04 99 - MASONRY .................................................................................................................... 5
Division 5 - Metals
Section 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS ............................................................................................ 4
Division 6 - Wood, Plastics and Composites
Section 06 08 99 - ROUGH CARPENTRY ................................................................................................. 4
Section 06 40 00 - ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK ............................................................................. 7
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 01 10
Page 2
2016-01-13
Division 7 - Thermal and Moisture Protection
Section 07 84 00 - FIRE STOPPING............................................................................................................ 5
Section 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS ........................................................................................................ 6
Division 8 - Openings
Section 08 11 00 - METAL DOORS AND FRAMES ................................................................................. 6
Section 08 13 73 - SLIDING METAL DOORS ........................................................................................... 4
Section 08 71 11 - FINISH HARDWARE ................................................................................................... 4
Section 08 80 50 - GLAZING ...................................................................................................................... 5
Section 08 87 53 - SECURITY FILMS ........................................................................................................ 5
Division 9 - Finishes
Section 09 21 16 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES ............................................................................... 9
Section 09 51 13 - ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS ............................................................................................ 3
Section 09 53 00.01 - ACOUSTICAL SUSPENSION ................................................................................. 4
Section 09 65 19 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING ..................................................................................... 4
Section 09 68 13 - TILE CARPETING ...................................................................................................... 11
Section 09 91 23 - INTERIOR PAINTING ................................................................................................ 12
Division 21 - Fire Suppression
Section 21 05 01 - COMMON WORK RESULTS - MECHANICAL ...................................................... 11
Section 21 05 05 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION ......................................... 4
Section 21 13 13 - WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS ............................................................................. 6
Division 22 - Plumbing
Section 22 05 00 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING ........................................................ 6
Section 22 11 16 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING ....................................................................................... 5
Section 22 13 17 - DRAINAGE WASTE AND VENT PIPING - CAST IRON AND COPPER ................ 3
Section 22 30 05 - DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS .................................................................................. 3
Section 22 42 00 - COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES ................................................................... 3
Section 22 42 01 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES ..................................................... 4
Division 23 - Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
Section 23 03 01 - USE OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS DURING CONSTRUCTION ............................ 1
Section 23 05 05 - INSTALLATION OF PIPEWORK ................................................................................ 5
Section 23 05 17 - PIPE WELDING ............................................................................................................ 3
Section 23 05 23.01 - VALVES - BRONZE .............................................................................................. 10
Section 23 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT................... 7
Section 23 05 48 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT3
Section 23 05 53.01 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION ........................................................................ 6
Section 23 05 93 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC....................................... 11
Section 23 05 94 - PRESSURE TESTING OF DUCTED AIR SYSTEMS ................................................. 3
Section 23 07 13 - DUCT INSULATION .................................................................................................... 5
Section 23 07 15 - THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING ................................................................... 12
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 01 10
Page 3
2016-01-13
Section 23 08 02 - CLEANING AND START-UP OF MECHANICAL PIPING SYSTEMS .................... 3
Section 23 11 23 - FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING ........................................................................... 3
Section 23 23 00 - REFRIGERANT PIPING ............................................................................................... 5
Section 23 31 13.01 - METAL DUCTS - LOW PRESSURE TO 500 PA ................................................... 8
Section 23 33 14 - DAMPERS - BALANCING........................................................................................... 3
Section 23 33 16 - DAMPERS - FIRE AND SMOKE ................................................................................. 3
Section 23 33 46 - FLEXIBLE DUCTS ....................................................................................................... 3
Section 23 36 00 - AIR TERMINAL UNITS ............................................................................................... 3
Section 23 37 13 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES ................................................................. 3
Section 23 74 00 - PACKAGED OUTDOOR HVAC EQUIPMENT .......................................................... 7
Section 23 81 40 - AIR SOURCE UNITARY HEAT PUMPS .................................................................... 7
Division 25 - Integrated Automation
Section 25 01 11 - EMCS: START-UP, VERIFICATION AND COMMISSIONING ............................... 5
Section 25 01 12 - EMCS: TRAINING ........................................................................................................ 2
Section 25 05 01 - EMCS: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................... 8
Section 25 05 02 - EMCS: SUBMITTALS AND REVIEW PROCESS ...................................................... 4
Section 25 05 03 - EMCS: PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS ............................................................... 3
Section 25 05 54 - EMCS: IDENTIFICATION ........................................................................................... 2
Section 25 08 20 - EMCS: WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE ............................................................ 4
Section 25 10 01 - EMCS: LOCAL AREA NETWORK (LAN) ................................................................. 3
Section 25 30 01 - EMCS: BUILDING CONTROLLERS ........................................................................ 10
Section 25 30 02 - EMCS: FIELD CONTROL DEVICES ........................................................................ 12
Section 25 90 01 - EMCS: SITE REQUIREMENTS, APPLICATIONS AND SYSTEMS SEQUENCES
OF OPERATION .......................................................................................................................................... 1
Division 26 - Electrical
Section 26 05 00 - COMMON WORK RESULTS - FOR ELECTRICAL .................................................. 8
Section 26 05 20 - WIRE AND BOX CONNECTORS (0-1000V).............................................................. 3
Section 26 05 21 - WIRES AND CABLES (0-1000V) ................................................................................ 3
Section 26 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS .................................. 2
Section 26 05 31 - SPLITTERS, JUNCTION, PULL BOXES AND CABINETS ...................................... 2
Section 26 05 32 - OUTLET BOXES, CONDUIT BOXES AND FITTINGS ............................................ 2
Section 26 05 34 - CONDUITS, CONDUIT FASTENINGS AND CONDUIT FITTINGS........................ 4
Section 26 24 16.01 - PANELBOARDS BREAKER TYPE ........................................................................ 4
Section 26 28 16.02 - MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS ............................................................. 3
Section 26 28 23 - DISCONNECT SWITCHES - FUSED AND NON-FUSED ......................................... 1
Section 26 29 10 - MOTOR STARTERS TO 600 V INSTALLATION ONLY .......................................... 2
Section 26 50 00 - LIGHTING ..................................................................................................................... 6
Section 26 53 00 - EXIT LIGHTS ................................................................................................................ 2
Division 27 - Communications
Section 27 05 28 - PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS ................................................ 2
Section 27 51 19 - SOUND MASKING SYSTEM ...................................................................................... 5
Division 28 - Electronic Safety and Security
Section 28 31 00 - FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM ............................................................................... 9
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
EXISTING HAZARDOUS
MATERIAL INFORMATION
Part 1
General
1.1
DEFINITIONS
Section 00 31 26
Page 1
2016-01-13
.1
Hazardous Materials Report: Information prepared by a specialist consultant hired
directly by the Departmental Representative, and is included as information documents
related to Project and identified in the Appendices as such, and only as specifically
referenced in the Appendices.
.2
Contract Documents: All documents and information of any type and in any form,
specifically prepared for use of Contract and as defined in Contractor’s Agreement Form.
1.2
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
.1
Status of Hazardous Materials Report: Hazardous Materials Report identified in the
Appendices; or any part thereof, are not part of Contract Documents prepared by the
Departmental Representative and are made available to Bidder for the purpose of
providing Bidder with access to information available to Departmental Representative
under the following conditions:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
Hazardous Materials Report shall not be considered a representation or warranty
that information contained therein is accurate, complete, or appropriate.
Bidder shall interpret and draw conclusions about Hazardous Materials Report
and are encouraged to obtain specialist advice with regards to this information.
Departmental Representative assumes no responsibility for such interpretations
and conclusions.
Information contained in Hazardous Materials Report may be time sensitive and
dates shall be considered when interpreting Hazardous Materials Report.
Bidder may rely upon data contained in Hazardous Materials Report; or parts
thereof, which are specifically incorporated into Contract Documents by means
of copying, transcribing or referencing, but shall draw their own conclusions
from such data and shall not rely on opinions or interpretations contained therein.
.2
Hazardous Materials Report: A Hazardous Materials Report is being prepared for this
project and will be attached as an Appendices in a future Addenda, but is not
incorporated into the Contract Documents:
.3
Direct inquiries during Bid period to person identified within the Contracting Authority
to receive inquiries; the Departmental Representative will not accept direct enquiries with
regards to hazardous materials removal.
Part 2
Products
2.1
USE OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS REPORT
.1
Information presented in the Hazardous Materials Report was commissioned by the
Departmental Representative; recommendations contained in the Hazardous Materials
Report were used by the Departmental Representative to assess relative risk of exposure
to hazardous materials and the level of involvement of all parties contributing to the
Contract Documents.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
EXISTING HAZARDOUS
MATERIAL INFORMATION
Information contained in the Hazardous Materials Report may be useful to the
Contractor, and is made available for review with no implied or express warranty from
the Departmental Representative as to the accuracy or completeness of this Document.
Part 3
Execution
3.1
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS REPORT
.1
Section 00 31 26
Page 2
2016-01-13
A copy of the Hazardous Materials Report is included in the Appendices.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
SUMMARY OF WORK
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
.1
Title and description of Work.
.2
Contract Method.
.3
Work by others.
.4
Future work.
.5
Work sequence.
.6
Contractor use of premises.
.7
Partial Owner occupancy.
.8
Alterations to existing building.
1.2
Section 01 11 00
Page 1
2016-01-13
PRECEDENCE
.1
1.3
For Federal Government projects, Division 01 Sections take precedence over technical
specification sections in other Divisions of this Project Manual.
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
1.4
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
.1
Work of this Contract comprises interior renovation of existing warehouse and research &
development buildings at Canada Centre for Inland Waters for Environment Canada,
located at 867 Lakeshore Rd., Burlington, Ontario L7R 4A6; and further identified as
PWGSC Ontario Project Number R.069124.001.
.2
Refer to Section 00 31 26 for information regarding Designated Substances and Hazardous
Materials Survey. Required abatement requirements are identified within the Contract
Documents.
1.5
CONTRACT METHOD
.1
Construct work under lump sum contract.
.2
Relations and responsibilities between Contractor and subcontractors and suppliers
subcontractors assigned by Departmental Representative are as defined in Conditions of
Contract. Assigned Subcontractors must, in addition:
.1
.2
Furnish to Contractor, bonds covering faithful performance of subcontracted work
and payment of obligations thereunder when Contractor is required to furnish such
bonds to Departmental Representative.
Purchase and maintain liability insurance to protect Contractor from claims for not
less than limits of liability which Contractor is required to provide to Departmental
Representative.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
1.6
SUMMARY OF WORK
Section 01 11 00
Page 2
2016-01-13
COST BREAKDOWN
.1
Within 48 hours of notification of acceptance of bid furnish a cost breakdown by Section
aggregating contract amount.
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
HVAC – Ships Wing
HVAC – R&D
Controls
Plumbing
Ceilings
.2
Flooring Show separately cost of equipment purchased exempt from Ontario Retail Sales
Tax under your Ontario Sales Tax license number.
.3
Within 48 hours of acceptance of bid submit a list of subcontractors.
1.7
WORK BY OTHERS
.1
The Contractor shall for the purpose of the Ontario Occupational Health and Safety Act
and Regulations for Construction Projects, and for the duration of the Work of the
Contract:
.1
.2
1.8
Assume the role of Constructor in accordance with the Authority Having
Jurisdictions.
Agree, in the event of two or more Contractors working at the same time and space
at the work site, without limiting the General Conditions GC3.7, to the
Departmental Representative's order to:
.1
Assume, as the Constructor, the responsibility for the Departmental
Representative's other Contractors.
CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES
.1
Contractor shall limit use of premises for Work, for storage, and for access, to allow;
.1
.2
Partial owner occupancy of the remainder of the building.
Public usage.
.2
Coordinate use of premises under direction of Departmental Representative.
.3
Obtain and pay for use of additional storage or work areas needed for operations under this
Contract.
1.9
OWNER OCCUPANCY
.1
Owner will occupy premises during entire construction period for execution of normal
operations.
.2
Cooperate with Owner in scheduling operations to minimize conflict and to facilitate
Owner usage.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
1.10
SUMMARY OF WORK
Section 01 11 00
Page 3
2016-01-13
ALTERATIONS TO EXISTING BUILDING
.1
Remove and recycle, compost, anaerobically digest, sell material for reuse or dispose of:
.1
.2
Remove in good order, turn over to Departmental Representative, and store within building
where designated by Departmental Representative:
.1
.3
All demolition waste resulting from demolition activities as indicated on Drawings
that are not designated for reinstallation or turnover to Departmental
Representative.
Mechanical and electrical items as indicated.
Remove, temporarily store, clean, alter to suit and reinstall:
.1
Mechanical and electrical items as indicated.
.4
Provide new openings required in existing construction.
.5
Block in openings where items removed with material and finish to match existing
adjoining construction.
.6
Existing equipment and services supported by ceilings identified to be demolished must be
secured to structure above.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not used.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not used.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
WORK RESTRICTIONS
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
.1
1.2
Section 01 14 00
Page 1
2016-01-13
Section 01 56 00 – Temporary Barriers and Enclosures: Coordination and provision of
temporary
ACCESS AND EGRESS
.1
1.3
Design, construct and maintain temporary "access to" and "egress from" work areas,
including stairs, runways and ramps, independent of finished surfaces and in accordance
with relevant municipal, provincial and other regulations.
USE OF SITE AND FACILITIES
.1
Coordination of Hours of Work: Confine hours of Work on site from 07:00 hours to
18:00 hours, local time, Monday through Friday, and as follows:
.1
.2
.3
Review hours of work with Departmental Representative.
Conduct work undertaken during normal operating hours in a manner that does
not disrupt Owner’s operations.
Arrangements for extended hours to those stated above or for any Work required
on Saturdays, Sundays or statutory holidays must be pre-arranged in writing with
the Departmental Representative.
.1
Normal operating hours are as follows:
.1
Monday to Friday:
07:00 hours to 18:00 hours
.2
Saturday:
Closed
.3
Sunday:
Closed
.2
No additional compensation will be paid by the Departmental
Representative for overtime work where scheduling requires work to be
completed on weekends, evenings, or nights unless directed specifically
by the Departmental Representative.
.2
Execute work with least possible interference or disturbance to normal use of premises.
Make arrangements with Departmental Representative to facilitate work as stated.
.3
Maintain existing services to building and provide for personnel and vehicle access.
.4
Where security is reduced by work provide temporary means to maintain security.
.5
Departmental Representative will assign sanitary facilities for use by Contractor's
personnel. Keep facilities clean.
.6
Closures: protect work temporarily until permanent enclosures are completed.
1.4
ALTERATIONS, ADDITIONS OR REPAIRS TO EXISTING BUILDING
.1
Execute work with least possible interference or disturbance to building operations,
occupants, public and normal use of premises. Arrange with Departmental Representative
to facilitate execution of work.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
1.5
WORK RESTRICTIONS
Section 01 14 00
Page 2
2016-01-13
EXISTING SERVICES
.1
Notify, Departmental Representative and utility companies of intended interruption of
services and obtain required permission.
.2
Where Work involves breaking into or connecting to existing services, confirm service
interruption identified in Shutdown Schedule with Departmental Representative 1 week
and again 48 hours in advance of scheduled shutdown or interruption of mechanical or
electrical service throughout course of work. Keep duration of interruptions minimal.
Carry out interruptions after normal working hours of occupants, preferably on
weekends.
.3
Provide for personnel, pedestrian and vehicular traffic.
.4
Construct barriers in accordance with Section 01 56 00 – Temporary Barriers and
Enclosures.
1.6
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
.1
Paint public occupied areas Monday to Friday from 18:00 to 07:00 hours only and on
Saturdays, Sundays, and statutory holidays.
.2
Carry out noise generating Work Monday to Friday from 18:00 to 07:00 hours and on
Saturdays, Sundays, and statutory holidays.
.3
Submit schedule in accordance with Section 01 32 16 - Construction Progress Schedule Bar (GANTT) Chart.
.4
Ensure Contractor's personnel employed on site become familiar with and obey
regulations including safety, fire, traffic and security regulations.
.5
Keep within limits of work and avenues of ingress and egress.
.6
Ingress and egress of Contractor vehicles, personnel and visitors at site is limited to
locations shown on Drawing A1.00.
.7
Deliver materials outside of peak traffic hours 09:30 to 15:00 unless otherwise approved
by Departmental Representative. Deliveries to site or removals from site involving
occupation of City of Toronto streets shall not take place without a valid Street
Occupancy Permit.
.8
Prior to cutting or drilling horizontal or vertical surfaces including concrete, concrete
block or other structural substrate, determine location of reinforcing, service lines, pipes,
conduits or other items by x-ray, ground penetrating radar or other appropriate method.
Submit findings to Departmental Representative prior to cutting or drilling.
1.7
SECURITY
.1
Where security has been reduced by Work of Contract, provide temporary means to
maintain security.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
Personnel and visitors will be checked daily at main Security Control Desk in the
A&L Building at start of work shift or visit and provided with pass which must
be worn at all times. Pass must be returned at end of work shift and personnel
checked out.
.1
When signed in, workers and visitors will be allowed unescorted access
to A&L Building, Hydraulics Wing, R&D and WTC in accordance with
the Security Status of the General Conditions of the Contract.
Security escort:
.1
.2
.3
.4
1.8
Personnel employed on this project must be escorted when executing work after
normal working hours.
Submit an escort request to Departmental Representative at least 14 days before
service is needed. Costs of security escort will be Contractor's responsibility.
Any escort request may be cancelled free of charge if notification of cancellation
is given at least 4 hours before scheduled time of escort. Cost incurred by late
request will be Contractor's responsibility.
Calculation of costs will be based on average hourly rate of security officer for
minimum of 8 hours per day for late service request and of 4 hours for late
cancellations.
BUILDING SMOKING ENVIRONMENT
.1
Comply with smoking restrictions. Smoking is not permitted.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Section 01 14 00
Page 3
2016-01-13
Security clearances:
.1
.3
WORK RESTRICTIONS
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
PAYMENT PROCEDURES FOR TESTING
LABORATORY SERVICES
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
.1
Particular requirements for inspection and testing to be carried out by testing laboratory
designated by Departmental Representative are specified under sections as follows:
.1
.2
1.2
Section 01 29 83
Page 1
2016-01-13
Section 05 12 23 – Structural Steel for Buildings
Section 07 81 00 – Applied Fireproofing
APPOINTMENT AND PAYMENT
.1
Departmental Representative will appoint and pay for services of testing laboratory
except follows:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.2
1.3
Inspection and testing required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders
of public authorities.
Inspection and testing performed exclusively for Contractor's convenience.
Testing, adjustment and balancing of conveying systems, mechanical and
electrical equipment and systems.
Mill tests and certificates of compliance.
Tests specified to be carried out by Contractor under supervision of Departmental
Representative.
Where tests or inspections by designated testing laboratory reveal Work not in
accordance with contract requirements, pay costs for additional tests or inspections as
required by Departmental Representative to verify acceptability of corrected work.
CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
.1
Provide labour, equipment and facilities to:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Provide access to Work for inspection and testing.
Facilitate inspections and tests.
Make good Work disturbed by inspection and test.
Provide storage on site for laboratory's exclusive use to store equipment and cure
test samples.
.2
Notify Departmental Representative 48 hours minimum sufficiently in advance of
operations to allow for assignment of laboratory personnel and scheduling of test.
.3
Where materials are specified to be tested, deliver representative samples in required
quantity to testing laboratory.
.4
Pay costs for uncovering and making good Work that is covered before required
inspection or testing is completed and approved by Departmental Representative.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
PAYMENT PROCEDURES FOR TESTING
LABORATORY SERVICES
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
Section 01 29 83
Page 2
2016-01-13
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
PROJECT COORDINATION
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
.1
This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations
on Project including, but not limited to, the following:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.2
1.2
Section 01 31 13
Page 1
2016-01-13
General project coordination procedures
Coordination of Drawings and Specifications
Administrative and supervisory personnel
Electronic project management software systems
Each Subcontractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of
responsibility will be assigned to specific Subcontractors by Contractor.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
.1
Section 01 26 13 – Requests for Information Procedures
.2
Section 01 31 19 – Project Meetings
.3
Section 01 32 16 – Construction Progress Schedule Bar (GANTT) Chart: Construction
progress documentation for preparing and submitting Contractor’s Construction
Schedule.
.4
Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures
.5
Section 01 73 00 – Execution: Coordinating general installation and site engineering
services.
.6
Section 01 77 00 – Closeout Procedures
.7
Divisions 21, 22 and 23 – Common Work Results: Common work results for fire
suppression, plumbing, and heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems
.8
Division 25 – Common Work Results: Common work results for integrated automation.
.9
Divisions 26, 27 and 28 – Common Work Results: Common work results for electrical,
communications, and electronic safety and security.
1.3
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
.1
General Coordination: Coordination that generally applies to all components of the
Project Manual as follows:
.1
.2
.3
Review requirements for inclusion of schedule milestones to ensure timely
submittal of Shop Drawings, product data and samples for review by
Departmental Representative, and expected time frame for review accounting for
possible resubmission without delay consequences.
Coordinate construction activities as required with Project Schedule to ensure
efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work.
Contractor shall coordinate where Subcontractor’s installation of one part of
Work is dependent on installation of other components.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.4
.5
1.4
PROJECT COORDINATION
Section 01 31 13
Page 2
2016-01-13
Contractor will schedule and coordinate construction activities of other
Subcontractors in sequence required to obtain best results. Where availability of
space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to assure
maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation
by other Subcontractors, under separate contract or by Contractor’s own forces.
SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
.2
Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings where limited space availability
necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different
components or where coordination is required for installation of products and materials
fabricated by separate entities:
.1
.2
.3
.3
Indicate relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings.
Indicate required installation sequences.
Refer to Divisions 21, 22, 23 and 25 – Mechanically related Sections, and
Division 26, 27, 28 and 29 Electrically related Sections for specific coordination
drawing requirements for mechanical and electrical installations.
Staff Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of principal
staff assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project
site:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities.
List addresses and telephone numbers; including office and alternate telephone
numbers.
Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as
standbys in absence of individuals assigned to Project.
Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary site office, and by each
temporary telephone.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
ON-SITE DOCUMENTS
.1
Maintain at job site, one copy each of the following:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
Contract Drawings
Specifications
Addenda and amendments
Reviewed Shop Drawings
Change Orders
Other modifications to Contract
Site test reports
Copy of approved Construction Schedule
Manufacturers' installation and application instructions
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.10
.11
.12
PROJECT COORDINATION
Labour conditions and wage schedules
Applicable current editions of municipal regulations and by-laws
Current building codes, complete with addenda bulletins applicable to Place of
Work
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURES
.1
Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other
construction activities to avoid conflicts and ensure orderly progress of Work. Such
administrative activities shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
3.2
Section 01 31 13
Page 3
2016-01-13
Preparation of schedules and coordination with Contractor’s and other
Subcontractor’s activities.
Installation and removal of temporary facilities under direction of Contractor not
provided by Contractor.
Delivery and processing of submittals for Contractor conveyance to
Departmental Representative.
Progress meetings where required by Contractor and Departmental
Representative.
Contract acceptance procedures as scheduled by Contractor and as necessary to
fulfill Departmental Representative’s acceptance procedures.
COORDINATION
.1
Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of
Specifications to verify efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work.
.2
Contractor shall coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections that
depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation with
Subcontractors as follows:
.1
.2
.3
Scheduling construction operations in sequence required to obtain best results
where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other
components, before or after its own installation.
Coordinating installation of different components with Subcontractors to verify
maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
Making adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later
installation.
.3
Contractor shall prepare memoranda where necessary, for distribution to each party
involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as
required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings:
.4
Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other
construction activities, and activities of other contractors, if any, to avoid conflicts and to
verify orderly progress of Work. Administrative activities include, but are not limited to,
the following:
.1
Preparation of Contractor’s Construction Schedule
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
3.3
PROJECT COORDINATION
Section 01 31 13
Page 4
2016-01-13
Preparation of Schedule of Values
Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls
Delivery and processing of submittals
Progress meetings
Pre-Installation Meetings
Project closeout activities
GENERAL INSTALLATION PROVISIONS
.1
Contractor shall coordinate with installer of each major component to inspect both
substrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner.
.2
Contractor shall comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and
recommendations, to extent that those instructions and recommendations are more
explicit or stringent than requirements contained in Contract Documents and
Specifications.
.3
Contractor shall inspect Products immediately upon delivery and again prior to
installation. Reject damaged and defective items and arrange for replacement.
.4
Contractor shall provide attachment and connection devices and methods necessary for
securing Work. Secure Work true to line and level. Allow for expansion and building
movement.
.5
Contractor will supervise Work and ensure the following:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
Provide uniform joint widths in exposed Work. Arrange joints in exposed Work
to obtain the best visual effect. Refer questionable choices to Contractor for final
decision.
Install each component during weather conditions and Project status that will
ensure best possible results. Isolate each part of completed construction from
incompatible Products as necessary to prevent deterioration.
Coordinate temporary enclosures with required inspections and tests, to minimize
necessity of uncovering completed construction for that purpose.
Install individual components at standard mounting heights recognized within the
industry for particular applications indicated where mounting heights are not
indicated. Refer questionable mounting height decisions to Contractor for final
decision.
Coordinate construction activities to ensure that no part of Work, completed or in
progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious
exposure during construction period.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
PROJECT MEETINGS
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
ADMINISTRATIVE
Section 01 31 19
Page 1
2016-01-13
.1
Schedule and administer project meetings throughout the progress of the work at the call
of Departmental Representative.
.2
Prepare agenda for meetings.
.3
Distribute written notice of each meeting 4 days in advance of meeting date to
Departmental Representative.
.4
Provide physical space and make arrangements for meetings.
.5
Preside at meetings.
.6
Record the meeting minutes. Include significant proceedings and decisions. Identify
actions by parties.
.7
Reproduce and distribute copies of minutes within three days after meetings and transmit
to Departmental Representative, meeting participants and affected parties not in
attendance.
.8
Representative of Contractor, Subcontractor and suppliers attending meetings will be
qualified and authorized to act on behalf of party each represents.
1.2
PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING
.1
Within 15 days after award of Contract, request a meeting of parties in contract to discuss
and resolve administrative procedures and responsibilities.
.2
Departmental Representative, Contractor, major Subcontractors, field inspectors and
supervisors be in attendance.
.3
Establish time and location of meeting and notify parties concerned minimum 5 days
before meeting.
.4
Incorporate mutually agreed variations to Contract Documents into Agreement, prior to
signing.
.5
Agenda to include:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Appointment of official representative of participants in the Work.
Schedule of Work: in accordance with Section 01 32 16 – Construction Progress
Schedule Bar (GANTT) Chart.
Requirements for project coordination including use of Departmental
Representative’s electronic project management software in accordance with
Section 01 31 13 – Project Coordination.
Schedule of submission of shop drawings, samples, mock-ups, colour chips.
Submit submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
Requirements for temporary facilities, site sign, offices, storage sheds, utilities,
fences in accordance with Section 01 52 00 – Temporary Facilities.
Site security in accordance with Section 01 56 00.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
.13
.14
.15
1.3
PROJECT MEETINGS
Section 01 31 19
Page 2
2016-01-13
Health and safety in accordance with Section 01 35 29 – Health and Safety
Requirements.
Proposed changes, change orders, procedures, approvals required, mark-up
percentages permitted, time extensions, overtime, administrative requirements.
Owner provided products.
Record drawings and specifications in accordance with Section 01 78 00 –
Closeout Submittals.
Maintenance manuals in accordance with Section 01 78 00 – Closeout
Submittals.
Take-over procedures, acceptance, warranties in accordance with Section
01 77 00 – Closeout Procedures.
Monthly progress claims, administrative procedures, photographs, hold backs.
Appointment of inspection and testing agencies or firms.
Insurances, transcript of policies.
PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
.1
Schedule pre-installation meetings required by technical specification Sections making
reference to this Section a minimum of 1 week before starting affected work.
.2
Purpose: to discuss coordination and installation requirements for materials and
assemblies installed by different Sections of the Work, and to confirm rough-ins, special
installation requirements, clearances, material compatibility, protection of installed
materials or assemblies, and similar issues.
.3
Attendees:
.1
.2
1.4
Contractor’s Representatives: Contractor’s project manager, site superintendent,
representatives of Subcontractors affecting construction, and others as necessary.
Departmental Representative's Representatives: as determined by Departmental
Representative.
PROGRESS MEETINGS
.1
During course of Work and two (2) weeks prior to project completion, schedule progress
meetings bi-weekly.
.2
Contractor, major Subcontractors involved in Work and Departmental Representative are
to be in attendance.
.3
Notify parties minimum four (4) days prior to meetings.
.4
Record minutes of meetings and circulate to attending parties and affected parties not in
attendance within three (3) days after meeting.
.5
Agenda to include the following:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Review, approval of minutes of previous meeting.
Review of Work progress since previous meeting.
Field observations, problems, conflicts.
Problems which impede construction schedule including current Requests For
Information.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
PROJECT MEETINGS
Review of off-site fabrication delivery schedules.
Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule.
Revision to construction schedule.
Progress schedule, during succeeding work period.
Review submittal schedules: expedite as required.
Maintenance of quality standards.
Review proposed changes for effect on construction schedule and on completion
date.
Other business.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Section 01 31 19
Page 3
2016-01-13
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
1.2
Section 01 32 00
Page 1
2016-01-13
Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals
ELECTRONIC COPY
.1
Submit electronic copy of colour digital photography in jpg format, fine resolution.
.2
Submit colour hard copy of digital photographs arranged on 215 mm x 279 mm paper
and as follows:
.1
.2
.3
Project Identification: name and number of project and date of exposure
indicated in header of each sheet.
Photograph Identification: typewritten room number and description of
photograph (i.e. “Office 124, at doorway looking northeast”).
Photograph Size: 100 mm x 150 mm.
.3
Number of viewpoints: minimum twenty-four (24) viewpoints. Locations of viewpoints
determined by Departmental Representative.
.4
Frequency: monthly with progress statement and at completion of framing and services
before concealment as directed by Departmental Representative.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE BAR (GANTT) CHART
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
DEFINITIONS
Section 01 32 16
Page 1
2016-01-13
.1
Activity: element of Work performed during course of Project. Activity normally has
expected duration, and expected cost and expected resource requirements. Activities can
be subdivided into tasks.
.2
Bar Chart (GANTT Chart): graphic display of schedule-related information. In typical
bar chart, activities or other Project elements are listed down left side of chart, dates are
shown across top, and activity durations are shown as date-placed horizontal bars.
Generally Bar Chart should be derived from commercially available computerized project
management system.
.3
Baseline: original approved plan (for project, work package, or activity), plus or minus
approved scope changes.
.4
Construction Work Week: Monday to Friday, inclusive, will provide five day work week
and define schedule calendar working days as part of Bar (GANTT) Chart submission.
.5
Duration: number of work periods (not including holidays or other nonworking periods)
required to complete activity or other project element. Usually expressed as workdays or
workweeks.
.6
Master Plan: summary-level schedule that identifies major activities and key milestones.
.7
Milestone: significant event in project, usually completion of major deliverable.
.8
Project Schedule: planned dates for performing activities and the planned dates for
meeting milestones. Dynamic, detailed record of tasks or activities that must be
accomplished to satisfy Project objectives. Monitoring and control process involves using
Project Schedule in executing and controlling activities and is used as basis for decision
making throughout project life cycle.
.9
Project Planning, Monitoring and Control System: overall system operated by
Departmental Representative to enable monitoring of project work in relation to
established milestones.
1.2
REQUIREMENTS
.1
Ensure Master Plan and Detail Schedules are practical and remain within specified
Contract duration.
.2
Plan to complete Work in accordance with prescribed milestones and time frame.
.3
Limit activity durations to maximum of approximately 10 working days, to allow for
progress reporting.
.4
Ensure that it is understood that Award of Contract or time of beginning, rate of progress,
Certificate of Substantial Performance and Certificate of Completion as defined times of
completion are of essence of this contract.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE BAR (GANTT) CHART
Section 01 32 16
Page 2
2016-01-13
.2
Submit to Departmental Representative within ten (10) working days of Award of
Contract Bar (GANTT) Chart as Master Plan for planning, monitoring and reporting of
project progress.
.3
Submit Project Schedule to Departmental Representative within five (5) working days of
receipt of acceptance of Master Plan.
1.4
MASTER PLAN
.1
Structure schedule to allow orderly planning, organizing and execution of Work as Bar
Chart (GANTT).
.2
Departmental Representative will review and return revised schedules within 5 working
days.
.3
Revise impractical schedule and resubmit within 5 working days.
.4
Accepted revised schedule will become Master Plan and be used as baseline for updates.
1.5
PROJECT SCHEDULE
.1
Develop detailed Project Schedule derived from Master Plan.
.2
Ensure detailed Project Schedule includes as minimum milestone and activity types as
follows:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
.13
.14
.15
.16
.17
1.6
Award.
Shop Drawings, Samples.
Permits.
Mobilization.
Scheduled Shutdowns.
Interior Architecture (Walls, Floors and Ceiling).
Plumbing.
Lighting.
Electrical.
Piping.
Controls.
Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning.
Millwork.
Fire Systems.
Testing and Commissioning.
Supplied equipment long delivery items.
Departmental Representative supplied equipment required dates.
SHUTDOWN SCHEDULE
.1
Develop Shutdown Schedule from Project Schedule identifying the following:
.1
Shutdowns of mechanical and electrical systems required to complete work
within each renovation area.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
.3
.4
1.7
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE BAR (GANTT) CHART
Section 01 32 16
Page 3
2016-01-13
Anticipated start date and end date of each shutdown including overall
anticipated duration of each shutdown.
Identify systems affected by shutdown.
Maintain and update Shutdown Schedule as work progresses.
PROJECT SCHEDULE REPORTING
.1
Update Project Schedule on bi-weekly basis reflecting activity changes and completions,
as well as activities in progress.
.2
Provide four (4) week “lookout schedule” on bi-weekly basis showing scheduled
activities including scheduled shutdowns to facilitate the portions of the work in various
areas.
.3
Include as part of Project Schedule, narrative report identifying Work status to date,
comparing current progress to baseline, presenting current forecasts, defining problem
areas, anticipated delays and impact with possible mitigation.
1.8
PROJECT MEETINGS
.1
Discuss Project Schedule at regular site meetings specified in Section 01 31 19, identify
activities that are behind schedule and provide measures to regain slippage. Activities
considered behind schedule are those with projected start or completion dates later than
current approved dates shown on baseline schedule.
.2
Weather related delays with their remedial measures will be discussed and negotiated.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not used.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not used.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
ADMINISTRATIVE
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Section 01 33 00
Page 1
2016-01-13
.1
Submit to Departmental Representative submittals listed for review. Submit promptly and
in orderly sequence to not cause delay in Work. Failure to submit in ample time is not
considered sufficient reason for extension of Contract Time and no claim for extension
by reason of such default will be allowed.
.2
Do not proceed with Work affected by submittal until review is complete.
.3
Present shop drawings, product data, samples and mock-ups in SI Metric units.
.4
Where items or information is not produced in SI Metric units converted values are
acceptable.
.5
Review submittals prior to submission to Departmental Representative. This review
represents that necessary requirements have been determined and verified, or will be, and
that each submittal has been checked and co-ordinated with requirements of Work and
Contract Documents. Submittals not stamped, signed, dated and identified as to specific
project will be returned without being examined and considered rejected.
.6
Notify Departmental Representative, in writing at time of submission, identifying
deviations from requirements of Contract Documents stating reasons for deviations.
.7
Verify field measurements and affected adjacent Work are co-ordinated.
.8
Contractor's responsibility for errors and omissions in submission is not relieved by
Departmental Representative's review of submittals.
.9
Contractor's responsibility for deviations in submission from requirements of Contract
Documents is not relieved by Departmental Representative review.
.10
Keep one reviewed copy of each submission on site.
.11
Submit number of hard copies specified for each type and format of submittal and also
submit in electronic format as pdf files. Forward PDF, MS Word, MS Excel, MS Project
and Autocad dwg files on USB compatible with PWGSC encryption requirements or
through email or alternate electronic file sharing service such as ftp, as directed by
Departmental Representative.
1.2
SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA
.1
The term "shop drawings" means drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules,
performance charts, brochures and other data which are to be provided by Contractor to
illustrate details of a portion of Work.
.2
Where required in the technical specifications Sections, submit shop drawings stamped
and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Province of Ontario in
accordance with Section 01 33 50.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Section 01 33 00
Page 2
2016-01-13
.3
Indicate materials, methods of construction and attachment or anchorage, erection
diagrams, connections, explanatory notes and other information necessary for completion
of Work. Where articles or equipment attach or connect to other articles or equipment,
indicate that such items have been co-ordinated, regardless of Section under which
adjacent items will be supplied and installed. Indicate cross references to design drawings
and specifications.
.4
Allow ten (10) working days for Departmental Representative's review of each
submission.
.5
Adjustments made on shop drawings by Departmental Representative are not intended to
change Contract Amount. If adjustments affect value of Work, state such in writing to
Departmental Representative prior to proceeding with Work.
.6
Make changes in shop drawings as Departmental Representative may require, consistent
with Contract Documents. When resubmitting, notify Departmental Representative in
writing of revisions other than those requested.
.7
Accompany submissions with transmittal letter, in duplicate, containing:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.8
Submissions shall include:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.9
Date.
Project title and number.
Contractor's name and address.
Identification and quantity of each shop drawing, product data and sample.
Other pertinent data.
Date and revision dates.
Project title and number.
Name and address of:
.1
Subcontractor.
.2
Supplier.
.3
Manufacturer.
Contractor's stamp, signed by Contractor's authorized representative certifying
approval of submissions, verification of field measurements and compliance with
Contract Documents.
Details of appropriate portions of Work as applicable:
.4
Fabrication.
.5
Layout, showing dimensions, including identified field dimensions, and
clearances.
.6
Setting or erection details.
.7
Capacities.
.8
Performance characteristics.
.9
Standards.
.10
Operating weight.
.11
Wiring diagrams.
.12
Single line and schematic diagrams.
.13
Relationship to adjacent work.
After Departmental Representative's review, distribute copies.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Section 01 33 00
Page 3
2016-01-13
.10
Submit one (1) electronic copy of shop drawings for each requirement requested in
specification Sections and as Departmental Representative may reasonably request.
.11
Submit one (1) electronic copy of product data sheets or brochures for requirements
requested in specification Sections and as requested by Departmental Representative
where shop drawings will not be prepared due to standardized manufacture of product.
.12
Submit one (1) electronic copy of test reports for requirements requested in specification
Sections and as requested by Departmental Representative.
.1
.2
.13
Submit one (1) electronic copy of certificates for requirements requested in specification
Sections and as requested by Departmental Representative.
.1
.2
.14
Report signed by authorized official of testing laboratory that material, product or
system identical to material, product or system to be provided has been tested in
accordance with specified requirements.
Testing must have been within 3 years of date of contract award for project.
Statements printed on manufacturer's letterhead and signed by responsible
officials of manufacturer of product, system or material attesting that product,
system or material meets specification requirements.
Certificates must be dated after award of project contract complete with project
name.
Submit one (1) electronic copy of manufacturer’s instructions for requirements requested
in specification Sections and as requested by Departmental Representative.
.1
Pre-printed material describing installation of product, system or material,
including special notices and Material Safety Data Sheets concerning
impedances, hazards and safety precautions.
.15
Submit one (1) electronic copy of Manufacturer's Field Reports for requirements
requested in specification Sections and as requested by Departmental Representative.
.16
Documentation of the testing and verification actions taken by manufacturer's
representative to confirm compliance with manufacturer's standards or instructions.
.17
Submit one (1) electronic copy of Operation and Maintenance Data for requirements
requested in specification Sections and as requested by Departmental Representative.
.18
Delete information not applicable to project.
.19
Supplement standard information to provide details applicable to project.
.20
If upon review by Departmental Representative, no errors or omissions are discovered or
if only minor corrections are made, copies will be returned and fabrication and
installation of Work may proceed. If shop drawings are rejected, noted copy will be
returned and resubmission of corrected shop drawings, through same procedure indicated
above, must be performed before fabrication and installation of Work may proceed.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.21
Section 01 33 00
Page 4
2016-01-13
The review of shop drawings by Public Works and Government Services Canada
(PWGSC) is for sole purpose of ascertaining conformance with general concept.
.1
.2
1.3
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
This review shall not mean that PWGSC approves detail design inherent in shop
drawings, responsibility for which shall remain with Contractor submitting same,
and such review shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility for errors or
omissions in shop drawings or of responsibility for meeting requirements of
construction and Contract Documents.
Without restricting generality of foregoing, Contractor is responsible for
dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at job site, for information that
pertains solely to fabrication processes or to techniques of construction and
installation and for co-ordination of Work of sub-trades.
SAMPLES
.1
Submit for review samples in duplicate as requested in respective specification Sections.
Label samples with origin and intended use.
.2
Deliver samples prepaid to Departmental Representative's business address.
.3
Notify Departmental Representative in writing, at time of submission of deviations in
samples from requirements of Contract Documents.
.4
Where colour, pattern or texture is criterion, submit full range of samples.
.5
Adjustments made on samples by Departmental Representative are not intended to
change Contract Amount. If adjustments affect value of Work, state such in writing to
Departmental Representative prior to proceeding with Work.
.6
Make changes in samples which Departmental Representative may require, consistent
with Contract Documents.
.7
Reviewed and accepted samples will become standard of workmanship and material
against which installed Work will be verified.
1.4
MOCK-UPS
.1
1.5
Erect mock-ups in accordance with Section 01 45 00.
CERTIFICATES AND TRANSCRIPTS
.1
1.6
Immediately after award of Contract, submit Workers' Safety and Insurance Board
Experience Report.
FEES, PERMITS AND CERTIFICATES
.1
Provide authorities having jurisdiction with information requested.
.2
Pay fees and obtain certificates and permits required.
.3
Furnish certificates and permits.
.4
Submit acceptable certificate stating that suspended ceiling systems provide adequate
support for electrical fixtures, as required by current bulletin of Electrical Inspection
Department of Ontario Hydro.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
Section 01 33 00
Page 5
2016-01-13
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA): Canada
.1
.2
.2
.3
.4
Occupational Health and Safety Act Revised Statutes of Ontario 1990, Chapter
O.1 as amended, and Regulations for Construction Projects, O. Reg. 213/91 as
amended.
O. Reg. 490/09, Designated Substances.
Workplace Safety and Insurance Act, 1997.
Municipal statutes and authorities.
Treasury Board of Canada Secretariat (TBS):
.1
1.2
NFC 2010, Division B, Part 5 Hazardous Processes and Operations, subsection
5.6.1.3 Fire Safety Plan.
Province of Ontario:
.1
.5
NBC 2010, Division B, Part 8 Safety Measures at Construction and Demolition
Sites.
National Fire Code 2010 (NFC):
.1
.4
CSA S350-M1980(R2003), Code of Practice for Safety in Demolition of
Structures.
National Building Code 2010 (NBC):
.1
.3
Section 01 35 29
Page 1
2016-01-13
Treasury Board, Fire Protection Standard April 1, 2010 www.tbssct.gc.ca/pol/doc-eng.aspx ?id=17316&section=text.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Submit site-specific Health and Safety Plan: Within 7 days after date of Notice to
Proceed and prior to commencement of Work. Health and Safety Plan must include:
.1
.2
.3
Results of site specific safety hazard assessment.
Results of safety and health risk or hazard analysis for site tasks and operation
found in work plan.
Measures and controls to be implemented to address identified safety hazards and
risks.
.3
Provide a Fire Safety Plan, specific to the work location, in accordance with NBC,
Division B, Article 8.1.1.3 prior to commencement of work. The plan shall be
coordinated with, and integrated into, the existing Building's Emergency Procedures and
Evacuation Plan in place at the site. Departmental Representative will provide Building's
Emergency Procedures and Evacuation Plan. Deliver the Fire Safety Plan to the
Departmental Representative not later than 14 days before commencing work.
.4
Contractor's and Subcontractors' Safety Communication Plan.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 35 29
Page 2
2016-01-13
.5
Contingency and Emergency Response Plan addressing standard operating procedures
specific to the project site to be implemented during emergency situations. Coordinate
plan with existing Facility's Emergency Response requirements and procedures provided
by Departmental Representative.
.6
Departmental Representative will review Contractor's site-specific Health and Safety
Plan and provide comments to Contractor within ten (10) days after receipt of plan.
Revise plan as appropriate and resubmit plan to Departmental Representative within five
(5) days after receipt of comments from Departmental Representative.
.7
Departmental Representative's review of Contractor's final Health and Safety plan should
not be construed as approval and does not reduce the Contractor's overall responsibility
for construction Health and Safety.
.8
Submit names of personnel and alternates responsible for site safety and health.
.9
Submit records of Contractor's Health and Safety meetings when requested.
.10
Submit one (1) electronic copy of Contractor's authorized representative's work site
health and safety inspection reports to Departmental Representative weekly.
.11
Submit copies of orders, directions or reports issued by health and safety inspectors of the
authorities having jurisdiction.
.12
Submit copies of incident and accident reports.
.13
Submit Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
.14
Submit Workplace Safety and Insurance Board (WSIB) – Experience Rating Report.
1.3
FILING OF NOTICE
.1
File Notice of Project with Provincial authorities prior to commencement of Work.
.2
Contractor shall agree to install proper site separation and identification in order to
maintain time and space at all times throughout life of project.
1.4
WORK PERMIT
.1
1.5
Obtain Hot Work Permit from Property Manager.
SAFETY ASSESSMENT
.1
1.6
Perform site specific safety hazard assessment related to project.
MEETINGS
.1
1.7
Schedule and administer Health and Safety meeting with Departmental Representative
prior to commencement of Work.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
.1
Comply with the Acts and regulations of the Province of Ontario.
.2
Comply with specified standards and regulations to ensure safe operations at site.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
1.8
HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 35 29
Page 3
2016-01-13
PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
.1
Work at site may involve contact with:
.1
.2
.3
.4
1.9
Silica in concrete and concrete block.
Mercury in switches, fluorescent light tubes and thermostats.
Asbestos in pipe covering, vinyl composition tiles, transite panels, sealants,
mastics, pargings and BUR roof felt.
Lead in paint and emergency lighting batteries.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
.1
Develop written site-specific Health and Safety Plan based on hazard assessment prior to
beginning site Work and continue to implement, maintain, and enforce plan until final
demobilization from site. Health and Safety Plan must address project specifications.
.2
Departmental Representative may respond in writing, where deficiencies or concerns are
noted and may request re-submission with correction of deficiencies or concerns either
accepting or requesting improvements.
.3
Relief from or substitution for any portion or provision of minimum Health and Safety
standards specified herein or reviewed site-specific Health and Safety Plan shall be
submitted to Departmental Representative in writing.
1.10
COMPLIANCE REQUIREMENTS
.1
1.11
Comply with Ontario Occupational Health and Safety Act, R.S.O. 1990 Chapter 0.1, as
amended.
RESPONSIBILITY
.1
Be responsible for health and safety of persons on site, safety of property on site and for
protection of persons adjacent to site and environment to extent that they may be affected
by conduct of Work.
.2
Comply with and enforce compliance by employees with safety requirements of Contract
Documents, applicable federal, provincial, territorial and local statutes, regulations, and
ordinances, and with site-specific Health and Safety Plan.
.3
Where applicable the Contractor shall be designated "Constructor", as defined by
Occupational Health and Safety Act and Regulations for Construction Projects for the
Province of Ontario.
1.12
UNFORSEEN HAZARDS
.1
Should any unforeseen or peculiar safety-related factor, hazard, or condition become
evident during performance of Work, immediately stop work and advise Departmental
Representative verbally and in writing.
.2
Follow procedures in place for Employees Right to Refuse Work as specified in the
Occupational Health and Safety Act for the Province of Ontario.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
1.13
HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 35 29
Page 4
2016-01-13
HEALTH AND SAFETY CO-ORDINATOR
.1
Employ and assign to Work, competent and authorized representative as Health and
Safety Co-ordinator. Health and Safety Co-ordinator must:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
1.14
Have site-related working experience specific to activities associated with
abatement of lead and asbestos containing materials.
Have working knowledge of occupational safety and health regulations.
Be responsible for completing Contractor's Health and Safety Training Sessions
and ensuring that personnel not successfully completing required training are not
permitted to enter site to perform Work.
Be responsible for implementing, enforcing daily and monitoring site-specific
Contractor's Health and Safety Plan.
Be on site during execution of Work and report directly to and be under direction
of site supervisor.
POSTING OF DOCUMENTS
.1
Ensure applicable items, articles, notices and orders are posted in conspicuous location on
site in accordance with Acts and Regulations of Province of Ontario, and in consultation
with Departmental Representative.
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
.13
1.15
Contractor's Safety Policy.
Constructor's Name.
Notice of Project.
Name, trade, and employer of Health and Safety Representative or Joint Health
and Safety Committee members (if applicable).
Ministry of Labour Orders and reports.
Occupational Health and Safety Act and Regulations for Construction Projects
for Province of Ontario.
Address and phone number of nearest Ministry of Labour office.
Material Safety Data Sheets.
Written Emergency Response Plan.
Site Specific Safety Plan.
Valid certificate of first aider on duty.
WSIB "In Case of Injury At Work" poster.
Location of toilet and cleanup facilities.
CORRECTION OF NON-COMPLIANCE
.1
Immediately address health and safety non-compliance issues identified by authority
having jurisdiction or by Departmental Representative.
.2
Provide Departmental Representative with written report of action taken to correct noncompliance of health and safety issues identified.
.3
Departmental Representative may stop Work if non-compliance of health and safety
regulations is not corrected.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
1.16
HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 35 29
Page 5
2016-01-13
POWDER ACTUATED DEVICES
.1
1.17
Use powder actuated devices only after receipt of written permission from Departmental
Representative.
WORK STOPPAGE
.1
Give precedence to safety and health of public and site personnel and protection of
environment over cost and schedule considerations for Work.
.2
Assign responsibility and obligation to Health and Safety Coordinator or Competent
Supervisor to stop or start Work when, at Health and Safety Coordinator's or Competent
Supervisor's discretion, it is necessary or advisable for reasons of health or safety.
Departmental Representative may also stop Work for health and safety considerations.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not used.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not used.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
FIRE SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL
.1
1.2
Section 01 35 36
Page 1
2016-01-13
This Section specifies general requirements and procedures for fire safety. Additional
requirements may be specified in individual sections elsewhere in specifications.
REPORTING FIRES
.1
The Departmental Representative will co-ordinate arrangements for the Contractor to be
briefed at the pre-construction meeting concerning Building's fire safety protocol.
.2
Building Manager will supply a copy of "Fire Safety Emergency Evacuation Plan" in
effect for this building. Contractor shall comply with outlined fire safety requirements.
.3
Know location of nearest fire alarm box and telephone, including emergency phone
number.
.4
Report immediately all fire incidents to Fire Department as follows:
.1
.2
Activate nearest fire alarm box; or
Telephone.
.5
Person activating fire alarm box will remain at box to direct Fire Department to scene of
fire.
.6
When reporting fire by telephone, give location of fire, name or number of building and
be prepared to verify the location.
1.3
FIRE WATCH
.1
Appoint a Fire Watch at locations where welding and soldering, torching or roofing is to
take place.
.2
A dedicated Fire Watch is not required. A competent person from the workforce on site
may be assigned as Fire Watch for duration of work.
.3
Assign a person who is knowledgeable in the correct use of fire extinguishers on the
project.
.4
Have work inspected by the Fire Watch up to 4 hours after work stoppage for each work
period.
1.4
INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR FIRE PROTECTION AND ALARM SYSTEMS
.1
Fire protection and alarm system will not be:
.1
.2
.3
.2
Obstructed;
Shut-off; or
Left inactive at end of working day or shift.
Fire hydrants, standpipes and hose systems will not be used for other than fire-fighting
purposes unless authorized by Departmental Representative.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.3
1.5
FIRE SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 35 36
Page 2
2016-01-13
Provide and maintain free access to fire extinguishing equipment. Maintain exit facilities.
Keep means of egress free from materials, equipment and obstructing.
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
.1
1.6
Supply fire extinguishers, as necessary to protect work in progress and contractor's
physical plant on site.
INSTALLATION AND/OR REPAIR OF ROOF TO INCLUDE CONTRACTORS
PHYSICAL PLANT AT SITE
.1
Ensure personnel use and take precautions as follows:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
1.7
Use kettles equipped with thermometers or gauges in good working order.
Locate kettles in safe place outside of building. Locate to avoid danger of
igniting combustible material.
Maintain continuous supervision while kettles are in operation and provide metal
covers for kettles to smother any flames in case of fire. Fire extinguishers shall
be provided as required in 1.5.
Prior to start of work, demonstrate container capacities to Departmental
Representative.
Use only glass fibre roofing mops.
Used roofing mops will not be left unattended on roof and shall be stored away
from building and combustible materials.
All roofing materials will be stored in location no closer than 3 m to any
structures.
BLOCKAGE OF ROADWAYS
.1
1.8
Advise Departmental Representative of any work that would impede fire apparatus
response. This includes violation of minimum required overhead clearance.
SMOKING PRECAUTIONS
.1
1.9
Smoking is not permitted within areas of work or site storage.
RUBBISH AND WASTE MATERIALS
.1
Rubbish and waste materials are to be kept to a minimum.
.2
Burning of rubbish is prohibited.
.3
Remove all rubbish from work site at end of work day or shift or as directed.
.4
Storage:
.1
.2
Store oily waste in approved receptacles to ensure maximum cleanliness and
safety.
Deposit greasy or oily rags and materials subject to spontaneous combustion in
approved receptacles and remove from site daily or at the end of each shift.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
1.10
FIRE SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 35 36
Page 3
2016-01-13
FLAMMABLE AND COMBUSTIBLE LIQUIDS
.1
Handling, storage and use of flammable and combustible liquids are to be governed by
the current National Fire Code of Canada.
.2
Flammable and combustible liquids such as gasoline, kerosene and naphtha will be kept
for ready use in quantities not exceeding 45 litres provided they are stored in approved
safety cans bearing Underwriters' Laboratory of Canada or Factory Mutual seal of
approval. Storage of quantities of flammable and combustible liquids exceeding 45 litres
for work purposes requires permission of local Building Manager.
.3
Transfer of flammable and combustible liquids is prohibited within buildings or jetties.
.4
Transfer of flammable and combustible liquids will not be carried out in vicinity of open
flames or any type of heat-producing devices.
.5
Flammable liquids having a flash point below 38°C such as naphtha or gasoline will not
be used as solvents or cleaning agents.
.6
Flammable and combustible waste liquids, for disposal, will be stored in approved
containers located in a safe ventilated area. Quantities are to be kept to a minimum and
Fire Department is to be notified when disposal is required.
1.11
HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES
.1
Work entailing use of toxic or hazardous materials, chemicals and/or explosives, or
otherwise creating hazard to life, safety or health, will be in accordance with National
Fire Code of Canada.
.2
Obtain from local Building Manager a "Hot Work" permit for work involving welding,
burning or use of blow torches and salamanders, in buildings or facilities.
.3
When Work is carried out in dangerous or hazardous areas involving use of heat, provide
fire watchers equipped with sufficient fire extinguishers. Determination of dangerous or
hazardous areas along with level of protection necessary for Fire Watch is at discretion of
the local Building Manager. Contractors are responsible for providing fire watch service
for work on a scale established and in conjunction with Building Manager at preconstruction meeting.
.4
Where flammable liquids, such as lacquers or urethanes are to be used, proper ventilation
will be assured and all sources of ignition are to be eliminated. Building Manager is to be
informed prior to and at cessation of such work.
1.12
WELDING, BURNING AND CUTTING
.1
Contractor performing work of this Section must notify Departmental Representative in
advance of commencing work.
.2
Use non-combustible shields for electric and gas welding or cutting executed within 3 m
of combustible material or in occupied spaces.
.3
Place cylinders supplying gases as close to work as possible. Secure cylinders in upright
position, free from exposure to sun or high temperature.
.4
Locate fire extinguishing equipment near all welding, cutting and soldering operations.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
FIRE SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 35 36
Page 4
2016-01-13
.5
Contractor's mechanics shall be properly equipped with required protective clothing,
including goggles or welding hood or face mask, gloves, etc.
.6
Contractor is responsible for the protection of his work and the Departmental
Representative's property.
.7
Provide Fire Watch on standby with approved fire extinguisher while burning or welding
is in progress.
1.13
QUESTIONS AND/OR CLARIFICATIONS
.1
1.14
Direct any questions or clarification on Fire Safety in addition to above requirements to
local Building Manager.
FIRE INSPECTION
.1
Site inspections by Building Manager will be coordinated through Departmental
Representative.
.2
Allow local Building Manager unrestricted access to work site.
.3
Co-operate with Building Manager during routine fire safety inspection of work site.
.4
Immediately remedy all unsafe fire situations observed by Building Manager.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not used.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not used.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES AND CODES
Section 01 41 00
Page 1
2016-01-13
.1
Perform Work in accordance with National Building Code of Canada (NBC) 2010,
National Fire Code of Canada (NFC) 2010 and Ontario Building Code (OBC) 2012,
including all amendments up to bid closing date and other codes of provincial or local
application provided that in case of conflict or discrepancy, more stringent requirements
apply.
.2
Meet or exceed requirements of:
.1
.2
1.2
Contract documents.
Specified standards, codes and referenced documents.
HAZARDOUS MATERIAL DISCOVERY
.1
1.3
Stop work immediately and notify Departmental Representative if materials which may
contain designated substances or PCB's, other than those identified in Section 00 31 26 –
Existing Hazardous Material Information are discovered in course of work.
BUILDING SMOKING ENVIRONMENT
.1
1.4
Comply with smoking restrictions.
IAQ - INDOOR AIR QUALITY
.1
1.5
Comply with CSA-Z204-94(R1999), Guideline for Managing Indoor Air Quality in
Office Buildings and CSA B651-12.
ACCESSIBLE DESIGN
.1
1.6
Comply with CSA B651-12, Accessible Design for the Built Environment, unless
specified otherwise. In any case of conflict or discrepancy between the building codes
and CSA B651, the requirements of CSA B651 shall apply.
STATISTICAL INFORMATION
.1
Provide statistical information to Departmental Representative:
.1
.2
.2
Include in statistical information:
.1
.2
.3
Within ten working days after March 31 and September 30 occurring between
commencement of work and final completion
Within ten working days after final completion.
Statement of total person days of labour used on site in performance of contract,
including labour provided under sub-contracts.
Estimate of total value in dollars of material delivered to site and installed,
including material provided and installed under sub-contracts.
This information is required by Government of Canada solely to provide statistics that
will aid in assessing socio-economic benefits of this project.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
1.7
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 41 00
Page 2
2016-01-13
TAXES
.1
1.8
Pay applicable Federal, Provincial and Municipal taxes.
EXAMINATION
.1
Examine existing conditions and determine conditions affecting work.
.2
Conduct concrete floor moisture testing using Calcium Chloride moisture tests.
.1
Submit test results to Departmental Representative for approval prior to installing
any flooring. Conduct one test per 100 m² of area being covered.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Inspection and testing, administrative and enforcement requirements.
.2
Tests and mix designs.
.3
Mock-ups.
.4
Mill tests.
.5
Equipment and system adjust and balance.
1.2
Section 01 45 00
Page 1
2016-01-13
INSPECTION
.1
Allow Departmental Representative access to Work. If part of Work is in preparation at
locations other than Place of Work, allow access to such Work whenever it is in progress.
.2
Give timely notice requesting inspection if Work is designated for special tests,
inspections or approvals by Departmental Representative instructions, or law of Place of
Work.
.3
If Contractor covers or permits to be covered Work that has been designated for special
tests, inspections or approvals before such is made, uncover such Work, have inspections
or tests satisfactorily completed and make good such Work.
.4
Departmental Representative may order any part of Work to be examined if Work is
suspected to be not in accordance with Contract Documents. If, upon examination such
work is found not in accordance with Contract Documents, correct such Work and pay
cost of examination and correction. If such Work is found in accordance with Contract
Documents, Departmental Representative shall pay cost of examination and replacement.
1.3
INDEPENDENT INSPECTION AGENCIES
.1
Independent Inspection/Testing Agencies will be engaged by Departmental
Representative for purpose of inspecting and/or testing portions of Work under Section
01 29 83, above and beyond those required of the Contractor. Cost of such services will
be borne by Departmental Representative.
.2
Provide equipment required for executing inspection and testing by appointed agencies.
.3
Employment of inspection/testing agencies does not relax responsibility to perform Work
in accordance with Contract Documents.
.4
If defects are revealed during inspection and/or testing, appointed agency will request
additional inspection and/or testing to ascertain full degree of defect. Correct defect and
irregularities as advised by Departmental Representative at no cost to Departmental
Representative. Pay costs for retesting and reinspection.
1.4
ACCESS TO WORK
.1
Allow inspection/testing agencies access to Work, off site manufacturing and fabrication
plants.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
1.5
QUALITY CONTROL
Section 01 45 00
Page 2
2016-01-13
Co-operate to provide reasonable facilities for such access.
PROCEDURES
.1
Notify appropriate agency and Departmental Representative in advance of requirement
for tests, in order that attendance arrangements can be made.
.2
Submit samples and/or materials required for testing, as specifically requested in
specifications. Submit with reasonable promptness and in an orderly sequence so as not
to cause delay in Work.
.3
Provide labour and facilities to obtain and handle samples and materials on site. Provide
sufficient space to store and cure test samples.
1.6
REJECTED WORK
.1
Remove defective Work, whether result of poor workmanship, use of defective products
or damage and whether incorporated in Work or not, which has been rejected by
Departmental Representative as failing to conform to Contract Documents. Replace or reexecute in accordance with Contract Documents.
.2
Make good other Contractor's work damaged by such removals or replacements
promptly.
.3
If in opinion of Departmental Representative it is not expedient to correct defective Work
or Work not performed in accordance with Contract Documents, Departmental
Representative may deduct from Contract Amount difference in value between Work
performed and that called for by Contract Documents, amount of which shall be
determined by Departmental Representative.
1.7
REPORTS
.1
Submit one (1) electronic copy of inspection and test reports to Departmental
Representative and Contractor.
.2
Provide copies to Subcontractor of work being inspected or tested, manufacturer or
fabricator of material being inspected or tested and to authorities having jurisdiction as
required by authority having jurisdiction.
1.8
TESTS AND MIX DESIGN
.1
Furnish test results and mix designs as may be requested.
.2
The cost of tests and mix designs beyond those called for in Contract Documents or
beyond those required by law of Place of Work shall be appraised by Departmental
Representative and may be authorized as recoverable.
1.9
MOCK-UPS
.1
Prepare mock-ups for Work specifically requested in specifications. Include for Work of
all Sections required to provide mock-ups.
.2
Construct in all locations as specified in specific Section.
.3
Prepare mock-ups for Departmental Representative's review with reasonable promptness
and in an orderly sequence, so as not to cause any delay in Work.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
QUALITY CONTROL
Section 01 45 00
Page 3
2016-01-13
.4
Failure to prepare mock-ups in ample time is not considered sufficient reason for an
extension of Contract Time and no claim for extension by reason of such default will be
allowed.
.5
If requested, Departmental Representative will assist in preparing a schedule fixing dates
for preparation.
.6
Specification Sections identify whether mock-up may remain as part of Work or if it is to
be removed and when.
1.10
MILL TESTS
.1
1.11
Submit mill test certificates as required of specification Sections.
EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
.1
Submit testing, adjusting and balancing reports for mechanical, electrical and building
equipment systems.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
.1
1.2
Section 01 51 00
Page 1
2016-01-13
Temporary utilities.
SUBMITTALS
.1
1.3
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL
.1
Provide temporary utilities controls in order to execute work expeditiously.
.2
Remove from site all such work after use.
1.4
WATER SUPPLY
.1
Departmental Representative will provide continuous supply of potable water for
construction use.
.2
Departmental Representative will pay for utility charges at prevailing rates.
1.5
TEMPORARY HEATING AND VENTILATION
.1
Provide temporary heating required during construction period, including attendance,
maintenance and fuel.
.2
Construction heaters used inside building must be vented to outside or be non-flameless
type. Solid fuel salamanders are not permitted.
.3
Provide temporary heat and ventilation in enclosed areas as required to:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
Facilitate progress of Work.
Protect Work and products against dampness and cold.
Prevent moisture condensation on surfaces.
Provide ambient temperatures and humidity levels for storage, installation and
curing of materials.
Provide adequate ventilation to meet health regulations for safe working
environment.
.4
Maintain temperatures of minimum 10°C in areas where construction is in progress.
.5
Ventilating:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
Prevent accumulations of dust, fumes, mists, vapours or gases in areas occupied
during construction.
Provide local exhaust ventilation to prevent harmful accumulation of hazardous
substances into atmosphere of occupied areas.
Dispose of exhaust materials in manner that will not result in harmful exposure to
persons.
Ventilate storage spaces containing hazardous or volatile materials.
Ventilate temporary sanitary facilities.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.6
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
Section 01 51 00
Page 2
2016-01-13
Continue operation of ventilation and exhaust system for time after cessation of
work process to assure removal of harmful contaminants.
.6
Permanent heating system of building, may not be used.
.7
Departmental Representative will pay utility charges.
.8
Maintain strict supervision of operation of temporary heating and ventilating equipment to:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.9
1.6
Conform with applicable codes and standards.
Enforce safe practices.
Prevent abuse of services.
Prevent damage to finishes.
Vent direct-fired combustion units to outside.
Be responsible for damage to Work due to failure in providing adequate heat and
protection during construction.
TEMPORARY POWER AND LIGHT
.1
Departmental Representative will pay for temporary power during construction for
temporary lighting and operating of power tools, to a maximum supply of 230 volts, 30
amps.
.2
Temporary power for electric cranes and other equipment requiring in excess of above is
responsibility of Contractor.
.3
Provide and maintain temporary lighting throughout project. Ensure level of illumination
on all floors and stairs is not less than 162 lx.
.4
Electrical power and lighting systems installed under this Contract may be used for
construction requirements only with prior approval of Departmental Representative
provided that guarantees are not affected. Make good damage to electrical system caused
by use under this Contract. Replace lamps which have been used for more than 3 months.
1.7
FIRE PROTECTION
.1
Provide and maintain temporary fire protection equipment during performance of Work
required by insurance companies having jurisdiction and governing codes, regulations and
bylaws.
.2
Burning rubbish and construction waste materials is not permitted on site.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
Section 01 51 00
Page 3
2016-01-13
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
.1
Construction aids.
.2
Office and sheds.
.3
Parking.
.4
Project identification.
1.2
Section 01 52 00
Page 1
2016-01-13
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)
.1
.2
.2
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International)
.1
.2
.3
1.3
CAN/CGSB-1.189-2000, Exterior Alkyd Primer for Wood.
CAN/CGSB-1.59-97, Alkyd Exterior Gloss Enamel.
CSA A23.1-09/A23.2-09, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete
Construction/Methods of Test and Standard Practices for Concrete.
CSA 0121-08, Douglas Fir Plywood.
CAN/CSA-Z321-96(R2006), Signs and Symbols for the Occupational
Environment, withdrawn but still available from CSA, CCOHS and Techstreet.
INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL
.1
Prepare site plan indicating proposed location and dimensions of area to be fenced and
used by Contractor, number of trailers to be used, avenues of ingress/egress to fenced
area and details of fence installation.
.2
Indicate use of supplemental or other staging area.
.3
Provide construction facilities in order to execute work expeditiously.
.4
Remove from site all such work after use.
1.4
HOISTING
.1
Provide, operate and maintain hoists/cranes required for moving of materials and
equipment. Make financial arrangements with Subcontractors for use thereof.
.2
Hoists/cranes shall be operated by qualified operator.
.3
All hoisting shall be limited between 18:00 to 7:00 hours
1.5
ELEVATORS
.1
Existing elevators may not be used by construction personnel and transporting of
materials.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
1.6
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
Section 01 52 00
Page 2
2016-01-13
SITE STORAGE/LOADING
.1
Confine work and operations of employees to areas defined by Contract Documents. Do
not unreasonably encumber premises with products.
.2
Do not load or permit to load any part of Work with a weight or force that will endanger
the Work.
1.7
CONSTRUCTION PARKING
.1
Parking will be permitted on site provided it does not disrupt performance of Work.
.2
Provide and maintain adequate access to project site.
.3
If authorized to use existing roads for access to project site, maintain such roads for
duration of Contract and make good damage resulting from Contractors' use of roads.
.4
Clean construction access routes and marshalling areas where used by Contractor's
equipment.
1.8
OFFICES
.1
Provide office heated to 22°C, lighted 750 lx and ventilated, of sufficient size to
accommodate site meetings and furnished with drawing laydown table.
.2
Provide a clearly marked and fully stocked first-aid case in a readily available location.
.3
Subcontractors may not provide their own offices.
1.9
EQUIPMENT, TOOL AND MATERIALS STORAGE
.1
Provide and maintain, in a clean and orderly condition, lockable weatherproof sheds for
storage of tools, equipment and materials.
.2
Locate materials not required to be stored in weatherproof sheds on site in a manner to
cause least interference with work activities.
1.10
SANITARY FACILITIES
.1
Provide sanitary facilities for work force in accordance with governing regulations and
ordinances.
.2
Post notices and take such precautions as required by local health authorities. Keep area
and premises in sanitary condition.
.3
When permanent water and drain connections are completed, provide temporary water
closets and urinals complete with temporary enclosures, inside building. Permanent
facilities may be used on approval of Departmental Representative.
1.11
CONSTRUCTION SIGNAGE
.1
Provide and erect, within three (3) weeks of signing Contract, a project sign in a location
designated by Departmental Representative.
.2
No other signs or advertisements, other than warning signs, are permitted on site.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.3
Section 01 52 00
Page 3
2016-01-13
Provide project identification site sign comprising foundation, framing, and one (1) 1200
x 2400 mm signboard as detailed and as described below.
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.4
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
Foundations: 15 MPa concrete to CAN/CSA-A23.1/A23.2 minimum 200 mm
diameter x 900 mm deep.
Framework and battens: SPF, pressure treated minimum 89 x 89 mm.
Signboard: 19 mm Medium Density Overlaid Douglas Fir Plywood to CSA
O121.
Paint: alkyd enamel to CAN/CGSB-1.59 over exterior alkyd primer to CGSB 1GP-189.
Fasteners: hot-dip galvanized steel nails and carriage bolts.
Vinyl sign face: printed project identification, self-adhesive, vinyl film overlay,
supplied by Departmental Representative.
Locate project identification sign as directed by Departmental Representative and
construct as follows:
.1
.2
.3
Build concrete foundation, erect framework, and attach signboard to framing.
Paint all surfaces of signboard and framing with one coat primer and two coats
enamel. Colour white on signboard face, black on other surfaces.
Apply vinyl sign face overlay to painted signboard face in accordance with
installation instruction supplied.
.5
Direct requests for approval to erect a Consultant/Contractor signboard to Departmental
Representative. For consideration general appearance of Consultant/Contractor signboard
must conform to project identification site sign. Wording shall be in both official
languages.
.6
Signs and notices for safety and instruction shall be in both official languages. Graphic
symbols shall conform to CAN/CSA-Z321.
.7
Maintain approved signs and notices in good condition for duration of project, and
dispose of off site on completion of project or earlier if directed by Departmental
Representative.
1.12
PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC
.1
Provide access as necessary to maintain traffic.
.2
Maintain and protect traffic on affected roads during construction period except as
otherwise specifically directed by Departmental Representative.
.3
Provide measures for protection and diversion of traffic, including provision of watchpersons and flag-persons, erection of barricades, placing of lights around and in front of
equipment and work, and erection and maintenance of adequate warning, danger, and
direction signs
.4
Protect travelling public from damage to person and property.
.5
Contractor's traffic on roads selected for hauling material to and from site to interfere as
little as possible with public traffic.
.6
Verify adequacy of existing roads and allowable load limit on these roads. Contractor:
responsible for repair of damage to roads caused by construction operations.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.7
1.13
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
Section 01 52 00
Page 4
2016-01-13
Provide necessary lighting, signs, barricades, and distinctive markings for safe movement
of traffic.
CLEAN-UP
.1
Remove construction debris, waste materials, packaging material from work site daily.
.2
Clean dirt or mud tracked onto paved or surfaced roadways.
.3
Store materials resulting from demolition activities that are salvageable.
.4
Stack stored new or salvaged material.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
TEMPORARY BARRIERS
AND ENCLOSURES
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
.1
Barriers.
.2
Environmental Controls.
.3
Traffic Controls.
.4
Fire Routes.
1.2
Section 01 56 00
Page 1
2016-01-13
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB):
.1
.2
.2
Canadian Standards Association (CSA):
.1
1.3
CAN/CGSB-1.189-2000, Exterior Alkyd Primer for Wood.
CAN/CGSB-1.59-97, Alkyd Exterior Gloss Enamel.
CSA-O121-08 (T2013), Douglas Fir Plywood.
INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL
.1
Provide temporary controls in order to execute Work expeditiously.
.2
Remove from site all such work after use.
1.4
HOARDING
.1
1.5
Erect temporary site enclosure using modular freestanding fencing: galvanized, minimum
1.8 m high, chain link or welded steel mesh, pipe rail as required by Contractor for
securing site office and marshalling area. Provide one pedestrian entrance. Equip gates or
access points with locks and keys. Maintain fence in good repair.
GUARD RAILS AND BARRICADES
.1
Provide secure, rigid guard rails and barricades around open shafts and open edges of
floors.
.2
Provide as required by governing authorities having jurisdiction.
1.6
DUST TIGHT SCREENS
.1
Provide dust tight screens or insulated partitions to localize dust generating activities, and
for protection of workers, finished areas of Work and public.
.2
Maintain and relocate protection until such work is complete.
1.7
ACCESS TO SITE
.1
Provide and maintain access roads, sidewalk crossings, ramps and stairs as may be
required for access to Work.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
1.8
TEMPORARY BARRIERS
AND ENCLOSURES
Section 01 56 00
Page 2
2016-01-13
PUBLIC TRAFFIC FLOW
.1
1.9
Provide and maintain competent signal flag operators, traffic signals, barricades and
flares, lights, or lanterns as required to perform Work and protect the public. Comply
with requirements of Section 01 52 00.
FIRE ROUTES
.1
Maintain access to property including overhead clearances for use by emergency
response vehicles.
.2
Protect fire alarm systems.
.3
Maintain full access to emergency exits.
1.10
PROTECTION FOR OFF-SITE AND PUBLIC PROPERTY
.1
Protect surrounding private and public property from damage during performance of
Work.
.2
Be responsible for damage incurred.
1.11
PROTECTION OF BUILDING FINISHES
.1
Provide protection for finished and partially finished building finishes and equipment
during performance of Work.
.2
Provide necessary screens, covers, and hoardings.
.3
Confirm with Departmental Representative locations and installation schedule three
(3) days prior to installation.
.4
Be responsible for damage incurred due to lack of or improper protection.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
Section 01 61 00
Page 1
2016-01-13
.1
Product quality, availability, storage, handling, protection, and transportation.
.2
Manufacturer's instructions.
.3
Quality of Work, coordination and fastenings.
.4
Existing facilities.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
Within text of specifications, reference may be made to reference standards.
.2
Conform to these standards, in whole or in part as specifically requested in specifications.
.3
If there is question as to whether any product or system is in conformance with applicable
standards, Departmental Representative reserves right to have such products or systems
tested to prove or disprove conformance.
.4
The cost for such testing will be borne by Departmental Representative in event of
conformance with Contract Documents or by Contractor in event of non-conformance.
.5
Conform to latest date of issue of referenced standards in effect on date of submission of
Bids, except where specific date or issue is specifically noted.
1.3
QUALITY
.1
Products, materials, equipment and articles (referred to as products throughout
specifications) incorporated in Work shall be new, not damaged or defective, and of best
quality (compatible with specifications) for purpose intended. If requested, furnish
evidence as to type, source and quality of Products provided.
.2
Defective products, whenever identified prior to completion of Work, will be rejected,
regardless of previous inspections. Inspection does not relieve responsibility, but is
precaution against oversight or error. Remove and replace defective products at own
expense and be responsible for delays and expenses caused by rejection.
.3
Should any dispute arise as to quality or fitness of products, decision rests strictly with
Departmental Representative based upon requirements of Contract Documents.
.4
Unless otherwise indicated in specifications, maintain uniformity of manufacture for any
particular or like item throughout building.
.5
Permanent labels, trademarks and nameplates on products are not acceptable in
prominent locations, except where required for operating instructions, or when located in
mechanical or electrical rooms.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
1.4
COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 61 00
Page 2
2016-01-13
AVAILABILITY
.1
Immediately upon signing Contract, review product delivery requirements and anticipate
foreseeable supply delays for any items. If delays in supply of products are foreseeable,
notify Departmental Representative of such, in order that substitutions or other remedial
action may be authorized in ample time to prevent delay in performance of Work.
.2
In event of failure to notify Departmental Representative at commencement of Work and
should it subsequently appear that Work may be delayed for such reason, Departmental
Representative reserves right to substitute more readily available products of similar
character, at no increase in Contract Amount or Contract Time.
1.5
METRIC SIZED MATERIALS
.1
SI metric units of measurement are used exclusively on the drawings and in the
specifications for this project.
.2
The Contractor is required to provide metric products in the sizes called for in the
Contract Documents except where a valid claim can be made that a particular product is
not available on the Canadian market.
.3
Claims for exemptions from use of metric sized products shall be in writing and fully
substantiated with supportive documentation. Promptly submit application to
Departmental Representative for consideration and ruling. Non-metric sized products
may not be used unless Contractor's application has been approved in writing by the
Departmental Representative.
.4
Difficulties caused by the Contractor's lack of planning and effort to obtain modular
metric sized products which are available on the Canadian market will not be considered
sufficient reasons for claiming that they cannot be provided.
.5
Claims for additional costs due to provision of specified modular metric sized products
will not be considered.
1.6
STORAGE, HANDLING AND PROTECTION
.1
Handle and store products in manner to prevent damage, adulteration, deterioration and
soiling and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions when applicable.
.2
Store packaged or bundled products in original and undamaged condition with
manufacturer's seal and labels intact. Do not remove from packaging or bundling until
required in Work.
.3
Store products subject to damage from weather in weatherproof enclosures.
.4
Store cementitious products clear of earth or concrete floors, and away from walls.
.5
Keep sand, when used for grout or mortar materials, clean and dry. Store sand on wooden
platforms and cover with waterproof tarpaulins during inclement weather.
.6
Store sheet materials and lumber on flat, solid supports and keep clear of ground. Slope
to shed moisture.
.7
Store and mix paints in heated and ventilated room. Remove oily rags and other
combustible debris from site daily. Take every precaution necessary to prevent
spontaneous combustion.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 61 00
Page 3
2016-01-13
.8
Remove and replace damaged products at own expense and to satisfaction of
Departmental Representative.
.9
Touch-up damaged factory finished surfaces to Departmental Representative's
satisfaction. Use touch-up materials to match original. Do not paint over name plates.
1.7
TRANSPORTATION
.1
Pay costs of transportation of products required in performance of Work.
.2
Transportation cost of products supplied by Departmental Representative will be paid for
by Departmental Representative. Unload, handle and store such products.
1.8
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
.1
Unless otherwise indicated in specifications, install or erect products in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions. Do not rely on labels or enclosures provided with products.
Obtain written instructions directly from manufacturers.
.2
Notify Departmental Representative in writing, of conflicts between specifications and
manufacturer's instructions, so that Departmental Representative may establish course of
action.
.3
Improper installation or erection of products, due to failure in complying with these
requirements, authorizes Departmental Representative to require removal and reinstallation at no increase in Contract Amount or Contract Time.
1.9
QUALITY OF WORK
.1
Ensure Quality of Work is of highest standard, executed by workers experienced and
skilled in respective duties for which they are employed. Immediately notify
Departmental Representative if required Work is such as to make it impractical to
produce required results.
.2
Do not employ anyone unskilled in their required duties. Departmental Representative
reserves right to require dismissal from site, workers deemed incompetent or careless.
.3
Decisions as to standard or fitness of Quality of Work in cases of dispute rest solely with
Departmental Representative, whose decision is final.
1.10
CO-ORDINATION
.1
Ensure cooperation of workers in laying out Work. Maintain efficient and continuous
supervision.
.2
Be responsible for coordination and placement of openings, sleeves and accessories.
1.11
CONCEALMENT
.1
In finished areas, conceal pipes, ducts and wiring in floors, walls and ceilings, except
where indicated otherwise.
.2
Before installation, inform Departmental Representative if there is interference. Install as
directed by Departmental Representative.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
1.12
COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 61 00
Page 4
2016-01-13
REMEDIAL WORK
.1
Perform remedial work required to repair or replace parts or portions of Work identified
as defective or unacceptable. Coordinate adjacent affected Work as required.
.2
Perform remedial work by specialists familiar with materials affected. Perform in a
manner to neither damage nor put at risk any portion of Work.
1.13
LOCATION OF FIXTURES
.1
Consider location of fixtures, outlets, and mechanical and electrical items indicated as
approximate.
.2
Inform Departmental Representative of conflicting installation. Install as directed.
1.14
FASTENINGS
.1
Provide metal fastenings and accessories in same texture, colour and finish as adjacent
materials, unless indicated otherwise.
.2
Prevent electrolytic action between dissimilar metals and materials.
.3
Use non-corrosive hot dip galvanized steel fasteners and anchors for securing exterior
work, unless stainless steel or other material is specifically requested in affected
specification Section.
.4
Space anchors within individual load limit or shear capacity and ensure they provide
positive permanent anchorage. Wood, or any other organic material plugs are not
acceptable.
.5
Keep exposed fastenings to a minimum, space evenly and install neatly.
.6
Fastenings which cause spalling or cracking of material to which anchorage is made are
not acceptable.
1.15
FASTENINGS - EQUIPMENT
.1
Use fastenings of standard commercial sizes and patterns with material and finish suitable
for service.
.2
Use heavy hexagon heads, semi-finished unless otherwise specified. Use No.304 stainless
steel for exterior areas.
.3
Bolts may not project more than one diameter beyond nuts.
.4
Use plain type washers on equipment, sheet metal and soft gasket lock type washers
where vibrations occur. Use resilient washers with stainless steel.
1.16
PROTECTION OF WORK IN PROGRESS
.1
Prevent overloading of any part of building. Do not cut, drill or sleeve any load bearing
structural member, unless specifically indicated without written approval of Departmental
Representative.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
1.17
COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 61 00
Page 5
2016-01-13
EXISTING UTILITIES
.1
When breaking into or connecting to existing services or utilities, execute Work at times
directed by local governing authorities, with minimum of disturbance to Work, and/or
building occupants and pedestrian and vehicular traffic.
.2
Protect, relocate or maintain existing active services. When services are encountered, cap
off in manner approved by authority having jurisdiction. Stake and record location of
capped service.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
EXECUTION
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submittals: in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.3
Structural integrity of elements of project.
Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements.
Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of operational elements.
Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements.
Work of Owner or separate contractor.
Include in request:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
1.2
Section 01 73 00
Page 1
2016-01-13
Identification of project.
Location and description of affected Work.
Statement on necessity for cutting or alteration.
Description of proposed Work, and products to be used.
Alternatives to cutting and patching.
Effect on Work of Owner or separate contractor.
Written permission of affected separate contractor.
Date and time work will be executed.
MATERIALS
.1
Required for original installation.
.2
Change in Materials: Submit request for substitution in accordance with Section
01 33 00.
1.3
PREPARATION
.1
Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to damage or movement during
cutting and patching.
.2
After uncovering, inspect conditions affecting performance of Work.
.3
Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.
.4
Provide supports to assure structural integrity of surroundings; provide devices and
methods to protect other portions of project from damage.
.5
Provide protection from elements for areas which are to be exposed by uncovering work;
maintain excavations free of water.
1.4
EXECUTION
.1
Execute cutting, fitting, and patching including excavation and fill, to complete Work.
.2
Fit several parts together, to integrate with other Work.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
EXECUTION
Section 01 73 00
Page 2
2016-01-13
.3
Uncover Work to install ill-timed Work.
.4
Remove and replace defective and non-conforming Work.
.5
Provide openings in non-structural elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and
electrical Work.
.6
Execute Work by methods to avoid damage to other Work, and which will provide proper
surfaces to receive patching and finishing.
.7
Employ original installer to perform cutting and patching for weather-exposed and
moisture-resistant elements, and sight-exposed surfaces.
.8
Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic or impact tools not
allowed on masonry work without prior approval.
.9
Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract
Documents.
.10
Submit proposed materials, finishes and installation method for patching to Departmental
Representative for acceptance, prior to patching.
.11
Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes: Refinish continuous surfaces to nearest
intersection. Refinish assemblies by refinishing entire unit.
.12
Fit Work airtight pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.
.13
At penetration of fire rated wall, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with
firestopping material in accordance with Section 07 84 00, full thickness of the
construction element.
.14
Conceal pipes, ducts and wiring in floor, wall and ceiling construction of finished areas
except where indicated otherwise.
1.5
WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
.1
Separate waste materials for reuse, recycling, composting, and anaerobic digestion in
accordance with Section 01 74 20.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
.1
Progressive cleaning.
.2
Final cleaning.
1.2
CLEANING
Section 01 74 11
Page 1
2016-01-13
PROJECT CLEANLINESS
.1
Maintain Work in tidy condition, free from accumulation of waste products and debris,
other than that caused by Owner or other Contractors.
.2
Remove waste materials from site at regularly scheduled times or dispose of as directed
by Departmental Representative. Do not burn waste materials on site.
.3
Make arrangements with and obtain permits from authorities having jurisdiction for
disposal of waste and debris.
.4
Provide on-site containers for collection of waste materials and debris.
.5
Provide and use clearly marked separate bins for recycling. Refer to Section 01 74 20.
.6
Remove waste material and debris from site and deposit in waste container at end of each
working day.
.7
Dispose of waste materials and debris off site.
.8
Clean interior areas prior to start of finish work, and maintain areas free of dust and other
contaminants during finishing operations.
.9
Store volatile waste in covered metal containers, and remove from premises at end of
each working day.
.10
Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substances. Use of building
ventilation systems is not permitted for this purpose.
.11
Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to be cleaned, and
as recommended by cleaning material manufacturer.
.12
Schedule cleaning operations so that resulting dust, debris and other contaminants will
not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces nor contaminate building systems.
1.3
FINAL CLEANING
.1
When Work is Substantially Performed, remove surplus products, tools, construction
machinery and equipment not required for performance of remaining Work.
.2
Remove waste products and debris other than that caused by others, and leave Work
clean and suitable for occupancy.
.3
Prior to final review, remove surplus products, tools, construction machinery and
equipment.
.4
Remove waste products and debris other than that caused by Owner or other Contractors.
.5
Remove waste materials from site at regularly scheduled times or dispose of as directed
by Departmental Representative. Do not burn waste materials on site.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
CLEANING
Section 01 74 11
Page 2
2016-01-13
.6
Make arrangements with and obtain permits from authorities having jurisdiction for
disposal of waste and debris.
.7
Clean and polish glass, mirrors, hardware, wall tile, stainless steel, chrome, porcelain
enamel, baked enamel, plastic laminate, and mechanical and electrical fixtures. Replace
broken, scratched or disfigured glass.
.8
Remove stains, spots, marks and dirt from decorative work, electrical and mechanical
fixtures, furniture fitments, walls and floors.
.9
Clean lighting reflectors, lenses, and other lighting surfaces.
.10
HEPA vacuum clean and dust building interiors, behind grilles, louvres and screens.
.11
Wax, seal, shampoo or prepare floor finishes, as recommended by manufacturer.
.12
Inspect finishes, fitments and equipment and ensure specified workmanship and
operation.
.13
Broom clean and wash exterior walks, steps and surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of
grounds.
.14
Remove dirt and other disfiguration from exterior surfaces.
.15
Clean and sweep roofs, gutters, areaways, and sunken wells.
.16
Sweep and wash clean paved areas.
.17
Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition; clean or replace filters of
mechanical equipment.
.18
Clean roofs, downspouts, and drainage systems.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
CONSTRUCTION/DEMOLITION
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
CONSTRUCTION & DEMOLITION WASTE
Section 01 74 20
Page 1
2016-01-13
.1
Carefully deconstruct and source separate materials/equipment and divert, from D&C
waste destined for landfill to maximum extent possible. Target for this project is 75%
diversion from landfill. Reuse, recycle, compost, anaerobic digest or sell material for
reuse except where indicated otherwise. On site sales are not permitted.
.2
Source separate waste and maintain waste audits in accordance with the Environmental
Protection Act, Ontario Regulation 102/94 and Ontario Regulation 103/94.
.1
.2
.3
Submit a waste reduction workplan indicating the materials and quantities of material that
will be recycled and diverted from landfill.
.1
.4
1.2
Provide facilities for collection, handling and storage of source separated wastes.
Source separate the following waste:
.1
Brick and portland cement concrete.
.2
Corrugated cardboard.
.3
Wood, not including painted or treated wood or laminated wood.
.4
Gypsum board, unpainted.
.5
Steel.
.6
Items indicated in Section 02 41 99 - Demolition.
Indicate how material being removed from the site will be reused, recycled,
composted or anaerobically digested using Section 02 42 93, Deconstruction and
Waste Products Workplan Summary.
Submit proof that all waste is being disposed of at a licensed land fill site or waste
transfer site. A copy of the disposal/waste transfer site's license and a letter verifying that
said landfill site will accept the waste must be supplied to Departmental Representative
prior to removal of waste from the demolition site.
WASTE PROCESSING SITES
.1
Province of: Ontario.
.1
.2
.3
.2
Ministry of Environment and Energy, 135 St. Clair Avenue West, Toronto, ON,
M4V 1P5.
Telephone: 800-565-4923 or 416-323-4321.
Fax: 416-323-4682.
Recycling Council of Ontario: 215 Spadina Avenue, #225, Toronto, ON, M5T 2C7.
.1
.2
.3
.4
Telephone: 416-657-2797
Fax: 416-960-8053
Email: [email protected]a.
Internet: http://www.rco.on.ca/.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
CONSTRUCTION/DEMOLITION
Section 01 74 20
Page 2
2016-01-13
Not Used.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
CANADIAN GOVERNMENTAL DEPARTMENTS CHIEF RESPONSIBILITY
FOR THE ENVIRONMENT
.1
Government Chief Responsibility for the Environment.
Province
Address
General
Fax Inquiries
Ontario
Ministry of Environment
and Energy
135 St Clair Avenue West
Toronto, ON
M4V 1P5
(416) 323-4321
(800) 565-4923
(416) 323-4682
Environment Canada
Toronto, ON
(416) 734-4494
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
INSPECTION AND DECLARATION
.1
Section 01 77 00
Page 1
2016-01-13
Contractor's Inspection: Contractor and all Subcontractors shall conduct an inspection of
Work, identify deficiencies and defects, and repair as required to conform to Contract
Documents.
.1
.2
Notify Departmental Representative in writing of satisfactory completion of
Contractor's Inspection and that corrections have been made.
Request Departmental Representative's Inspection.
.2
Departmental Representative's Inspection: Departmental Representative and Contractor
will perform inspection of Work to identify obvious defects or deficiencies. Contractor to
correct Work accordingly.
.3
Completion: submit written certificate that following have been performed:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.4
1.2
Work has been completed and inspected for compliance with Contract
Documents.
Defects have been corrected and deficiencies have been completed.
Equipment and systems have been tested, adjusted and balanced and are fully
operational.
Certificates required by Fire Commissioner have been submitted.
Operation of systems have been demonstrated to Owner's personnel.
Work is complete and ready for final inspection.
Final Inspection: when items noted above are completed, request final inspection of
Work by Departmental Representative and Contractor. If Work is deemed incomplete by
Departmental Representative, complete outstanding items and request reinspection.
CLEANING
.1
In accordance with Section 01 74 11 - Cleaning.
.2
Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish and construction facilities from the site in
accordance with Section 01 74 20 – Construction/Demolition.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
Section 01 77 00
Page 2
2016-01-13
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
.1
As-built, samples, and specifications.
.2
Equipment and systems.
.3
Product data, materials and finishes, and related information.
.4
Operation and maintenance data.
.5
Spare parts, special tools and maintenance materials.
.6
Warranties and bonds.
.7
Final site survey.
1.2
Section 01 78 00
Page 1
2016-01-13
SUBMISSION
.1
Prepare instructions and data using personnel experienced in maintenance and operation
of described products.
.2
Copy will be returned after final inspection, with Departmental Representative's
comments.
.3
Revise content of documents as required prior to final submittal.
.4
Two (2) weeks prior to Substantial Performance of the Work, submit to the Departmental
Representative, four (4) final copies of maintenance manuals and commissioning
documentation in English.
.5
Ensure spare parts, maintenance materials and special tools provided are new,
undamaged or defective, and of same quality and manufacture as products provided in
Work.
.6
If requested, furnish evidence as to type, source and quality of products provided.
.7
Defective products will be rejected, regardless of previous inspections. Replace products
at own expense.
.8
Pay costs of transportation.
1.3
FORMAT
.1
Organize data in the form of an instructional manual.
.2
Binders: vinyl, hard covered, 3 'D' ring, loose leaf 219 x 279 mm with spine and face
pockets.
.3
When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings. Identify
contents of each binder on spine.
.4
Cover: Identify each binder with type or printed title 'Project Record Documents'; list title
of project and identify subject matter of contents.
.5
Arrange content by systems under Section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Section 01 78 00
Page 2
2016-01-13
.6
Provide tabbed fly leaf for each separate product and system, with typed description of
product and major component parts of equipment.
.7
Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data.
.8
Drawings: provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger
drawings to size of text pages.
.9
Provide 1:1 scaled CAD files in dwg format on CD-ROM or DVD-ROM.
1.4
CONTENTS - EACH VOLUME
.1
Table of Contents: provide title of project;
.1
.2
.3
.2
Date of submission;
Name, addresses, and telephone numbers of Contractor with name of responsible
parties;
Schedule of products and systems, indexed to content of volume.
For each product or system:
.1
List names, addresses and telephone numbers of subcontractors and suppliers,
including local source of supplies and replacement parts.
.3
Product Data: mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts,
and data applicable to installation; delete inapplicable information.
.4
Drawings: supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of
equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams.
.5
Typewritten Text: as required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of
instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions specified in
Section 01 45 00.
.6
Training: Refer to Section 01 79 00 – Demonstration and Training.
1.5
AS-BUILTS AND SAMPLES
.1
In addition to requirements in General Conditions, maintain at the site for Departmental
Representative review and reference throughout the progress of the Work one record
copy of:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.2
Contract Drawings.
Specifications.
Amendments and addenda.
Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.
Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples.
Field test records.
Inspection certificates.
Manufacturer's certificates.
Store record documents and samples in field office apart from documents used for
construction. Provide files, racks, and secure storage.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Section 01 78 00
Page 3
2016-01-13
.3
Label record documents and file in accordance with Section number listings in List of
Contents of this Project Manual. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat,
large, printed letters.
.4
Maintain record documents in clean, dry and legible condition. Do not use record
documents for construction purposes.
.5
Keep record documents and samples available for inspection by Departmental
Representative.
.6
Turn one set, paper copy and electronic copy, of AS-BUILT drawings and specifications
over to Departmental Representative on completion of work. Submit files on USB
compatible with PWGSC encryption requirements or through email or alternate
electronic file sharing service such as ftp, as directed by Departmental Representative.
.7
If project is completed without significant deviations from Contract drawings and
specifications submit to Departmental Representative one set of drawings and
specifications marked "AS-BUILT".
1.6
RECORDING ACTUAL SITE CONDITIONS
.1
Record information on set of black line opaque drawings and in copy of Project Manual,
provided by Departmental Representative.
.2
Provide felt tip marking pens, maintaining separate colours for each major system, for
recording information.
.3
Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal Work until
required information is recorded.
.4
Contract Drawings and shop drawings: legibly mark each item to record actual
construction, including:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.5
Specifications: legibly mark each item to record actual construction, including:
.1
.2
.6
Measured depths of elements of foundation in relation to finish first floor datum.
Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and
appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements.
Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances, referenced to visible
and accessible features of construction.
Field changes of dimension and detail.
Changes made by change orders.
Details not on original Contract Drawings.
References to related shop drawings and modifications.
Manufacturer, trade name, and catalogue number of each product actually
installed, particularly optional items and substitute items.
Changes made by Amendments and change orders.
Other Documents: maintain manufacturer's certifications, inspection certifications, field
test records, required by individual specifications Sections.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
1.7
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Section 01 78 00
Page 4
2016-01-13
EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
.1
Each Item of Equipment and Each System: include description of unit or system, and
component parts. Give function, normal operation characteristics, and limiting
conditions. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests, and complete
nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.
.2
Panel board circuit directories: provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and
communications.
.3
Include installed colour coded wiring diagrams.
.4
Operating Procedures: include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating
instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and
emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions.
.5
Maintenance Requirements: include routine procedures and guide for trouble-shooting;
disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing,
and checking instructions.
.6
Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required.
.7
Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions.
.8
Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer.
.9
Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams
required for maintenance.
.10
Provide installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer.
.11
Provide Contractor's coordination drawings, with installed colour coded piping diagrams.
.12
Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to
flow and control diagrams.
.13
Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended
quantities to be maintained in storage.
.14
Include test and balancing reports as specified in Section 01 45 00.
.15
Additional requirements: As specified in individual specification sections.
1.8
MATERIALS AND FINISHES
.1
Building Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes: include product data, with catalogue
number, size, composition, and colour and texture designations. Provide information for
re-ordering custom manufactured products.
.2
Instructions for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and
methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
.3
Moisture-protection and Weather-exposed Products: include manufacturer's
recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental
agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
.4
Additional Requirements: as specified in individual specifications sections.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
1.9
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Section 01 78 00
Page 5
2016-01-13
SPARE PARTS
.1
Provide spare parts, in quantities specified in individual specification Sections.
.2
Provide items of same manufacture and quality as items in Work.
.3
Deliver to site as directed; place and store.
.4
Receive and catalogue all items. Submit inventory listing to Departmental
Representative. Include approved listings in Maintenance Manual.
.5
Obtain receipt for delivered products and submit prior to final payment.
1.10
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
.1
Provide maintenance and extra materials, in quantities specified in individual
specification sections.
.2
Provide items of same manufacture and quality as items in Work.
.3
Deliver to site as directed; place and store.
.4
Receive and catalogue all items. Submit inventory listing to Departmental
Representative. Include approved listings in Maintenance Manual.
.5
Obtain receipt for delivered products and submit prior to final payment.
1.11
SPECIAL TOOLS
.1
Provide special tools, in quantities specified in individual specification section.
.2
Provide items with tags identifying their associated function and equipment.
.3
Deliver to site as directed; place and store.
.4
Receive and catalogue all items. Submit inventory listing to Departmental
Representative. Include approved listings in Maintenance Manual.
1.12
STORAGE, HANDLING AND PROTECTION
.1
Store spare parts, maintenance materials, and special tools in manner to prevent damage
or deterioration.
.2
Store in original and undamaged condition with manufacturer's seal and labels intact.
.3
Store components subject to damage from weather in weatherproof enclosures.
.4
Store paints and freezable materials in a heated and ventilated room.
.5
Remove and replace damaged products at own expense and to satisfaction of
Departmental Representative.
1.13
WARRANTIES AND BONDS
.1
Separate each warranty with index tab sheets keyed to Table of Contents listing.
.2
List subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone
number of responsible principal.
.3
Obtain warranties executed in duplicate by subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers,
within ten days after completion of the applicable item of work.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Section 01 78 00
Page 6
2016-01-13
.4
Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of
warranty until the Date of Certificate of Substantial Performance is determined.
.5
Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.
.6
Co-execute submittals when required.
.7
Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
Section 01 79 00
Page 1
2016-01-13
.1
Procedures for demonstration and instruction of equipment and systems to Owner's O&M
personnel.
.2
O&M personnel includes property facility manager, building operators, maintenance
staff, security staff and technical specialists, as applicable.
1.2
DESCRIPTION
.1
Demonstrate scheduled operation and maintenance of equipment and systems to
Departmental Representative's personnel two weeks prior to date of final inspection.
.2
Departmental Representative will provide list of personnel to receive instructions, and
will coordinate their attendance at agreed-upon times.
1.3
QUALITY CONTROL
.1
When specified in individual Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized
representative to demonstrate operation of equipment and systems, instruct Owner's
personnel, and provide written report that demonstration and instructions have been
completed.
.2
Submit training schedule of time and date for demonstration and training of each item of
equipment and each system in accordance with the training plan four weeks prior to
designated dates, for Departmental Representative's approval.
.3
Submit reports within one week after completion of demonstration, that demonstration
and instructions have been satisfactorily completed.
.4
Report shall give time and date of each demonstration and training, with list of persons
present.
1.4
CONDITIONS FOR DEMONSTRATIONS
.1
Equipment has been inspected and put into operation in accordance with individual
specifications Sections.
.2
Testing, adjusting, and balancing has been performed in accordance with Section
23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC and equipment and systems are
fully operational.
.3
Provide copies of completed operation and maintenance manuals for use in
demonstrations and instructions.
1.5
PREPARATION
.1
Verify that conditions for demonstration and instructions comply with requirements.
.2
Verify that designated O&M personnel are present.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
1.6
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
Section 01 79 00
Page 2
2016-01-13
DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS
.1
Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, and
maintenance of each item of equipment at scheduled times, at the equipment location.
.2
Instruct personnel in all phases of operation and maintenance using operation and
maintenance manuals as the basis of instruction.
.3
Review contents of manual in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.
.4
Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when the need
for additional data becomes apparent during instructions.
1.7
TIME ALLOCATED FOR INSTRUCTIONS
.1
Ensure amount of time required for instruction of each item of equipment or system as
follows:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Sections 23 05 93, 23 08 02 - Heating Systems: 4 hours of instruction.
Section 23 05 93, 23 23 00, 23 36 00, 23 74 00 - Ventilation Systems: 16 hours
of instruction.
Sections 25 01 11, 25 01 12, 25 05 01, 25 05 02, 25 05 03, 25 05 54, 25 08 20, 25
10 01, 25 30 02, 25 90 01 - Control Systems: 8 hours of instruction.
Sections 22 05 00, 22 42 00 - Commercial Plumbing System: 4 hours of
instruction.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
BUILDING MANAGEMENT MANUAL
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes:
.1
.2
This section is limited to portions of the Building Management Manual (BMM)
provided to Departmental Representative by Contractor.
Acronyms:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
1.2
Section 01 91 51
Page 1
2016-01-13
BMM - Building Management Manual.
Cx - Commissioning.
HVAC - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning.
PI - Product Information.
PV - Performance Verification.
TAB - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.
WHMIS - Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
.1
Standard letter size paper 216 mm x 279 mm.
.2
Methodology used to facilitate updating.
.3
Drawings, diagrams and schematics to be professionally developed.
.4
Electronic copy of data to be in a format accepted and approved by Departmental
Representative.
1.3
APPROVALS
.1
1.4
Prior to commencement, co-ordinate requirements for preparation, submission and
approval with Departmental Representative.
GENERAL INFORMATION
.1
Provide Departmental Representative the following for insertion into appropriate Part and
Section of BMM:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Complete list of names, addresses, telephone and fax numbers of Contractor,
sub-contractors that participated in delivery of project - as indicated in Section 1.2
of BMM.
Summary of architectural, structural, fire protection, mechanical and electrical
systems installed and commissioned - as indicated in Section 1.4 of BMM.
.1
Including sequence of operation as finalized after commissioning is
complete as indicated in Section 2.0 of BMM.
Description of building operation under conditions of heightened security and
emergencies as indicated in Section 2.0 of BMM.
System, equipment and components Maintenance Management System (MMS)
identification - Section 2.1 of BMM.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
.13
1.5
BUILDING MANAGEMENT MANUAL
Section 01 91 51
Page 2
2016-01-13
Information on operation and maintenance of architectural systems and equipment
installed and commissioned - Section 2.0 of BMM.
Information on operation and maintenance of fire protection and life safety
systems and equipment installed and commissioned - Section 2.0 of BMM.
Information on operation and maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment
installed and commissioned - Section 2.0 of BMM.
Operating and maintenance manual - Section 3.2 of BMM.
Final commissioning plan as actually implemented.
Completed commissioning checklists.
Commissioning test procedures employed.
Completed Product Information (PI) and Performance Verification (PV) report
forms, approved and accepted by Departmental Representative.
Commissioning reports.
CONTENTS OF OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
.1
For detailed requirements refer to Section 01 78 00.
.2
Departmental Representative to review and approve format and organization within twelve
(12) weeks of award of contract.
.3
Include original manufactures brochures and written information on products and
equipment installed on this project.
.4
Record and organize for easy access and retrieval of information contained in BMM.
.5
Include completed PI report forms, data and information from other sources as required.
.6
Inventory directory relating to information on installed systems, equipment and
components.
.7
Approved project shop-drawings, product and maintenance data.
.8
Manufacturer's data and recommendations relating: manufacturing process, installation,
commissioning, start-up, O&M, shutdown and training materials.
.9
Inventory and location of spare parts, special tools and maintenance materials.
.10
Warranty information.
.11
Inspection certificates with expiration dates, which require on-going re-certification
inspections.
.12
Maintenance program supporting information including:
.1
.2
1.6
Recommended maintenance procedures and schedule.
Information to removal and replacement of equipment including, required
equipment, points of lift and means of entry and egress.
LIFE SAFETY COMPLIANCE (LSC) MANUAL
.1
Samples of LSC Manual will be available from Departmental Representative.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
Section 01 91 51
Page 3
2016-01-13
Content of Manual:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
1.7
BUILDING MANAGEMENT MANUAL
All possible Emergency situations modes including: presence of fire and smoke,
power failure, lose of water or pressure, chemical spills and refrigerant release.
Failure of elevators and escalators.
HVAC emergencies and fuel supply failures.
Intrusion and security breach.
Emergency provisions for natural disasters, bomb threats and other disruptive
situations.
Dedicated emergency generators for high security projects, medical facilities and
computer systems.
Emergency control procedures for fire, power and major equipment failure.
Emergency contacts and numbers.
Manual to be readily available and comprehensible to non-technical readers.
SUPPORTING DOCUMENTATION FOR INSERTION INTO SUPPORTING
APPENDICES
.1
Provide Departmental Representative supporting documentation relating to installed
equipment and system, including:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
General:
.1
Finalized commissioning plan.
.2
WHMIS information manual.
.3
Approved "as-built" drawings and specifications.
.4
Procedures used during commissioning.
.5
Cross-Reference to specification sections.
Architectural and structural:
.1
Inspection certificates, construction permits.
.2
Roof anchor log books.
.3
PV reports.
Fire prevention, suppression and protection:
.1
Test reports.
.2
Smoke test reports.
.3
PV reports.
Mechanical:
.1
Installation permits, inspection certificates.
.2
Piping pressure test certificates.
.3
Ducting leakage test reports.
.4
TAB and PV reports.
.5
Charts of valves and steam traps.
.6
Copies of posted instructions.
Electrical:
.1
Installation permits, inspection certificates.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
BUILDING MANAGEMENT MANUAL
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.2
1.8
Section 01 91 51
Page 4
2016-01-13
TAB and PV reports.
Electrical work log book.
Charts and schedules.
Locations of cables and components.
Copies of posted instructions.
Assist Departmental Representative with preparation of BMM.
LANGUAGE
.1
1.9
English and French Language to be in separate binders.
USE OF CURRENT TECHNOLOGY
.1
Use current technology for production of documentation. Emphasis on ease of accessibility
at all times, maintain in up-to-date state, compatibility with user's requirements.
.2
Obtain Departmental Representative's approval before starting Work.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not used.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not used.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
DEMOLITION
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
CSA International
.1
1.2
Section 02 41 99
Page 1
2016-01-13
CSA S350-M1980 (R2003), Code of Practice for Safety in Demolition of
Structures.
SITE CONDITIONS
.1
Review "Designated Substance Report" and take precautions to protect environment.
.2
If material resembling spray or trowel-applied asbestos or other designated substance listed
as hazardous be encountered, stop work, take preventative measures, and notify
Departmental Representative immediately.
.1
.3
Proceed only after receipt of written instructions have been received from
Departmental Representative.
Notify Departmental Representative before disrupting building access or services.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not used.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Inspect building with Departmental Representative and verify extent and location of items
designated for removal, disposal, alternative disposal, recycling, salvage and items to
remain.
.2
Locate and protect utilities. Preserve active utilities traversing site in operating condition.
.3
Notify and obtain approval of utility companies before starting demolition.
.4
Disconnect, cap, plug or divert, as required, existing public utilities within the property
where they interfere with the execution of the work, in conformity with the requirements of
the authorities having jurisdiction. Mark the location of these and previously capped or
plugged services on the site and indicate location (horizontal and vertical) on the record
drawings. Support, shore up and maintain pipes and conduits encountered.
.1
.2
Immediately notify Departmental Representative and utility company concerned
in case of damage to any utility or service, designated to remain in place.
Immediately notify the Departmental Representative should uncharted utility or
service be encountered, and await instruction in writing regarding remedial action.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
3.2
DEMOLITION
Section 02 41 99
Page 2
2016-01-13
PROTECTION
.1
Prevent movement, settlement, or damage to adjacent utilities, and parts of building to
remain in place. Provide bracing and shoring required.
.2
Keep noise, dust, and inconvenience to occupants to minimum.
.3
Protect building systems, services and equipment.
.4
Provide temporary dust screens, covers, railings, supports and other protection as required.
.5
Do Work in accordance with Section 01 35 29.
.6
Demolition/Removal:
.1
.2
.3
3.3
Remove items as indicated.
Remove parts of existing building to permit new construction.
Trim edges of partially demolished building elements to tolerances as defined by
Departmental Representative to suit future use.
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.1
Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
.2
Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment
in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.3
Refer to demolition drawings and specifications for items to be salvaged for reuse.
.4
Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with
Section 01 74 20.
.1
Remove recycling containers and bins from site and dispose of materials at
appropriate facility.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
MASONRY
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
ASTM International
.1
.2
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
CAN/CSA-A165 SERIES-04(R2009), CSA Standards on Concrete Masonry
Units covers: A165.1, A165.2, A165.3.
CAN/CSA-A179-04(R2009), Mortar and Grout for Unit Masonry.
CAN/CSA-A370-04(R2009), Connectors for Masonry.
CAN/CSA A371-04(R2009), Masonry Construction for Buildings.
CSA G30.18-09, Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
CSA S304.1-04(R2010), Design of Masonry Structures.
Health Canada / Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)
.1
1.2
ASTM A496/A496M-07, Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for
Concrete Reinforcement.
CSA International
.1
.3
Section 04 04 99
Page 1
2016-01-13
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product Data:
.1
.2
.3
Shop Drawings:
.1
.2
.3
1.3
Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for
masonry products and include product characteristics, performance criteria,
physical size, finish and limitations.
Submit 2 copies of WHMIS MSDS.
.1
Indicate VOC's in g/L for epoxy coatings and galvanized protective
coatings and touch-up products to be applied within building envelope.
Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or
licensed in Province of Ontario, Canada.
Shop drawings consist of bar bending details, lists and placing drawings.
Placing drawings, indicate sizes, spacing, location and quantities of reinforcement
and connectors.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with
manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory
packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.3
.2
.3
Store materials off ground, indoors, in dry location and in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.
Store and protect masonry products from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.
Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets,
crates, padding and packaging materials as specified in Waste Reduction Workplan in
accordance with Section 01 74 20.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
MASONRY UNITS
.1
Standard concrete block units: to CAN/CSA-A165 Series (CAN/CSA-A165.1).
.1
.2
2.2
Section 04 04 99
Page 2
2016-01-13
Storage and Handling Requirements:
.1
.4
MASONRY
Classification: H/15/D/M.
Size: modular, CCMPA size code 15.
REINFORCEMENT AND CONNECTORS
.1
Bar reinforcement: to CAN/CSA-A371 and CSA G30.18, Grade 400, minimum 30%
recycled content.
.2
Wire reinforcement: to CAN/CSA-A371 and ASTM A496/A496M, truss type, minimum
30% recycled content.
.3
Connectors shall be corrosion resistant: to CAN/CSA-A370 and CSA S304.1.
2.3
MORTAR AND GROUT
.1
Mortar: to CAN/CSA-A179.
.1
.2
Use aggregate passing 1.18 mm sieve where 6 mm thick joints are indicated.
Colour: ground coloured natural aggregates or metallic oxide pigments.
.2
Mortar Type: S based on property specifications,
.3
Mortar for foundation walls, manholes, sewers, pavements, walks, patios and other
exterior masonry at or below grade: type M based on property specifications.
.4
Following applies regardless of mortar types and uses specified above:
.1
.2
Mortar for stonework: type N based on property specifications.
Mortar for grouted reinforced masonry: type S based on property specifications.
.5
Grout: to CAN/CSA-A179, Table 5.
.6
Parging mortar: type S to CAN/CSA-A179.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
MASONRY
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Verification of Conditions: verify conditions of substrates previously installed under other
Sections or Contracts are acceptable for product installation in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions.
.1
.2
.3
3.2
Section 04 04 99
Page 3
2016-01-13
Visually inspect substrate in presence of Departmental Representative.
Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately
upon discovery.
Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied
and after receipt of written approval to proceed from Departmental Representative.
INSTALLATION
.1
Do masonry work in accordance with CAN/CSA-A371 except where specified otherwise.
.1
.2
.3
Bond: running stretcher bond with vertical joints in perpendicular alignment and
centred on adjacent stretchers above and below.
Coursing height: 200 mm for one block and one joint.
Jointing: tool where exposed or where paint or other finish coating is specified to
provide smooth compressed cut joints flush.
.2
Build masonry plumb, level, and true to line, with vertical joints in alignment.
.3
Layout coursing and bond to achieve correct coursing heights, and continuity of bond
above and below openings, with minimum of cutting.
3.3
CONSTRUCTION
.1
Exposed masonry:
.1
.2
.2
Building-in:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.3
Remove chipped, cracked, and otherwise damaged units, in exposed masonry and
replace with undamaged units.
Cut out for electrical switches, outlet boxes, and other recessed or built-in objects.
Make cuts straight, clean, and free from uneven edges.
Install masonry connectors and reinforcement where indicated on drawings.
Build in items required to be built into masonry.
Prevent displacement of built-in items during construction. Check plumb, location
and alignment frequently, as work progresses.
Brace door jambs to maintain plumb. Fill spaces between jambs and masonry with
mortar.
Install loose steel lintels over openings where indicated.
Concrete block lintels:
.1
.2
Install reinforced concrete block lintels over openings in masonry where steel or
reinforced concrete lintels are not indicated.
End bearing: not less than 200 mm as indicated on drawings.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.4
.3
.2
.3
3.4
Cut openings in existing work as indicated.
Openings in walls: approved Departmental Representative.
Make good existing work. Use materials to match existing.
Build in flashings in masonry in accordance with CAN/CSA-A371.
.1
.7
Leave 3 mm space below shelf angles.
Leave 6 mm space between top of non-load bearing walls and partitions and
structural elements. Do not use wedges.
Built masonry to tie in with stabilizers, with provision for vertical movement.
Interface with other work:
.1
.2
.3
.6
Section 04 04 99
Page 4
2016-01-13
Provision for movement:
.1
.2
.5
MASONRY
Install flashings under exterior masonry bearing on foundation walls, slabs, shelf
angles, and steel angles over openings. Install flashings under weep hole courses
and as indicated.
In cavity walls and veneered walls, carry flashings from front edge of masonry,
under outer wythe, then up backing not less than 150 mm, and as follows:
.1
For masonry backing embed flashing 25 mm in joint.
.2
For concrete backing, insert flashing into reglets.
.3
For wood frame backing, staple flashing to walls behind sheathing paper.
.4
For gypsum board backing, bond to wall using manufacturer's
recommended adhesive.
Lap joints 150 mm and seal with adhesive.
Install weep hole vents in vertical joints immediately over flashings, in exterior wythes of
cavity wall and masonry veneer wall construction, at maximum horizontal spacing of 600
mm on centre.
REINFORCING AND CONNECTING
.1
Install masonry connectors and reinforcement in accordance with CAN/CSA-A370,
CAN/CSA-A371 and CSA S304.1 unless indicated otherwise.
.2
Prior to placing concrete, mortar, grout, obtain Departmental Representative's approval of
placement of reinforcement and connectors.
3.5
REINFORCED LINTELS AND BOND BEAMS
.1
Reinforce masonry lintels and bond beams as indicated.
.2
Place and grout reinforcement in accordance with CAN/CSA-A179, CAN/CSA-A371 and
CSA S304.1.
3.6
GROUTING
.1
Grout masonry in accordance with CAN/CSA-A179, CAN/CSA-A371 and CSA S304.1
and as indicated.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
3.7
MASONRY
Section 04 04 99
Page 5
2016-01-13
ANCHORS
.1
3.8
Supply and install metal anchors as indicated.
LATERAL SUPPORT AND ANCHORAGE
.1
3.9
Supply and install lateral support and anchorage in accordance with CSA S304.1 and as
indicated.
SITE TOLERANCES
.1
3.10
Tolerances of CAN/CSA-A371 apply.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
3.11
Inspection and testing will be carried out by Testing Laboratory designated by
Departmental Representative.
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.1
Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
.2
Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment
in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.3
Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with
Section 01 74 20.
.1
3.12
Remove recycling containers and bins from site and dispose of materials at
appropriate facility.
PROTECTION
.1
Protect masonry and other work from marking and other damage. Protect completed work
from mortar droppings. Use non-staining coverings.
.2
Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by masonry products installation.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
METAL FABRICATIONS
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
ASTM International
.1
.2
.3
.2
.2
.3
.4
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
The Master Painters Institute (MPI)
.1
1.2
GS-11-2008, 2nd Edition, Paints and Coatings.
Health Canada / Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)
.1
.5
CSA G40.20-13/G40.21-13, General Requirements for Rolled or Welded
Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel.
CSA S16-14, Design of Steel Structures.
CSA W48-14, Filler Metals and Allied Materials for Metal Arc Welding.
CSA W59-13, Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding).
Green Seal Environmental Standards (GS)
.1
.4
ASTM A53/A53M-12, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and
Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless.
ASTM A123/A123M-13, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot Dip Galvanized)
Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
ASTM A307-14, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and
Threaded Rod 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength.
CSA International
.1
.3
Section 05 50 00
Page 1
2016-01-13
Architectural Painting Specification Manual - current edition.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product Data:
.1
.2
.3
Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for
sections, plates, pipe, tubing, bolts and include product characteristics,
performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.
Submit two copies of WHMIS MSDS.
.1
For finishes, coatings, primers, and paints applied on site: indicate VOC
concentration in g/L.
Shop Drawings:
.1
.2
Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or
licensed in Province of Ontario, Canada.
Indicate materials, core thicknesses, finishes, connections, joints, method of
anchorage, number of anchors, supports, reinforcement, details, and accessories.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
1.3
METAL FABRICATIONS
Section 05 50 00
Page 2
2016-01-13
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Test Reports: submit certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance
characteristics and physical properties.
.2
Certifications: submit product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials
comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements.
1.4
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with
manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory
packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address.
.3
Storage and Handling Requirements:
.1
.2
.4
Store materials off ground, indoors, in dry location and in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.
Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets,
crates, padding and packaging materials as specified in Waste Reduction Workplan in
accordance with Section 01 74 20.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Steel sections and plates: to CSA G40.20/ G40.21, Grade 300W, minimum 30% recycled
content.
.2
Welding materials: to CSA W59.
.3
Welding electrodes: to CSA W48 Series.
.4
Bolts and anchor bolts: to ASTM A307.
2.2
FABRICATION
.1
Fabricate work square, true, straight and accurate to required size, with joints closely fitted
and properly secured.
.2
Use self-tapping shake-proof oval headed screws on items requiring assembly by screws or
as indicated.
.3
Where possible, fit and shop assemble work, ready for erection.
.4
Ensure exposed welds are continuous for length of each joint. File or grind exposed welds
smooth and flush.
2.3
FINISHES
.1
Galvanizing: hot dipped galvanizing with zinc coating 600 g/m2, Coating Grade 85, to
ASTM A123/A123M.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
METAL FABRICATIONS
Section 05 50 00
Page 3
2016-01-13
.2
Shop coat primer: in accordance with chemical component limits and restrictions
requirements and VOC limits of CCD-047a.
.3
Zinc primer: zinc rich, ready mix in accordance with chemical component limits and
restrictions requirements and VOC limits of CCD-047a.
2.4
SHOP PAINTING
.1
Apply one shop coat of primer to metal items, with exception of galvanized or concrete
encased items.
.2
Use primer unadulterated, as prepared by manufacturer. Paint on dry surfaces, free from
rust, scale, grease. Do not paint when temperature is lower than 7 degrees C.
.3
Clean surfaces to be field welded; do not paint.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Verification of Conditions: verify conditions of substrates previously installed under other
Sections or Contracts are acceptable for metal fabrications installation in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions.
.1
.2
.3
3.2
Visually inspect substrate in presence of Departmental Representative.
Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately
upon discovery.
Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied
and after receipt of written approval to proceed from Departmental Representative.
ERECTION
.1
Do welding work in accordance with CSA W59 unless specified otherwise.
.2
Erect metalwork square, plumb, straight, and true, accurately fitted, with tight joints and
intersections.
.3
Provide suitable means of anchorage acceptable to Departmental Representative such as
dowels, anchor clips, bar anchors, expansion bolts and shields, and toggles.
.4
Exposed fastening devices to match finish and be compatible with material through which
they pass.
.5
Supply components for work by other trades in accordance with shop drawings and
schedule.
.6
Weld field connection.
.7
Deliver items over for casting into concrete and building into masonry together with setting
templates to appropriate location and construction personnel.
.8
Touch-up rivets, field welds, bolts and burnt or scratched surfaces with primer after
completion of:
.1
Primer: maximum VOC limit 250 g/L to GS-11.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.9
Section 05 50 00
Page 4
2016-01-13
Touch-up galvanized surfaces with zinc rich primer where burned by field welding.
.1
3.3
METAL FABRICATIONS
Primer: maximum VOC limit 250 g/L to GS-11.
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.1
Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
.2
Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment
in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.3
Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with
Section 01 74 20.
.1
3.4
Remove recycling containers and bins from site and dispose of materials at
appropriate facility.
PROTECTION
.1
Protect installed products and components from damage during construction.
.2
Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by metal fabrications installation.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
CSA International
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.2
1.2
ASTM A123/A123M-13, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized)
Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
National Lumber Grades Authority (NLGA)
.1
.4
CSA B111-1974(R2003), Wire Nails, Spikes and Staples.
CSA O121-08, Douglas Fir Plywood.
CAN/CSA-O141-05(R2009), Softwood Lumber.
CSA O151-09, Canadian Softwood Plywood.
CAN/CSA-O325.0-07, Construction Sheathing.
CAN/CSA-Z809-08, Sustainable Forest Management.
American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM)
.1
.3
Section 06 08 99
Page 1
2016-01-13
Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber 2010.
National Building Code of Canada (NBC) 2010.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product Data:
.1
1.3
Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for
rough carpentry work and include product characteristics, performance criteria,
physical size, finish and limitations.
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS SUBMITTALS
.1
Extra Stock Materials:
.1
1.4
Provide electrical equipment backboards for mounting electrical equipment as
indicated. Use 19 mm thick plywood on 19 x 38 mm furring around spacing,
perimeter and at maximum 300 mm intermediate
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Lumber identification: by grade stamp of an agency certified by Canadian Lumber
Standards Accreditation Board.
.2
Plywood identification: by grade mark in accordance with applicable CSA standards.
.3
Plywood, OSB and wood based composite panel construction sheathing identification: by
grademark in accordance with applicable CSA standards.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
1.5
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Section 06 08 99
Page 2
2016-01-13
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with
manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory
packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address.
.3
Storage and Handling Requirements:
.1
.2
.3
Store materials indoors and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations
in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.
Store and protect wood from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.
Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Lumber: unless specified otherwise, softwood, S4S, S-DRY graded and stamped, in
accordance with following standards:
.1
.2
.3
.2
Furring, blocking, nailing strips, grounds, rough bucks, cants, curbs, fascia backing and
sleepers:
.1
.2
.3
.3
Board sizes: "Standard" or better grade.
Dimension sizes: "Standard" light framing or better grade.
Post and timbers sizes: "Standard" or better grade.
Panel Materials: CAN/CSA-Z809 or SFI.
.1
.2
.3
.4
CAN/CSA-O141.
NLGA Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber.
CAN/CSA-Z809, or SFI.
Douglas fir plywood (DFP): to CSA O121, standard construction.
Urea-formaldehyde free.
Canadian softwood plywood (CSP): to CSA O151, standard construction.
Urea-formaldehyde free.
Plywood, OSB and wood based composite panels: to CAN/CSA-O325.
Urea-formaldehyde free.
Wood Preservative:
.1
.2
Surface-applied wood preservative: clear, copper naphthenate or 5%
pentachlorophenol solution, water repellent preservative.
Pentachlorophenol use is restricted to building components that are in ground
contact and subject to decay or insect attack only. Where used,
pentachlorophenol-treated wood must be covered with two coats of an appropriate
sealer.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.3
2.2
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Section 06 08 99
Page 3
2016-01-13
Structures built with wood treated with pentachlorophenol and inorganic
arsenicals must not be used for storing food nor should the wood come in contact
with drinking water.
ACCESSORIES
.1
Fasteners: to ASTM A123/A123M, for exterior work and pressure- preservative treated
lumber.
.2
Nails, spikes and staples: to CSA B111.
.3
Bolts: 12.5 mm diameter unless indicated otherwise, complete with nuts and washers.
.4
Proprietary fasteners: toggle bolts, expansion shields and lag bolts, screws and lead or
inorganic fibre plugs, recommended for purpose by manufacturer.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Verification of Conditions: verify conditions of substrates previously installed under other
Sections or Contracts are acceptable for rough carpentry installation in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions.
.1
.2
.3
3.2
Visually inspect substrate in presence of Departmental Representative.
Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately
upon discovery.
Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied
and after receipt of written approval to proceed from Departmental Representative.
PREPARATION
.1
Treat surfaces of material with wood preservative, before installation.
.2
Apply preservative by dipping, or by brush to completely saturate and maintain wet film on
surface for minimum 3 minute soak on lumber and 1 minute soak on plywood.
.3
Re-treat surfaces exposed by cutting, trimming or boring with liberal brush application of
preservative before installation.
.4
Treat material as follows:
.1
3.3
Wood cants, fascia backing, curbs, nailers, sleepers on roof deck.
INSTALLATION
.1
Comply with requirements of NBC, supplemented by the following paragraphs.
.2
Install furring and blocking as required to space-out and support casework, cabinets, wall
and ceiling finishes, facings, fascia, soffit, siding and other work as required.
.3
Align and plumb faces of furring and blocking to tolerance of 1:600.
.4
Install rough bucks, nailers and linings to rough openings as required to provide backing
for frames and other work.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Section 06 08 99
Page 4
2016-01-13
.5
Install wood cants, fascia backing, nailers, curbs and other wood supports as required and
secure using galvanized steel fasteners.
.6
Install wood backing, dressed, tapered and recessed slightly below top surface of roof
insulation for roof hopper.
.7
Install sleepers as indicated.
.8
Use caution when working with particle board. Use dust collectors and high quality
respirator masks.
.9
Frame, anchor, fasten, tie and brace members to provide necessary strength and rigidity.
.10
Countersink bolts where necessary to provide clearance for other work.
3.4
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.1
Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
.2
Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment
in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.3
Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with
Section 01 74 20.
.1
Remove recycling containers and bins from site and dispose of materials at
appropriate facility.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
.1
.2
.2
1.2
Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber 204.
South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD), California State, Regulation
XI. Source Specific Standards
.1
.2
.9
Rules for the Measurement and Inspection of Hardwood and Cypress 1998.
National Lumber Grades Authority (NLGA)
.1
.8
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
National Hardwood Lumber Association (NHLA)
.1
.7
CSA B111-74(R2003), Wire Nails, Spikes and Staples.
CSA O121-08(R2013), Douglas Fir Plywood.
CSA O141-05(R2014), Softwood Lumber.
CSA O151-09(R2014), Canadian Softwood Plywood.
CSA O153-13, Poplar Plywood.
Health Canada / Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)
.1
.6
CAN/CGSB-71.20-M88, Adhesive, Contact, Brushable.
CSA International
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.5
AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards, AWS Edition 1-2009.
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)
.1
.4
ANSI/NPA A208.2-09, Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF) for Interior
Applications.
ANSI/HPVA HP-1-09, Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood.
Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada (AWMAC), Architectural
Woodwork Institute (AWI) and Woodwork Institute (WI).
.1
.3
Section 06 40 00
Page 1
2016-01-13
SCAQMD Rule 1113-A2007, Architectural Coatings.
SCAQMD Rule 1168-A2005, Adhesives and Sealants Applications.
Sustainable Forestry Initiative (SFI).
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product Data:
.1
Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for
architectural woodwork and include product characteristics, performance criteria,
physical size, finish and limitations.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
.3
.2
.3
.4
Submit two copies of WHMIS MSDS.
Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or
licensed in Province of Ontario, Canada.
Indicate details of construction, profiles, jointing, fastening and other related
details.
.1
Scales: profiles full size, details half full size.
Indicate materials, thicknesses, finishes and hardware.
Indicate locations of service outlets in casework, typical and special installation
conditions, and connections, attachments, anchorage and location of exposed
fastenings.
Samples:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.5
Section 06 40 00
Page 2
2016-01-13
Shop Drawings:
.1
.4
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
Submit for review and acceptance of each unit.
Samples will be returned for inclusion into work.
Submit duplicate samples of hardwood, softwood, plywood, fibreboard,
particleboard: sample size 300 x 300 mm or 300 mm long.
Submit duplicate samples of laminated plastic for colour selection.
Submit duplicate samples of laminated plastic joints, edging, cutouts and
postformed profiles.
Certifications: submit AWMAC GIS certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that
materials comply with specified performance characteristics and physical properties.
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
Architectural woodwork shall be manufactured and/or installed to the current
AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Standards and shall be subject to an inspection
at the plant and/or site by an appointed AWMAC Certified Inspector.
Inspection costs shall be included in the bid price for this project. Contact your
local AWMAC Chapter for details of inspection costs.
Shop drawings shall be submitted to the AWMAC Chapter office for review
before work commences.
Work that does not meet the AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Standards, as
specified, shall be replaced, reworked and/or refinished by the architectural
woodwork contractor, to the approval of AWMAC, at no additional cost to the.
Departmental Representative.
If the woodwork contractor is an AWMAC Manufacturer member in good
standing, a two (2) year AWMAC Guarantee Certificate will be issued.
The AWMAC Guarantee shall cover replacing, reworking and/or refinishing any
deficient architectural woodwork due to faulty workmanship or defective
materials supplied by the woodwork contractor, which may appear during a two
(2) year period following the date of issuance.
If the woodwork contractor is not an AWMAC Manufacturer member they shall
provide the Departmental Representative with a two (2) year maintenance bond, in
lieu of the AWMAC Guarantee Certificate, to the full value of the architectural
woodwork contract.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
1.3
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
Section 06 40 00
Page 3
2016-01-13
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Lumber by grade stamp of an agency certified by Canadian Lumber Standards
Accreditation Board.
.2
Plywood, particleboard, OSB and wood based composite panels to CSA and ANSI
standards.
1.4
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with
manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory
packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address.
.1
.2
.3
Storage and Handling Requirements:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Protect millwork against dampness and damage during and after delivery.
Store millwork in ventilated areas, protected from extreme changes of temperature
or humidity.
Store materials off ground, indoors, in dry location and in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.
Store and protect architectural woodwork from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.
Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets,
crates, padding and packaging materials as specified in Waste Reduction Workplan in
accordance with Section 01 74 20.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Douglas fir plywood (DFP): to CSA O121, standard construction, FSC certified.
.1
.2
Plywood resin to contain no added urea-formaldehyde.
Interior mat-formed wood particleboard: to ANSI/NPA A208.1, FSC certified.
.1
Particleboard resin to contain no added urea-formaldehyde.
.3
Laminated plastic for flatwork: to NEMA LD3, Grade VGL, Type HD, pattern, colour,
finish as selected by Departmental Representative.
.4
Laminated plastic for postforming work: to NEMA LD3, Grade VGL, Type HD, pattern,
colour, finish as selected by Departmental Representative.
.5
Thermofused Melamine: to NEMA LD3 Grade VGL.
.1
High wear resistant thermofused melamine: equal or exceed 400 cycles (Minimum
standard for HPL abrasion test).
.6
Nails and staples: to CSA B111.
.7
Wood screws: type and size to suit application.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
.8
Splines: metal.
.9
Sealant: in accordance with Section 07 92 00.
.1
.10
Sealants: VOC limit 250 g/L maximum to SCAQMD Rule 1168.
Laminated plastic adhesive:
.1
.2
.3
2.2
Section 06 40 00
Page 4
2016-01-13
Adhesive: contact adhesive to CAN/CGSB-71.20.
Adhesives: VOC limit 120 g/L maximum to SCAQMD Rule 1168 and GS-36.
Clear Wood Finishes: VOC limit 550 g/L maximum to SCAQMD Rule 1113.
MANUFACTURED UNITS
.1
Casework:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.2
Fabricate caseworks to AWI/AWMAC/WI AWS premium quality grade.
Furring, blocking, nailing strips, grounds and rough bucks and sleepers.
.1
Board sizes: "standard" or better grade.
.2
Dimension sizes: "standard" light framing or better grade.
.3
Urea-formaldehyde free.
Framing NLGA grade.
Case bodies (ends, divisions and bottoms).
.1
Grade M-2 for interior use, minimum 720 kg/m³ density and Grade M-3,
minimum 750 kg/m³ particleboard for countertops and shelves, thickness
as indicated in Drawings.Backs:
.1
Grade M-2 for interior use, minimum 720 kg/m³ density.Shelving:
.1
Grade M-3, minimum 750 kg/m³ particleboard for countertops and
shelves, thickness as indicated in DrawingsEdge banding: High Pressure
Decorative Laminate for HPDL Finished Surfaces; colour to match with surface
finish
Drawers:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Fabricate drawers to AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards
premium grade supplemented as follows:
Sides and Backs.
.1
Softwood and poplar plywood DFP grade, square edge, thickness as
indicated in Drawings.
Bottoms:
.1
Softwood and poplar plywood DFP grade, square edge, thickness as
indicated in Drawings.
Fronts:
.1
Softwood and poplar plywood DFP grade, square edge, thickness as
indicated in Drawings.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.3
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
Section 06 40 00
Page 5
2016-01-13
Casework Doors:
.1
Grade M-2 for interior use, minimum 720 kg/m³ density.FABRICATION
.1
Set nails and countersink screws apply stained wood filler to indentations, sand smooth and
leave ready to receive finish.
.2
Shop install cabinet hardware for doors, shelves and drawers. Recess shelf standards unless
noted otherwise.
.3
Shelving to cabinetwork to be adjustable unless otherwise noted.
.4
Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, inserts, appliances, outlet boxes and other fixtures.
.5
Shop assemble work for delivery to site in size easily handled and to ensure passage
through building openings.
.6
Obtain governing dimensions before fabricating items which are to accommodate or abut
appliances, equipment and other materials.
.7
Ensure adjacent parts of continuous laminate work match in colour and pattern.
.8
Veneer laminated plastic to core material in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's
instructions. Ensure core and laminate profiles coincide to provide continuous support and
bond over entire surface. Use continuous lengths up to 2400 mm. Keep joints 600 mm from
sink cutouts.
.9
Form shaped profiles and bends as indicated, using postforming grade laminate to laminate
manufacturer's instructions.
.10
Use straight self-edging laminate strip for flatwork to cover exposed edge of core material.
Chamfer exposed edges uniformly at approximately 20 degrees. Do not mitre laminate
edges.
.11
Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of core of plastic laminate work.
.12
Apply laminated plastic liner sheet where indicated.
2.4
CABINET WORK HARDWARE
.1
Provide the following cabinet hardware, in quantity required and as required, complete
with all screws, bolts, washers for complete installation.
.2
Fasteners:
.1
.2
.3
.3
Draw Bolt Fasteners: Mitre butt joint fastener, adjustable and requiring no special
tools for installation, galvanized.
Non-exposed Fasteners: Fabricators choice consistent with quality level specified.
Exposed Fasteners: Architectural appearance, material, finish and
Pulls: Stainless steel, sizes/profiles to be selected.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.4
.5
.1
Low height drawers (150 mm (6”)): Full extension, length to suit drawer box,
22 kg (50 lb) capacity, side mounting with positive stop and hold-in detent
features, black zinc finish.
.2
High height drawers (150 mm (6”), 305 mm (12”)): Full extension, Drawer
box; Length to suit drawer box, 45 kg (100 lb) capacity, side mounting with
positive stop, hold-in detent and silencer features, black zinc finish.
Hinges:
.2
.2
2.5
Standard Doors: Elbow Latches for inactive leaves of pairs of doors to be locked,
standard duty, zinc finish.
Shelf Rests:
.1
.8
Typical Cabinet Doors: Concealed, euro-style hinge with cover caps; fully
adjustable for overlay, depth, height and closing force; opening angle of 110;
self-closing feature; nickel plated steel construction; overlay and half overlay
mounting, size and profile to suit cabinet construction.
Typical lockable drawers: Nickel finished, Master Keyed, keyed alike in groups,
drawer lock, gang lock for groups of 3 drawers or more.
Door Latches:
.1
.7
Section 06 40 00
Page 6
2016-01-13
Drawer Slides: Following list of drawer slides is provided to indicate general conformance
requirements only; notify the Departmental Representative where drawer width, height or
intended use differs from that indicated in the general descriptions and the requirements of
the manufacturer; coordinate sample submittals before ordering materials:
.1
.6
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
Wall Standards and Brackets: Recessed mounted pilaster with clips, chrome
finish; space standards at 406 mm O/C, refer to Drawings for number of shelves
and length.
Wall Shelf Supports: Chrome standard and brackets: Wall shelving, depths as
indicated.
Hasps: Medium duty, stainless steel.
FINISHING
.1
Finish in accordance with Section 09 91 23.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Verification of Conditions: verify conditions of substrates previously installed under other
Sections or Contracts are acceptable for architectural woodwork installation in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions.
.1
.2
.3
Visually inspect substrate in presence of Departmental Representative.
Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately
upon discovery.
Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied
and after receipt of written approval to proceed from Departmental Representative.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
3.2
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
Section 06 40 00
Page 7
2016-01-13
INSTALLATION
.1
Do architectural woodwork to AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards.
.2
Install prefinished millwork at locations shown on drawings.
.1
.3
Position accurately, level, plumb straight.
Fasten and anchor millwork securely.
.1
Supply and install heavy duty fixture attachments for wall mounted cabinets.
.4
Use draw bolts in countertop joints.
.5
Scribe and cut as required to fit abutting walls and to fit properly into recesses and to
accommodate piping, columns, fixtures, outlets or other projecting, intersecting or
penetrating objects.
.6
At junction of plastic laminate counter back splash and adjacent wall finish, apply small
bead of sealant in accordance with Section 07 92 00.
.7
Apply water resistant building paper over wood framing members in contact with masonry
or cementitious construction.
.8
Fit hardware accurately and securely in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions.
.9
For site application, offset joints in plastic laminate facing from joints in core.
3.3
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.1
.2
Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment
in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.1
.2
.3
Clean millwork and cabinet work inside cupboards and drawers and outside
surfaces.
Remove excess glue from surfaces.
Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with
Section 01 74 20.
.1
3.4
Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
Remove recycling containers and bins from site and dispose of materials at
appropriate facility.
PROTECTION
.1
Protect millwork and cabinet work from damage until final inspection.
.2
Protect installed products and components from damage during construction.
.3
Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by architectural woodwork installation.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
FIRE STOPPING
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
Section 07 84 00
Page 1
2016-01-13
Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)
.1
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada (ULC)
.1
.2
.3
1.2
CAN/ULC-S101-14, Standard Methods of for Fire Endurance Tests of Building
Construction and Materials.
CAN/ULC-S102-10, Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics
of Building Materials and Assemblies.
CAN/ULC-S115-11, Standard Method of Fire Tests of Firestop Systems.
DEFINITIONS
Fire Stop Material: device intended to close off opening or penetration during fire or
materials that fill openings in wall or floor assembly where penetration is by cables, cable
trays, conduits, ducts and pipes and poke-through termination devices, including electrical
outlet boxes along with their means of support through wall or floor openings.
Single Component Fire Stop System: fire stop material that has Listed Systems Design and
is used individually without use of high temperature insulation or other materials to create
fire stop system.
Multiple Component Fire Stop System: exact group of fire stop materials that are identified
within Listed Systems Design to create on site fire stop system.
Continuity of Fire Separations: NBC 2010, Division B, Parts 3.1.8 and 3.1.9.1, 9.10.9):
.1
1.3
Wall, partition or floor assemblies required to be a fire separation shall be:
constructed as a continuous element; have a fire resistance rating; have openings
protected by a closure; and have penetrations sealed by a firestop.
SUBMITTALS
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
Product Data:
.1
.2
Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet and
include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and
limitations.
Submit two copies of WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets.
Shop Drawings:
.1
.2
Submit shop drawings to show location, proposed material, reinforcement,
anchorage, fastenings and method of installation.
Construction details should accurately reflect actual job conditions.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
FIRE STOPPING
Section 07 84 00
Page 2
2016-01-13
Samples:
.1
Submit duplicate 300 x 300 mm samples showing actual fire stop material
proposed for project.
Quality assurance submittals: submit following in accordance with Section 01 45 00.
.1
.2
.3
.4
1.4
Test reports: in accordance with CAN/ULC-S101 for fire endurance and
CAN/ULC-S102 for surface burning characteristics.
.1
Submit certified test reports from approved independent testing
laboratories, indicating compliance of applied fire stopping with
specifications for specified performance characteristics and physical
properties.
Certificates: submit certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that materials
comply with specified performance characteristics and physical properties.
Manufacturer's Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions and
special handling criteria, installation sequence, cleaning procedures.
Manufacturer's Field Reports: submit to manufacturer's written reports within 3
days of review, verifying compliance of Work, as described in PART 3 - FIELD
QUALITY CONTROL.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Qualifications:
.1
.2
.3
Installer: company specializing in fire stopping installations with 5 years
documented experience approved by manufacturer.
All fire stopping material shall be from one manufacturer.
All fire stopping installation work for entire project shall be by a single contractor
experienced in firestopping. Individual disciplines shall NOT fire stop their own
work.
Pre-Installation Meetings: convene pre-installation meeting one week prior to beginning
work of this Section, with contractor's representative and Departmental Representative in
accordance with Section 01 32 16 to:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Verify project requirements.
Review installation and substrate conditions.
Co-ordination with other building subtrades.
Review manufacturer's installation instructions and warranty requirements.
Site Meetings: as part of Manufacturer's Services described in PART 3 - FIELD
QUALITY CONTROL, schedule site visits, to review Work, at stages listed.
.1
.2
.3
After delivery and storage of products, and when preparatory Work is complete,
but before installation begins.
Twice during progress of Work at 25% and 60% complete.
Upon completion of Work, after cleaning is carried out.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
1.5
FIRE STOPPING
Section 07 84 00
Page 3
2016-01-13
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Packing, shipping, handling and unloading:
.1
.2
.3
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00.
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions.
Deliver materials to the site in undamaged condition and in original unopened
containers, marked to indicate brand name, manufacturer, ULC markings.
Storage and Protection:
.1
.2
Store materials indoors in dry location and in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.
Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
Waste Management and Disposal:
.1
Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section
01 74 20.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
Fire stopping and smoke seal systems: in accordance with CAN/ULC-S115.
.1
.2
Asbestos-free materials and systems capable of maintaining effective barrier
against flame, smoke and gases in compliance with requirements of
CAN/ULC-S115 and not to exceed opening sizes for which they are intended and
conforming to specified special requirements described in PART 3.
Fire stop system rating: F.
Service penetration assemblies: systems tested to CAN/ULC-S115.
Service penetration fire stop components: certified by test laboratory to CAN/ULC-S115.
Fire-resistance rating of installed fire stopping assembly in accordance with NBC.
Fire stopping and smoke seals at openings intended for ease of re-entry such as cables:
elastomeric seal.
Fire stopping and smoke seals at openings around penetrations for pipes, ductwork and
other mechanical items requiring sound and vibration control: elastomeric seal.
Primers: to manufacturer's recommendation for specific material, substrate, and end use.
Water (if applicable): potable, clean and free from injurious amounts of deleterious
substances.
Damming and backup materials, supports and anchoring devices: to manufacturer's
recommendations, and in accordance with tested assembly being installed as acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
Sealants for vertical joints: non-sagging.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
FIRE STOPPING
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
Section 07 84 00
Page 4
2016-01-13
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications,
including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and
datasheets.
3.2
PREPARATION
Examine sizes and conditions of voids to be filled to establish correct thicknesses and
installation of materials.
.1
Ensure that substrates and surfaces are clean, dry and frost free.
Prepare surfaces in contact with fire stopping materials and smoke seals to manufacturer's
instructions.
Maintain insulation around pipes and ducts penetrating fire separation without interruption
to vapour barrier.
Mask where necessary to avoid spillage and over coating onto adjoining surfaces; remove
stains on adjacent surfaces.
3.3
INSTALLATION
Install fire stopping and smoke seal material and components in accordance with
manufacturer's certified tested system listing.
Seal holes or voids made by through penetrations, poke-through termination devices, and
unpenetrated openings or joints to ensure continuity and integrity of fire separation are
maintained.
Provide temporary forming as required and remove forming only after materials have
gained sufficient strength and after initial curing.
Tool or trowel exposed surfaces to neat finish.
Remove excess compound promptly as work progresses and upon completion.
3.4
SEQUENCES OF OPERATION
Proceed with installation only when submittals have been reviewed by Departmental
Representative.
Install floor fire stopping before interior partition erections.
Metal deck bonding: fire stopping to precede spray applied fireproofing to ensure required
bonding.
Mechanical pipe insulation: certified fire stop system component.
.1
3.5
Ensure pipe insulation installation precedes fire stopping.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Inspections: notify Departmental Representative when ready for inspection and prior to
concealing or enclosing fire stopping materials and service penetration assemblies.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
FIRE STOPPING
Section 07 84 00
Page 5
2016-01-13
Manufacturer's Field Services:
.1
.2
.3
3.6
Obtain written report from manufacturer verifying compliance of Work, in
handling, installing, applying, protecting and cleaning of product and submit
Manufacturer's Field Reports as described in PART 1 - SUBMITTALS.
Provide manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations
and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
Schedule site visits, to review Work, as directed in PART 1 - QUALITY
ASSURANCE.
CLEANING
Proceed in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
On completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials,
excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.
Remove temporary dams after initial set of fire stopping and smoke seal materials.
3.7
SCHEDULE
Fire stop and smoke seal at:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
Penetrations through fire-resistance rated masonry, concrete, and gypsum board
partitions and walls.
Edge of floor slabs at curtain wall and precast concrete panels.
Top of fire-resistance rated masonry and gypsum board partitions.
Intersection of fire-resistance rated masonry and gypsum board partitions.
Control and sway joints in fire-resistance rated masonry and gypsum board
partitions and walls.
Penetrations through fire-resistance rated floor slabs, ceilings and roofs.
Openings and sleeves installed for future use through fire separations.
Around mechanical and electrical assemblies penetrating fire separations.
Rigid ducts: greater than 129 cm2: fire stopping to consist of bead of fire stopping
material between retaining angle and fire separation and between retaining angle
and duct, on each side of fire separation.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
JOINT SEALANTS
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
Section 07 92 00
Page 1
2016-01-13
.1
Materials, preparation and application for caulking and sealants.
.2
Text to complete other various Sections containing sealant or caulking specifications.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM)
.1
.2
.2
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)
.1
.2
.3
.3
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
Transport Canada (TC)
.1
1.3
Canadian Environmental Protection Act, 1999 (CEPA).
Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)
.1
.5
CAN/CGSB-19.13-M87, Sealing Compound, One-component, Elastomeric,
Chemical Curing.
CAN/CGSB-19.17-M90, One-Component Acrylic Emulsion Base Sealing
Compound.
CAN/CGSB-19.24-M90, Multi-component, Chemical Curing Sealing Compound.
Department of Justice Canada (Jus)
.1
.4
ASTM C919-12, Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications.
ASTM C920-14a, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act, 1992 (TDGA).
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Manufacturer's product to describe.
.1
.2
.3
Caulking compound.
Primers.
Sealing compound, each type, including compatibility when different sealants are
in contact with each other.
.3
Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.4
Submit duplicate samples of each type of material and colour.
.5
Cured samples of exposed sealants for each color where required to match adjacent
material.
.6
Submit manufacturer's instructions in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.1
Instructions to include installation instructions for each product used.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
1.4
JOINT SEALANTS
Section 07 92 00
Page 2
2016-01-13
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, handle, store and protect materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00.
.2
Deliver and store materials in original wrappings and containers with manufacturer's seals
and labels, intact. Protect from freezing, moisture, water and contact with ground or floor.
1.5
WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
.1
Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.2
Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities.
.3
Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard,
packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with Waste
Management Plan.
.4
Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic in designated containers.
.5
Handle and dispose of hazardous materials in accordance with the CEPA, TDGA,
Regional and Municipal regulations.
.6
Unused sealant material must not be disposed of into sewer system, into streams, lakes,
onto ground or in other location where it will pose health or environmental hazard.
.7
Divert unused joint sealing material from landfill to official hazardous material collections
site approved by Departmental Representative.
.8
Empty plastic joint sealer containers are not recyclable. Do not dispose of empty containers
with plastic materials destined for recycling.
.9
Fold up metal banding, flatten, and place in designated area for recycling.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
.1
Environmental Limitations:
.1
.2
Joint-Width Conditions:
.1
.3
Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than
those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.
Joint-Substrate Conditions:
.1
1.7
Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under following conditions:
.1
When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits
permitted by joint sealant manufacturer or are below 4.4°C.
.2
When joint substrates are wet.
Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of
interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
.1
Comply with requirements of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System
(WHMIS) regarding use, handling, storage, and disposal of hazardous materials; and
regarding labelling and provision of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) acceptable to
Labour Canada.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
JOINT SEALANTS
Section 07 92 00
Page 3
2016-01-13
.2
Conform to manufacturer's recommended temperatures, relative humidity, and substrate
moisture content for application and curing of sealants including special conditions
governing use.
.3
Ventilate area of work as directed by Departmental Representative by use of approved
portable supply and exhaust fans.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
SEALANT MATERIALS
.1
Do not use caulking that emits strong odours, contains toxic chemicals or is not certified as
mould resistant in air handling units.
.2
When low toxicity caulks are not possible, confine usage to areas which offgas to exterior,
are contained behind air barriers, or are applied several months before occupancy to
maximize offgas time.
.3
Where sealants are qualified with primers use only these primers.
2.2
SEALANT MATERIAL DESIGNATIONS
.1
Polyurethane:
.1
.2
Silicone:
.1
.2
.3
Type S-4: One part acrylic latex, Shore A Hardness 20, conforming to
CAN/CGSB-19.17 and ASTM 834.
Acoustical Sealant:
.1
.5
Type S-2: Mould and mildew resistant, Shore A Hardness 15-25, one component
conforming to CAN/CGSB-19.13 and ASTM C920, primerless, Type S, Grade
NS, Class 25, use NT, G, and A, SWRI validated.
Type S-3: Exterior Weatherproofing Sealant, One part, low modulus, neutral cure,
Shore A Hardness 15 25, conforming to CAN/CGSB 19.13 M, Classification C 1
40 B N and C 1 25 B N, and ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, use NT,
M, G, A and O, colour as selected by Departmental Representative from
manufacturer’s standard range.
Acrylic Latex:
.1
.4
Type S-1: One component, non-sag, for general construction, Shore A
Hardness 15+, conforming to CAN/CGSB-19.13, Type 2, MCG-2-25-A-N and
ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, M, and A, colour to be
selected by Departmental Representative from manufacturer’s standard range.
Type S-5: Non-skinning, non-hardening, single component synthetic rubber
sealant, conforming to ASTM C919, primerless, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25,
SWRI validated.
Multi-Component:
.1
Type S-6: Saw cut sealant, multi-component, self levelling, conforming to ASTM
D2240.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
.6
Section 07 92 00
Page 4
2016-01-13
Type S-7: Two part multi-component sealant; chemical curing, non sag, exterior
wall sealant, Shore A Hardness 20-35, conforming to CAN/CGSB 19.24 M, Type
2, Class B, and ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, use NT, M, and A.
Preformed Compressible and Non-Compressible back-up materials.
.1
.2
.3
.4
2.3
JOINT SEALANTS
Polyethylene, Urethane, Neoprene or Vinyl Foam.
.1
Extruded open or closed cell foam backer rod.
.2
Size: oversize 30 to 50%.
Neoprene or Butyl Rubber.
.1
Round solid rod, Shore A hardness 70.
High Density Foam.
.1
Extruded closed cell polyvinyl chloride (PVC), extruded polyethylene,
closed cell, Shore A hardness 20, tensile strength 140 to 200 kPa, extruded
polyolefin foam, 32 kg/m3 density, or neoprene foam backer, size as
recommended by manufacturer.
Bond Breaker Tape.
.1
Polyethylene bond breaker tape which will not bond to sealant.
SEALANT SELECTION
.1
Where no specified type of sealant is shown or specified choose one of the sealants
specified in this Section applicable to that intended application, and consistent with
manufacturer's recommendations.
.2
Perimeters of exterior openings where frames meet exterior facade of building (i.e. brick,
block, precast masonry): Sealant Type S-7.
.3
Seal interior perimeters of exterior openings as detailed on drawings: Sealant type: S-4.
.4
Interior control and expansion joints in floor surfaces: Sealant Type S-6.
.5
Perimeters of interior frames, as detailed and itemized: Sealant Type S-4.
.6
Perimeter of bath fixtures (e.g. sinks, tubs, urinals, stools, waterclosets, basins, vanities):
Sealant Type S-2.
.7
Exposed interior control joints in drywall: Sealant Type S-1.
2.4
JOINT CLEANER
.1
Non-corrosive and non-staining type, compatible with joint forming materials and sealant
recommended by sealant manufacturer.
.2
Primer: as recommended by manufacturer.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
PROTECTION
.1
Protect installed Work of other trades from staining or contamination.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
3.2
JOINT SEALANTS
Section 07 92 00
Page 5
2016-01-13
SURFACE PREPARATION
.1
Examine joint sizes and conditions to establish correct depth to width relationship for
installation of backup materials and sealants.
.2
Clean bonding joint surfaces of harmful matter substances including dust, rust, oil grease,
and other matter which may impair Work.
.3
Do not apply sealants to joint surfaces treated with sealer, curing compound, water
repellent, or other coatings unless tests have been performed to ensure compatibility of
materials. Remove coatings as required.
.4
Ensure joint surfaces are dry and frost free.
.5
Prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
3.3
PRIMING
.1
Where necessary to prevent staining, mask adjacent surfaces prior to priming and caulking.
.2
Prime sides of joints in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions immediately
prior to caulking.
3.4
BACKUP MATERIAL
.1
Apply bond breaker tape where required to manufacturer's instructions.
.2
Install joint filler to achieve correct joint depth and shape, with approximately 30%
compression.
3.5
MIXING
.1
3.6
Mix materials in strict accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions.
APPLICATION
.1
Sealant.
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.2
Apply sealant in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
Mask edges of joint where irregular surface or sensitive joint border exists to
provide neat joint.
Apply sealant in continuous beads.
Apply sealant using gun with proper size nozzle.
Use sufficient pressure to fill voids and joints solid.
Form surface of sealant with full bead, smooth, free from ridges, wrinkles, sags, air
pockets, embedded impurities.
Tool exposed surfaces before skinning begins to give slightly concave shape.
Remove excess compound promptly as work progresses and upon completion.
Curing.
.1
.2
Cure sealants in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions.
Do not cover up sealants until proper curing has taken place.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.3
JOINT SEALANTS
Section 07 92 00
Page 6
2016-01-13
Cleanup.
.1
.2
.3
Clean adjacent surfaces immediately and leave Work neat and clean.
Remove excess and droppings, using recommended cleaners as work progresses.
Remove masking tape after initial set of sealant.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM)
.1
.2
.2
.2
NFPA 80-2013, Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives.
NFPA 252-2012, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada (ULC)
.1
1.2
CSDMA, Recommended Specifications for Commercial Steel Doors and Frames,
2006.
CSDMA, Selection and Usage Guide for Commercial Steel Door and Frame
Products, 2009.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
.1
.2
.6
CSA G40.20-13/G40.21-13, General Requirements for Rolled or Welded
Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel.
CSA W59-13, Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding).
Canadian Steel Door Manufacturers' Association (CSDMA)
.1
.5
CAN/CGSB-1.181-99, Ready-Mixed Organic Zinc-Rich Coating.
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International)
.1
.4
ASTM A653/A653M-13, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)
.1
.3
Section 08 11 00
Page 1
2016-01-13
CAN/ULC-S104-10, Standard Method for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
.1
Design Requirements:
.1
.2
1.3
Steel fire rated doors and frames: labelled and listed by an organization
accredited by Standards Council of Canada in conformance with CAN/ULCS104, NFPA 252 for ratings specified or indicated.
Provide fire labelled frames for openings requiring fire protection ratings. Test
products in conformance with CAN/ULC-S104, ASTM E152 or NFPA 252 and
listed by nationally recognized agency having factory inspection services.
SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Provide product data: in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.3
Provide shop drawings: in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.1
Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or
licensed in Province of Ontario, Canada.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
.3
.4
1.4
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
Section 08 11 00
Page 2
2016-01-13
Indicate each type of door, material, steel core thicknesses, mortises,
reinforcements, location of exposed fasteners, openings, glazed, arrangement of
hardware and finishes.
Indicate each type frame material, core thickness, reinforcements, glazing stops,
location of anchors and exposed fastenings and fire rating finishes.
Include schedule identifying each unit, with door marks and numbers relating to
numbering on drawings and door schedule.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00.
.2
Waste Management and Disposal:
.1
Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section
01 74 20.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Hot dipped galvanized steel sheet: to ASTM A653/A653M, ZF75, minimum base steel
thickness in accordance with CSDMA Table 1 - Thickness for Component Parts,
minimum 30% recycled content.
.2
Reinforcement channel: to CSA G40.20/G40.21, Type 44W, coating designation to
ASTM A653/A653M, ZF75.
2.2
DOOR CORE MATERIALS
.1
Honeycomb construction:
.1
2.3
Structural small cell, 24.5 mm maximum kraft paper 'honeycomb', weight: 36.3
kg per ream minimum, density: 16.5 kg/m3 minimum sanded to required
thickness.
ADHESIVES
.1
Honeycomb cores and steel components: heat resistant, spray grade, resin reinforced
neoprene/rubber (polychloroprene) based, low viscosity, contact cement.
.2
Lock-seam doors: fire resistant, resin reinforced polychloroprene, high viscosity,
sealant/adhesive.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
2.4
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
Section 08 11 00
Page 3
2016-01-13
PRIMER
.1
2.5
Touch-up prime CAN/CGSB-1.181.
PAINT
.1
2.6
Field paint steel doors and frames in accordance with Section 09 91 23. Protect
weatherstrips from paint. Provide final finish free of scratches or other blemishes.
ACCESSORIES
.1
Door silencers: single stud rubber/neoprene type.
.2
Interior top and bottom caps: steel.
.3
Fabricate glazing stops as formed channel, minimum 16 mm height, accurately fitted,
butted at corners and fastened to frame sections with counter-sunk oval head sheet metal
screws.
.4
Door bottom seal: rubber bulb with extruded aluminum drip.
.5
Metallic paste filler: to manufacturer's standard.
.6
Fire labels: metal riveted.
.7
Sealant: 07 92 00
.8
Glazing: 08 80 50
.9
Panel anchors for existing frames: Fabricate 1.7 mm thickness sheet steel angles and floor
anchor channels accurately fitted, butted at corners and fastened to existing frame
sections and concrete slab.
2.7
FRAMES FABRICATION GENERAL
.1
Fabricate frames in accordance with CSDMA specifications.
.2
Fabricate frames to profiles and maximum face sizes as indicated.
.3
Interior frames: 1.6 mm welded type construction.
.4
Blank, reinforce, drill and tap frames for mortised, templated hardware, and electronic
hardware using templates provided by finish hardware supplier. Reinforce frames for
surface mounted hardware.
.5
Protect mortised cutouts with steel guard boxes.
.6
Prepare frame for door silencers, 3 for single door, 2 at head for double door.
.7
Manufacturer's nameplates on frames and screens are not permitted.
.8
Conceal fastenings except where exposed fastenings are indicated.
.9
Provide factory-applied touch up primer at areas where zinc coating has been removed
during fabrication.
2.8
FRAME ANCHORAGE
.1
Provide appropriate anchorage to floor and wall construction.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
Section 08 11 00
Page 4
2016-01-13
.2
Locate each wall anchor immediately above or below each hinge reinforcement on hinge
jamb and directly opposite on strike jamb.
.3
Provide 2 anchors for rebate opening heights up to 1520 mm and 1 additional anchor for
each additional 760 mm of height or fraction thereof.
.4
Locate anchors for frames in existing openings not more than 150 mm from top and
bottom of each jambs and intermediate at 660 mm on centre maximum.
2.9
FRAMES: WELDED TYPE
.1
Welding in accordance with CSA W59.
.2
Accurately mitre or mechanically joint frame product and securely weld on inside of
profile.
.3
Cope accurately and securely weld butt joints of mullions, transom bars, centre rails and
sills.
.4
Grind welded joints and corners to a flat plane, fill with metallic paste and sand to
uniform smooth finish.
.5
Securely attach floor anchors to inside of each jamb profile.
.6
Weld in 2 temporary jamb spreaders per frame to maintain proper alignment during
shipment.
2.10
DOOR FABRICATION GENERAL
.1
Doors: swing type, flush, with provision for glass and/or louvre openings as indicated.
.2
Fabricate doors with longitudinal edges welded. Seams: grind welded joints to a flat
plane, fill with metallic paste filler and sand to a uniform smooth finish.
.3
Blank, reinforce, drill doors and tap for mortised, templated hardware and electronic
hardware.
.4
Factory prepare holes 12.7 mm diameter and larger except mounting and through-bolt
holes, on site, at time of hardware installation.
.5
Reinforce doors where required, for surface mounted hardware. Provide flush steel top
caps to exterior doors. Provide inverted, recessed, spot welded channels to top and
bottom of interior doors.
.6
Provide factory-applied touch-up primer at areas where zinc coating has been removed
during fabrication.
.7
Provide fire labelled doors for those openings requiring fire protection ratings, as
scheduled. Test such products in conformance with CAN/ULC-S104, ASTM E152,
NFPA 252 and list by nationally recognized agency having factory inspection service and
construct as detailed in Follow-Up Service Procedures/Factory Inspection Manuals issued
by listing agency to individual manufacturers.
.8
Manufacturer's nameplates on doors are not permitted.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
2.11
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
Section 08 11 00
Page 5
2016-01-13
DOORS: HONEYCOMB CORE CONSTRUCTION
.1
2.12
Form face sheets for interior doors from 2.0 mm sheet steel with honeycomb core
laminated under pressure to face sheets.
HOLLOW STEEL CONSTRUCTION
.1
Form face sheets for interior doors from 2.0 mm sheet steel.
.2
Reinforce doors with vertical stiffeners, securely welded to face sheets at 150 mm on
centre maximum.
.3
Fill voids between stiffeners of interior doors with honeycomb core.
2.13
FIXED PANEL FABRICATION
.1
Fabricate fixed door panels from the same materials, construction and finished in the
same manner as doors as specified in Articles 2.10, 2.11 and 2.12 above
.2
Reinforce panel edges with inverted, recessed, spot welded channels on all sides.Error!
Reference source not found.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
.1
3.2
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications,
including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and
datasheets.
INSTALLATION GENERAL
.1
Install labelled steel fire rated doors and frames to NFPA 80 except where specified
otherwise.
.2
Install doors and frames to CSDMA Installation Guide.
3.3
FRAME INSTALLATION
.1
Set frames plumb, square, level and at correct elevation.
.2
Secure anchorages and connections to adjacent construction.
.3
Brace frames rigidly in position while building-in. Install temporary horizontal wood
spreader at third points of door opening to maintain frame width. Provide vertical support
at centre of head for openings over 1200 mm wide. Remove temporary spreaders after
frames are built-in.
.4
Make allowances for deflection of structure to ensure structural loads are not transmitted
to frames.
.5
Caulk perimeter of frames between frame and adjacent material.
3.4
DOOR INSTALLATION
.1
Install doors and hardware in accordance with hardware templates and manufacturer's
instructions and Section 08 71 00.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
Provide even margins between doors and jambs and doors and finished floor as follows.
.1
.2
.3
Hinge side: 1.0 mm.
Latchside and head: 1.5 mm.
Finished floor and top of carpet: 13 mm.
.3
Adjust operable parts for correct function.
.4
Install louvres.
3.5
Section 08 11 00
Page 6
2016-01-13
FIXED PANEL INSTALLATION
.1
Preparation of existing door frames:
.1
.2
Close all existing door frame preparations and hardware preparations:
.1
Fabricate and weld min. 1.3 mm sheet steel patch panels.
.2
Fill existing frame surfaces with metallic paste filler. Sand and prime
paint.
Panel anchors for existing frames:
.1
.2
Provide continuous 25 x 25 sheet metal angles at head and jambs
Provide continuous concealed floor channel/anchor.
.3
Prime paint frames and anchors.
.4
Install panels in existing frames: Weld panels to continuous steel angles at head and
jambs and continuous floor channel.
.1
.2
.5
Provide even margins between doors and frame and doors and floor slab as follows.
.1
.2
3.6
Grind welds smooth; apply metallic paste filler.
Sand surfaces and prime paint.
Frame Head and Jambs: 1.5 mm.
Floor Slab: 3.2 mm.
FINISH REPAIRS
.1
Touch up with primer finishes damaged during installation.
.2
Fill exposed frame anchors and surfaces with imperfections with metallic paste filler and
sand to a uniform smooth finish.
3.7
GLAZING
.1
Install glazing for doors and frames in accordance with Section 08 80 50.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
SLIDING METAL DOORS
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
Section 08 71 11: Finish Hardware
.2
Section 08 87 53: Security Film
1.2
Section 08 13 73
Page 1
2016-01-13
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)
.1
.2
CSA International
.1
.3
CSA G40.20-13/G40.21-13, General Requirements for Rolled or Welded
Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel.
Green Seal Environmental Standards (GS)
.1
.2
1.3
CAN/CGSB-1.105-M91, Quick-Drying Primer.
GS-11-2008, 2nd Edition, Paints and Coatings.
GS-36-00, Commercial Adhesives.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product Data:
.1
.3
Shop Drawings:
.1
.2
.4
Submit shop drawings including plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware
mounting heights, and attachments to other Work.
Indicate each type of door, arrangement of hardware, required clearances.
Manufacturers Reports:
.1
1.4
Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for
sliding metal doors and hardware and include product characteristics,
performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.
Manufacturer's Field Reports: submit manufacturer's written reports within 3
days of review, verifying compliance of Work, as described in Part 3 - FIELD
QUALITY CONTROL.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 00.
.2
Operation and Maintenance Data: submit operation and maintenance data for sliding
metal doors for incorporation into manual.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
1.5
SLIDING METAL DOORS
Section 08 13 73
Page 2
2016-01-13
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Regulatory Agency Requirements:
.1
.2
1.6
Sliding metal doors: certified by Canadian Certification Organization accredited
by Standards Council of Canada.
Certifications: product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply
with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with
manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory
packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address.
.1
.2
.3
.3
Storage and Handling Requirements:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Apply temporary protective coating to finished surfaces. Remove coating after
installation.
Use coatings that are easy to remove and residue free.
Leave protective covering in place until final cleaning of building.
Store materials off ground, indoors, in dry location and in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.
Store and protect sliding metal doors from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.
Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets,
crates, padding and packaging materials as specified in Waste Reduction Workplan in
accordance with Section 01 74 20.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
DOOR DESIGN CRITERIA
.1
Design doors to:
.1
.2
.2
2.2
Operate manually.
Open horizontally, sliding to both sides (bi-parting).
Provide headrail track for installation on slope for gravity closing.
MATERIALS
.1
Horizontal sliding doors: Aluminum Association alloy AA 1100-H14 anodizing quality,
with styles and rails as shown on Drawing A0.02:
.1
.2
Framed Panel Sections: Manufacturer’s standard extruded fixed and sliding
aluminum non-thermally broken frame
.1
Configuration: X-O-O-X as shown on Drawings.
Tempered glass to CAN/CGSB-12.1, Type 1, Class A.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.3
.2
SLIDING METAL DOORS
Section 08 13 73
Page 3
2016-01-13
Security Film: As specified in Section 08 87 53.
Sliding Door Hardware: Manufacturer’s standard low profile sliding door framing and
side lite framing in sizes and types as required to meet requirements of specified systems
including; but not limited to, the following:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Head guides and track
Casters
Sound gaskets
Manufacturer’s standard surface mounted pull on leading panel on exterior and
interior sides.
Other hardware required for a complete and operational installation.
Hardware Finishes: Polished stainless steel.
.3
Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high strength aluminum with
non-staining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
.4
Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, non-staining,
non-bleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials
.5
Framing Gaskets: As recommended by manufacturer for joint type .
.6
Framing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer for joint type
2.3
ALUMINUM FINISHES
.1
Clear anodic finish: to designation AA-A31.
.2
Appearance and properties of anodized finishes designated by Aluminum Association as
Architectural Class 2.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Verification of Conditions: verify conditions of substrates previously installed under
other Sections or Contracts are acceptable for sliding metal doors installation in
accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
.1
.2
.3
3.2
Visually inspect substrate in presence of Departmental Representative.
Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately
upon discovery.
Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied
and after receipt of written approval to proceed from Departmental
Representative.
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
.1
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written data, including product technical
bulletins, product catalogue installation instructions, product carton installation
instructions, and data sheets.
.2
Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
SLIDING METAL DOORS
Section 08 13 73
Page 4
2016-01-13
.3
Install glazing in accordance with Certification Organizations requirements.
.4
Installation includes electric wiring from power supply located near door opening.
.5
Adjust door components to ensure smooth operation.
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Have manufacturer of products supplied under this Section review Work involved in
handling, installation/application, protection and cleaning of its products, and submit
written reports in acceptable format to verify compliance of Work with Contract.
.2
Manufacturer's Field Services:
.1
.2
.3
Schedule site visits:
.1
.2
.3
3.4
Obtain written reports from manufacturer verifying compliance of Work, in
handling, installing, applying, protecting and cleaning of product within 3 days of
review and submit.
Submit manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations
and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
After delivery and storage of products, and when preparatory Work is complete,
but before installation begins.
Twice during progress of Work at 25% and 60% complete.
Upon completion of Work, after cleaning is carried out.
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.1
.2
.3
Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
Clean aluminum, metal and other components with damp rag and approved nonabrasive cleaner in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Remove traces of primer, caulking; clean doors and frames.
.2
Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment
in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.3
Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with
Section 01 74 20.
.1
3.5
Remove recycling containers and bins from site and dispose of materials at
appropriate facility.
PROTECTION
.1
Protect installed products and components from damage during construction.
.2
Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by sliding metal doors installation.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
FINISH HARDWARE
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
Section 08 11 10: Metal Door Frames.
.2
Section 08 13 73: Sliding Metal Doors
1.2
Section 08 71 11
Page 1
2016-01-13
PRODUCT DATA SHEETS
.1
Submit one copy of product data sheets in accordance with Sections 01 33 00 and
01 78 00.
.2
Product data sheets shall consist of catalogue cuts, manufacturer's name and number,
finish and reference identification to specified standard.
1.3
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
.1
1.4
Submit schematic diagrams of electrical components for inclusion in maintenance manual
specified in Sections 01 33 00 and 01 78 00.
REFERENCES
.1
Standard hardware location dimensions in accordance with Canadian Metric Guide for
Steel Doors and Frames (Modular Construction) prepared by CSDMA - Canadian Steel
Door Manufacturers' Association and CSA B651-12, Accessible Design for the Built
Environment.
.2
Use abbreviations and symbols recommended in "Abbreviations and Symbols as used in
Architectural Door and Hardware Schedules and Specifications", 1983, published by the
Door and Hardware Institute.
.3
Use hardware schedule format recommended in "Sequence and Format for the Hardware
Schedule", June, 1984, published by the Door and Hardware Institute.
1.5
DEFINITIONS
.1
Master Key (MK):
.1
.2
.2
A key which operates all the master keyed locks or cylinders in a group, each
lock or cylinder usually operated by its own change key.
To combine a group of locks or cylinders such that each is operated by its own
key as well as by a master key for the entire group.
Master Key System:
.1
.2
Any keying arrangement which has two or more levels of keying.
A keying arrangement which has exactly two levels of keying.
.3
Grand Master Key (GMK): The key which operates two or more separate groups of
locks, each operated by a different master key.
.4
Grand Master Key System: A master key system which has exactly three levels of
keying.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
FINISH HARDWARE
Section 08 71 11
Page 2
2016-01-13
.5
Great Grand Master Key (GGMK): The key which operates two or more separate groups
of locks, which are each operated by a different grand master key.
.6
Great Grand Master Key System: A master key system which has exactly four levels of
keying.
.7
Top Master Key (TMK): The highest level master key in a master key system.
1.6
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
.1
Use ULC listed and labelled hardware for doors in fire rated partitions and fire exits.
.2
Use UL 437 listed cylinders in locking devices where indicated on door and frame
schedule, to high security rating indicated.
1.7
HARDWARE LIST
.1
Submit hardware schedule in accordance with Sections 01 33 00 and 01 78 00.
.2
Submit literature cuts, indicating hardware proposed, including make, model, base
material, function, ANSI Function where ANSI used in this specification, Grade, Type,
Series, BHMA finish, trim, ULC listing, UL listing, manufacturer and other pertinent
information. Indicate which model or accessory is being provided where more than one
model or accessory appears on a page.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
KEYING, ACCESSORIES AND FINISH
.1
Provide accessories with hardware.
.2
626 finish (satin chrome plated on brass or bronze) unless noted otherwise.
.3
Finish fasteners to match the exposed surface on which they appear.
.4
Provide temporary construction keying.
.5
Final keying: to ANSI/BHMA-A156.5-2014, Grade 1.
.6
Use lock and latch sets with solid metal, U shape, lever handles meeting requirements of
CSA B651-12, Accessible Design for the Built Environment, clause 5.2.7 Door Hardware
and Figure 20, unless specified otherwise.
.7
Provide lever handles of same style for bored and mortise locksets.
.8
Door prep: to ANSI/BHMA-A156.115-2014 for steel doors and frames and
ANSI/BHMA-A156.115-W-2006 for wood doors and frames.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
2.2
FINISH HARDWARE
Section 08 71 11
Page 3
2016-01-13
MATERIALS
.1
Hinge: to ANSI/BHMA-A156.1-2013, Grade indicated, 626 satin chrome, use antifriction (ball) bearing hinges with closers, one hinge for each 750 mm of door height,
101 mm hinges for 38 mm doors, 115 mm hinges on 45 mm doors, 125 mm hinges on
50 mm doors, button tips, non- rising removable pins unless indicated NRP on hardware
schedule.
.1
Interior:
.1
Grade 1: A8111 - heavy weight, steel, 4 ball bearing.
.2
Door closer: to ANSI/BHMA-A156.4-2013, Grade 1, C02021 parallel arm mounting,
C02041 top jamb mounting,]and adaptor plates, surface closer, modern type with cover,
sprayed enamel finish, metallic 689 aluminum, size to suit door width and mass, heavyduty shock-absorber arm. Disabled access doors: to operate at a minimum pressure not
exceeding 38 N for exterior doors, 22 N for interior doors and close in not less than
5 seconds from an open position of 90°.
.3
Overhead stop: to ANSI/BHMA- A156.8-2010, concealed slide type, 110° opening, stop
and shock absorber effective at all times. Function C01511 Type 1 concealed.
.4
Lock and latch set (bored): to ANSI/BHMA- A156.2-2011, Series 4000, Grade 1, bolted
through door, ANSI door prep ANSI/BHMA-A156.115- 2006 for steel doors and frames
and ANSI/BHMA-A156.115-W-2006 for wood doors and frames, deadlatching bolt,
function indicated, stainless steel.
.5
Kick plate: to ANSI/BHMA-A156.6-2010, type J102 stainless steel, 1.55 x 250 mm x
door width, 3 bevelled edges.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
HARDWARE SCHEDULE
.1
Refer to hardware schedule below:
REMAINDER OF PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
1
EA.
HARDWARE
FINISH HARDWARE
Section 08 71 11
Page 4
2016-01-13
Heading 01
DR261B
ALL HARDWARE BY SLIDING DOOR MANUFACTURER
Heading 02
DW219
914 x 2134 x 45 x HMD x HMF x 45MIN
1
EA.
STOREROOM LOCK
3
EA.
HINGE
1
EA.
OH STOP
1
EA.
SURFACE CLOSER
1
EA.
KICK PLATE
R8148C26D-41
5BB1 127 x 114 NRP
100S
1460-3077HD EDA
8400 200mm x 40mm LDW B4E
630
652
630
689
630
Heading 03
DW219A
914 x 2134 x 45 x HMD x HMF x 45MIN
3
EA.
HINGE
1
EA.
OFFICE LOCK
1
EA.
OH STOP
1
EA.
SURFACE CLOSER
1
EA.
KICK PLATE
5BB1 127 x 114 NRP
ML2054 -LWA
100S
1460-3077HD EDA
8400 200mm X 40mm LDW B4E
652
630
630
689
630
Heading 04
DW219B
914 x 2134 x 45 x HMD x HMF x 45MIN
3
EA.
HINGE
1
EA.
OFFICE LOCK
1
EA.
OH STOP
1
EA.
SURFACE CLOSER
1
EA.
KICK PLATE
5BB1 127 x 114 NRP
R8148C26D-41
100S
1460-3077HD EDA
8400 200mm X 40mm LDW B4E
652
630
630
689
630
Heading 05
DW219C
914 x 2134 x 45 x HMD x HMF x 45MIN
3
EA.
HINGE
1
EA.
OFFICE LOCK
1
EA.
OH STOP
1
EA.
SURFACE CLOSER
1
EA.
KICK PLATE
5BB1 127 x 114 NRP
ML2054 -LWA
100S
1460-3077HD EDA
8400 200mm X 40mm LDW B4E
END OF SECTION
652
630
630
689
630
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
GLAZING
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
.1
Section 08 11 00 - Metal Doors And Frames
.2
Section 08 11 16 - Aluminum Doors And Frames
1.2
Section 08 80 50
Page 1
2016-01-13
REFERENCES
.1
ASTM International
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.2
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)
.1
.2
.3
.3
CCD-045-95(R2005), Sealants and Caulking Compounds.
Glass Association of North American (GANA)
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
1.3
CAN/CGSB-12.1-M90, Tempered or Laminated Safety Glass.
CAN/CGSB-12.2-M91, Flat, Clear Sheet Glass.
CAN/CGSB-12.3-M91, Flat, Clear Float Glass.
Environmental Choice Program (ECP)
.1
.4
ASTM C542-05(2011), Standard Specification for Lock-Strip Gaskets.
ASTM D790-10, Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced
and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials.
ASTM D1003-13, Standard Test Method for Haze and Luminous Transmittance
of Plastics.
ASTM D1929-13a, Standard Test Method for Determining Ignition Temperature
of Plastics.
ASTM D2240-05(2010), Standard Test Method for Rubber Property - Durometer
Hardness.
ASTM E84-14, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
GANA Glazing Manual 50th Anniversary Edition-2008.
GANA Laminated Glazing Reference Manual - 2009.
GANA Sealant Manual-2008.
GANA Laminated Glazing Reference Manual (2009).
GANA Guide to Architectural Glass (2010).
GANA/PGC International Protective Glazing Manual (2010).
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
.1
1.4
Arrange for site visit with Departmental Representative prior to start of Work to examine
existing site conditions adjacent to demolition Work.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for
glass, sealants, and glazing accessories and include product characteristics,
performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.
Shop Drawings:
.1
.4
Section 08 80 50
Page 2
2016-01-13
Product Data:
.1
.3
GLAZING
Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or
licensed in Province of Ontario, Canada.
Samples:
.1
.2
Submit for review and acceptance of each unit.
Submit 300 mm x 300 mm size samples of glass types.
.5
Certificates: submit product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials
comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements.
.6
Test Reports: certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance
characteristics and physical properties.
1.5
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 00.
.2
Operation and Maintenance Data: submit operation and maintenance data for glazing for
incorporation into manual.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
1.7
Certificates: product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with
specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with
manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory
packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address.
.3
Storage and Handling Requirements:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.4
Store materials off ground, indoors, in dry location and in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.
Store and protect glazing and frames from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.
Protect prefinished aluminum surfaces with wrapping.
Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets,
crates, padding and packaging materials as specified in Waste Reduction Workplan in
accordance with Section 01 74 20.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
1.8
GLAZING
Section 08 80 50
Page 3
2016-01-13
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
.1
Ambient Requirements:
.1
.2
Install glazing when ambient temperature is 10 degrees C minimum. Maintain
ventilated environment for 24 hours after application.
Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after
installation of glazing compounds.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Design Criteria:
.1
.2
.2
Size glass to withstand wind loads, dead loads and positive and negative live loads
to ASTM E330.
Limit glass deflection to 1/200 with full recovery of glazing materials.
Flat Glass:
.1
.2
Float glass: to CAN/CGSB-12.3, minimum 6 mm thick.
Safety glass: to CAN/CGSB-12.1, transparent, minimum 6 mm thick.
.1
Type 2-tempered.
.2
Class B-float.
.3
Category II – fully tempered.
.3
Plastic Film: in accordance with Section 08 87 53.
.4
Sealant: in accordance with Section 07 92 00.
2.2
ACCESSORIES
.1
Setting blocks: silicone, 90 Shore A durometer hardness to ASTM D2240, to suit glazing
method, glass light weight and area.
.2
Spacer shims: silicone, 50-60 Shore A durometer hardness to ASTM D2240, 75 mm long x
one half height of glazing stop x thickness to suit application. Self adhesive on one face.
.3
Glazing tape:
.1
100% polybutalene vehicle. Extruded in ribbon form with paper separator. Tape
shall have an integral shim strip where required; black colour.
.4
Glazing splines: resilient silicone, extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot,
black colour.
.5
Lock-strip gaskets: to ASTM C542.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
GLAZING
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Verification of Conditions: verify conditions of substrates previously installed under other
Sections or Contracts are acceptable for glazing installation in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions.
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
3.2
Section 08 80 50
Page 4
2016-01-13
Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.
Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions,
and ready to receive glazing.
Visually inspect substrate in presence of Departmental Representative.
Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately
upon discovery.
Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied
and after receipt of written approval to proceed from Departmental Representative.
PREPARATION
.1
Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.
.2
Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer.
.3
Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.
3.3
INSTALLATION: INTERIOR WET/DRY METHOD (TAPE AND SEALANT)
.1
Perform work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual for glazing installation methods
and with GANA Sealant Manual.
.2
Cut glazing tape to length and install against permanent stops, projecting 1.6 mm above
sight line.
.3
Place setting blocks at 1/4 points, with edge block maximum 150 mm from corners.
.4
Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape to ensure full contact at perimeter of
light or unit.
.5
Install removable stops, with spacer shims inserted between glazing and applied stops at
600 mm intervals, 6 mm below sight line.
.6
Fill gaps between light and applied stop with sealant to depth equal to bite on glazing, to
uniform and level line.
.7
Trim protruding tape edge.
3.4
INSTALLATION: PLASTIC FILM
.1
Install plastic film with adhesive, applied in accordance with film manufacturer's
instructions.
.2
Place without air bubbles, creases or visible distortion.
.3
Fit tight to glass perimeter with razor cut edge.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
3.5
GLAZING
Section 08 80 50
Page 5
2016-01-13
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.1
.2
.2
Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with
Section 01 74 20.
.1
3.6
Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
.1
Remove traces of primer, caulking.
.2
Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.
.3
Remove labels.
.4
Clean glass using approved non-abrasive cleaner in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and
equipment in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
Remove recycling containers and bins from site and dispose of materials at
appropriate facility.
PROTECTION
.1
Protect installed products and components from damage during construction.
.2
After installation, mark each light with an "X" by using removable plastic tape or paste.
.1
.3
Do not mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units.
Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by glazing installation.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
SECURITY FILMS
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
.1
.2
.2
.3
.4
.5
Canada Labour Code, WHMIS data sheets.
Underwriters laboratories of Canada (ULC)
.1
1.2
ASTM D882-12, Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic
Sheeting.
ASTM D1004-13, Standard Test Method for Tear Resistance (Graves Tear) of
Plastic Film and Sheeting.
ASTM D1044-13, Standard Test Method for Resistance of Transparent Plastics to
Surface Abrasion.
ASTM D2582-09, Standard Test Method for Puncture-Propagation Tear
Resistance of Plastic Film and Thin Sheeting.
ASTM E84-14, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
Government of Canada
.1
.4
ANSI Z97.1-2009, Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings - Safety
Performance Specifications and Methods of Test.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
.1
.3
Section 08 87 53
Page 1
2016-01-13
ULC-S332-93(R1998), Standard for Burglary Resisting Material.
DEFINITIONS
.1
For the purposes of this specification applying definitions follow:
.1
.2
.2
Security and safety film types:
.1
1.3
Safety: Reduction of risk of injury, loss or death due to accidental, natural or
unintentional causes.
Security: Reduction of risk of injury, loss or death due to intentional actions of
others.
Type 2: Areas of concern related to seismographic upgrade, low end smash and
grab break and entry and over pressure due to violent weather or low bomb blast.
SAMPLES
.1
Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Submit one 500 x 500 mm sample of film installed on 7 mm thick clear plate glass.
1.4
SHOP DRAWINGS
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
1.5
SECURITY FILMS
Section 08 87 53
Page 2
2016-01-13
TEST REPORTS
.1
1.6
Submit test reports from approved independent testing laboratories, certifying compliance
with specifications, for film applied to glass.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with section 01 61 00.
.2
Provide and maintain dry, off-ground weatherproof storage.
.3
Store rolls of security film flat on cross supports. Do not stand rolls of film on end.
.4
Remove only in quantities required for same day use.
.5
Store materials in accordance with manufacturers written instructions.
1.7
WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20, and with Waste
Reduction Workplan.
.2
Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers.
.3
Ensure emptied containers are sealed and stored safely for disposal away from children.
1.8
ENVIRONMENTAL AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
.1
1.9
Comply with requirements of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System
(WHMIS) regarding use, handling, storage, and disposal of hazardous materials; and
regarding labelling and provision of material safety data sheets acceptable to Canada
Labour Code.
WARRANTY
.1
Work of this Section 12 months warranty period prescribed in subsection GC3.13 of
General Conditions is extended to 10 years.
.2
Ensure warranty includes items as follows:
.1
.2
.3
.4
1.10
Maintain adhesion properties without blistering, bubbling or delaminating from
glass.
Maintain appearance without discolouration.
Remove, replace and reapply defective materials.
In event of product failure under warranty terms, remove and re-apply film without
glass replacement at no cost to Departmental Representative.
MAINTENANCE DATA
.1
Provide operation and maintenance data for window film for incorporation into manual
specified in Section 01 78 00.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
SECURITY FILMS
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Security Film - General: Multi-ply optically clear polyester film with factory applied
adhesive, abrasion resistant coating and release liner.
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.2
Number of laminations: 1.
Total thickness of installed film: 0.2 mm.
Elongation: to ASTM D882.
Break strength: to ASTM D882.
Young's Modulus: to ASTM D882.
Tear resistance: to ASTM D1004.
Impact resistance: to ULC-S332.
Abrasion resistance: ASTM D1044.
Flammability: surface burn characteristics to ASTM E84.
Adhesive: high mass pressure sensitive, acrylic base, peel strength: 2.5 - 3.5 kg/25
mm width to ANSI Z97.1.
Tensile strength: minimum 206.70 MPa to ASTM D882.
Solar protection
.1
.2
2.2
Section 08 87 53
Page 3
2016-01-13
Shading coefficient: 0.95 maximum.
Visible light:
.1
Reflected: 9% minimum.
.2
Transmitted: 87% minimum.
.3
Type 2 Security Film:
.1
Puncture resistance: 10 kg to ASTM D2582.
FABRICATION
.1
Shop installation of security film to glass panels:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
Ensure dust, grease, and chemical residue are removed from surface of glass
before installation of film.
Examine glass under natural daylight and identify cracks, blisters, bubbles,
discolouration, edge defects or other anomalies that may cause film to delaminate,
or cause vision transparency or distortion problems. View glass from 2.0 m
minimum. Report findings to Departmental Representative.
Proceed with Work only after receipt of written approval from Departmental
Representative.
Install security film to glass panels ensuring no blisters, bubbles, scratches, edge
defects or distortions.
.1
Cut film edges straight and square to within 3 mm of edge of panel.
Deliver glass panels complete with security film installed to site in accordance
with section 01 61 00.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
SECURITY FILMS
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
Section 08 87 53
Page 4
2016-01-13
.1
Clean glass before beginning installation using neutral cleaning solution.
.2
Ensure no deleterious material adheres to glass by balding surface of glass using industrial
razors.
.3
Ensure dust, grease, and chemical residue are removed from surface of glass before
installation of film.
.4
Examine glass under natural daylight and identify cracks, blisters, bubbles, discoloration,
edge defects or other anomalies that may cause, film to delaminate, or vision transparency
or distortion problems. Report findings to Departmental Representative.
.5
Proceed with Work only after receipt of written approval from Departmental
Representative.
.6
Before beginning Work, place absorbent material at sash frame to absorb moisture
accumulation generated by film application.
3.2
INSTALLATION
.1
Cut film edges straight and square.
.2
Ensure film is installed behind window stops.
.3
Cut edges in accordance with manufacturers written instructions.
.4
Apply and attach film to glass in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
.5
Splicing:
.1
.2
.3
Splice film only when glass is greater in width than film.
Splice film only after receipt of written approval from Departmental
Representative.
Use butt factory edges only.
.6
Use clean, clear water to remove protective water soluble coating on adhesive side of film.
.7
Use only water and film slip solution on glass to facilitate positioning of film.
.8
Ensure removal of excess water from between film and glass.
.9
Remove left over material form work area and return work area to original condition.
3.3
INSPECTION
.1
Return to work place after 30 days but no longer than 40 days for final cleaning and
inspection of installed film.
.2
Ensure finished surface of film is vision free of blisters, bubbles, tears, scratches, edge
defects, delaminating or vision distortion when viewed under natural daylight from 2.0 m
minimum.
.3
Remove and replace film that continues to show blisters, bubbles, tears, scratches, edge
defects or vision distortion in film when viewed under natural daylight from 2.0 m
minimum after 30 day period.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
3.4
SECURITY FILMS
Section 08 87 53
Page 5
2016-01-13
FINAL CLEANING
.1
3.5
Wash interior and exterior of each glass panel and film using cleaning solution
recommended by film manufacturer.
MAINTENANCE
.1
Follow manufacturers written instructions for care and maintenance of security film.
.2
Use only cleaning solution recommended by manufacturer for regularly scheduled
cleaning of security film.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
ASTM International
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
.2
AWCI Levels of Gypsum Board Finish 101a-97.
Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
.1
1.2
ASTM A653/A653M-11, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
ASTM C475/C475M-15, Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint
Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board.
ASTM C514-04(2014), Standard Specification for Nails for the Application of
Gypsum Board.
ASTM C645-11a, Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing
Members
ASTM C840-13, Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of
Gypsum Board.
ASTM C1002-14, Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws
for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood
Studs or Steel Studs.
ASTM C1047-14a, Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum
Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base.
ASTM C1280-13a, Standard Specification for Application of Gypsum Sheathing.
ASTM C1396/C1396M-14a, Standard Specification for Gypsum Board.
ASTM E90-09 Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne
Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements.
ASTM E2638-10 Standard Test Method for Objective Measurement of the
Speech Privacy Provided by a Closed Room.
ASTM F1267-15 Standard Specification for Metal, Expanded, Steel.
Association of the Wall and Ceilings Industries International (AWCI)
.1
.3
Section 09 21 16
Page 1
2016-01-13
CSA S136-12, North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed
Steel Structural Members and Commentary
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product Data:
.1
Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for
gypsum board assemblies and include product characteristics, performance
criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
1.3
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Section 09 21 16
Page 2
2016-01-13
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
.1
Minimum sound transmission rating of installed panel partition to be STC 45, tested to
ASTM E90.
.2
Minimum speech privacy category SPC Standard Speech Privacy 60-65 tested to ASTM
E2638.
1.4
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with
manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory
packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address.
.3
Storage and Handling Requirements:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.4
1.5
Store gypsum board assemblies materials level off ground, indoors, in dry
location and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry,
well-ventilated area.
Store and protect gypsum board assemblies from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.
Protect from weather, elements and damage from construction operations.
Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends or surfaces.
Protect prefinished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive
papers or sprayed coatings which bond when exposed to sunlight or weather.
Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets,
crates, padding and packaging materials as specified in Waste Reduction Workplan in
accordance with Section 01 74 20.
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
.1
Maintain temperature 10 degrees C minimum, 21 degrees C maximum for 48 hours prior
to and during application of gypsum boards and joint treatment, and for 48 hours
minimum after completion of joint treatment.
.2
Apply board and joint treatment to dry, frost free surfaces.
.3
Ventilation: ventilate building spaces as required to remove excess moisture that would
prevent drying of joint treatment material immediately after its application.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
Section 09 21 16
Page 3
2016-01-13
.1
Standard board: to ASTM C1396/C1396M, minimum 40% recycled content, regular,
12.7 and 15.9 mm thick, 1200 mm wide x maximum practical length, ends square cut,
edges bevelled.
.2
Non-load bearing channel stud framing: to ASTM C645, stud size as indicated on
Drawings, roll formed from 0.53 mm thickness hot dipped galvanized steel sheet, for
screw attachment of gypsum board. Knock-out service holes at 460 mm centres. Steel:
minimum 25% recycled content.
.1
.3
Use 0.91 mm thickness stud framing to support fire rated door frames.
Structural channel stud framing: Meeting requirements of CSA S136; identified for type,
grade and mechanical properties; minimum 92 mm deep x 38 mm wide x metal core
nominal thickness 1.15 mm spaced at 406 mm on centre, hot dipped galvanized steel; roll
formed with knurled flanges, services and bracing cut outs; Steel: minimum 25%
recycled content
.1
.2
.3
.4
Use 1.1 mm thickness stud framing to support security mesh.
Track: Meeting requirements of CSA S136 having minimum metal core nominal
thickness to match studs, hot dipped galvanized steel and as follows:
.1
Top track flanges of depth to suit vertical deflection; do not fix top of
studs to track; width to suit studs; single top track system.
Floor track to suit stud width, with 33 mm flanges.
Channel Stiffener: 19 mm cold rolled channel of 1.15 mm, electro-galvanized
steel.
.4
Floor and ceiling tracks: to ASTM C645, in widths to suit stud sizes, 32 mm flange
height. Steel: minimum 25% recycled content.
.5
Slotted Deflection Track: Premanufactured slotted top runner with 63 mm down standing
legs and having 6 mm wide x 38 mm high slots spaced at 25 mm on centre along length
of runner; tested and certified for use in fire rated wall construction and have a ULC or
CULUS labelled assembly for fire rated assemblies.
.6
Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width
indicated; 1.2 mm nominal base metal thickness x 400 mm wide
.7
Metal channel stiffener: 19 x 38 mm size, 1.4 mm thick cold rolled steel, coated with rust
inhibitive coating, minimum 25% recycled content.
.8
Metal furring runners, hangers, tie wires, inserts, anchors: to ASTM C645.
.9
Drywall furring channels: 0.5 mm core thickness galvanized steel channels for screw
attachment of gypsum board.
.10
Resilient clips: 0.5 mm base steel thickness galvanized steel for resilient attachment of
gypsum board.
.11
Security Mesh:
.1
Expanded carbon steel security screen mesh to ASTM F1267, Type II, Class 1,
Grade A.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.12
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Section 09 21 16
Page 4
2016-01-13
Style: 25 mm - #10 flattened, 63 - 70% open area.
Mesh size: Nominal 32 mm x 60 mm opening size.
Opening size: Nominal 25 mm x 50 mm.
Thickness: 3.2 mm overall.
Fastening assembly: One-way tamper resistant self drilling cadmium plated
fastener and formed diamond-shaped washer assemblies.
Sheet Metal Strapping:
.1
.2
Steel sheet for covering security mesh in length and width required; 1.8 mm
nominal base metal thickness x 1200 mm wide.
Fastening assembly: One-way tamper resistant self drilling cadmium plated
fastener and washer.
.13
Steel drill screws: to ASTM C1002.
.14
Laminating compound: as recommended by manufacturer, asbestos-free.
.15
Casing beads, corner beads, control joints and edge trim: to ASTM C1047, aluminum
coated, 0.5 mm base thickness, perforated flanges, one piece length per location.
.16
Sealants: in accordance with Section 07 92 00.
.1
Acoustic sealant: in accordance with Section 07 92 00.
.17
Insulating strip: rubberized, moisture resistant, 3 mm thick closed cell neoprene strip,
12 mm wide, with self sticking permanent adhesive on one face, lengths as required.
.18
Joint compound: to ASTM C475/C475M, asbestos-free.
.19
Joint tape: to ASTM C475/C475M.
.1
.20
Paper tape for standard gypsum board.
Acoustic Sound Batts for Non-Rated Assemblies: Meeting the requirements of
ASTM C423, ASTM E90 and ASTM E413, and ULC S702 mineral fibre acoustic sound
batts, Type 1 for all properties other than thermal, width to friction fit steel studs;
un-faced, thickness to fill a minimum of 90% of the cavity thickness, nominal
density 12.2 kg/m3 minimum; STC 45 rating.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Verification of Conditions: verify conditions of substrates previously installed under
other Sections or Contracts are acceptable for gypsum board assemblies installation in
accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
.1
.2
.3
Visually inspect substrate in presence of Departmental Representative.
Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately
upon discovery.
Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied
and after receipt of written approval to proceed from Departmental
Representative.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
3.2
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Section 09 21 16
Page 5
2016-01-13
STEEL STUD FRAMING INSTALLATION
.1
Install steel framing members to receive screw-attached gypsum board in accordance
with ASTM C754 except where specified otherwise.
.2
Align partition tracks at floor and ceiling and secure at 600 mm on centre maximum.
.3
Install damp proof course under stud shoe tracks of partitions on slabs on grade.
.4
Place studs vertically at centres indicated on Drawings and not more than 50 mm from
abutting walls, and at each side of openings and corners. Position studs in tracks at floor
and ceiling. Cross brace steel studs as required to provide rigid installation to
manufacturer's instructions.
.5
Erect metal studding to tolerance of 1:1000.
.6
Attach studs to bottom and ceiling track using screws.
.7
Co-ordinate simultaneous erection of studs with installation of service lines. When
erecting studs ensure web openings are aligned.
.8
Co-ordinate erection of studs with installation of door/window frames and special
supports or anchorage for work specified in other Sections.
.9
Provide two studs extending from floor to ceiling at each side of openings wider than
stud centres specified. Secure studs together, 50 mm apart using column clips or other
approved means of fastening placed alongside frame anchor clips.
.10
Erect track at head of door openings to accommodate intermediate studs. Secure track to
studs at each end, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install intermediate
studs above openings in same manner and spacing as wall studs.
.11
Frame openings and around built-in equipment, access panels, on four sides. Extend
framing into reveals. Check clearances with equipment suppliers.
.12
Install steel studs or furring channel between studs for attaching electrical and other
boxes.
.13
Extend partitions to ceiling height except where noted otherwise on drawings.
.14
Maintain clearance under beams and structural slabs to avoid transmission of structural
loads to studs. Use Slotted Deflection Track.
.15
Install continuous insulating strips to isolate studs from uninsulated surfaces.
.16
Install structural channel steel framing members to receive security mesh, sheet steel
strapping and gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C754 except where specified
otherwise.
3.3
FURRING INSTALLATION
.1
Erect hangers and runner channels for suspended gypsum board ceilings to ASTM C840
except where specified otherwise.
.2
Support light fixtures by providing additional ceiling suspension hangers within 150 mm
of each corner and at maximum 600 mm around perimeter of fixture.
.3
Install work level to tolerance of 1:1200.
.4
Frame perimeter of openings for access panels, light fixtures, diffusers and grilles.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Section 09 21 16
Page 6
2016-01-13
.5
Furr for gypsum board faced vertical bulkheads within and at termination of ceilings.
.6
Install wall furring for gypsum board wall finishes to ASTM C840, except where
specified otherwise.
.7
Furr beams, columns, pipes and exposed services where indicated.
3.4
INSTALLATION OF SECURITY MESH
.1
Install security mesh continuously from floor to ceiling across the face of metal studs
with 100 mm side and end laps.
.1
.2
Install sheet metal strapping continuously from floor to ceiling across the face of security
mesh with 100 mm side and end laps.
.1
.2
3.5
Fasten security mesh to face of metal studs using screws and shaped washers at
600 mm O/C on vertical studs; 300 mm O/C on horizontal plates and tracks and
around openings.
Fasten sheet metal to metal studs using screws and washers at 600 mm O/C on
vertical studs; 600 mm O/C on horizontal plates and tracks and around openings.
Fasten sheet metal end and side laps using screws at 600 mm O/C.
ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION
.1
Erect accessories straight, plumb or level, rigid and at proper plane. Use full length pieces
where practical. Make joints tight, accurately aligned and rigidly secured. Mitre and fit
corners accurately, free from rough edges. Secure at 150 mm on centre.
.2
Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are
readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.
.3
Install casing beads around perimeter of suspended ceilings.
.4
Install casing beads where gypsum board butts against surfaces having no trim concealing
junction and where indicated. Seal joints with sealant.
.5
Install insulating strips continuously at edges of gypsum board and casing beads abutting
metal window and exterior door frames, to provide thermal break.
.6
Construct control joints of preformed units set in gypsum board facing and supported
independently on both sides of joint.
.7
Provide continuous polyethylene dust barrier behind and across control joints.
.8
Locate control joints where indicated and at changes in substrate construction.
.9
Install control joints straight and true.
.10
Construct expansion joints as detailed, at building expansion and construction joints.
Provide continuous dust barrier.
.11
Install expansion joint straight and true.
.12
Splice corners and intersections together and secure to each member with 3 screws.
.13
Install access doors to electrical and mechanical fixtures specified in respective sections.
.1
Rigidly secure frames to furring or framing systems.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.14
Section 09 21 16
Page 7
2016-01-13
Acoustic Sound Batts:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
3.6
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Install acoustic sound batts within metal stud space as indicated for sound or fire
rating.
Acoustic sound batts to extend full height of partitions.
Fill behind electrical outlet boxes, fire hose cabinets and other openings with at
least 150 mm lap around perimeter of opening; do not compress acoustic sound
batts as this could cause the gypsum board finish to bulge or push outward.
Coordinate with Electrical and Mechanical Subcontractors and verify that no
back-to-back openings are formed, whether or not so indicated on drawings.
Installation to in accordance with manufacturer's current written
recommendations.
GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION AND FINISHING
.1
Do installation and finishing of gypsum board to ASTM C840 except where specified
otherwise.
.2
Apply gypsum board after bucks, anchors, blocking, electrical and mechanical work have
been reviewed.
.3
Apply single or double layer gypsum board to metal furring or framing using screw
fasteners for first layer, screw fasteners for second layer. Maximum spacing of screws
300 mm on centre.
.1
.2
Single-Layer Application:
.1
Apply gypsum board on ceilings prior to application of walls to ASTM
C840.
.2
Apply gypsum board vertically unless indicated otherwise. If horizontal
is required, provide sheet lengths that will minimize end joints.
Double-Layer Application:
.1
Install gypsum board for base layer and exposed gypsum board for face
layer.
.2
Apply base layer to ceilings prior to base layer application on walls;
apply face layers in same sequence. Offset joints between layers at least
250 mm.
.3
Apply base layers at right angles to supports unless otherwise indicated.
.4
Apply base layer on walls and face layers vertically with joints of base
layer over supports and face layer joints offset at least 250 mm with base
layer joints.
.4
Install ceiling boards in direction that will minimize number of end-butt joints. Stagger
end joints at least 250 mm.
.5
Install gypsum board on walls vertically to avoid end-butt joints. At stairwells and similar
high walls, install boards horizontally with end joints staggered over studs, except where
local codes or fire-rated assemblies require vertical application.
.6
Install gypsum board with face side out.
.7
Do not install damaged or damp boards.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Section 09 21 16
Page 8
2016-01-13
.8
Locate edge or end joints over supports. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on
opposite sides of wall.
.9
Gypsum Board Finish: finish gypsum board walls and ceilings to following levels in
accordance with AWCI Levels of Gypsum Board Finish:
.1
Levels of finish:
.1
Level 0: no tapping, finishing or accessories required.
.2
Level 1: embed tape for joints and interior angles in joint compound.
Surfaces to be free of excess joint compound; tool marks and ridges are
acceptable.
.3
Level 2: embed tape for joints and interior angles in joint compound and
apply one separate coat of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener
heads and accessories; surfaces free of excess joint compound; tool
marks and ridges are acceptable.
.4
Level 3: embed tape for joints and interior angles in joint compound and
apply two separate coats of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener
heads and accessories; surfaces smooth and free of tool marks and ridges.
.5
Level 4: embed tape for joints and interior angles in joint compound and
apply three separate coats of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener
heads and accessories; surfaces smooth and free of tool marks and ridges.
.6
Level 5: embed tape for joints and interior angles in joint compound and
apply three separate coats of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener
heads and accessories; apply a thin skim coat of joint compound to entire
surface; surfaces smooth and free of tool marks and ridges.
.10
Finish face panel joints and internal angles with joint system consisting of joint
compound, joint tape and taping compound installed according to manufacturer's
directions and feathered out onto panel faces.
.11
Finish corner beads, control joints and trim as required with two coats of joint compound
and one coat of taping compound, feathered out onto panel faces.
.12
Fill screw head depressions with joint and taping compounds to bring flush with adjacent
surface of gypsum board so as to be invisible after surface finish is completed.
.13
Sand lightly to remove burred edges and other imperfections. Avoid sanding adjacent
surface of board.
.14
Completed installation to be smooth, level or plumb, free from waves and other defects
and ready for surface finish.
.15
Mix joint compound slightly thinner than for joint taping.
.16
Apply thin coat to entire surface using trowel or drywall broad knife to fill surface texture
differences, variations or tool marks.
.17
Allow skim coat to dry completely.
.18
Remove ridges by light sanding or wiping with damp cloth.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
3.7
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Section 09 21 16
Page 9
2016-01-13
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.1
.2
.2
Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with
Section 01 74 20.
.1
3.8
Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and
equipment in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
Remove recycling containers and bins from site and dispose of materials at
appropriate facility.
PROTECTION
.1
Protect installed products and components from damage during construction.
.2
Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by gypsum board assemblies installation.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
1.2
Section 09 51 13
Page 1
2016-01-13
Section 09 53 00 – Acoustical Suspension
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
.1
.2
.2
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)
.1
.2
.3
CSA B111-74(R1998), Wire Nails, Spikes and Staples.
Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC)
.1
1.3
CAN/CGSB-51.34-M86, Vapour Barrier, Polyethylene Sheet, for Use in Building
Construction.
CAN/CGSB-92.1-M89, Sound Absorptive Prefabricated Acoustical Units.
Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
.1
.4
ASTM E1264-08e1, Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products.
ASTM E2638-10, Standard Test Method for Objective Measurement of the
Speech Privacy Provided by a Closed Room.
CAN/ULC-S102-10, Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
SAMPLES
.1
Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Submit duplicate full size samples of each type acoustical units.
1.4
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
.1
1.5
Fire-resistance rated floor/ceiling and roof/ceiling assembly: certified by a Canadian
Certification Organization accredited by Standards Council of Canada.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
1.6
Minimum speech privacy category SPC Standard Speech Privacy 60-65 tested to ASTM
E2638.
WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.2
Collect and separate plastic, paper packaging and corrugated cardboard in accordance with
Waste Management Plan.
1.7
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
.1
Permit wet work to dry before commencement of installation.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Section 09 51 13
Page 2
2016-01-13
.2
Maintain uniform minimum temperature of 15°C and humidity of 20 - 40% before and
during installation.
.3
Store materials in work area 48 hours prior to installation.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Acoustic units for suspended ceiling system: to CAN/CGSB-92.1.
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
.13
.14
.15
Type III.
Wet-formed mineral fibre with minimum 75% recycled content.
Pattern no pattern.
Flame spread rating of Class A or less in accordance with CAN/ULC-S102.
Smoke developed 50 or less in accordance with CAN/ULC-S102.
Noise reduction coefficient (NRC) designation of 0.70.
Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC) rating 35, in accordance with ASTM E1264
Light reflectance range of 0.85.
Edge type square.
Colour white.
Size 609 x 1219 x 25 mm thick.
Shape panel.
Alloy designation for stainless steel pans 302.
Surface finish of aluminum panels anodized.
Surface coverings: factory applied latex paint.
.2
Adhesive: low VOC type recommended by acoustic unit manufacturer.
.3
Staples, nails and screws: to CSA B111 non-corrosive finish as recommended by acoustic
unit manufacturer.
.4
Polyethylene: to CAN/CGSB-51.34, 0.15 mm thick.
.5
Hold down clips: purpose made clips to secure tile to suspension system, approved for use
in fire-rated systems.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
3.2
Do not install acoustical panels and tiles until work above ceiling has been inspected by
Departmental Representative.
INSTALLATION
.1
Install acoustical panels and tiles in ceiling suspension system.
.2
Install fibrous acoustical media over entire area above suspended metal panels.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.3
3.3
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Section 09 51 13
Page 3
2016-01-13
In fire rated ceiling systems, secure lay-in panels with hold-down clips and protect over
light fixtures, diffusers, air return grilles and other appurtenances according to
Certification Organizations design requirements.
INTERFACE WITH OTHER WORK
.1
Co-ordinate ceiling work to accommodate components of other sections, such as light
fixtures, diffusers, speakers, sprinkler heads, to be built into acoustical ceiling components.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
ACOUSTICAL SUSPENSION
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
.1
1.2
Section 09 53 00.01
Page 1
2016-01-13
Section 09 51 13 – Acoustical Ceilings
REFERENCES
.1
ASTM International
.1
.2
.3
.2
Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)
.1
1.3
ASTM C635/C635M-13, Standard Specifications for the Manufacture,
Performance and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and
Lay-In Panel Ceilings.
ASTM C636/C636M-13, Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling
Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels.
ASTM E580/E580M-11b, Standard Practice for Installation of Ceiling Suspension
Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Subject to Earthquake
Ground Motions.
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product Data:
.1
.3
Shop Drawings:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for
acoustical suspension and include product characteristics, performance criteria,
physical size, finish and limitations.
Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or
licensed in Province of Ontario, Canada.
Submit reflected ceiling plans for special grid patterns as indicated.
Indicate lay-out, insert and hanger spacing and fastening details, splicing method
for main and cross runners, location of access splines, change in level details,
access door dimensions, and locations and acoustical unit support at ceiling fixture
and lateral bracing and accessories.
Samples:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Submit for review and acceptance of each unit.
Samples will be returned for inclusion into work.
Submit one representative model of ceiling suspension system.
Ceiling system to show basic construction and assembly, treatment at walls,
recessed fixtures, splicing, interlocking, finishes, acoustical unit installation.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
1.4
ACOUSTICAL SUSPENSION
Section 09 53 00.01
Page 2
2016-01-13
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 00.
.2
Operation and Maintenance Data: submit operation and maintenance data for acoustical
suspension for incorporation into manual.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Fire-resistance rated suspension system: certified by a Canadian Certification Organization
accredited by Standards Council of Canada.
.2
Certifications: submit product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials
comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with
manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory
packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address.
.3
Storage and Handling Requirements:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Store materials off ground, indoors, in dry location and in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.
Store and protect acoustical ceiling tiles and tracks from nicks, scratches, and
blemishes.
Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets,
crates, padding and packaging materials as specified in Waste Reduction Workplan in
accordance with Section 01 74 20.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
DESIGN CRITERIA
.1
2.2
Design Requirements: maximum deflection: 1/360th of span to ASTM C635/C635M
deflection test.
MATERIALS
.1
Intermediate duty system to ASTM C635/C635M.
.2
Basic materials for suspension system: commercial quality cold rolled steel, zinc coated.
.3
Suspension system: non fire rated, made up as follows:
.1
.4
2 directional exposed tee bar grid.
Exposed tee bar grid components: shop painted satin sheen white colour. Components die
cut. Main tee with double web, rectangular bulb and 25 mm rolled cap on exposed face.
Cross tee with rectangular bulb; web extended to form positive interlock with main tee
webs; lower flange extended and offset to provide flush intersection.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.5
ACOUSTICAL SUSPENSION
Section 09 53 00.01
Page 3
2016-01-13
Hanger wire: galvanized soft annealed steel wire:
.1
3.6 mm diameter for access tile ceilings.
.6
Hanger inserts: purpose made.
.7
Carrying channels: 38mm galvanized steel, as recommended by acoustic unit
manufacturer.
.8
Accessories: splices, clips, wire ties, retainers and wall moulding flush, to complement
suspension system components, as recommended by system manufacturer.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Verification of Conditions: verify conditions of substrates previously installed under other
Sections or Contracts are acceptable for acoustical ceiling tile and track installation in
accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
.1
.2
.3
3.2
Visually inspect substrate in presence of Departmental Representative.
Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately
upon discovery.
Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied
and after receipt of written approval to proceed from Departmental Representative.
INSTALLATION
.1
Manufacturer's Instructions: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations,
including product technical bulletins, product catalogue installation instructions, product
carton installation instructions, and data sheets.
.2
Installation: to ASTM C636/C636M except where specified otherwise.
.3
Do not erect ceiling suspension system until work above ceiling has been inspected and
approved by Departmental Representative.
.4
Secure hangers to overhead structure using attachment methods acceptable to
Departmental Representative.
.5
Install hangers spaced at maximum 1200 mm centres and within 150 mm from ends of
main tees.
.6
Lay out system according to reflected ceiling plan.
.7
Ensure suspension system is co-ordinated with location of related components.
.8
Install wall moulding to provide correct ceiling height.
.9
Completed suspension system to support super-imposed loads, such as lighting fixtures,
diffusers and grilles.
.10
Support at light fixtures and diffusers with additional ceiling suspension hangers within
150 mm of each corner and at maximum 600 mm around perimeter of fixture.
.11
Interlock cross member to main runner to provide rigid assembly.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
ACOUSTICAL SUSPENSION
Section 09 53 00.01
Page 4
2016-01-13
.12
Frame at openings for light fixtures, air diffusers and at changes in ceiling heights.
.13
Finished ceiling system to be square with adjoining walls and level within 1:1000.
3.3
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.1
.2
Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment
in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.1
.3
Touch up scratches, abrasions, voids and other defects in painted surfaces.
Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with
Section 01 74 20.
.1
3.4
Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
Remove recycling containers and bins from site and dispose of materials at
appropriate facility.
PROTECTION
.1
Protect installed products and components from damage during construction.
.2
Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by acoustical suspension installation.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)
.1
.2
CAN/CGSB-25.20-95 – Surface Sealer for Floors
CSA Group
.1
.2
1.2
Section 09 65 19
Page 1
2016-01-13
CSA A126.2 – High Vinyl Floor Tile
CSA B651-12, Accessible Design for the Built Environment.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product Data:
.1
.3
Samples:
.1
1.3
Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for
resilient tile flooring and include product characteristics, performance criteria,
physical size, finish and limitations.
Submit duplicate tile in size specified, 300 mm long base.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Extra Materials:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
1.4
Provide maintenance materials of resilient tile flooring, base and adhesive in
accordance with Section 01 78 00.
Provide 1 m2 of each colour, pattern and type flooring material required for this
project for maintenance use.
Extra materials from same production run as installed materials.
Identify each container of floor tile and each container of adhesive.
Deliver to Departmental Representative, upon completion of the work of this
section.
Store where directed by Departmental Representative.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with
manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory
packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address.
.3
Storage and Handling Requirements:
.1
.2
Store materials off ground, indoors, in dry location and in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.
Store and protect specified materials from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.3
.4
1.5
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
Section 09 65 19
Page 2
2016-01-13
Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets,
crates, padding, and packaging materials as specified in Waste Reduction Workplan in
accordance with Section 01 74 20.
SITE CONDITIONS
.1
Ambient Conditions:
.1
Maintain air temperature and structural base temperature at flooring installation
area above 20 degrees C for 48 hours before, during and for 48 hours after
installation.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Solid vinyl tile: to CSA A126.2-M1984, annealed, micro-edged, 3 mm thickness, 102 x
915 mm.
.2
Resilient base: to vinyl, straight, minimum 1200 mm length and 100 mm high, including
premoulded end stops and external corners for coved base only, of colour indicated.
.3
Primer, cement, and adhesive: type recommended by flooring and base manufacturer to
suit substrate and installation, Ecologo certified.
.4
Self-levelling compound: modified cement based material forming a roller-castor-chair
and moisture-resistant layer.
.5
Sub-floor filler: premixed latex modified cement mixed with water to produce
cementitious paste.
.6
Concrete floor sealer: to CAN/CGSB-25.20-95, Type 1.
.7
Wax and sealer: type recommended by flooring manufacturer.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Verification of Conditions: verify that conditions of substrate previously installed under
other Sections or Contracts are acceptable for resilient tile flooring installation in
accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
.1
.2
.3
Visually inspect substrate in presence of Departmental Representative.
Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately
upon discovery.
Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied
and after receipt of written approval to proceed from Departmental
Representative.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
3.2
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
Section 09 65 19
Page 3
2016-01-13
INSPECTION
.1
3.3
Ensure concrete floors are dry, by using test methods recommended by tile manufacturer.
SUB-FLOOR TREATMENT
.1
Remove or treat old adhesives to prevent residual, old flooring adhesives from bleeding
through to new flooring and/or interfering with the bonding of new adhesives.
.2
Clean floor and apply filler; trowel and float to leave smooth, flat hard surface. Prohibit
traffic until filler cured and dry.
.3
Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes and other defects
with sub-floor filler.
.4
Seal concrete to flooring manufacturer's printed instructions.
3.4
TILE APPLICATION
.1
Provide high ventilation rate, with maximum outside air, during installation, and for 48 to
72 hours after installation. If possible, vent directly to outside. Do not let contaminated
air recirculate through district or whole building air distribution system. Maintain extra
ventilation for at least one month following building occupation.
.2
Apply adhesive uniformly using recommended trowel in accordance with flooring
manufacturer's instructions. Do not spread more adhesive than can be covered by flooring
before initial set takes place.
.3
Lay flooring with joints parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical tile pattern.
Border tiles minimum half tile width.
.4
Install flooring with pattern grain parallel for units and parallel to width of room.
.5
As installation progresses, and after installation, roll flooring in 2 directions including
resilient tile with 45 kg minimum roller to ensure full adhesion.
.6
Cut tile and fit neatly around fixed objects.
.7
Terminate flooring at centerline of door in openings where adjacent floor finish or colour
is dissimilar.
.8
Install metal edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges where flooring terminates.
3.5
BASE APPLICATION
.1
Lay out base to keep number of joints at minimum. Base joints at maximum length
available or at internal or premoulded corners.
.2
Clean substrate and prime with one coat of adhesive.
.3
Apply adhesive to back of base.
.4
Set base against wall and floor surfaces tightly by using 3 kg hand roller.
.5
Install straight and level to variation of 1:1000.
.6
Scribe and fit to door frames and other obstructions. Use premoulded end pieces at flush
door frames.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
Section 09 65 19
Page 4
2016-01-13
.7
Cope internal corners. Use premoulded corner units for right angle external corners. Use
formed straight base material for external corners of other angles, minimum 300 mm each
leg. Wrap around toeless base at external corners.
.8
Install toeless type base before installation of carpet on floors.
3.6
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.1
.2
Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment
in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.1
Clean flooring and base surfaces to flooring manufacturer's printed instructions.
.3
Remove excess adhesive from floor, base and wall surfaces without damage.
.4
Clean, seal and wax floor surface to flooring manufacturer's instructions. In carpeted
areas clean base surface before carpet installation.
.5
Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with
Section 01 74 20.
.1
3.7
Remove recycling containers and bins from site and dispose of materials at
appropriate facility.
PROTECTION
.1
Protect new floors from time of final set of adhesive until final inspection.
.2
Prohibit traffic on floor for 48 hours after installation.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
TILE CARPETING
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (AATCC)
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.2
.2
.3
.4
.5
.2
.3
.4
.5
CAN/CGSB-4.2 No. 22-2004, Textile Test Methods - Colourfastness to Rubbing
(Crocking).
CAN/CGSB-4.2 No.27.6M-2004, Textile Test Methods - Flame Resistance Methemine Tablet Test for Textile Floor Coverings.
CAN/CGSB-4.2 No. 76-94/ISO 2551: 1981 , Textile Test Methods Machine-Made Textile Floor Coverings - Determination of Dimensional Changes
Due to the Effects of Varied Water and Heat Conditions.
CAN/CGSB-4.2 No.77.1-94/ISO 4919:2000, Textile Test Methods - Carpets Determination of Tuft Withdrawal Force.
CAN/CGSB-4.129-93 (R1997), Carpets for Commercial Use.
Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
.1
.5
ASTM D1335-12, Standard Test Method for Tuft Bind of Pile Yarn Floor
Coverings.
ASTM D1667-05(2011), Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular
Materials-Vinyl Chloride Polymers and Copolymers (Closed-Cell Foam).
ASTM D2661-11, Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene
(ABS) Schedule 40 Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings.
ASTM D3574-11, Standard Test Methods for Flexible Cellular Materials - Slab,
Bonded, and Molded Urethane Foams.
ASTM D3936-12, Standard Test Method for Resistance to Delamination of the
Secondary Backing of Pile Yarn Floor Covering.
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)
.1
.4
AATCC Test Method 16-2004, Colorfastness to Light.
AATCC Test Method 23-2005, Colorfastness to Burn Gas Fumes.
AATCC Test Method 129-2005, Colourfastness to Ozone in the Atmosphere
Under High Humidities.
AATCC Test Method 134-2006, Electrostatic Propensity of Carpets.
AATCC Test Method 171-2005, Carpets: Cleaning of; Hot Water Extraction
Method.
AATCC Test Method 175-2008, Stain Resistance: Pile Floor Coverings.
AATCC Test Method 189-2007, Fluorine Content of Carpet Fibers.
ASTM International
.1
.3
Section 09 68 13
Page 1
2016-01-13
CSA B651-12, Accessible Design for the Built Environment.
Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI)
.1
CRI Carpet Installation Standard 2011.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
.3
.6
National Floor Covering Specification Manual 2007.
SCAQMD Rule 1113-A2007, Architectural Coatings.
SCAQMD Rule 1168-A2005, Adhesives and Sealants Applications.
Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada (ULC)
.1
.2
1.2
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD), California State, Regulation
XI. Source Specific Standards
.1
.2
.11
C.R.C., c.923-10, Hazardous Products Act - Carpet Regulations, Part II of
Schedule 1.
National Floor Covering Association (NFCA)
.1
.10
CCD-152-2009, Flooring Products, Commercial Non-modular Textile Flooring.
Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)
.1
.9
CRI Green Label Indoor Air Quality Testing Program.
CRI Green Label Plus Indoor Air Quality Testing Program.
Health Canada
.1
.8
Section 09 68 13
Page 2
2016-01-13
Environmental Choice Program (ECP)
.1
.7
TILE CARPETING
CAN/ULC-S102-10, Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics
of Building Materials and Assemblies.
CAN/ULC-S102.2-10, Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning
Characteristics of Flooring, Floor Coverings and Miscellaneous Materials and
Assemblies.
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
.1
Pre-Installation Meetings:
.1
.2
1.3
Convene pre-installation meeting 1 week prior to beginning work of this Section
and on-site installation, with Contractor's Representative and Departmental
Representative in accordance with Section 01 31 19 to:
.1
Verify project requirements.
.2
Review installation and substrate conditions.
.3
Co-ordination with other construction subtrades.
.4
Review manufacturer's written installation instructions and warranty
requirements.
Sequencing: sequence with other work in accordance with Section 09 65 19. Comply with
manufacturer's written recommendations for sequencing construction operations.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
Section 09 68 13
Page 3
2016-01-13
Product Data:
.1
.2
.3
TILE CARPETING
Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for
each carpet tile, adhesive and carpet protection, subfloor patching compound and
include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and
limitations.
Submit 2 copies of WHMIS MSDS.
Samples:
.1
.2
.3
Submit for review and acceptance of each unit.
Samples will be returned for inclusion into work.
Submit duplicate samples of each type of carpet tile specified and duplicate tiles
for each colour selected.
.4
Certificates: submit product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials
comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements.
.5
Test and Evaluation Reports:
.1
Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance
characteristics and physical properties.
.6
Manufacturer's Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation and storage instructions.
.7
Manufacturers Reports:
.1
.8
Qualification Statements:
.1
.2
1.4
Manufacturer's Field Reports: submit manufacturer's written reports within 3 days
of review, verifying compliance with specifications.
Compliance: to CAN/ULC-S102 and CAN/ULC-S102.2.
Tuft bind: meets requirements of CAN/CGSB-4.129 when tested to
CAN/CGSB-4.2 No.77.1.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 00.
.2
Operation and Maintenance Data: submit operation and maintenance data for installed
products for incorporation into manual.
.3
Warranty Documentation: submit warranty documents specified.
1.5
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Extra stock materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00: deliver to Owner extra
materials from same production run as products installed. Package products with
protective covering and identify with descriptive labels. Comply with Section 01 78 00.
.1
Quantity: provide minimum:
.1
Carpet tile: 2% of total installation with a minimum of 1 box of each
colour and type.
.2
Tile Carpeting Accessories: 5% of total installation with a minimum
length of 3000 mm of each colour and type.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
1.6
TILE CARPETING
Section 09 68 13
Page 4
2016-01-13
Delivery, storage and protection: comply with Owner's requirements for delivery
and storage of extra materials.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Regulatory Requirements: Use only carpeting materials that have been tested and accepted
for labelling under ULC S102.2 and meeting requirements of the Authority Having
Jurisdiction.
.2
Qualifications:
.1
.2
1.7
Manufacturer: capable of providing field service representation during
construction and approving application method.
Flooring Installer:
.1
Experienced in performing work of this Section who has specialized in
installation of work similar to that required for this project.
.2
Certified by carpet manufacturer prior to bid submission.
.3
Must not sub-contract labour without written approval of Departmental
Representative.
.4
Responsible for proper product installation, including floor testing and
preparation as specified and in accordance with carpet manufacturer's
written instructions.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with
manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory
packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address.
.3
Storage and Handling Requirements:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
Store materials off ground, indoors, in dry location and in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.
Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at
temperature conditions recommended by manufacturer.
Store and protect carpet tile and adhesive in original containers or wrapping with
manufacturer's seals and labels intact.
Store and protect carpet tile and accessories in location as directed by
Departmental Representative.
Store carpet and adhesive at minimum temperature of 18 degrees C and relative
humidity of maximum 65% for minimum of 48 hours before installation.
Prevent damage to materials during handling and storage. Keep materials under
cover and free from dampness.
Safety: comply with requirements of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information
System (WHMIS) regarding use, handling, storage, and disposal of hazardous
materials.
Off gas carpet products off site in accordance with CSA B651.
Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.4
1.8
TILE CARPETING
Section 09 68 13
Page 5
2016-01-13
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets,
crates, padding, and packaging materials as specified in Waste Reduction Workplan in
accordance with Section 01 74 20.
SITE CONDITIONS
.1
Ambient Conditions:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
1.9
Moisture: ensure substrate is within moisture limits and alkalinity limits
recommended by manufacturer. Prepare moisture testing and provide report to
Departmental Representative.
Temperature: maintain ambient temperature of not less than 18 degrees C from 48
hours before installation to at least 48 hours after completion of work.
Relative humidity: maintain between 10% and 65% for 48 hours before, during
and 48 hours after installation.
Ventilation:
.1
Ventilate area of work as directed by Departmental Representative by use
of approved portable supply and exhaust fans.
.2
Ventilate enclosed spaces in accordance with Section 01 51 00. Provide
fans with HEPA filters.
.3
Provide continuous ventilation during and after carpet application. Run
ventilation system 24 hours per day during installation; provide
continuous ventilation for 7 days after completion of carpet installation.
Install carpet after space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in space is
completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete.
WARRANTY
.1
Manufacturer's warranty: submit, for Departmental Representative's acceptance,
manufacturer's standard warranty document executed by authorized company official.
Manufacturer's warranty is in addition to and does not limit other rights Owner may have
under Contract Documents.
.2
Warranty period: 1 year, commencing on date of substantial performance of work.
.1
Warranty covers labour and repair or replacement of defective components for 1
year after date of substantial performance.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Manufacturers:
.1
.2
Ensure manufacturer has minimum 5 years experience in manufacturing
components similar to or exceeding requirements of project.
Description:
.1
Adhesives: VOC limit 50 g/L maximum to SCAQMD Rule 1168.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
2.2
TILE CARPETING
Section 09 68 13
Page 6
2016-01-13
Primer: in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for surface
conditions:
.1
VOC limit: 100 g/L maximum to SCAQMD Rule 1113
PERFORMANCE
.1
Flammability: certified for flammability to Health Canada regulations under "Hazardous
Products - Carpet Regulations", Part II of Schedule 1.
.2
Flame Spread: maximum flame spread rating 300, maximum smoke developed
classification 500, when tested to CAN/ULC-S102.2.
.3
Smoke Development: 450 or less per ASTM E662.
.4
Dry Breaking Strength: to ASTM D2661, minimum acceptable tear strength in both length
and width:
.1
11.3 kg for carpets installed by glue down installation.
.5
Wear: maximum 10% of pile face fiber by weight for 10 years.
.6
Edge Ravel: none for 10 years.
.7
Static Resistance: permanent static control to AATCC 134, 2000 V maximum at 20% RH
and 22 degrees C.
.8
Static Generation: less than 2.5 kV per AATCC 134 for 10 years.
.9
Tuft Bind: Tuft Lock: to ASTM D1335, minimum acceptable 3.6 for loop pile product.
.10
De-lamination of Secondary Backing: Lamination Strength of Secondary Backing: to
ASTM D3936, minimum acceptable peel strength of 1.6 kg/25 mm.
.11
Stain resistance: to AATCC 175, 8.
.12
Soil Resistance: 550 ppm fluorine minimum.
.13
Colourfastness to light: to AATCC 16.
.14
Indoor Air Quality Certification: certified to CRI Green Label IAQ requirements.
2.3
FABRICATION
.1
Type CPT-1: colour and pattern to be selected by Departmental Representative from
manufacturer’s standard range, size 610 mm x 610 mm.
.2
Face construction: Tufted.
.3
Pile Surface Appearance: Level loop; textured.
.4
Pile fibre: to CAN/CGSB-4.129.
.1
.5
Nylon: BCF.
.1
Type: Nylon 6.
Dyeing Method: solution dyed.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.6
TILE CARPETING
Section 09 68 13
Page 7
2016-01-13
Tufted Carpet Backing: to CAN/CGSB-4.129.
.1
Primary backing:
.1
Polypropylene: Cut Pile Carpet: 100% woven polypropylene at a
minimum weight of 126 g/m2.
.7
Secondary and Unitary Backings: to CAN/CGSB-4.129.
.8
Stitches: 39.4 stitches/10 cm.
.9
Gauge: 50.4 rows/10 cm.
.10
Finished Pile Height: minimum 4.7 mm average.
.11
Surface Pile Weight: minimum 711.9 g/sq.m.
.12
Total Weight: 3330 g/sq.m.
.13
Dimensional Stability: maximum + 0.15% to CAN/CGSB-4.2 No. 76/ISO 2551.
2.4
TILE CUSHION BACKING
.1
Density: urethane 224 kg/m3; EVA and PVC 240 kg/m3 to ASTM D3574.
.2
Compression force deflection, minimum: urethane 34.5 kN/m2 to ASTM D3574.
.3
Compression deflection, minimum: EVA and PVC 48.3 kN/m2 to ASTM D1667.
.4
Compression set at 50%, maximum: urethane 15% to ASTM D3574.
.5
Compression set at 25%, maximum: EVA and PVC 10% to ASTM D3574.
.6
Ash content, maximum: urethane 50%; EVA and PVC 50% to ASTM D297.
.7
Anti-microbial Resistance: to AATCC 174, 2 mm minimum halo of inhibition for gram
positive bacteria.
.1
.2
2.5
1 mm minimum halo of inhibition for gram negative bacteria.
Ensure no fungal growth.
ACCESSORIES
.1
Base:
.1
.2
Edge Strips:
.1
.3
Resilient Base: as specified in 09 65 00.
Metal:
.1
Designed for carpet being installed.
.2
Floor flange minimum 38 mm wide, face minimum 16 mm wide.
.3
Finish: clear anodic coating.
Adhesive:
.1
.2
.3
Pressure Sensitive Type: recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for direct glue
down installation of specialty backed carpet tiles.
On site application VOC limit: 50 g/L maximum to SCAQMD Rule 1168.
Adhesive in compliance with CCD-152.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.4
TILE CARPETING
Section 09 68 13
Page 8
2016-01-13
Transition Mouldings:
.1
Carpet edge / reducer strip: Extruded vinyl shapes meeting or exceeding ADA
Recommendations for change of level transitions for transition between floors
finishes having different levels.
.5
Carpet protection: non-staining heavy duty kraft paper.
.6
Subfloor patching compound: Portland cement base filler, mix with latex and water to form
cementitious paste.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLERS
.1
3.2
Use experienced and qualified technicians to carry out assembly and installation of tile
carpet.
EXAMINATION
.1
Examine conditions, substrates and work to receive work of this Section, co-ordinate with
Section 01 71 00.
.2
Verification of Conditions: verify conditions of substrates previously installed under other
Sections or Contracts are acceptable for carpet tile installation in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions.
.1
.2
3.3
Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately
upon discovery.
Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied
and after receipt of written approval to proceed from Departmental Representative.
PREPARATION
.1
Subfloor Preparation:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
Inspect concrete and determine special care required to make it a suitable for
carpet.
Fill and level cracks 3 mm wide or protrusions over 0.8 mm with appropriate and
compatible polymer fortified patching compound.
Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for maximum patch
thickness.
Prime large patch areas with compatible primer.
Ensure concrete substrates are cured, clean and dry.
Ensure concrete substrates are free of paint, dirt, grease, oil, curing or parting
agents, and other contaminates, including sealers, that interfere with the bonding
of adhesive.
Where powdery or porous concrete surface is encountered, apply primer
compatible with adhesive to provide a suitable surface for glue-down installation.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
Pre-condition carpeting: following manufacturer's written instructions.
Demolition / Removal:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
3.4
Prepare floor surfaces in accordance with CRI Carpet Installation Standard.
Tile Carpeting Preparation:
.1
.4
Section 09 68 13
Page 9
2016-01-13
Surface Preparation: prepare surface in accordance with manufacturer's written
recommendations and co-ordinate with Section 01 71 00.
.1
.3
TILE CARPETING
Remove and divert carpet for recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20 and
with Waste Reduction Workplan. Co-ordinate with Departmental Representative.
Vacuum used carpet before removal.
Maintain possession of removed used carpet.
Remove used tiles and pack in container. Use effective packing techniques to
maximize amount of material in container.
Sort only clean, dry carpet tiles for reclamation. Clean is defined as carpet free
from demolition debris, asbestos contamination, garbage, knife blades and tack
strips.
Carpet undercushion: provide recycling of carpet padding where locally available
or as designated by carpet reclamation program.
INSTALLATION
.1
Install carpet tiles in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and CRI Carpet
Installation Standard and co-ordinate with Section 01 73 00.
.2
Co-ordinate tile carpeting work with work of other trades, for proper time and sequence to
avoid construction delays.
.3
Install carpet tile after finishing work is completed but before demountable office
partitions and telephone and electrical pedestal outlets are installed.
.4
Install carpet tile as per manufacturer's recommendation. This can include quarter-turn 90
degree format, monolithic, random, quarter turn ashlar, horizontal, herringbone or vertical
ashlar.
.5
Snugly join carpet tiles in completed installation.
.1
.2
Measure distance covered by 11 carpet tiles (10 joints) and ensure distance is in
compliance with manufacturer specifications.
Do not trap yarn between carpet tiles.
.6
Apply thin film of pressure-sensitive adhesive according to manufacturer's
recommendations.
.7
Ensure finished installation presents smooth wearing surface free from conspicuous seams,
burring and other faults.
.8
Use material from same dye lot.
.1
.2
Ensure colour, pattern and texture match within visual areas.
Maintain constant pile direction.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
TILE CARPETING
Section 09 68 13
Page 10
2016-01-13
.9
Fit around architectural, mechanical, electrical and telephone outlets, and furniture
fitments, around perimeter of rooms into recesses, and around projections.
.10
Install carpet tiles to underfloor duct system and to access covers.
.11
Install carpeting in pan type floor access covers.
.12
Extend carpet tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions,
removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
.13
Install carpet tiles smooth and free from bubbles, puckers, and other defects.
.14
Protect exposed carpet tile edges at transition to other flooring materials with suitable
transition strips.
3.5
SITE QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Manufacturer's Field Services:
.1
.2
.3
.4
3.6
Co-ordinate manufacturer's services with Section 01 45 00. Have manufacturer
review work involved in handling, installation / application, protection and
cleaning of its products, and submit written reports, in acceptable format, to verify
compliance of work with Contract.
Manufacturer's field services: provide manufacturer's field services, consisting of
product use recommendations and periodic site visits for inspection of product
installation, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Schedule site visits:
.1
After delivery and storage of products, and when preparatory Work, or
other Work, on which the Work of this Section depends, is complete but
before installation begins.
.2
Twice during progress of Work at 25% and 60% complete.
.3
Upon completion of Work, after cleaning is carried out.
Obtain reports within 3 days of review and submit immediately to Departmental
Representative.
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.1
.2
.2
Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with
Section 01 74 20.
.1
3.7
Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and
equipment in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.1
Vacuum carpets clean immediately after completion of installation.
Remove recycling containers and bins from site and dispose of materials at
appropriate facility.
PROTECTION
.1
Protect installed products and components from damage during construction.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
TILE CARPETING
Section 09 68 13
Page 11
2016-01-13
.2
Prohibit traffic on carpet for period of 24 hours minimum after installation and until
adhesive is cured.
.3
Install carpet protection to satisfaction of Departmental Representative.
.4
Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by tile carpeting installation.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
INTERIOR PAINTING
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
Section 06 40 00 - Architectural Woodwork.
.2
Section 08 14 16 – Flush Wood Doors.
.3
Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Board Assemblies.
1.2
Section 09 91 23
Page 1
2016-01-13
REFERENCES
.1
Architectural Painting Specifications Manual, Master Painters Institute (MPI), 2010.
.2
Systems and Specifications Manual, SSPC Painting Manual, Volume Two, Society for
Protective Coatings (SSPC).
.3
Test Method for Measuring Total Volatile Organic Compound Content of Consumer
Products, Method 24 (for Surface Coatings) of the Environmental Protection Agency
(EPA).
.4
National Fire Code of Canada 2010 (NFC).
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Contractor shall have a minimum of five years proven satisfactory experience. When
requested, provide a list of last three comparable jobs including, job name and location,
specifying authority, and project manager.
.2
Qualified journeymen who have a "Tradesman Qualification Certificate of Proficiency"
shall be engaged in painting work. Apprentices may be employed provided they work
under the direct supervision of a qualified journeyman in accordance with trade
regulations.
.3
Conform to latest MPI requirements for interior painting work including preparation and
priming.
.4
Materials (primers, paints, coatings, varnishes, stains, lacquers, fillers, thinners, solvents,
etc.) shall be in accordance with MPI Painting Specification Manual "Approved Product"
listing and shall be from a single manufacturer for each system used.
.5
Other paint materials such as linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, etc. shall be the highest
quality product of an approved manufacturer listed in MPI Painting Specification Manual
and shall be compatible with other coating materials as required.
.6
Retain purchase orders, invoices and other documents to prove conformance with noted
MPI requirements when requested by Departmental Representative.
.7
Standard of Acceptance:
.1
.2
.3
Walls: No defects visible from a distance of 1000 mm at 90° to surface.
Ceilings: No defects visible from floor at 45° to surface when viewed using final
lighting source.
Final coat to exhibit uniformity of colour and uniformity of sheen across full
surface area.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
1.4
INTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 23
Page 2
2016-01-13
ENVIRONMENTAL PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
.1
Provide paint products meeting MPI "Environmentally Friendly" E1 ratings based on VOC
(EPA Method 24) content levels.
.2
Where indoor air quality (odour) is a problem, use only MPI listed materials having a
minimum E2 rating.
1.5
INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS
.1
Interior painting and decorating work shall be inspected by a Paint Inspection Agency
(inspector) acceptable to the specifying authority and local Painting Contractor's
Association. Painting contractor shall notify Paint Inspection Agency a minimum of one
week prior to commencement of work and provide a copy of project painting specification,
plans and elevation drawings (including pertinent details) as well as a Finish Schedule.
.2
Interior surfaces requiring painting shall be inspected by Paint Inspection Agency who
shall notify Departmental Representative and General Contractor in writing of defects or
problems, prior to commencing painting work, or after prime coat shows defects in
substrate.
.3
Where "special" painting, coating or decorating system applications (i.e. elastomeric
coatings) or non-MPI listed products or systems are to be used, paint or coating
manufacturer shall provide as part of this work, certification of surfaces and conditions for
specific paint or coating system application as well as on site supervision, inspection and
approval of their paint or coating system application as required at no additional cost to
Departmental Representative.
1.6
SCHEDULING OF WORK
.1
Submit work schedule for various stages of painting to Departmental Representative for
approval. Submit schedule minimum of 48 hours in advance of proposed operations.
.2
Obtain written authorization from Consultant for any changes in work schedule.
.3
Schedule painting operations to prevent disruption of occupants in and about the building.
1.7
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit product data and manufacturer's installation/application instructions for each paint
and coating product to be used in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Submit WHMIS MSDS- Material Safety Data Sheets in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.3
Upon completion, submit records of products used. List products in relation to finish
system and include the following:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
Product name, type and use.
Manufacturer's product number.
Colour numbers.
MPI Environmentally Friendly classification system rating.
Manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
1.8
INTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 23
Page 3
2016-01-13
SAMPLES
.1
Submit full range colour sample chips in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate where
colour availability is restricted.
.2
Submit duplicate 200 x 300 mm sample panels of each paint with specified paint or coating
in colours, gloss/sheen and textures required to MPI Painting Specification Manual
standards submitted on the following substrate materials:
.1
.2
.3
1.9
50 mm concrete block for finishes over concrete or concrete masonry surfaces.
13 mm gypsum board for finishes over gypsum board and other smooth surfaces.
When approved, sample panels shall become acceptable standard of quality for appropriate
on-site surface with one of each sample retained on-site.
QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Provide mock-up in accordance with Section 01 45 00.
.2
When requested by Departmental Representative, prepare and paint designated surface,
area, room or item (in each colour scheme) to requirements specified herein, with specified
paint or coating showing selected colours, gloss/sheen, textures and workmanship to MPI
Painting Specification Manual standards for review and approval. When approved,
surface, area, room and/or items shall become acceptable standard of finish quality and
workmanship for similar on-site work.
1.10
EXTRA MATERIALS
.1
Submit maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00.
.2
Submit one - four litre can of each type and colour of finish coating. Identify colour and
paint type in relation to established colour schedule and finish system.
.3
Deliver to Contractor and store where directed.
1.11
DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00.
.2
Labels shall clearly indicate:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Manufacturer's name and address.
Type of paint or coating.
Compliance with applicable standard.
Colour number in accordance with established colour schedule.
.3
Remove damaged, opened and rejected materials from site.
.4
Provide and maintain dry, temperature controlled, secure storage.
.5
Observe manufacturer's recommendations for storage and handling.
.6
Store materials and supplies away from heat generating devices.
.7
Store materials and equipment in a well ventilated area with temperature range 7°C to
30°C.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
INTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 23
Page 4
2016-01-13
.8
Store temperature sensitive products above minimum temperature as recommended by
manufacturer.
.9
Keep areas used for storage, cleaning and preparation, clean and orderly to approval of
Consultant. After completion of operations, return areas to clean condition to approval of
Departmental Representative.
.10
Remove paint materials from storage only in quantities required for same day use.
.11
Comply with requirements of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System
(WHMIS) regarding use, handling storage, and disposal of hazardous materials.
.12
Fire Safety Requirements:
.1
.2
.3
1.12
Provide one 9 kg Type ABC fire extinguisher adjacent to storage area.
Store oily rags, waste products, empty containers and materials subject to
spontaneous combustion in ULC approved, sealed containers and remove from
site on a daily basis.
Handle, store, use and dispose of flammable and combustible materials in
accordance with the National Fire Code of Canada.
SITE REQUIREMENTS
.1
Heating, Ventilation and Lighting:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.2
Ventilate enclosed spaces in accordance with Section 01 35 29.
Perform no painting work unless adequate and continuous ventilation and
sufficient heating facilities are in place to maintain ambient air and substrate
temperatures above 10°C for 24 hours before, during and after paint application
until paint has cured sufficiently.
Where required, provide continuous ventilation for seven days after completion of
application of paint.
Coordinate use of existing ventilation system with Departmental Representative
and ensure its operation during and after application of paint as required.
Provide temporary ventilating and heating equipment where permanent facilities
are not available or supplemental ventilating and heating equipment if ventilation
and heating from existing system is inadequate to meet minimum requirements.
Perform no painting work unless a minimum lighting level of 323 Lux is provided
on surfaces to be painted. Adequate lighting facilities shall be provided by General
Contractor.
Temperature, Humidity and Substrate Moisture Content Levels:
.1
Unless specifically pre-approved by the specifying body, Paint Inspection Agency
and the applied product manufacturer, perform no painting work when:
.1
Ambient air and substrate temperatures are below 10°C.
.2
Substrate temperature is over 32°C unless paint is specifically formulated
for application at high temperatures.
.3
Substrate and ambient air temperatures are expected to fall outside MPI or
paint manufacturer's prescribed limits.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
INTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 23
Page 5
2016-01-13
.4
.2
.3
.4
.3
Surface and Environmental Conditions:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Apply paint finish only in areas where dust is no longer being generated by related
construction operations or when wind or ventilation conditions are such that
airborne particles will not affect quality of finished surface.
Apply paint only to adequately prepared surfaces and to surfaces within moisture
limits noted herein.
Apply paint only when previous coat of paint is dry or adequately cured.
Additional Interior Application Requirements:
.1
.2
1.13
The relative humidity is above 85% or when the dew point is less than 3°C
variance between the air/surface temperature.
.5
Rain or snow are forecast to occur before paint has thoroughly cured or
when it is foggy, misty, raining or snowing at site.
Perform no painting work when the maximum moisture content of the substrate
exceeds:
.1
12% for concrete and masonry (clay and concrete brick/block).
.2
15% for wood.
.3
12% for plaster and gypsum board.
Conduct moisture tests using a properly calibrated electronic Moisture Meter,
except test concrete floors for moisture using a simple "cover patch test".
Test concrete, masonry and plaster surfaces for alkalinity as required.
Apply paint finishes only when temperature at location of installation can be
satisfactorily maintained within manufacturer's recommendations.
Apply paint in occupied facilities during silent hours only. Schedule operations to
approval of Departmental Representative such that painted surfaces will have
dried and cured sufficiently before occupants are affected.
WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.2
Paint, stain and wood preservative finishes and related materials (thinners, solvents, etc.,)
are regarded as hazardous products and are subject to regulations for disposal. Information
on these controls can be obtained from Provincial Ministries of Environment and Regional
levels of Government.
.3
Material which cannot be reused must be treated as hazardous waste and disposed of in an
appropriate manner.
.4
Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste, including used sealant and adhesive
tubes and containers, in containers or areas designated for hazardous waste.
.5
To reduce the amount of contaminants entering waterways, sanitary/storm drain systems or
into ground the following procedures shall be strictly adhered to:
.1
.2
Retain cleaning water for water-based materials to allow sediments to be filtered
out.
Retain cleaners, thinners, solvents and excess paint and place in designated
containers and ensure proper disposal.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.3
.4
.5
INTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 23
Page 6
2016-01-13
Return solvent and oil soaked rags used during painting operations for
contaminant recovery, proper disposal, or appropriate cleaning and laundering.
Dispose of contaminants in an approved legal manner in accordance with
hazardous waste regulations.
Empty paint cans are to be dry prior to disposal or recycling (where available).
.6
Where paint recycling is available, collect waste paint by type and provide for delivery to
recycling or collection facility.
.7
Set aside and protect surplus and uncontaminated finish materials: deliver to or arrange
collection by employees, individuals, or organizations for verifiable re-use or
re-manufacturing.
.8
Close and seal tightly partly used sealant and adhesive containers and store protected in
well ventilated fire-safe area at moderate temperature.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Paint materials listed in the MPI Approved Products List (APL) are acceptable for use on
this project.
.2
Paint materials for paint systems shall be products of a single manufacturer.
.3
Only qualified products with E2 "Environmentally Friendly" rating are acceptable for use
on this project.
.4
Paints, coatings, adhesives, solvents, cleaners, lubricants, and other fluids, shall:
.1
.2
.3
be manufactured without compounds which contribute to ozone depletion in the
upper atmosphere.
be manufactured without compounds which contribute to smog in the lower
atmosphere.
do not contain methylene chloride, chlorinated hydrocarbons, toxic metal
pigments.
.5
Water-borne surface coatings must be manufactured and transported in a manner that steps
of process, including disposal of waste products arising therefrom, will meet requirements
of applicable governmental acts, by-laws and regulations including, for facilities located in
Canada, Fisheries Act and Canadian Environmental Protection Act (CEPA).
.6
Water-borne surface coatings must not be formulated or manufactured with aromatic
solvents, formaldehyde, halogenated solvents, mercury, lead, cadmium, hexavelant
chromium or their compounds.
.7
Water-borne surface coatings and recycled water-borne surface coatings must have a flash
point of 61.0°C or greater.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.8
INTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 23
Page 7
2016-01-13
Both water-borne surface coatings and recycled water-borne surface coatings must be
made by a process that does not release:
.1
.2
Matter in undiluted production plant effluent generating a 'Biochemical Oxygen
Demand' (BOD) in excess of 15 mg/L to a natural watercourse or a sewage
treatment facility lacking secondary treatment.
Total Suspended Solids (TSS) in undiluted production plant effluent in excess of
15 mg/L to a natural watercourse or a sewage treatment facility lacking secondary
treatment.
.9
Water-borne paints and stains, recycled water-borne surface coatings and water borne
varnishes must meet a minimum "Environmentally Friendly" E2 rating.
.10
Recycled water-borne surface coatings must contain 50% post-consumer material by
volume.
.11
Recycled water-borne surface coatings must not contain:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.12
The following must be performed on each batch of consolidated post-consumer material
before surface coating is reformulated and canned. These tests must be performed at a
laboratory or facility which has been accredited by the Standards Council of Canada.
.1
.2
.3
2.2
Lead in excess of 600.0 ppm weight/weight total solids.
Mercury in excess of 50.0 ppm weight/weight total product.
Cadmium in excess of 1.0 ppm weight/weight total product.
Hexavelant chromium in excess of 3.0 ppm weight/weight total product.
Organochlorines or polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBS) in excess of 1.0 ppm
weight/weight total product.
Lead, cadmium and chromium are to be determined using ICP-AES (Inductively
Coupled Plasma - Atomic Emission Spectroscopy) technique no. 6010 as defined
in EPA SW-846.
Mercury is to be determined by Cold Vapour Atomic Absorption Spectroscopy
using Technique no. 7471 as defined in EPA SW-846.
Organochlorines and PCBs are to be determined by Gas Chromatography using
Technique no. 8081 as defined in EPA SW-846.
COLOURS
.1
Departmental Representative will provide Colour Schedule after Contract award.
.2
Colour schedule will be based upon the selection of two base colours and two accent
colours. No more than six colours will be selected for the entire project.
.3
Selection of colours will be from manufacturers full range of colours.
.4
Where specific products are available in a restricted range of colours, selection will be
based on the limited range.
.5
Second coat in a three coat system to be tinted slightly lighter colour than top coat to show
visible difference between coats.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
2.3
INTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 23
Page 8
2016-01-13
MIXING AND TINTING
.1
Perform colour tinting operations prior to delivery of paint to site. On-site tinting of
painting materials is allowed only with Departmental Representative's written permission.
.2
Paste, powder or catalyzed paint mixes shall be mixed in strict accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions.
.3
Where thinner is used, addition shall not exceed paint manufacturer's recommendations.
Do not use kerosene or any such organic solvents to thin water-based paints.
.4
Thin paint for spraying according in strict accordance with paint manufacturer's
instructions. If directions are not on container, obtain instructions in writing from
manufacturer and provide copy of instructions to Departmental Representative.
.5
Re-mix paint in containers prior to and during application to ensure break-up of lumps,
complete dispersion of settled pigment, and colour and gloss uniformity.
2.4
GLOSS/SHEEN RATINGS
.1
Paint gloss shall be defined as the sheen rating of applied paint, in accordance with the
following values:
Gloss Level
Category
G1 - matte
finish
G2 - velvet
finish
G3 - eggshell
finish
G4 - satin
finish
G5 semi-gloss
finish
G6 - gloss
finish
G7 - high
gloss finish
.2
2.5
Units @ 60°
Units @ 85°
0 to 5
max. 10
0 to 10
10 to 35
10 to 25
10 to 35
20 to 35
min. 35
35 to 70
70 to 85
> 85
Gloss level ratings of painted surfaces as noted on Finish Schedule provided after Contract
Award.
INTERIOR PAINTING SYSTEMS
.1
Concrete Masonry Units: smooth and split face block and brick
.1
.2
Galvanized Metal: doors, frames, railings, misc. steel, pipes, overhead decking, ducts, etc.
.1
.3
INT 4.2A Latex Level 5 finish.
INT 5.3B Waterborne light industrial coating.
Dressed Lumber: including doors, door and window frames, casings, mouldings, etc.
.1
INT 6.3E Polyurethane varnish Level 5 finish (over stain).
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.4
INTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 23
Page 9
2016-01-13
Plaster and Gypsum Board: gypsum wallboard, drywall, "sheet rock type material", etc.,
and textured finishes
.1
INT 9.2M Institutional low odour/low VOC Level 5 finish.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
.1
Perform preparation and operations for interior painting in accordance with MPI Painting
Specifications Manual except where specified otherwise.
.2
Apply paint materials in accordance with paint manufacturer's written application
instructions.
3.2
EXISTING CONDITIONS
.1
Investigate existing substrates for problems related to proper and complete preparation of
surfaces to be painted. Report to Departmental Representative damages, defects,
unsatisfactory or unfavourable conditions before proceeding with work.
.2
Conduct moisture testing of surfaces to be painted using a properly calibrated electronic
moisture meter, except test concrete floors for moisture using a simple "cover patch test"
and report findings to Departmental Representative. Do not proceed with work until
conditions fall within acceptable range as recommended by manufacturer.
.3
Maximum moisture content as follows:
.1
.2
3.3
Gypsum Board: 12%.
Concrete: 12%.
PROTECTION
.1
Protect existing building surfaces and adjacent structures from paint spatters, markings and
other damage by suitable non-staining covers or masking. If damaged, clean and restore
such surfaces as directed by Departmental Representative.
.2
Protect items that are permanently attached such as Fire Labels on doors and frames.
.3
Protect factory finished products and equipment.
.4
Protect building occupants and general public in and about the building.
.5
Removal of electrical cover plates, light fixtures, surface hardware on doors, bath
accessories and other surface mounted equipment, fittings and fastenings shall be done
prior to undertaking any painting operations by General Contractor. Items shall be securely
stored and re-installed after painting is completed by General Contractor.
.6
Move and cover furniture and portable equipment as necessary to carry out painting
operations. Replace as painting operations progress.
.7
As painting operations progress, place "WET PAINT" signs in occupied areas to approval
of Departmental Representative.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
3.4
INTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 23
Page 10
2016-01-13
CLEANING AND PREPARATION
.1
Clean and prepare surfaces in accordance with MPI Painting Specification Manual
requirements. Refer to MPI Manual in regard to specific requirements and as follows:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
Remove dust, dirt, and other surface debris by vacuuming, wiping with dry, clean
cloths or compressed air.
Wash surfaces with a biodegradable detergent and bleach where applicable and
clean warm water using a stiff bristle brush to remove dirt, oil and other surface
contaminants.
Rinse scrubbed surfaces with clean water until foreign matter is flushed from
surface.
Allow surfaces to drain completely and allow to dry thoroughly.
Prepare surfaces for water-based painting, water-based cleaners should be used in
place of organic solvents.
Use trigger operated spray nozzles for water hoses.
Many water-based paints cannot be removed with water once dried. However,
minimize the use of kerosene or any such organic solvents to clean up water-based
paints.
.2
Prevent contamination of cleaned surfaces by salts, acids, alkalis, other corrosive
chemicals, grease, oil and solvents before prime coat is applied and between applications
of remaining coats. Apply primer, paint, or pretreatment as soon as possible after cleaning
and before deterioration occurs.
.3
Sand and dust between coats as required to provide adequate adhesion for next coat and to
remove defects visible from a distance up to 1000 mm.
.4
Clean metal surfaces to be painted by removing rust, loose mill scale, welding slag, dirt,
oil, grease and other foreign substances in accordance with MPI requirements. Remove
traces of blast products from surfaces, pockets and corners to be painted by brushing with
clean brushes, blowing with clean dry compressed air, or vacuum cleaning.
.5
Touch up of shop primers with primer as specified in applicable section. Major touch-up
including cleaning and painting of field connections, welds, rivets, nuts, washers, bolts,
and damaged or defective paint and rusted areas, shall be by supplier of fabricated material.
.6
Do not apply paint until prepared surfaces have been accepted by Departmental
Representative.
3.5
APPLICATION
.1
Method of application to be as approved by Departmental Representative. Apply paint by
brush, roller or air sprayer. Conform to manufacturer's application instructions unless
specified otherwise.
.2
Brush and Roller Application:
.1
.2
Apply paint in a uniform layer using brush and/or roller of types suitable for
application.
Work paint into cracks, crevices and corners.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.3
.4
.5
.3
INTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 23
Page 11
2016-01-13
Paint surfaces and corners not accessible to brush using spray, daubers and/or
sheepskins. Paint surfaces and corners not accessible to roller using brush, daubers
or sheepskins.
Brush and/or roll out runs and sags, and over-lap marks. Rolled surfaces shall be
free of roller tracking and heavy stipple unless approved by Departmental
Representative.
Remove runs, sags and brush marks from finished work and repaint.
Spray application:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
Provide and maintain equipment that is suitable for intended purpose, capable of
properly atomizing paint to be applied, and equipped with suitable pressure
regulators and gauges.
Keep paint ingredients properly mixed in containers during paint application either
by continuous mechanical agitation or by intermittent agitation as frequently as
necessary.
Apply paint in a uniform layer, with overlapping at edges of spray pattern.
Brush out immediately all runs and sags.
Use brushes to work paint into cracks, crevices and places which are not
adequately painted by spray.
.4
Use dipping, sheepskins or daubers only when no other method is practical in places of
difficult access and only when specifically authorized by Engineer.
.5
Apply coats of paint as a continuous film of uniform thickness. Repaint thin spots or bare
areas before next coat of paint is applied.
.6
Allow surfaces to dry and properly cure after cleaning and between subsequent coats for
minimum time period as recommended by manufacturer.
.7
Sand and dust between coats to remove visible defects.
.8
Finish surfaces both above and below sight lines as specified for surrounding surfaces,
including such surfaces as tops of interior cupboards and cabinets and projecting ledges.
.9
Finish inside of cupboards and cabinets as specified for outside surfaces.
.10
Finish closets and alcoves as specified for adjoining rooms.
.11
Finish top, bottom, edges and cutouts of doors after fitting as specified for door surfaces.
3.6
MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
.1
Unless otherwise specified, paint finished area exposed conduits, piping, hangers,
ductwork and other mechanical and electrical equipment with colour and finish to match
adjacent surfaces, except as noted otherwise.
.2
Boiler room, mechanical and electrical rooms: paint exposed conduits, piping, hangers,
ductwork and other mechanical and electrical equipment.
.3
Other unfinished areas: leave exposed conduits, piping, hangers, ductwork and other
mechanical and electrical equipment in original finish and touch up scratches and marks.
.4
Touch up scratches and marks on factory painted finishes and equipment with paint as
supplied by manufacturer of equipment.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
INTERIOR PAINTING
Section 09 91 23
Page 12
2016-01-13
.5
Do not paint over nameplates.
.6
Keep sprinkler heads free of paint.
.7
Paint inside of ductwork where visible behind grilles, registers and diffusers with primer
and one coat of matt black paint.
.8
Paint fire protection piping red.
.9
Paint disconnect switches for fire alarm system and exit light systems in red enamel.
.10
Paint natural gas piping yellow.
.11
Paint both sides and edges of backboards for telephone and electrical equipment before
installation. Leave equipment in original finish except for touch-up as required, and paint
conduits, mounting accessories and other unfinished items.
.12
Do not paint interior transformers and substation equipment.
3.7
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Field inspection of painting operations to be carried out by independent inspection firm as
designated by Departmental Representative.
.2
Advise Departmental Representative when surfaces and applied coating is ready for
inspection. Do not proceed with subsequent coats until previous coat has been approved.
.3
Co-operate with inspection firm and provide access to areas of work.
3.8
RESTORATION
.1
Clean and re-install all hardware items removed before undertaken painting operations.
.2
Remove protective coverings and warning signs as soon as practical after operations cease.
.3
Remove paint splashings on exposed surfaces that were not painted. Remove smears and
spatter immediately as operations progress, using compatible solvent.
.4
Protect freshly completed surfaces from paint droppings and dust to approval of
Departmental Representative. Avoid scuffing newly applied paint.
.5
Restore areas used for storage, cleaning, mixing and handling of paint to clean condition as
approved by Departmental Representative.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
COMMON WORK RESULTS - FOR MECHANICAL
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
.1
Section 21 05 01
Page 1
2016-01-13
It is the responsibility of the Constructor to make requirements for affected related
specification sections, and any requirements for alternates and sub situations available to
Subcontractors:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
Subcontractors to receive a complete set of Documents for preparation of their
Bids, and to provide a clear understanding of the complete scope-of-work for the
Project.
Failure to provide required information to Subcontractors during the bid and
Construction Phases of the Work will not relieve the Constructor of their
responsibility for coordination of the affected Work.
Constructor is responsible for any additional costs to the Contractor arising from
Subcontractors not receiving a complete package of Documents.
Provide complete coordination between Mechanical Divisions to attain a
complete and functional building system; Mechanical Divisions include, but are
not limited to, the following:
.1
Division 21 – Mechanical Common Requirements
.2
Division 21 – Fire Suppression
.3
Division 22 – Plumbing
.4
Division 23 – Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning
.5
Division 25 – Integrated Automation
Provide complete, fully tested and operational mechanical systems to meet
requirements described herein and in complete accord with applicable codes and
ordinances:
.1
Comply with the National Building Code
Include costs to obtain permits and to pay for fees and charges, including
inspection charges, by Authorities Having Jurisdiction that issue permits;
coordinate related inspections; permits, fees, and inspections include, but are not
limited to the following:
.1
Plumbing and Gas
.2
HVAC
.3
Sprinklers and Fire Protection
Documents for the Project, including Specifications and Drawings, are generally
diagrammatic and approximately to scale unless specifically detailed otherwise;
the establish scope, material, and installation quality, and are not considered as
detailed installation instructions.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
1.2
COMMON WORK RESULTS - FOR MECHANICAL
Section 21 05 01
Page 2
2016-01-13
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
.1
Coordination: Cooperate and coordinate with other trades and verify order of installation
of overlapping or interconnecting services or equipment before starting Work:
.1
Drawings and Specifications: Drawings and specifications are complementary to
each other; and what is called for by one is binding as if called for by both and as
follows:
.1
Examine Contract Documents including drawings and specifications, and
work of other trades before starting Work and verify that Work can be
satisfactorily completed without changes to the building.
.2
Departmental Representative will provide a clarification to identified
discrepancies between drawings and specifications that leave the
Contractor in doubt as to the true intent and meaning of the documents as
follows:
.1
During Bid Period: A written Addendum will be issued to
address a written request for clarification
.2
During Construction: A Construction Communication will be
issued to address a written request for information
.3
Departmental Representative will respond to Requests for Interpretation
and determine the requirements for clarification based only on variances
contained in the documents as follows:
.1
Clarification based on information and not contained in the
documents or in manufacturers written literature will be regarded
as a change to the Work
.2
Clarification will include effects or influence of other specified
products, adjacent construction, adjacent finishes, and methods
of construction.
.3
Clarification issued during Construction Phase that affects the
cost of the Work will be regarded as a Change to the Work.
.4
Coordinate installation of the Work with manufacturer's recommended
installation details and procedures, supplemented by requirements of
Contract Documents; provide adequate access space for maintenance and
service of equipment and systems.
.5
Coordinate location of access to cleanouts, valves, equipment, and duct
access doors above continuous ceilings; coordinate access panel and door
requirements with Section 08 31 00.
.6
Coordinate installation of Work with adjacent work by others in
accordance with requirements listed in Section 01 73 00 and as follows:
.1
Install material and equipment generally in locations and routes
shown, close to building structure with minimum interference
with other services or free space; remove and replace improperly
installed equipment as determined by Departmental
Representative
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
COMMON WORK RESULTS - FOR MECHANICAL
Section 21 05 01
Page 3
2016-01-13
.2
.7
1.3
Refer to electrical, mechanical, structural and architectural
drawings when setting out work and coordinate with other
applicable components of the Work when setting out locations
for ductwork, equipment, and piping so that conflicts are avoided
and symmetrical even spacing is maintained.
.3
Provide coordination drawings showing the work of other trades
and contractors involved in areas of potential conflict or
congestion at no additional cost to the Contract.
.4
Coordinate dimensional details with applicable architectural and
structural drawings.
.5
Full size and detailed drawings will take precedence over scale
measurements from drawings when laying out the Work.
.6
Coordinate requirements of, and connect to, equipment specified
in other Sections, and to equipment supplied and installed by
other contractors or by Departmental Representative; uncrate
equipment, assemble, move in place, and install complete, startup and test; refer to Division 01 for pre-purchased equipment
and equipment furnished by other Divisions.
Declarations: Coordinate declaration of Substantial Performance and
Total Performance with requirements of the General Conditions and
Supplementary Conditions of Contract and with Section 01 77 00.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product Data:
.1
.3
Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for
mechanical equipment and include product characteristics, performance criteria,
physical size, finish and limitations.
Shop drawings:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Where stated in respective specification sections, submit drawings stamped and
signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Province of Ontario,
Canada.
Drawings to show:
.1
Mounting arrangements.
.2
Operating and maintenance clearances.
Drawings and product data accompanied by:
.1
Detailed drawings of bases, supports, and anchor bolts.
.2
Acoustical sound power data, where applicable.
.3
Points of operation on performance curves.
.4
Manufacturer to certify current model production.
.5
Certification of compliance to applicable codes.
In addition to transmittal letter referred to in Section 01 33 00: use MCAC "Shop
Drawing Submittal Title Sheet". Identify section and paragraph number.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.5
.6
.7
COMMON WORK RESULTS - FOR MECHANICAL
Section 21 05 01
Page 4
2016-01-13
Identify materials and equipment submittals by listing manufacturer, trade name,
and model number, and as follows:
.1
Detailed drawings of bases, supports, operating weight and anchor bolts.
.2
Acoustical sound power data, where applicable.
.3
Points of operation on performance curves.
.4
Manufacturer to certify current model production.
.5
Certification of compliance to applicable codes.
.6
Include copies of applicable brochure or catalogue material.
.7
Do not assume that applicable catalogues are available in Consultants
office.
.8
Maintenance and operating manuals will not be considered as suitable
submittal material.
.9
Leave space on shop drawing to accommodate Consultants review
stamp.
.10
Clearly mark each shop drawing with identical name or number where
equipment is identified by name or number on drawings or in
specifications.
.11
Clearly identify dimensional and technical data sufficient to verify that
equipment meets specified requirements.
.12
Clearly identify wiring, piping, service connection data and motor sizes.
.13
Clearly mark each submittal sheet using arrows, underlining, or circling
to indicate differences between specifications and options proposed for
use in the Work, such as differences in sizes, types, model numbers,
rating, capacities, and similar criteria.
.14
Specifically note specified features included as a part of the submittal,
such as special tank linings, pump seals, materials or painting.
.15
Strike out non-applicable material.
Review shop drawings prior to submittal to Consultant certifying that:
.1
Site measurements are verified and correct.
.2
Site construction criteria, materials, catalogue numbers and similar data
are coordinated with shop drawings and requirements of the Work.
.3
Certify review of each shop drawing by placing Subcontractor’s and
Constructor’s review stamps, date and signatures of responsible persons.
.4
Verify installed materials and equipment meet specified requirements
where shop drawings are not provided to Consultant for review.
Use of Metric Units and Conversions in Submittals:
.1
Units expressed in these documents are written in Systems
International (SI) Metric Units; soft metric conversions are used
throughout.
.2
Submit shop drawings and maintenance manuals in SI Units; use same SI
Units for submittals as stated in specification or drawings.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
1.4
COMMON WORK RESULTS - FOR MECHANICAL
Section 21 05 01
Page 5
2016-01-13
RECORD DRAWINGS
.1
Provide final record (as-built) drawings in digital format (AutoCAD) and Meet the
requirements of Section 01 78 39 – Project Record Documents.
.2
Suitably store and protect drawings on site and make available at all times for inspection.
.1
1.5
Site records:
.1
Contractor to produce 1 set of reproducible mechanical drawings and
create a sets of white prints as required for each phase of work. Mark
changes as work progresses and as changes occur. Include changes to
existing mechanical systems, control systems and low voltage control
wiring.
.2
Transfer information weekly to reproducibles, revising reproducibles to
show work as actually installed.
.3
Use different colour waterproof ink for each service.
.4
Make available for reference purposes and inspection.
.5
Drawings to show inverts of underground piping at building entry/exit
and below floor slab at each branch, riser base, change in direction as
well as at least three points on straight runs.
.6
Show locations of access doors and panels and identify the equipment
and components that they serve.
AS-BUILT DRAWINGS:
.1
Prior to start of Testing, Adjusting and Balancing (TAB) for HVAC, finalize production
of as-built drawings.
.2
Identify each drawing in lower right hand corner in letters at least 12 mm high as follows:
- "AS BUILT DRAWINGS: THIS DRAWING HAS BEEN REVISED TO SHOW
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AS INSTALLED" (Signature of Contractor) (Date).
.3
Perform testing, adjusting and balancing for HVAC using as-built drawings.
.4
Submit completed reproducible as-built drawings with Operating and Maintenance
Manuals.
.5
Submit copies of as-built drawings for inclusion in final TAB report.
1.6
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 00.
.2
Operation and Maintenance Data: submit operation and maintenance data of mechanical
equipment for incorporation into manual.
.1
.2
Operation and maintenance manual approved by, and final copies deposited with,
Departmental Representative before final inspection.
Operation data to include:
.1
Control schematics for systems including environmental controls.
.2
Description of systems and their controls.
.3
Description of operation of systems at various loads together with reset
schedules and seasonal variances.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
COMMON WORK RESULTS - FOR MECHANICAL
Section 21 05 01
Page 6
2016-01-13
.4
Operation instruction for systems and component.
.5
Description of actions to be taken in event of equipment failure.
.6
Valves schedule and flow diagram.
.7
Colour coding chart.
Maintenance data to include:
.1
Servicing, maintenance, operation and trouble-shooting instructions for
each item of equipment.
.2
Data to include schedules of tasks, frequency, tools required and task
time.
Performance data to include:
.1
Equipment manufacturer's performance datasheets with point of
operation as left after commissioning is complete.
.2
Equipment performance verification test results.
.3
Special performance data as specified.
.4
Testing, adjusting and balancing reports as specified in Section 23 05 93.
Approvals:
.1
Submit 2 copies of draft Operation and Maintenance Manual to
Departmental Representative for approval. Submission of individual data
will not be accepted unless directed by Departmental Representative.
.2
Make changes as required and re-submit as directed by Departmental
Representative.
Additional data:
.1
Prepare and insert into operation and maintenance manual additional data
when need for it becomes apparent during specified demonstrations and
instructions.
Site records:
.1
Departmental Representative will provide 1 set of reproducible
mechanical drawings. Provide sets of white prints as required for each
phase of work. Mark changes as work progresses and as changes occur.
Include changes to existing mechanical systems, control systems and low
voltage control wiring.
.2
Transfer information weekly to reproducibles, revising reproducibles to
show work as actually installed.
.3
Use different colour waterproof ink for each service.
.4
Make available for reference purposes and inspection.
As-Built drawings:
.1
Prior to start of Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC, finalize
production of as-built drawings.
.2
Identify each drawing in lower right hand corner in letters at least 12 mm
high as follows: "AS BUILT DRAWINGS: THIS DRAWING HAS
BEEN REVISED TO SHOW MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AS
INSTALLED" (Signature of Contractor) (Date).
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
COMMON WORK RESULTS - FOR MECHANICAL
Section 21 05 01
Page 7
2016-01-13
.3
.9
1.7
Submit to Departmental Representative for approval and make
corrections as directed.
.4
Perform testing, adjusting and balancing for HVAC using as-built
drawings.
.5
Submit completed reproducible as-built drawings with Operating and
Maintenance Manuals.
Submit copies of as-built drawings for inclusion in final TAB report.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 00.
.2
Furnish spare parts as follows:
.1
.2
One glass for each gauge glass.
One filter cartridge or set of filter media for each filter or filter bank in addition
to final operating set. Upon handover, contractor to replace all filters utilized
during start-up and construction in all air handling equipment.
.3
Provide one set of special tools required to service equipment as recommended by
manufacturers.
.4
Furnish one commercial quality grease gun, grease and adapters to suit different types of
grease and grease fittings.
1.8
WARRANTY
.1
Provide a written warranty stating that Work executed in this Contract will be free from
defective workmanship and materials for a period of one (1) year starting from the date of
substantial performance of work in accordance with the requirements specified in
Section 01 78 00.
.2
Warranty makes provision for repair or replacement of any Work that fails or becomes
defective during the term of the warranty, providing the operating and maintenance
instructions have been complied with by the Departmental Representative.
.3
Duration of the warranty specified does not, in any way, supplant any other guaranties or
warranties provided under the Contract for individual pieces of equipment or systems
having a longer period provided by Manufacturers or as called for in the project
documents.
.4
Unless specified otherwise, Departmental Representative will be responsible for routine
maintenance requirements as required in the manufacturer’s instructions, and will be
responsible for supplying filters, grease and belts and other consumables required for
routine maintenance.
1.9
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with
manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory
packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.3
Section 21 05 01
Page 8
2016-01-13
Storage and Handling Requirements:
.1
.2
.3
.4
COMMON WORK RESULTS - FOR MECHANICAL
Store materials indoors, off ground, and in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.
Store and protect materials from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.
Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets,
crates, padding and packaging materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
FACTORY APPLIED FINISH PAINTING
.1
Apply prime and final paint coats to equipment and materials supplied as part of this
division.
.2
Use heat resistant paint where conditions require.
.3
Protect factory finished equipment during construction, and clean at completion of work.
.4
Field Painting:
.1
.2
After equipment has been installed and piping and insulation is completed, clean
rust and oil from exposed iron and steel work provided under this Division,
whether or not it has been factory prime painted.
Touch up any damage to prime and final coat resulting from shipping or
installation.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Examination of Existing Conditions
.1
.2
.3
.4
3.2
Visit and examine the site and note characteristics and features affecting the
Work before submitting Bid.
Report discrepancies in writing to Departmental Representative prior to Bid
closing.
No allowances will be made for difficulties encountered or expenses incurred
arising from conditions of the site or existing items that are readily visible or
known to exist at the time of Bid.
Unforeseen conditions or discrepancies that could not be readily ascertained at
the time of Bid will be administered as a change to the Contract.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
.1
Coordinate requirements of the Work with other Divisions.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
COMMON WORK RESULTS - FOR MECHANICAL
Section 21 05 01
Page 9
2016-01-13
Coordinate locations of mechanical penetrations and sleeves through concrete floor
structure including slabs, beams, purlins and girders; coordinate sleeving locations with
other trades and conditions noted on site.
.1
.2
Contractor will prepare coordination drawings for each floor level of the building
indicating requirements of all trades penetrating concrete floor construction.
Contractor to obtain sign-off from affected mechanical subtrades having
penetrations and sleeves before submitting shop drawings to Departmental
Representative for review
.3
Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately upon
discovery.
.4
Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied and after
receipt of written approval to proceed from Departmental Representative.
.5
Provide inserts, holes and sleeves, cutting and fitting required for mechanical work;
relocate improperly located holes and sleeves.
.6
Provide inserts or drill for expansion bolts, hanger rods, brackets, and supports.
.7
Obtain written approval from Departmental Representative before drilling, coring, cutting
or burning structural members; verify that post tensioned or pre-stressed strands are
located accurately and avoid cutting or damaging these elements with an adequate margin
of safety.
.8
The Contractor is responsible to patch and make good building where damaged from
equipment installation, improperly located holes and similar criteria.
3.3
USE OF PERMANENT SYSTEMS FOR TEMPORARY HEAT
.1
Coordinate requirements for use of permanent heating systems for temporary heat in
accordance with Section 01 51 00; do not use permanent system for temporary heating
purposes without written permission from Departmental Representative; protect and
restore permanent systems as specified in Section 01 51 00.
.2
Provide a proposed temporary heat agreement for Departmental Representative to review
prior to use of permanent building systems for temporary heat; agreement includes
payment schedules for utilities, spare parts listings, and confirmation of warranty.
.3
The terms of warranty are not modified by the use of permanent systems for temporary
heat; equipment manufacturers certify that equipment is in "new" condition at start of
warranty period, and as follows:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Block-off system components not required for temporary heat in accordance with
manufacturer’s requirement to maintain warranty.
Thoroughly clean and overhaul permanent equipment used during construction
period, replace worn or damaged parts before final inspection.
Operate heating systems under conditions that allow no temporary or permanent
damage.
Operate with proper safety devices and controls installed and fully operational.
Operate systems only with treated water as specified.
Air systems may not be used for temporary heating.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.7
.8
.9
.4
Section 21 05 01
Page 10
2016-01-13
Provide alarm indicating system failure; connect alarm to independent alarm
company system.
Replace mechanical seals, regardless of condition, with new mechanical seals
where pumps are used for temporary heating prior to Total Performance of the
Work.
Avoid thermal shock to heating system during planning, construction and
operation of temporary heating system.
Review temporary heating procedures with Departmental Representative as follows:
.1
.2
3.4
COMMON WORK RESULTS - FOR MECHANICAL
Obtain acceptance by Departmental Representative for thermal insulation work
and automatic control equipment associated with use of permanent heating
system for temporary heat.
Obtain approval from Departmental Representative and authority having
jurisdiction before use of permanent heating system for temporary heat.
EXISTING SERVICES
.1
Maintain liaison with Departmental Representative to interrupt, re-route, or connect to
water, sewer, heating, or gas systems, with minimum interruption of services.
.2
Do not shut down or make connections to any existing service without written permission
from the Departmental Representative.
.3
Confirm elevations and locations of existing services prior to and during excavation.
.4
Route pipes, ducts, conduits and other services to avoid interference with existing
installation.
.5
Cut back and cap existing services not being used, so that finished Work presents a neat
and clean appearance.
.6
Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to existing systems, including insulation
and coverings, when making connections.
.7
Existing facility to be in operation throughout the duration of Construction, with
minimum length of system shut-down periods.
.8
Include overtime work for tie-in piping, ductwork, or wiring at night or on weekends.
.9
Provide Departmental Representative with as-built drawings of site services in
accordance with Section 01 78 00; dimensioned to grid lines, building exterior walls or
other permanent building component.
3.5
EQUIPMENT PROTECTION AND CLEAN-UP
.1
Protect equipment and materials in storage on site during and after installation until final
acceptance; leave factory covers in place; take special precautions to prevent entry of
foreign material into working parts of piping and duct systems.
.2
Protect equipment with polyethylene covers and crates.
.3
Operate, drain and flush out bearings and refill with new change of oil, before final
acceptance.
.4
Clean piping, ducts and equipment of dirt, cuttings and other foreign substances in
accordance with Section 01 74 11.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
COMMON WORK RESULTS - FOR MECHANICAL
Section 21 05 01
Page 11
2016-01-13
.5
Protect bearings and shafts during installation: Grease shafts and sheaves to prevent
corrosion. Supply and install necessary extended nipples for lubrication purposes.
.6
Clean interior and exterior of all systems including strainers. Vacuum interior of
ductwork and air handling unit.
3.6
PAINTING REPAIRS AND RESTORATION
.1
Do painting in accordance with Section 09 91 23.
.2
Prime and touch up marred finished paintwork to match original.
.3
Restore to new condition, finishes which have been damaged.
3.7
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Site Tests: conduct following tests in accordance with Section 01 45 00 and submit report
as described in PART 1 - ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS.
.2
Manufacturer's Field Services:
.1
.2
3.8
Obtain written report from manufacturer verifying compliance of Work, in
handling, installing, applying, protecting and cleaning of product and submit
Manufacturer's Field Reports as described in PART 1 - ACTION AND
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS.
Provide manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations
and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
DEMONSTRATION
.1
Departmental Representative will use equipment and systems for test purposes prior to
acceptance. Supply labour, material, and instruments required for testing.
.2
Trial usage to apply to following equipment and systems:
.1
.2
Air Handling Units
Packaged Air Conditioning Units
.3
Supply tools, equipment and personnel to demonstrate and instruct operating and
maintenance personnel in operating, controlling, adjusting, trouble-shooting and
servicing of all systems and equipment during regular work hours, prior to acceptance.
.4
Use operation and maintenance manual, as-built drawings, and audio visual aids as part
of instruction materials.
.5
Instruction duration time requirements as specified in appropriate sections.
.6
Contractor will record these demonstrations on video tape for future reference.
3.9
PROTECTION
.1
Protect equipment and systems openings from dirt, dust, and other foreign materials with
materials appropriate to system.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR
FIRE SUPPRESSION
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product Data:
.1
.3
Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for
equipment specified in Division 21 and include product characteristics,
performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.
Shop Drawings:
.1
.2
.3
1.2
Section 21 05 05
Page 1
2016-01-13
Indicate on drawings:
.1
Mounting arrangements.
.2
Operating and maintenance clearances.
Shop drawings and product data accompanied by:
.1
Detailed drawings of bases, supports, and anchor bolts.
.2
Acoustical sound power data, where applicable.
.3
Points of operation on performance curves.
.4
Manufacturer to certify current model production.
.5
Certification of compliance to applicable codes.
In addition to transmittal letter referred to in Section 01 33 00: use MCAC "Shop
Drawing Submittal Title Sheet". Identify section and paragraph number.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 00.
.2
Operation and Maintenance Data: submit operation and maintenance data for sprinkler
heads and fire hose cabinet for incorporation into manual.
.1
.2
.3
Operation and maintenance manual approved by, and final copies deposited with,
Departmental Representative before final inspection.
Operation data to include:
.1
Control schematics for systems including environmental controls.
.2
Description of systems and their controls.
.3
Description of operation of systems at various loads together with reset
schedules and seasonal variances.
.4
Operation instruction for systems and component.
.5
Description of actions to be taken in event of equipment failure.
.6
Valves schedule and flow diagram.
.7
Colour coding chart.
Maintenance data to include:
.1
Servicing, maintenance, operation and trouble-shooting instructions for
each item of equipment.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
1.3
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR
FIRE SUPPRESSION
.2
Data to include schedules of tasks, frequency, tools required and task time.
Performance data to include:
.1
Equipment manufacturer's performance datasheets with point of operation
as left after commissioning is complete.
.2
Equipment performance verification test results.
.3
Special performance data as specified.
.4
Testing, adjusting and balancing reports as specified in Section 23 05 93.
Approvals:
.1
Submit 2 copies of draft Operation and Maintenance Manual to
Departmental Representative for approval. Submission of individual data
will not be accepted unless directed by Departmental Representative.
.2
Make changes as required and re-submit as directed by Departmental
Representative.
Additional data:
.1
Prepare and insert into operation and maintenance manual additional data
when need for it becomes apparent during specified demonstrations and
instructions.
Site records:
.1
Departmental Representative will provide 1 set of reproducible
mechanical drawings. Provide sets of prints as required for each phase of
work. Mark changes as work progresses and as changes occur. Include
changes to existing mechanical systems, control systems and low voltage
control wiring.
.2
Transfer information weekly to reproducibles, revising reproducibles to
show work as actually installed.
.3
Use different colour waterproof ink for each service.
.4
Make available for reference purposes and inspection.
As-Built drawings:
.1
Prior to start of Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC, finalize
production of as-built drawings.
.2
Identify each drawing in lower right hand corner in letters at least 12 mm
high as follows: "AS BUILT DRAWINGS: THIS DRAWING HAS
BEEN REVISED TO SHOW MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AS
INSTALLED" (Signature of Contractor) (Date).
.3
Submit to Departmental Representative for approval and make corrections
as directed.
.4
Perform testing, adjusting and balancing for HVAC using as-built
drawings.
.5
Submit completed reproducible as-built drawings with Operating and
Maintenance Manuals.
Submit copies of as-built drawings for inclusion in final TAB report.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Section 21 05 05
Page 2
2016-01-13
Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 00.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR
FIRE SUPPRESSION
Section 21 05 05
Page 3
2016-01-13
Furnish spare parts as follows:
.1
One glass for each gauge glass.
.3
Provide one set of special tools required to service equipment as recommended by
manufacturers and in accordance with Section 01 78 00.
.4
Furnish one commercial quality grease gun, grease and adapters to suit different types of
grease and grease fittings.
1.4
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with
manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory
packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address.
.3
Storage and Handling Requirements:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Store materials off ground, indoors, and in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.
Store and protect fire suppression equipment from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.
Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets,
crates, padding and packaging materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Refer to related sections
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Verification of Conditions: verify that site conditions of are acceptable for installation of
fire suppression systems in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
.1
.2
.3
3.2
Visually inspect site conditions where fire suppression systems are to be installed.
Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately
upon discovery.
Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied.
PAINTING REPAIRS AND RESTORATION
.1
Do painting in accordance with Section 09 91 23.
.2
Prime and touch up marred finished paintwork to match original.
.3
Restore to new condition, finishes which have been damaged.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
3.3
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR
FIRE SUPPRESSION
Section 21 05 05
Page 4
2016-01-13
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Site Tests: conduct following tests in accordance with Section 01 45 00 and submit report
as described in PART 1 - ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS.
.2
Manufacturer's Field Services:
.1
.2
3.4
Obtain written report from manufacturer verifying compliance of Work, in
handling, installing, applying, protecting and cleaning of product and submit
Manufacturer's Field Reports as described in PART 1 - ACTION AND
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS.
Provide manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations
and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
DEMONSTRATION
.1
Departmental Representative will use equipment and systems for test purposes prior to
acceptance. Supply labour, material, and instruments required for testing.
.2
Supply tools, equipment and personnel to demonstrate and instruct operating and
maintenance personnel in operating, controlling, adjusting, trouble-shooting and servicing
of all systems and equipment during regular work hours, prior to acceptance.
.3
Use operation and maintenance manual, as-built drawings, and audio visual aids as part of
instruction materials.
.4
Instruction duration time requirements as specified in appropriate sections.
.5
Departmental Representative will record these demonstrations on video tape for future
reference.
3.5
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.1
Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
.2
Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment
in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.3
Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with
Section 01 74 20.
.1
3.6
Remove recycling containers and bins from site and dispose of materials at
appropriate facility.
PROTECTION
.1
Protect equipment and systems openings from dirt, dust, and other foreign materials with
materials appropriate to system.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
National Fire Prevention Association (NFPA)
.1
.2
.2
NFPA 13-2010, Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
NFPA 25-2008, Standard for the Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of
Water-Based Fire Protection Systems.
Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada (ULC)
.1
.2
1.2
Section 21 13 13
Page 1
2016-01-13
CAN/ULC-S543-09, Standard for Internal Lug Quick Connect Coupling for Fire
Hose.
CAN/ULC-S543-09-AM1, Amendment 1 to Standard for Internal Lug Quick
Connect Coupling for Fire Hose.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product Data:
.1
.3
Shop Drawings:
.1
.4
Submit certified test reports for wet pipe fire protection sprinkler systems from
approved independent testing laboratories, indicating compliance with
specifications for specified performance characteristics and physical properties.
Certificates:
.1
.7
Submit samples of following:
.1
Each type of sprinkler head.
Test reports:
.1
.6
Indicate:
.1
Materials.
.2
Finishes.
.3
Temperature Rating.
.4
Assembly details.
.5
Accessories.
Samples:
.1
.5
Provide manufacturer's printed product literature and data sheets, and include
product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.
Submit certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that materials comply with
specified performance characteristics and physical properties.
Manufacturers' Instructions:
.1
Provide manufacturer's installation instructions.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.8
Section 21 13 13
Page 2
2016-01-13
Field Quality Control Submittals:
.1
1.3
WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
Manufacturer's Field Reports: manufacturer's field reports specified.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide operation, maintenance and engineering data for incorporation into manual
specified in Section 01 78 00.
.2
Manufacturer's Catalog Data, including specific model, type, and size for:
.1
.2
.3
.3
Drawings:
.1
.4
As-built drawings of each system.
.1
After completion, but before final acceptance, submit complete set of
as-built drawings of each system for record purposes.
.2
Submit 760 mm by 1050 mm drawings with title block similar to full size
contract drawings.
.3
Submit as-built drawings in AutoCAD format for recording keeping at
completion of project
Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
.1
1.4
Preliminary tests on piping system.
Records:
.1
.6
Sprinkler heads and piping system layout.
.1
Prepare 760 mm by 1050 mm detailed working drawings of system layout
in accordance with NFPA 13, "Working Drawings (Plans)".
.2
Show data essential for proper installation of each system.
.3
Show details, plan view, elevations, and sections of systems supply and
piping.
Field Test Reports:
.1
.5
Pipe and fittings.
Sprinkler heads.
Mechanical couplings.
Provide Contractors Material and Test Certificate for aboveground piping and
other documentation for incorporation into manual in accordance with NFPA 13.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Qualifications:
.1
.2
Installer: company or person specializing in wet sprinkler systems with
documented experience.
Supply grooved joint couplings, fittings, valves, grooving tools and specialties from a
single manufacturer. Use date stamped castings for coupling housings, fittings, valve
bodies, for quality assurance and traceability.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
1.5
WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
Section 21 13 13
Page 3
2016-01-13
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Extra Materials:
.1
.2
1.6
Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00.
Provide spare sprinklers and tools in accordance with NFPA 13.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with
manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements:
.1
.3
Storage and Protection:
.1
.2
.4
Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with
manufacturer's name, address.
Store materials indoors in dry location.
Store and protect materials from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at
temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer.
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse of pallets, crates, padding, and packaging
materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
.1
Locate sprinkler heads in consistent pattern in ceiling. Avoid interference with lights, and
air supply diffusers.
.2
Devices and equipment for fire protection service: ULC approved for use in wet pipe
sprinkler systems.
.3
Location of Sprinkler Heads:
.1
.2
.4
Water Distribution:
.1
2.2
Locate heads in relation to ceiling and spacing of sprinkler heads not to exceed that
permitted by NFPA 13 for ordinary hazard occupancy.
Positioning of sprinkler heads to be similar to existing conditions on site, with new
concealed heads located in new drywall ceiling.
Make distribution uniform throughout the area in which sprinkler heads will open.
PIPE, FITTINGS AND VALVES
.1
Pipe:
.1
.2
Ferrous: to NFPA 13.
Copper tube: to NFPA 13.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
Ferrous: screwed, welded, flanged or roll grooved.
.1
Grooved joints designed with two ductile iron housing segments, pressure
responsive gasket, and zinc-electroplated steel bolts and nuts. Cast with
offsetting angle-pattern bolt pads for rigidity and visual pad-to-pad offset
contact.
Copper tube: screwed, soldered, brazed, grooved.
Provide threaded fittings into which sprinkler heads, sprinkler head riser nipples,
or drop nipples are threaded.
Plain-end fittings with mechanical couplings and fittings which use steel gripping
devices to bite into pipe when pressure is applied will not be permitted.
Rubber gasketted grooved-end pipe and fittings with mechanical couplings are
permitted in pipe sizes 32 mm and larger.
Fittings: ULC approved for use in wet pipe sprinkler systems.
Ensure fittings, mechanical couplings, and rubber gaskets are supplied by same
manufacturer.
Side outlet tees using rubber gasketted fittings are not permitted.
Sprinkler pipe and fittings: metal.
Pipe hangers:
.1
2.3
Section 21 13 13
Page 4
2016-01-13
Fittings and joints to NFPA 13:
.1
.3
WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
ULC listed for fire protection services in accordance with NFPA.
SPRINKLER HEADS
.1
General: to NFPA 13 and ULC listed for fire services.
.2
Sprinkler Head Type:
.1
.3
Provide nominal 1.2 cm orifice sprinkler heads.
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
2.4
Type D: concealed chrome glass bulb type with ring and cup.
Release element of each head to be of intermediate temperature rating or higher as
suitable for specific application.
Provide polished stainless steel ceiling plates or chromium-plated finish on copper
alloy ceiling plates, and chromium-plated pendent sprinklers below suspended
ceilings.
Provide corrosion-resistant sprinkler heads and sprinkler head guards in
accordance with NFPA 13.
Provide sprinkler heads as indicated on drawings.
Deflector: not more than 75 mm below suspended ceilings.
Ceiling plates: not more than 25 mm deep.
Ceiling cups: not permitted.
PIPE SLEEVES
.1
Provide pipe sleeves where piping passes through walls.
.2
Secure sleeves in position and location during construction.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
Section 21 13 13
Page 5
2016-01-13
.3
Provide sleeves of sufficient length to pass through entire thickness of walls.
.4
Provide 2.5 cm minimum clearance between exterior of piping and interior of sleeve or
core-drilled hole.
.1
.2
.3
.5
Sleeves in Masonry and Concrete Walls, Floors, and Roofs:
.1
.2
2.5
Firmly pack space with mineral wool insulation.
Seal space at both ends of sleeve or core-drilled hole with plastic waterproof
cement which will dry to firm but pliable mass.
In fire walls and fire floors, seal both ends of pipe sleeves or core-drilled holes
with ULC listed fill, void, or cavity material.
Provide hot-dip galvanized steel.
Core drilling of masonry and concrete may be provided in lieu of pipe sleeves
when cavities in core-drilled hole are completely grouted smooth.
ESCUTCHEON PLATES
.1
Provide split hinge type metal plates for piping passing through walls in exposed spaces.
.2
Provide polished stainless steel plates in finished spaces.
.3
Provide paint finish on metal plates in unfinished spaces.
2.6
SIGNS
.1
2.7
Attach properly lettered and approved metal signs to each valve and alarm device to NFPA
13.
SPARE PARTS CABINET
.1
Provide metal cabinet with extra sprinkler heads and sprinkler head wrench adjacent to
each alarm valve. Number and types of extra sprinkler heads as specified in NFPA 13.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
.1
3.2
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications,
including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and
datasheet.
INSTALLATION
.1
3.3
Install, inspect and test to acceptance in accordance with NFPA 13 and NFPA 25.
PIPE INSTALLATION
.1
Install piping straight and true to bear evenly on hangers and supports. Do not hang piping
from plaster ceilings.
.2
Keep interior and ends of new piping and existing piping thoroughly cleaned of water and
foreign matter.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
Section 21 13 13
Page 6
2016-01-13
.3
Keep piping systems clean during installation by means of plugs or other approved
methods. When work is not in progress, securely close open ends of piping to prevent entry
of water and foreign matter.
.4
Inspect piping before placing into position.
3.4
DISINFECTION
.1
Disinfect new piping and existing piping.
.2
Fill piping systems with solution containing minimum of 50 parts per million of chlorine
and allow solution to stand for minimum of 24 hours.
.3
Flush solution from systems with clean water until maximum residual chlorine content is
not greater than 0.2 part per million or residual chlorine content of domestic water supply.
.4
Obtain at least two consecutive satisfactory bacteriological samples from piping, analyzed
by certified laboratory, and submit results prior to piping being placed into service.
3.5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Site Test, Inspection:
.1
.2
.3
3.6
Perform test to determine compliance with specified requirements in presence of
Departmental Representative.
Test, inspect, and approve piping before covering or concealing.
Schedule site visits, to review Work, as directed in PART 1 - QUALITY
ASSURANCE.
CLEANING
.1
Clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.1
.2
Remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.
Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with
Section 01 74 20.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
1.2
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product Data:
.1
.3
Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for
equipment listed in Divisions 21 through 25, and include product characteristics,
performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.
Shop Drawings:
.1
.2
.3
.4
1.3
Section 22 05 00
Page 1
2016-01-13
Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or
licensed in Province of Ontario, Canada.
Indicate on drawings:
.1
Mounting arrangements.
.2
Operating and maintenance clearances.
Shop drawings and product data accompanied by:
.1
Detailed drawings of bases, supports, and anchor bolts.
.2
Acoustical sound power data, where applicable.
.3
Points of operation on performance curves.
.4
Manufacturer to certify current model production.
.5
Certification of compliance to applicable codes.
In addition to transmittal letter referred to in Section 01 33 00: use MCAC "Shop
Drawing Submittal Title Sheet". Identify section and paragraph number.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 00.
.2
Operation and Maintenance Data: submit operation and maintenance data for equipment
for incorporation into manual.
.1
.2
Operation and maintenance manual approved by, and final copies deposited with,
Departmental Representative before final inspection.
Operation data to include:
.1
Control schematics for systems including environmental controls.
.2
Description of systems and their controls.
.3
Description of operation of systems at various loads together with reset
schedules and seasonal variances.
.4
Operation instruction for systems and component.
.5
Description of actions to be taken in event of equipment failure.
.6
Valves schedule and flow diagram.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
Section 22 05 00
Page 2
2016-01-13
.7
Colour coding chart.
Maintenance data to include:
.1
Servicing, maintenance, operation and trouble-shooting instructions for
each item of equipment.
.2
Data to include schedules of tasks, frequency, tools required and task time.
Performance data to include:
.1
Equipment manufacturer's performance datasheets with point of operation
as left after commissioning is complete.
.2
Equipment performance verification test results.
.3
Special performance data as specified.
.4
Testing, adjusting and balancing reports as specified in Section 23 05 93.
Approvals:
.1
Submit 2 copies of draft Operation and Maintenance Manual to
Departmental Representative for approval. Submission of individual data
will not be accepted unless directed by Departmental Representative.
.2
Make changes as required and re-submit as directed by Departmental
Representative.
Additional data:
.1
Prepare and insert into operation and maintenance manual additional data
when need for it becomes apparent during specified demonstrations and
instructions.
Site records:
.1
Departmental Representative will provide 1 set of reproducible
mechanical drawings. Provide sets of white prints as required for each
phase of work. Mark changes as work progresses and as changes occur.
Include changes to existing mechanical systems, control systems and low
voltage control wiring.
.2
Transfer information weekly to reproducibles, revising reproducibles to
show work as actually installed.
.3
Use different colour waterproof ink for each service.
.4
Make available for reference purposes and inspection.
As-built drawings:
.1
Prior to start of Testing, Adjusting and Balancing, finalize production of
as-built drawings.
.2
Identify each drawing in lower right hand corner in letters at least 12 mm
high as follows: - "AS BUILT DRAWINGS: THIS DRAWING HAS
BEEN REVISED TO SHOW MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AS
INSTALLED" (Signature of Contractor) (Date).
.3
Submit to Departmental Representative for approval and make corrections
as directed.
.4
Perform testing, adjusting and balancing using as-built drawings.
.5
Submit completed reproducible as-built drawings with Operating and
Maintenance Manuals.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.9
1.4
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
Section 22 05 00
Page 3
2016-01-13
Submit copies of as-built drawings for inclusion in final TAB report.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 00.
.2
Provide one set of special tools required to service equipment as recommended by
manufacturers.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with
manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory
packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address.
.3
Storage and Handling Requirements:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Store materials indoors, off ground, and in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.
Store and protect equipment from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.
Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets,
crates, padding and packaging materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not used.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Examination of Existing Conditions
.1
.2
.3
.4
3.2
Visit and examine the site and note characteristics and features affecting the Work
before submitting Bid.
Report discrepancies in writing to Consultant prior to Bid closing.
No allowances will be made for difficulties encountered or expenses incurred
arising from conditions of the site or existing items that are readily visible or
known to exist at the time of Bid.
Unforeseen conditions or discrepancies that could not be readily ascertained at the
time of Bid will be administered as a change to the Contract.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
.1
Coordinate requirements of the Work with Section 01 73 29 – Cutting and Patching.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
Section 22 05 00
Page 4
2016-01-13
Coordinate locations of mechanical penetrations and sleeves through concrete floor
structure including slabs, beams, purlins and girders; coordinate sleeving locations with
other Divisions
.1
.2
Contractor will prepare coordination drawings for each floor level of the building
indicating requirements of all trades penetrating concrete floor construction.
Contractor to obtain sign-off from affected mechanical subtrades having
penetrations and sleeves before submitting shop drawings to Consultant for review
.3
Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately upon
discovery.
.4
Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied and after
receipt of written approval to proceed from Departmental Representative.
.5
Provide inserts, holes and sleeves, cutting and fitting required for mechanical work;
relocate improperly located holes and sleeves.
.6
Provide inserts or drill for expansion bolts, hanger rods, brackets, and supports.
.7
Obtain written approval from Consultant before drilling, coring, cutting or burning
structural members; verify that post tensioned or pre-stressed strands are located accurately
and avoid cutting or damaging these elements with an adequate margin of safety.
.8
The Contractor is responsible to patch and make good building where damaged from
equipment installation, improperly located holes and similar criteria.
3.3
EXISTING SERVICES
.1
Maintain liaison with Owner to interrupt, re-route, or connect to water, sewer, heating, or
gas systems, with minimum interruption of services.
.2
Do not shut down or make connections to any existing service without written permission
from the Owner.
.3
Confirm elevations and locations of existing services prior to and during excavation.
.4
Route pipes, ducts, conduits and other services to avoid interference with existing
installation.
.5
Cut back and cap existing services not being used, so that finished Work presents a neat
and clean appearance.
.6
Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to existing systems, including insulation
and coverings, when making connections.
.7
Existing facility to be in operation throughout the duration of Construction, with minimum
length of system shut-down periods.
.8
Include overtime work for tie-in piping, ductwork, or wiring at night or on weekends.
.9
Provide Consultant with as-built drawings of site services in accordance with
Section 01 78 00; dimensioned to grid lines, building exterior walls or other permanent
building component.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
3.4
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
Section 22 05 00
Page 5
2016-01-13
EQUIPMENT PROTECTION AND CLEAN-UP
.1
Protect equipment and materials in storage on site during and after installation until final
acceptance; leave factory covers in place; take special precautions to prevent entry of
foreign material into working parts of piping and duct systems.
.2
Protect equipment with polyethylene covers and crates.
.3
Operate, drain and flush out bearings and refill with new change of oil, before final
acceptance.
.4
Clean piping, ducts and equipment of dirt, cuttings and other foreign substances in
accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.5
Protect bearings and shafts during installation: Grease shafts and sheaves to prevent
corrosion. Supply and install necessary extended nipples for lubrication purposes.
.6
Clean interior and exterior of all systems including strainers. Vacuum interior of ductwork
and air handling unit.
3.5
PAINTING REPAIRS AND RESTORATION
.1
Do painting in accordance with Section 09 91 23.
.2
Prime and touch up marred finished paintwork to match original.
.3
Restore to new condition, finishes which have been damaged.
3.6
SYSTEM CLEANING
.1
3.7
Clean interior and exterior of all systems including strainers. Vacuum interior of ductwork
and air handling units.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Site Tests: conduct following tests in accordance with Section 01 45 00 and submit report
as described in PART 1 -ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS.
.2
Manufacturer's Field Services:
.1
.2
3.8
Obtain written report from manufacturer verifying compliance of Work, in
handling, installing, applying, protecting and cleaning of product and submit
Manufacturer's Field Reports as described in PART 1 - ACTION AND
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS.
Provide manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations
and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
DEMONSTRATION
.1
Departmental Representative will use equipment and systems for test purposes prior to
acceptance. Supply labour, material, and instruments required for testing.
.2
Trial usage to apply to following equipment and systems:
.1
.2
Domestic water
Sanitary piping
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
Section 22 05 00
Page 6
2016-01-13
.3
Supply tools, equipment and personnel to demonstrate and instruct operating and
maintenance personnel in operating, controlling, adjusting, trouble-shooting and servicing
of all systems and equipment during regular work hours, prior to acceptance.
.4
Use operation and maintenance manual, as-built drawings, and audio visual aids as part of
instruction materials.
.5
Instruction duration time requirements as specified in appropriate sections.
.6
Contractor will record these demonstrations on video tape for future reference.
3.9
PROTECTION
.1
Protect equipment and systems openings from dirt, dust, and other foreign materials with
materials appropriate to system.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/American Society of Mechanical Engineers
International (ASME).
.1
.2
.2
NRCC 47668, National Plumbing Code of Canada (NPC) - 2010.
Transport Canada (TC)
.1
1.2
MSS-SP-67-2011, Butterfly Valves.
MSS-SP-70-2011, Gray Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.
MSS-SP-71-2011, Gray Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.
MSS-SP-80-2013, Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves.
National Research Council (NRC)/Institute for Research in Construction
.1
.9
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS).
.1
.2
.3
.4
.8
Canadian Environmental Protection Act, 1999, c. 33 (CEPA).
Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)
.1
.7
CSA B242-05(R2011), Groove and Shoulder Type Mechanical Pipe Couplings.
Department of Justice Canada (Jus)
.1
.6
ASTM A307-12, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and
Threaded Rod 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength.
ASTM B88M-13, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube
(Metric).
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International)
.1
.5
ASME B16.15-2013, Cast Copper Alloy Threaded Fittings: Classes 125 and 250.
ASME B16.18-2012, Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
ASME B16.22-2001(R2005), Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint
Pressure Fittings
ASTM International Inc. (ASTM)
.1
.4
ANSI/ASME B16.24-2001(2006), Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and Flanged
Fittings.
American Society of Mechanical Engineers International (ASME)
.1
.2
.3
.3
Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act, 1992, c. 34 (TDGA).
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Section 22 11 16
Page 1
2016-01-13
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
Provide manufacturer's printed product literature and datasheets for insulation and
adhesives, and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size,
finish and limitations.
Closeout Submittals:
.1
1.3
Section 22 11 16
Page 2
2016-01-13
Product Data:
.1
.3
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section
01 78 00.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Packaging Waste Management:
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.2
Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic in designated containers.
.3
Handle and dispose of hazardous materials in accordance with CEPA, TDGA, Regional
and Municipal regulations.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPING
.1
Domestic hot, cold and recirculation systems, within building.
.1
.2
2.2
Above ground: copper tube, hard drawn, type L: to ASTM B88M.
Buried or embedded: copper tube, soft annealed, type K: to ASTM B88M, in long
lengths and with no buried joints.
FITTINGS
.1
Bronze pipe flanges and flanged fittings, Class 150 and 300: to ANSI/ASME B16.24.
.2
Cast bronze threaded fittings, Class 125 and 250: to ASME B16.15.
.3
Cast copper, solder type: to ASME B16.18.
.4
Wrought copper and copper alloy, solder type: to ASME B16.22.
.5
NPS 2 and larger: roll grooved to CSA B242.
2.3
JOINTS
.1
Rubber gaskets, latex-free 1.6 mm thick: to AWWA C111.
.2
Bolts, nuts, hex head and washers: to ASTM A307, heavy series.
.3
Solder: lead free.
.4
Teflon tape: for threaded joints.
.5
Grooved couplings: designed with angle bolt pads to provide rigid joint, complete with
EPDM flush seal gasket.
.6
Dielectric connections between dissimilar metals: dielectric fitting, complete with
thermoplastic liner.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
2.4
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
Section 22 11 16
Page 3
2016-01-13
VALVES
.1
Refer to section 23 05 23.01 for details.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATION
.1
3.2
Manufacturer's Instructions: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations,
including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and
datasheets.
INSTALLATION
.1
Install in accordance with NPC.
.2
Install pipe work in accordance with Section 23 05 01, supplemented as specified herein.
.3
Assemble piping using fittings manufactured to ANSI standards.
.4
Install CWS piping below and away from HWS and HWC and other hot piping so as to
maintain temperature of cold water as low as possible.
.5
Connect to fixtures and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions
unless otherwise indicated.
3.3
VALVES
.1
3.4
Isolate equipment, fixtures and branches with ball valves.
PRESSURE TESTS
.1
Conform to requirements of Section 22 05 01.
.2
Test pressure: greater of maximum system operating pressure or 860 kPa.
3.5
FLUSHING AND CLEANING
.1
3.6
Flush entire system for 8 h. Ensure outlets flushed for 2 h. Let stand for 24 h, then draw one
sample off longest run. Submit to testing laboratory to verify that system is clean to Federal
potable water guidelines. Let system flush for additional 2 h, then draw off another sample
for testing.
PRE-START-UP INSPECTIONS
.1
Systems to be complete, prior to flushing, testing and start-up.
.2
Verify that system can be completely drained.
.3
Ensure that pressure booster systems are operating properly.
.4
Ensure that air chambers, expansion compensators are installed properly.
3.7
DISINFECTION
.1
Flush out, disinfect and rinse system to requirements of authority having jurisdiction.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
3.8
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
Section 22 11 16
Page 4
2016-01-13
Upon completion, provide laboratory test reports on water quality for Departmental
Representative approval.
START-UP
.1
Timing: Start up after:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Pressure tests have been completed.
Disinfection procedures have been completed.
Certificate of static completion has been issued.
Water treatment systems operational.
.2
Provide continuous supervision during start-up.
.3
Start-up procedures:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.4
3.9
Establish circulation and ensure that air is eliminated.
Check pressurization to ensure proper operation and to prevent water hammer,
flashing and/or cavitation.
Bring domestic hot water storage tank up to design temperature slowly.
Monitor piping systems for freedom of movement, pipe expansion as designed.
Check control, limit, safety devices for normal and safe operation.
Rectify start-up deficiencies.
PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION
.1
Scheduling:
.1
.2
Procedures:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.3
Verify system performance after pressure and leakage tests and disinfection are
completed, and Certificate of Completion has been issued by authority having
jurisdiction.
Verify that flow rate and pressure meet Design Criteria.
TAB in accordance with Section 23 05 93.
Adjust pressure regulating valves while withdrawal is maximum and inlet pressure
is minimum.
Sterilize piping systems for Legionella control.
Verify performance of temperature controls.
Verify compliance with safety and health requirements.
Check for proper operation of water hammer arrestors. Run one outlet for 10
seconds, then shut of water immediately. If water hammer occurs, replace water
hammer arrestor or re-charge air chambers. Repeat for outlets and flush valves.
Confirm water quality consistent with supply standards, and ensure no residuals
remain as result of flushing or cleaning.
Reports:
.1
Provide report detailing testing/verification procedure and results.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
3.10
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
Section 22 11 16
Page 5
2016-01-13
OPERATION REQUIREMENTS
.1
3.11
Co-ordinate operation and maintenance requirements including, cleaning and maintenance
of specified materials and products with Section 23 05 01.
CLEANING
.1
Clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
DRAINAGE WASTE AND VENT PIPING
- CAST IRON AND COPPER
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
1.2
Section 22 13 17
Page 1
2016-01-13
Section 22 11 16: Domestic Water Piping
REFERENCES
.1
ASTM International Inc.
.1
.2
.3
.2
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).
.1
.2
.3
.3
CSA B67-1972(R1996), Lead Service Pipe, Waste Pipe, Traps, Bends and
Accessories. NOT ON CSA WEB SITE use another reference standard.
CSA B70-12, Cast Iron Soil Pipe, Fittings and Means of Joining.
CSA B125.3-12, Plumbing Fittings.
Green Seal Environmental Standards (GSES)
.1
1.3
ASTM B32-08, Standard Specification for Solder Metal.
ASTM B306-13, Standard Specification for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV).
ASTM C564-12, Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil
Pipe and Fittings.
Standard GS-36-00, Commercial Adhesives.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product Data:
.1
1.4
Provide manufacturer's printed product literature and datasheets for adhesives, and
include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and
limitations.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle in accordance with Section 01 61 00.
.2
Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name,
address.
.3
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return packaging materials in
accordance with Section 01 74 20.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
DRAINAGE WASTE AND VENT PIPING
- CAST IRON AND COPPER
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
.1
Above ground sanitary and vent: Type DWV to: ASTM B306.
.1
.2
2.2
Section 22 13 17
Page 2
2016-01-13
Fittings.
.1
Cast brass: to CSA B125.3.
.2
Wrought copper: to CSA B125.3.
Solder: lead free, to ASTM B32.
CAST IRON PIPING AND FITTINGS
.1
Above ground sanitary and vent: to CSA B70.
.1
Joints:
.1
Hub and spigot:
.1
Caulking lead: to CSA B67.
.2
Mechanical joints:
.1
Neoprene or butyl rubber compression gaskets with stainless steel
clamps.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATION
.1
3.2
Manufacturer's Instructions: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations,
including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and
datasheets.
INSTALLATION
.1
In accordance with Section 22 05 00.
.2
Install in accordance with National Plumbing Code and local authority having jurisdiction.
3.3
TESTING
.1
3.4
Hydraulically test to verify grades and freedom from obstructions.
PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION
.1
Cleanouts:
.1
.2
.3
Ensure accessible and that access doors are correctly located.
Open, cover with linseed oil and re-seal.
Verify that cleanout rods can probe as far as the next cleanout, at least.
.2
Test to ensure traps are fully and permanently primed.
.3
Ensure that fixtures are properly anchored, connected to system and effectively vented.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.4
3.5
DRAINAGE WASTE AND VENT PIPING
- CAST IRON AND COPPER
Section 22 13 17
Page 3
2016-01-13
Affix applicable label (sanitary, vent, pump discharge etc.) c/w directional arrows every
floor or 4.5 m (whichever is less).
CLEANING
.1
Clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11
.2
Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with
Section 01 74 20.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International)
.1
.2
.3
1.2
Section 22 30 05
Page 1
2016-01-13
CSA B51-03(R2007), Boiler, Pressure Vessel, and Pressure Piping Code.
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.110-94(R2009), Construction and Test of Electric Storage
Tank Water Heaters.
CAN/CSA-C191-04, Performance of Electric Storage Tank Water Heaters for
Household Service.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product Data:
.1
.3
Shop Drawings:
.1
1.3
Provide manufacturer's printed product literature and datasheets for domestic
water heater, and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical
size, finish and limitations.
Indicate:
.1
Equipment, including connections, fittings, control assemblies and
ancillaries, identifying factory and field assembled.
.2
Electrical characteristics including voltage, phase, and current draw
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
.1
1.4
Provide maintenance and engineering data for incorporation into manual specified in
Section 01 78 00.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle in accordance with Section 01 61 00.
.2
Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name,
address.
.3
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets,
crates, padding and packaging materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
1.5
WARRANTY
.1
For the Work of this Section 22 30 05 - Domestic Water Heaters, 12 months warranty
period prescribed in subsection GC3.13 of General Conditions is extended to number of
years specified for each product.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
ELECTRIC WATER HEATER
Section 22 30 05
Page 2
2016-01-13
.1
Heater to be a glass-lined commercial electric domestic water heater
.2
Heater to be constructed in accordance with ASME code, and listed with Underwriters’
Laboratories
.3
All internal surfaces of the tank shall be glass-lined with an alkaline borosilicate
composition that has been fused-to-steel by firing at a temperature of 871oF.
.4
Tank shall be cathodically protected with powered anodes.
.5
Entire vessel is to be enclosed in a round steel enclosure with a baked enamel finish
.6
Temperature controls include limiting switch which will require resetting manually in the
event the temperature reaches 88oC.
.7
Capacity: as indicated on drawings
.8
Dimensions: as indicated on drawings
2.2
TRIM AND INSTRUMENTATION
.1
Drain valve: NPS 1with hose end.
.2
Thermometer: 100 mm dial type with red pointer and thermowell filled with conductive
paste.
.3
Pressure gauge: 75 mm dial type with red pointer, syphon, and shut-off cock.
.4
Thermowell filled with conductive paste for control valve temperature sensor.
.5
ASME rated temperature and pressure relief valve sized for full capacity of heater, having
discharge terminating over floor drain and visible to operators.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATION
.1
3.2
Manufacturer's Instructions: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations,
including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and
datasheets.
INSTALLATION
.1
Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and authority having
jurisdiction.
.2
Provide structural steel for support, as indicated on the drawings.
.3
Provide insulation between tank and supports.
.4
Install natural gas fired domestic water heaters in accordance with CAN/CSA-B149.1.
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Manufacturer's factory trained representative to start up and commission DHW heaters.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
3.4
DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
Section 22 30 05
Page 3
2016-01-13
CLEANING
.1
Clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.1
.2
Remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.
Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with
Section 01 74 20.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes:
.1
.2
.2
.3
Install rough-in for equipment supplied by others, complete with valves on hot and
cold water supplies, waste and vent.
Equipment installed by others.
.1
Connect with unions.
Equipment not installed.
.1
Capped for future connection by others.
Related Sections:
.1
1.2
The supply and installation of Plumbing Fixtures and Trim.
Products Installed but not Supplied Under this Section:
.1
.3
Section 22 42 00
Page 1
2016-01-13
Section 01 35 29.06 - Health and Safety Requirements.
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).
.1
.2
.3
.2
American Society for Mechanical Engineers (ASME)/Canadian Standards
Association(CSA International).
.1
.2
1.3
CAN/CSA-B45 Series-02(R2008), Plumbing Fixtures.
CSA-B125.3-11, Plumbing Fittings.
CAN/CSA-B651-04(R2010), Accessible Design for the Built Environment.
ASME A112.18.1-2011/CSA B125.1-11, Plumbing Supply Fittings.
ASME A112.18.2-2011/CSA B125.2-11, Plumbing Waste Fittings.
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.1
.2
Indicate, for all fixtures and trim:
.1
Dimensions, construction details, roughing-in dimensions.
.2
Size of water and waste connections.
Closeout Submittals:
.1
.2
Submit maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 00.
Include:
.1
Description of fixtures and trim, giving manufacturer's name, type, model,
year, capacity.
.2
Details of operation, servicing, maintenance.
List of recommended spare parts.
.3
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
1.4
COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES
Section 22 42 00
Page 2
2016-01-13
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Health and Safety:
.1
1.5
Do construction occupational health and safety in accordance with Section
01 35 29.06.
DELIVERY STORAGE AND DISPOSAL
.1
Waste Management and Disposal:
.1
.2
.3
Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section
01 74 20.
Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard,
packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with
Waste Management Plan.
Fold up metal and plastic banding, flatten and place in designated area for
recycling.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURED UNITS
.1
Fixtures: manufacture in accordance with CAN/CSA-B45 series.
.2
Trim, fittings: manufacture in accordance with CAN/CSA-B125.
.3
Exposed plumbing brass to be chrome plated.
.4
Number, locations: architectural drawings to govern.
.5
Fixtures in any one location to be product of one manufacturer and of same type.
.6
Trim in any one location to be product of one manufacturer and of same type.
.7
Refer to mechanical drawings for fixture specifications.
.8
Fixture piping:
.1
.2
Hot and cold water supplies to each fixture:
.1
Chrome plated flexible supply pipes each with handwheel stop, reducers,
escutcheon.
Waste:
.1
Brass P trap with clean out on each fixture not having integral trap.
.2
Chrome plated in all exposed places.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Mounting heights:
.1
Standard: to comply with manufacturer's recommendations unless otherwise
indicated or specified.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
3.2
COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES
Section 22 42 00
Page 3
2016-01-13
ADJUSTING
.1
Conform to water conservation requirements specified this section.
.2
Adjustments:
.1
.2
.3
Adjust water flow rate to design flow rates.
Adjust pressure to fixtures to ensure no splashing at maximum pressures.
Checks:
.1
Aerators: operation, cleanliness.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
Section 22 42 01
Page 1
2016-01-13
.1
Section 22 05 00: Common Work Results for Plumbing.
.2
Section 22 11 16: Domestic Water Piping
.3
Section 22 13 17: Drainage Waste and Vent Piping – Cast Iron and Copper
.4
Section 22 13 18: Drainage Waste and Vent Piping – Plastic
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
ASTM International
.1
.2
.2
American Water Works Association (AWWA)
.1
.2
.3
.3
CSA-B64 Series-11, Backflow Preventers and Vacuum Breakers.
CSA B79-08, Commercial and Residential Drains and Cleanouts.
CAN/CSA-B356-10, Water Pressure Reducing Valves for Domestic Water
Supply Systems.
Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI)
.1
.2
1.3
ANSI/AWWA C700-09, Standard for Cold Water Meters-Displacement Type,
Bronze Main Case.
ANSI/AWWA C701-12, Standard for Cold Water Meters-Turbine Type for
Customer Service.
ANSI/AWWA C702-10, Standard for Cold Water Meters-Compound Type.
CSA International
.1
.2
.3
.4
ASTM A126-04(2014), Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for
Valves, Flanges and Pipe Fittings.
ASTM B62-09, Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal
Castings.
PDI-G101-R2010, Testing and Rating Procedure for Grease Interceptors with
Appendix of Installation and Maintenance.
PDI-WH201-R2010, Water Hammer Arresters Standard.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product Data:
.1
Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for
plumbing products and include product characteristics, performance criteria,
physical size, finish and limitations.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.3
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES
Shop Drawings:
.1
Indicate on drawings to indicate materials, finishes, method of anchorage,
number of anchors, dimensions construction and assembly details and
accessories.
.4
Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
.5
Manufacturers' Field Reports: manufacturers' field reports specified.
1.4
Section 22 42 01
Page 2
2016-01-13
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 00.
.2
Operation and Maintenance Data: submit operation and maintenance data for plumbing
specialties and accessories for incorporation into manual.
.1
.2
.3
1.5
Description of plumbing specialties and accessories, giving manufacturers name,
type, model, year and capacity.
Details of operation, servicing and maintenance.
Recommended spare parts list.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with
manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory
packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address.
.3
Storage and Handling Requirements:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Store materials off ground, indoors, in dry location and in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.
Store and protect plumbing materials from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.
Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return in accordance with Section
01 74 20.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
CLEANOUTS
.1
Cleanout Plugs: heavy cast iron male ferrule with brass screws and threaded brass or
bronze plug. Sealing-caulked lead seat or neoprene gasket.
.2
Access Covers:
.1
.2
Wall Access: face or wall type, polished nickel bronze round cover with flush
head securing screws, bevelled edge frame complete with anchoring lugs.
Floor Access: round cast iron body and frame with adjustable secured nickel
bronze top and:
.1
Plugs: bolted bronze with neoprene gasket.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Verification of Conditions: verify that site conditions are acceptable for plumbing
specialties and accessories installation in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions.
.1
.2
.3
3.2
Section 22 42 01
Page 3
2016-01-13
Visually inspect site conditions in area where equipment is to be installed.
Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately
upon discovery.
Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied.
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
.1
3.3
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications,
including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and
data sheet.
INSTALLATION
.1
Install in accordance with National Plumbing Code of Canada and local authority having
jurisdiction.
.2
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified.
3.4
CLEANOUTS
.1
Install cleanouts at base of soil and waste stacks, and rainwater leaders, at locations
required code, and as indicated.
.2
Bring cleanouts to wall or finished floor unless serviceable from below floor.
.3
Building drain cleanout and stack base cleanouts: line size to maximum NPS 4.
3.5
START-UP
.1
General:
.1
.2
Timing: start-up only after:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.3
In accordance with Section 01 91 13: General Requirements, supplemented as
specified herein.
Pressure tests have been completed.
Disinfection procedures have been completed.
Certificate of static completion has been issued.
Water treatment systems operational.
Provide continuous supervision during start-up.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
3.6
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES
Section 22 42 01
Page 4
2016-01-13
TESTING AND ADJUSTING
.1
General:
.1
.2
Timing:
.1
.2
.3
After start-up deficiencies rectified.
After certificate of completion has been issued by authority having jurisdiction.
Cleanouts:
.1
3.7
Test and adjust plumbing specialties and accessories in accordance with Section
01 91 13: General Requirements, supplemented as specified.
Verify covers are gas-tight, secure, yet readily removable.
CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
.1
Commissioning Reports: in accordance with Section 01 91 13: reports, supplemented as
specified.
.2
Training: provide training in accordance with Section 01 91 13: Training of O&M
Personnel, supplemented as specified.
3.8
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.1
Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
.2
Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment
in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.3
Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with
Section 01 74 21.
.1
3.9
Remove recycling containers and bins from site and dispose of materials at
appropriate facility.
PROTECTION
.1
Protect installed products and components from damage during construction.
.2
Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by plumbing specialties and accessories
installation.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
USE OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
DURING CONSTRUCTION
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
RELATED SECTIONS
.1
1.2
Section 23 03 01
Page 1
2016-01-13
Section 01 51 00 - Temporary Utilities.
USE OF SYSTEMS
.1
Use of new and existing permanent heating and ventilating systems for supplying
temporary heat or ventilation is permitted only under the following conditions:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
Active portion of system is complete, pressure tested, cleaned, flushed out.
Specified water treatment system has been commissioned, water treatment is being
continuously monitored.
Areas of the building under construction have been closed in, and areas to be
heated/ventilated are clean and will not thereafter be subjected to dust-producing
processes.
There is no possibility of damage from any cause.
Supply ventilation systems are protected by 60% filters, which shall be inspected
daily, changed every week, or more frequently as required.
Return systems have approved filters over all openings, inlets, outlets.
All systems will be:
.1
operated as per manufacturer's recommendations or instructions.
.2
operated by Contractor.
.3
monitored continuously by Contractor.
Warranties and guarantees are not thereby relaxed.
Regular preventive and all other manufacturers recommended maintenance
routines are performed by Contractor at his own expense and under supervision of
Departmental Representative.
Before static completion, entire system to be refurbished, cleaned internally and
externally, restored to "as- new" condition, filters in air systems replaced.
.2
Filters referred to herein are over and above those specified elsewhere in this specification.
.3
Exhaust systems are not included in any approvals for temporary heating ventilation.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
INSTALLATION OF PIPEWORK
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)
.1
1.2
Section 23 05 05
Page 1
2016-01-13
CAN/CGSB-1.181-99, Ready-Mixed Organic Zinc-Rich Coating.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
1.3
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle in accordance with Section 01 61 00.
.2
Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name,
address.
.3
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets,
crates, paddling, and packaging materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATION
.1
3.2
Manufacturer's Instructions: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations,
including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and
datasheets.
CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT
.1
In accordance with manufacturer's instructions unless otherwise indicated.
.2
Use valves and either unions or flanges for isolation and ease of maintenance and
assembly.
.3
Use double swing joints when equipment mounted on vibration isolation and when piping
subject to movement.
3.3
CLEARANCES
.1
Provide clearance around systems, equipment and components for observation of
operation, inspection, servicing, maintenance and as recommended by manufacturer.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
3.4
INSTALLATION OF PIPEWORK
Section 23 05 05
Page 2
2016-01-13
Provide space for disassembly, removal of equipment and components as recommended by
manufacturer or as indicated (whichever is greater) without interrupting operation of other
system, equipment, components.
DRAINS
.1
Install piping with grade in direction of flow except as indicated.
.2
Install drain valve at low points in piping systems, at equipment and at section isolating
valves.
.3
Pipe each drain valve discharge separately to above floor drain. Discharge to be visible.
.4
Drain valves: NPS 3/4 gate or globe valves unless indicated otherwise, with hose end male
thread, cap and chain.
3.5
AIR VENTS
.1
Install automatic air vents at high points in piping systems.
.2
Install isolating valve at each automatic air valve.
.3
Install drain piping to approved location and terminate where discharge is visible.
3.6
DIELECTRIC COUPLINGS
.1
General: compatible with system, to suit pressure rating of system.
.2
Locations: where dissimilar metals are joined.
.3
NPS 2 and under: isolating unions or bronze valves.
.4
Over NPS 2: isolating flanges.
3.7
PIPEWORK INSTALLATION
.1
Screwed fittings jointed with Teflon tape.
.2
Protect openings against entry of foreign material.
.3
Install to isolate equipment and allow removal without interrupting operation of other
equipment or systems.
.4
Assemble piping using fittings manufactured to ANSI standards.
.5
Saddle type branch fittings may be used on mains if branch line is no larger than half size of
main.
.1
Hole saw (or drill) and ream main to maintain full inside diameter of branch line
prior to welding saddle.
.6
Install exposed piping, equipment, rectangular cleanouts and similar items parallel or
perpendicular to building lines.
.7
Install concealed pipework to minimize furring space, maximize headroom, conserve
space.
.8
Slope piping, except where indicated, in direction of flow for positive drainage and
venting.
.9
Install, except where indicated, to permit separate thermal insulation of each pipe.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
INSTALLATION OF PIPEWORK
Section 23 05 05
Page 3
2016-01-13
.10
Group piping wherever possible.
.11
Ream pipes, remove scale and other foreign material before assembly.
.12
Use eccentric reducers at pipe size changes to ensure positive drainage and venting.
.13
Provide for thermal expansion as indicated.
.14
Valves:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
3.8
Install in accessible locations.
Remove interior parts before soldering.
Install with stems above horizontal position unless otherwise indicated.
Valves accessible for maintenance without removing adjacent piping.
Use ball valves at branch take-offs for isolating purposes except where otherwise
specified.
Install butterfly valves between weld neck flanges to ensure full compression of
liner.
SLEEVES
.1
General: install where pipes pass through masonry, concrete structures, fire rated
assemblies, and elsewhere as indicated.
.2
Material: schedule 40 black steel pipe.
.3
Construction: foundation walls and where sleeves extend above finished floors to have
annular fins continuously welded on at mid-point.
.4
Sizes: 6 mm minimum clearance between sleeve and uninsulated pipe or between sleeve
and insulation.
.5
Installation:
.1
.2
.3
.6
Sealing:
.1
.2
.3
.4
3.9
Concrete, masonry walls, concrete floors on grade: terminate flush with finished
surface.
Other floors: terminate 25 mm above finished floor.
Before installation, paint exposed exterior surfaces with heavy application of
zinc-rich paint to CAN/CGSB-1.181.
Foundation walls and below grade floors: fire retardant, waterproof non-hardening
mastic.
Elsewhere: Provide space for firestopping. Maintain fire rating integrity.
Sleeves installed for future use: fill with lime plaster or other easily removable
filler.
Ensure no contact between copper pipe or tube and sleeve.
ESCUTCHEONS
.1
Install on pipes passing through walls, partitions, floors, and ceilings in finished areas.
.2
Construction: one piece type with set screws. Chrome or nickel plated brass or type 302
stainless steel.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.3
3.10
INSTALLATION OF PIPEWORK
Section 23 05 05
Page 4
2016-01-13
Sizes: outside diameter to cover opening or sleeve. Inside diameter to fit around pipe or
outside of insulation if so provided.
PREPARATION FOR FIRE STOPPING
.1
Material and installation within annular space between pipes, ducts, insulation and
adjacent fire separation to Section 07 84 00.
.2
Uninsulated unheated pipes not subject to movement: No special preparation.
.3
Uninsulated heated pipes subject to movement: wrap with non-combustible smooth
material to permit pipe movement without damaging fires topping material or installation.
.4
Insulated pipes and ducts: ensure integrity of insulation and vapour barriers.
3.11
FLUSHING OUT OF PIPING SYSTEMS
.1
Flush system in accordance with Section 23 08 02.
.2
Before start-up, clean interior of piping systems in accordance with requirements of
Section 01 74 11 supplemented as specified in relevant mechanical sections.
.3
Preparatory to acceptance, clean and refurbish equipment and leave in operating condition,
including replacement of filters in piping systems.
3.12
PRESSURE TESTING OF EQUIPMENT AND PIPEWORK
.1
Advise Departmental Representative 48 hours minimum prior to performance of pressure
tests.
.2
Pipework: test as specified in relevant sections of heating, ventilating and air conditioning
work.
.3
Maintain specified test pressure without loss for 4 hours minimum unless specified for
longer period of time in relevant mechanical sections.
.4
Prior to tests, isolate equipment and other parts which are not designed to withstand test
pressure or media.
.5
Conduct tests in presence of Departmental Representative.
.6
Pay costs for repairs or replacement, retesting, and making good. Departmental
Representative to determine whether repair or replacement is appropriate.
.7
Insulate or conceal work only after approval and certification of tests by Departmental
Representative.
3.13
EXISTING SYSTEMS
.1
Connect into existing piping systems at times approved by Departmental Representative.
.2
Request written approval 7 days minimum, prior to commencement of work.
.3
Be responsible for damage to existing plant by this work.
.4
Ensure daily clean-up of existing areas.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
3.14
INSTALLATION OF PIPEWORK
Section 23 05 05
Page 5
2016-01-13
CLEANING
.1
Clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.1
.2
Remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.
Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with
Section 01 74 20.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
PIPE WELDING
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American National Standards Institute/American Society of Mechanical Engineers
(ANSI/ASME)
.1
.2
.3
.2
.2
.3
AWS C1.1M/C1.1-2000(R2006), Recommended Practices for Resistance
Welding.
AWS Z49.1-2005, Safety in Welding, Cutting and Allied Process.
AWS W1-2000, Welding Inspection Handbook.
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International)
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
1.2
ANSI/AWWA C206-03, Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe.
American Welding Society (AWS)
.1
.4
ASME B31.1-2010, Power Piping.
ANSI/ASME B31.3-2006, Process Piping.
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code BPVC-2010:
.1
BPVC 2010 Section I: Power Boilers.
.2
BPVC 2010 Section V: Nondestructive Examination.
.3
BPVC 2010 Section IX: Welding and Brazing Qualifications.
American National Standards Institute/American Water Works Association
(ANSI/AWWA)
.1
.3
Section 23 05 17
Page 1
2016-01-13
CSA W47.2-M1987(R2008), Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of
Aluminum.
CSA W48-06, Filler Metals and Allied Materials for Metal Arc Welding.
CSA B51-03(R2007), Boiler, Pressure Vessel and Pressure Piping Code.
CSA-W117.2-2006, Safety in Welding, Cutting and Allied Processes.
CSA W178.1-2008, Certification of Welding Inspection Organizations.
CSA W178.2-2008, Certification of Welding Inspectors.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
1.3
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Qualifications:
.1
Welders:
.1
Welding qualifications in accordance with CSA B51.
.2
Use qualified and licensed welders possessing certificate for each
procedure performed from authority having jurisdiction.
Submit welder's qualifications to Departmental Representative.
.3
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
PIPE WELDING
Section 23 05 17
Page 2
2016-01-13
.4
.2
.3
1.4
Each welder to possess identification symbol issued by authority having
jurisdiction.
.5
Certification of companies for fusion welding of aluminum in accordance
with CSA W47.2.
Inspectors:
.1
Inspectors qualified to CSA W178.2.
Certifications:
.1
Registration of welding procedures in accordance with CSA B51.
.2
Copy of welding procedures available for inspection.
.3
Safety in welding, cutting and allied processes in accordance with
CSA-W117.2.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle in accordance with Section 01 61 00.
.2
Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name,
address.
.3
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets
crates paddling and packaging materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
ELECTRODES
.1
Electrodes: in accordance with CSA W48 Series.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATION
.1
3.2
Manufacturer's Instructions: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations,
including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and
datasheets.
QUALITY OF WORK
.1
3.3
Welding: in accordance with ANSI/ASME B31.1 and B31.3, ANSI/ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code, Sections I and IX and ANSI/AWWA C206, using procedures
conforming to AWS B3.0, AWS C1.1, and special procedures specified elsewhere in
Mechanical Divisions applicable requirements of authority having jurisdiction.
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
.1
Identify each weld with welder's identification symbol.
.2
Backing rings:
.1
.2
Where used, fit to minimize gaps between ring and pipe bore.
Do not install at orifice flanges.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.3
Section 23 05 17
Page 3
2016-01-13
Fittings:
.1
.2
3.4
PIPE WELDING
NPS 2 and smaller: install welding type sockets.
Branch connections: install welding tees or forged branch outlet fittings.
INSPECTION AND TESTS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
.1
Review weld quality requirements and defect limits of applicable codes and standards with
Departmental Representative before work is started.
.2
Formulate "Inspection and Test Plan" in co-operation with Departmental Representative.
.3
Do not conceal welds until they have been inspected, tested and approved by inspector.
.4
Provide for inspector to visually inspect welds during early stages of welding procedures in
accordance with Welding Inspection Handbook. Repair or replace defects as required by
codes and as specified.
3.5
SPECIALIST EXAMINATIONS AND TESTS
.1
General:
.1
.2
.3
Perform examinations and tests by specialist qualified to CSA W178.1 and CSA
W178.2 and approved by Departmental Representative.
To ANSI/ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessels Code, Section V, CSA B51 and
requirements of authority having jurisdiction.
Inspect and test 10 % of welds in accordance with "Inspection and Test Plan" by
non-destructive visual examination and full gamma ray radiographic (hereinafter
referred to as "radiography") tests.
.2
Hydrostatically test welds to ANSI/ASME B31.1.
.3
Visual examinations: include entire circumference of weld externally and wherever
possible internally.
.4
Failure of visual examinations:
.1
3.6
Upon failure of welds by visual examination, perform additional testing as directed
by Departmental Representative of total of up to 10% of welds, selected at random
by Departmental Representative by radiographic tests].
DEFECTS CAUSING REJECTION
.1
3.7
As described in ANSI/ASME B31.1 and ANSI/ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessels Code.
REPAIR OF WELDS WHICH FAILED TESTS
.1
3.8
Re-inspect and re-test repaired or re-worked welds at Contractor's expense.
CLEANING
.1
Clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.2
Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with
Section 01 74 20.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
VALVES - BRONZE
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
.1
.2
.2
.3
.4
ASTM A276-10, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.
ASTM B62-09, Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal
Castings.
ASTM B283/B283M-11a, Standard Specification for Copper and Copper Alloy
Die Forgings (Hot-Pressed).
ASTM B505/B505M-11, Standard Specification for Copper-Base Alloy
Continuous Castings.
Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. (MSS)
.1
.2
.3
1.2
ASME B1.20.1-1983(R2006), Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch).
ASME B16.18-2001, Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
ASTM International
.1
.2
.3
Section 23 05 23.01
Page 1
2016-01-13
MSS SP-25-2008, Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges and
Unions.
MSS SP-80-2008, Bronze Gate Globe, Angle and Check Valves.
MSS SP-110-2010, Ball Valves, Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint,
Grooved and Flared Ends.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product Data:
.1
.2
.3
Shop Drawings:
.1
1.3
Provide manufacturer's printed product literature and data sheets for equipment
and systems and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical
size, finish and limitations.
Submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets.
Submit data for valves specified in this Section.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
.1
1.4
Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Extra Materials/Spare Parts:
.1
Furnish following spare parts:
.1
Valve seats: one for every 10 valves each size, minimum 1.
.2
Discs: one for every 10 valves, each size. Minimum 1.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
1.5
VALVES - BRONZE
.3
.4
.5
Tools:
.1
.2
Section 23 05 23.01
Page 2
2016-01-13
Stem packing: one for every 10 valves, each size. Minimum 1.
Valve handles: 2 of each size.
Gaskets for flanges: one for every 10 flanged joints.
Furnish special tools for maintenance of systems and equipment.
Include following:
.1
Lubricant gun for expansion joints..
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with
manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements:
.1
.3
Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with
manufacturer's name, address.
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets,
crates, padding, and packaging materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Provide valves in accordance with the valve schedule that forms part of this Section.
.2
Use one manufacturer only for all valves of the same type.
.3
Equip valves with renewable seats suitable for the service intended and to provide positive
shutoff.
.4
Provide composition discs on globe and check valves that are suitable for temperature and
fluid or gas encountered.
.5
Comply with ANSI B16.18 for solder joint ends.
.6
Comply with ANSI/ASME B1.20.1 for threaded ends.
.7
Comply with ANSI/AWWA C606 and CAN/CSA B242 for grooved ends.
.8
Comply with ANSI/ASME B16.1 for cast iron flanges with face-to-face distance to
ANSI/ASME B16.10.
.9
Comply with ASTM A126 Cl.B for cast iron valves; bronze valves to ASTM B61 and
ASTM B62 as noted.
.10
Threaded Valve Stem Materials: Naval brass to ASTM B21/B21M; copper silicone alloys
to ASTM B98/B98M; or phosphor bronze to ASTM B139/B139M.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
VALVES - BRONZE
Section 23 05 23.01
Page 3
2016-01-13
2.2
VALVE APPLICATION SCHEDULE
HEATING SYSTEMS (Heating Water, Condenser Water and Glycol)
100
150
STYLE
0 - 50 mm
55 - 75 mm
- 150 mm
– 200 mm
GATE
BUTTER-F
LY
BALANC-I
NG
GLOBE
GATE
GLOBE
CHECK
CHECK
SPRING
CHECK
PLUG
Connection
Valve Item
Number
BALL
300
- 400 mm
--
Flanged
Flanged
Flanged
Flanged
Flanged
--
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
Function
--
Isolation
Isolation
Isolation
Isolation
Isolation
Connection
Valve Item
Number
Function
--
Grooved
Grooved
Grooved
Grooved
Grooved
--
7.1
7.1
7.1
7.1
7.5
--
Isolation
Grooved /
Flanged
Isolation
Grooved /
Flanged
Isolation
Grooved /
Flanged
Isolation
Grooved /
Flanged
Isolation
Grooved /
Flanged
13.4 / 13.3
13.4 / 13.3
13.4 / 13.3
13.4 / 13.3
13.4 / 13.3
Circuit
balancing
--
Circuit
balancing
--
Circuit
balancing
--
Circuit
balancing
--
--
--
--
--
Connection
‐‐
Valve Item
Number
‐‐
Function
‐‐
Connection
Valve Item
Number
--
Circuit
balancing
Flanged
--
2.6
Function
--
Connection
Valve Item
Number
Function
Connection
Valve Item
Number
Function
Connection
--
Valve Item
Number
--
--
--
--
--
--
Isolation/
Throttling
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
---
---
---
---
---
---
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
-Flanged/Groove
d
-Flanged/Groove
d
--
--
--
Flanged
Flanged
Flanged
3.4 / 3.7
3.4 / 3.7
3.4
3.4
3.4
Function
--
Check
Check
Check
Check
Check
Connection
Valve Item
Number
Function
Connection
Valve Item
Number
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
---
-Wafer/Grooved
-Wafer/Grooved
-Wafer/Grooved
-Wafer/Grooved
-Wafer/Grooved
--
4.2 / 4.4
4.2 / 4.4
4.2 / 4.4
4.2 / 4.4
4.2 / 4.4 / 4.5
Function
---
Check
Condenser
Water Pumps
Flanged/Groove
d
Check
Condenser
Water Pumps
Flanged/Groove
d
Check
Condenser
Water Pumps
Flanged/Groove
d
Check
Condenser
Water Pumps
Connection
Check
Condenser
Water Pumps
Flanged/Groove
d
5.2 / 5.7
5.3 / 5.7
5.4 / 5.7
5.4 / 5.7
5.4
Valve Item
Number
Function
Connection
LOCK
SHIELD
200
- 250 mm
Valve Item
Number
Function
Connection
--
Flanged
--
Balancing
Balancing
Balancing
Balancing
Balancing
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
-Screwed/
VicPress
--
--
--
--
--
Grooved
Grooved
--
--
--
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
VALVES - BRONZE
Section 23 05 23.01
Page 4
2016-01-13
HEATING SYSTEMS (Heating Water, Condenser Water and Glycol)
100
150
STYLE
0 - 50 mm
55 - 75 mm
- 150 mm
– 200 mm
200
- 250 mm
300
- 400 mm
Valve Item
Number
9.1 / 6.8
6.9
6.9
--
--
--
Function
Drains Angle &
Isolation
Isolation
Isolation
--
--
--
PLUMBING (Cold Water (soft and hard), Hot Water and Hot Water Recirculation)
100
150
200
STYLE
0 - 50 mm
65 - 75 mm
- 150 mm
– 200 mm
- 250 mm
300
- 400 mm
--
Screwed
Flanged
Flanged
Flanged
Flanged
GATE
Connection
Valve Item
Number
Function
--
1.1
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
--
Isolation
Isolation
Isolation
Isolation
Isolation
--
Grooved
Grooved
Grooved
Grooved
Grooved
BUTTER-F
LY
Connection
Valve Item
Number
Function
--
7.1 / 7.6
7.1 / 7.6
7.1
7.1
7.5
--
Isolation
Isolation
Isolation
Isolation
Isolation
GLOBE
CHECK
SPRING
BALL
Connection
--
Screwed
Flanged
Flanged
Flanged
Flanged
Valve Item
Number
--
2.1
2.6
2.6
2.6
2.6
Function
--
Isolation/
Throttling
Isolation/
Throttling
--
Flanged
Flanged
Flanged
Valve Number
Function
Connection
Valve Item
Number
----
Isolation/
Throttling
Flanged/Groove
d
3.4 / 3.7
Check
Wafer/Grooved
Isolation/
Throttling
Connection
Isolation/
Throttling
Screwed/Groove
d
3.3 / 3.7
Check
Wafer/Grooved
3.4
Check
Wafer/Grooved
3.4
Check
Wafer/Grooved
3.4
Check
Wafer/Grooved
--
4.2 / 4.4
4.2 / 4.4
4.2 / 4.4
4.2 / 4.4
4.2 / 4.4 / 4.5
Function
--
Connection
Valve Item
Number
Function
VicPress
Check, Sewage
& Sump
Grooved
Check, Sewage
& Sump
Grooved
Check, Sewage
& Sump
--
Check, Sewage
& Sump
--
Check, Sewage
& Sump
--
6.8
6.9
6.9
--
--
--
Isolation
Isolation
Isolation
--
--
--
0 - 50 mm
65 - 75 mm
100
- 150 mm
150
– 200 mm
200
- 250 mm
300
- 400 mm
--
Flanged
Flanged
Flanged
Flanged
Flanged
--
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
---
Isolation
Flanged
Isolation
Flanged
Isolation
Flanged
Isolation
Flanged
Isolation
Flanged
--
2.6
2.6
2.6
2.6
2.6
Isolation/
Throttling
Flanged
Isolation/
Throttling
Flanged
Isolation/
Throttling
Flanged
Isolation/
Throttling
Flanged
PLUMBING (Waste Water)
STYLE
GATE
GLOBE
CHECK
Connection
Valve Item
Number
Function
Connection
Valve Item
Number
Function
--
Connection
Valve Item
Number
Function
--
Isolation/
Throttling
Flanged
--
3.4
3.4
3.4
3.4
3.4
--
Check
Check
Check
Check
Check
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
VALVES - BRONZE
Section 23 05 23.01
Page 5
2016-01-13
NATURAL GAS (Natural Gas)
0 – 50 mm
55 - 75 mm
100
– 150 mm
150
– 200 mm
200
– 250 mm
300
- 400 mm
Connection
Valve Item
Number
Function
Connection
Valve Item
Number
Screwed
Screwed
Screwed
Screwed
Screwed
Screwed
5.5
5.6
5.6
5.6
5.6
5.6
Isolation
Screwed
Isolation
Isolation
Isolation
Isolation
Isolation
Function
Isolation
0 - 50 mm
65 - 75 mm
100
- 150 mm
150
– 200 mm
200
- 250 mm
300
- 400 mm
Screwed/Groove
d
--
--
--
--
--
6.7 / 6.10
--
--
--
--
--
Isolation (UL)
Screwed
-Flanged
---
---
---
---
2.5
2.6
--
--
--
--
Isolation/
Throttling
Screwed
Isolation/
Throttling
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
3.2
--
--
--
--
--
Check
--
-Wafer/Grooved
-Wafer/Grooved
-Wafer/Grooved
-Wafer/Grooved
-Wafer/Grooved
--
4.3 / 4.6
4.3 / 4.6
4.3 / 4.6
4.3 / 4.6
4.3 / 4.6
---
Check (UL)
Grooved
Check (UL)
Grooved
Check (UL)
Grooved
Check (UL)
Grooved
Check (UL)
--
--
1.9
1.9
1.9
1.9
--
---
Isolation
Grooved
Isolation
Grooved
Isolation
Grooved
Isolation
Grooved
-Grooved
--
7.4
7.4
7.4
7.4
7.4
--
Isolation
Isolation
Isolation
Isolation
Isolation
STYLE
PLUG
BALL
6.6
FIRE (Standpipe and Sprinklers)
STYLE
Connection
BALL
GLOBE
Valve Item
Number
Function
Connection
Valve Item
Number
Function
CHECK
SPRING
GATE
BUTTER-F
LY
Connection
Valve Item
Number
Function
Connection
Valve Item
Number
Function
Connection
Valve Item
Number
Function
Connection
Valve Item
Number
Function
2.3
VALVE
TYPE
VALVE PRODUCT SCHEDULE
ITEM
1.1
1.0
GATE
VALVES
1.2
1.3
DESCRIPTION
B62 Bronze Construction,
Solid Wedge Disc, Union
Bonnet
B62 Bronze Construction,
Solid Wedge Disc, Union
Bonnet
Cast Iron, Solid Wedge Disc
PRESSURE
RATING
SERVICE (PSI)
CONNECTIO
N
OPERATOR
125
Steam 200 WOG
Threaded or
Soldered
Handwheel,
Rising Stem
200 PSI
Solder
Handwheel,
Rising Stem
1380 CWP
Flanged
Handwheel,
Rising Stem
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
Bronze Construction, Solid
Wedge Disc, Bolted Bonnet
Cast Iron Construction,
Bronze Fitted, Solid Wedge
Disc, Bolted Bonnet
All stainless steel gate valve
Cast steel construction, Hard
Facing Trim, Solid Wedge
Disc, Bolted Bonnet. Bypass
where specified for service HP
steam
Bronze Construction, Union
Bonnet, Solid Wedge Disc,
Stainless Steel Seat
Cast ductile iron construction,
EPDM coated disc, brass stem
VALVES - BRONZE
Section 23 05 23.01
Page 6
2016-01-13
125
Steam 200 WOG
Flanged
Handwheel,
Non-Rising
Stem
125
Steam 200 WOG
Flanged
Handwheel,
OS & Y
1035 CWP
Threaded
Handwheel
Class 150
Flanged
Handwheel,
OS & Y
200 Steam
400 WOG
Screwed
Handwheel,
Rising Stem
Grooved
Handwheel,
Rising or
Non-Rising
stem.
CONNECTIO
N
OPERATOR
Screwed
Handwheel
Solder
Handwheel
Screwed
Handwheel
Soldered
Handwheel
Screwed
Handwheel,
Rising Stem
Flanged
Handwheel,
OS & Y
Flanged
Handwheel,
OS & Y
Threaded
Handwheel
Screwed
Handwheel,
Stem Rising
1725 kPa CWP
Approved acceptable manufacturers: Crane, Jenkins, Kitz -
VALVE
TYPE
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
PRESSURE
RATING
SERVICE (PSI)
Bronze Construction, Swivel
125 Steam
Type Metal Disc, Screwed
200 WOG
Bonnet
Bronze Construction, Swivel
125 Steam
2.2
Type Metal Disc, Bonnet
200 WOG
Bronze Construction,
Renuable Teflon Disc, Swivel 125 Steam
2.3
Type Disc Holer, Union
200 WOG
Bonnet
Bronze Construction,
Renuable Teflon Disc, Swivel 125 Steam
2.4
Type Disc Holer, Union
200 WOG
Bonnet
Bronze Construction, 420 S.S.
2.5
2760 CWP
Union Bonnet
Cast Iron Construction,
125 Steam
2.6
Bronze trimmed, Bolted
200 WOG
Bonnet
Cast steel construction, plug
2.7
type disc, bolted bonnet,
Class 150
stellite trim
2.8
All stainless steel globe valve
1035 CWP
Union Bonnet, Renewable
150 Steam
2.9
Teflon Disc, Swivel Type Disc
300 WOG
Holder, Screwed Ends
Approved acceptable manufacturers: Crane, Jenkins, Nibco 2.1
2.0
GLOBE
VALVES
VALVE
TYPE
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
PRESSURE
RATING
SERVICE (PSI)
CONNECTIO
N
OPERATOR
3.0
CHECK
VALVES
3.1
Bronze Construction
Y-Pattern, Regrind seating,
Screwed Cap, Integral Disc
125 Steam
200 WOG
Solder
Swing
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
VALVES - BRONZE
Bronze Construction,
T-Pattern Regrind Seating,
4140 CWP
Screwed Cap
Bronze Construction
125 Steam
3.3
Y-pattern, Regrind Seating,
200 WOG
Screwed Cap, Integral Disc
Cast Iron Construction,
125 Steam
3.4
Bronze Trimmed, Regrindable
200 WOG
Disc, Bolted Cover
Cast Steel Construction,
3.5
Class 150
Stellite Trim
3.6
All stainless steel check valve
1035 CWP
Cast ductile iron body,
3.7
stainless steel trimmed,
2065 kPa CWP
coupled cover.
Approved acceptable manufacturers: Crane, Jenkins, Nibco 3.2
VALVE
TYPE
ITEM
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.0
BALL
VALVES
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
DESCRIPTION
Brass Construction, 2-piece
construction, Teflon seats,
Seals Buna-N O-ring, Blow
out Proof stem
Brass Construction, 2-piece
construction, Teflon seats,
Seals Buna-N O-ring, Blow
out Proof stem
Brass Construction, 2-piece
construction, Teflon seats,
Seals Buna-N O-ring, Blow
out Proof stem
Brass Construction, 2-piece
construction, Teflon seats,
Seals Buna-N O-ring, Blow
out XXXX stem
ANSI 150 All stainless steel
ball valve
Forged Brass, 2-piece
Construction, Blow Out
Proof Stem, Hard chrome
Plated Forged Brass Ball,
Teflon seats, Buna-N O-ring,
CGA Approved
Forged Brass, 2-piece
Construction, Blow Out
Proof Stem, Hard chrome
Plated Forged Brass Ball,
Teflon seats, Buna-N O-ring,
UL Approved
Forged Brass, 2-piece
Construction, Blow Out
Proof Stem, Hard chrome
Plated Forged Brass Ball,
Teflon seats,
Section 23 05 23.01
Page 7
2016-01-13
Threaded
Swing
Threaded
Swing
Flanged
Swing
Flanged
Swing
Screwed
Swing
Grooved
Swing
PRESSURE
RATING
SERVICE (PSI)
CONNECTIO
N
OPERATOR
150 Steam 600 WOG
Screwed
Lever
150 Steam 600 WOG
Screwed
Wing Handles
150 Steam 600 WOG
Soldered
Lever
150 Steam 600 WOG
Soldered
Wing Handles
c/w Memory
Stop
1970 CWP Kitz 150
UTRM (Reduced
Bore)
Flanged
Worm Gear
600 GAS
Screwed
Lever
600 GAS
Screwed
Lever
2065 CWP
Vic-Press
Lever
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
6.9
6.10
VALVES - BRONZE
Cast Ductile Iron, 2-piece
Construction, Blow Out
Proof Stem, Hard chrome
Plated Steel Ball, TFE seats.
Cast Bronze, 2-piece
Construction, Blow Out
Proof Stem, Hard Chrome
Plated Brass Ball, TFE seats,
with Supervisory Switches.
UL approved.
Section 23 05 23.01
Page 8
2016-01-13
5515 CWP
Grooved
Lever or gear
2410 CWP
Grooved /
Threaded
Handwheel
Approved acceptable manufacturers: Crane, Nibco, Newman Hattersley -
VALVE
TYPE
ITEM
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.0
BUTTERFLY
VALVES
7.4
DESCRIPTION
Cast Iron Body, EPDM
Resilient Seat, Bronze
Disc, 416 SS Shaft,
Bronze Bushings
Ductile iron body, enamel
coated body, EPDM
pressure responsive seat.
Cast Iron Body, EPDM
Resilient Seat, Bronze
Disc, 416 SS Shaft,
Bronze Bushings
Cast Iron Body, EPOM
Resilient Seat, Bronze
Disc, 416 SS Shaft,
Bronze Bushings
DI Body, Disc, and Shaft,
EPDM Disc Coating, UL
approved -
PRESSURE
RATING
SERVICE (PSI)
200
2065 CWP
CONNECTIO
N
Lug
10 Position
Lever
Grooved
10 position
lever or Gear
200
Lug
Infinite
Position
Lever c/w
Memory Stop
200
Lug
Gear Wheet
c/w Flag
Indicator
Grooved -
Gear, Wheel,
c/w Flag
Indicator &
Provision for
Monitor
2065 CWP
DI Body, PPS Coated DI
Disc, EPDM seal, SS
AGS Grooved
2065 CWP
Shaft
Cast Bronze Body,
EPDM Coated Disc,
7.6
Grooved
2065 CWP
Copper-Tube Dimension
Ends.
Grade CF8M Stainless
Steel Body and Disc,
7.7
Grooved
2065 CWP
Elastomer Seal, 316SS
Stem.
Approved acceptable manufacturers: Jenkins, Keystone, Crane7.5
VALVE
TYPE
9.0
DRAIN
VALVES
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
PRESSURE
RATING
SERVICE (PSI)
Hard Chrome Plated Ball,
1380 WP @ 121oC
Cap and Drain
Approved acceptable manufacturers: Toyo, Kitz
9.1
OPERATOR
Gear
Lever or Gear
Lever or Gear
CONNECTIO
N
OPERATOR
Screwed X hose
Lever
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
VALVE
TYPE
10.0
NEEDLE
VALVES
VALVE
TYPE
VALVES - BRONZE
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
PRESSURE
RATING
SERVICE (PSI)
CONNECTIO
N
OPERATOR
10.1
B62 Bronze Construction
2760 CWP
Screwed
Handwheel
Rising Stem
CONNECTIO
N
OPERATOR
Screwed
Pressure
Screwed
Temperature
and Pressure
Screwed
Pressure
Approved acceptable manufacturers: Jenkins, WH Bolton, Crane
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
VALVE TYPE
13.0
CIRCUIT
BALANCING
VALVES
PRESSURE
RATING
SERVICE (PSI)
Heating Water
to 1100 kPa
Bronze Body, Composition
Disc
Bronze Body, Composition
11.2
Domestic water
Disc
Brass or Bronze Body,
11.3
LP Steam
Teflon Disc, SS Spring
Approved acceptable manufacturers: Sarco, Lunkenheimer
11.1
11.0
RELIEF
VALVES
Section 23 05 23.01
Page 9
2016-01-13
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
PRESSURE
RATING
SERVICE (PSI)
CONNECTION
OPERATOR
13.1
DZR brass (Ametal) copper
alloy body, globe type, with 2065 kPa
EPDM seat, and venturi
taps.
Screwed
Handwheel
with memory
stop
13.2
DZR brass (Ametal) copper
alloy body, globe type, with
2065 kPa
EPDM seat, and venturi
taps.
Soldered
Handwheel
with memory
stop
13.3
Ductile iron body, globe type,
with EPDM seat, and venturi 2065 kPa
taps.
Flanged
Handwheel
with memory
stop
13.4
Ductile iron body, globe type,
with EPDM seat, and venturi 2065 kPa
taps.
Grooved
Handwheel
with memory
stop
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install rising stem valves in upright position with stem above horizontal.
.2
Remove internal parts before soldering.
.3
Install valves with unions at each piece of equipment arranged to allow servicing,
maintenance, and equipment removal.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
3.2
VALVES - BRONZE
Section 23 05 23.01
Page 10
2016-01-13
CLEANING
.1
Clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.1
.2
Remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.
Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with
Section 01 74 20.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
.1
.2
.2
.3
ASTM A125-96(2007), Standard Specification for Steel Springs, Helical,
Heat-Treated.
ASTM A307-10, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000
PSI Tensile Strength.
ASTM A563-07a, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts.
Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valves and Fittings Industry (MSS)
.1
.2
.3
1.2
ASME B31.1-2010, Power Piping.
ASTM International
.1
.3
Section 23 05 29
Page 1
2016-01-13
MSS SP 58-2009, Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and
Manufacture.
MSS SP 69-2003, Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.
MSS SP 89-2003, Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation
Practices.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product Data:
.1
.3
Shop Drawings:
.1
.4
Submit certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that materials comply with
specified performance characteristics and physical properties.
Manufacturers' Instructions:
.1
1.3
Submit shop drawings for:
.1
Bases, hangers and supports.
.2
Connections to equipment and structure.
.3
Structural assemblies.
Certificates:
.1
.5
Provide manufacturer's printed product literature and data sheets for hangers and
supports and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size,
finish and limitations.
Provide manufacturer's installation instructions.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
1.4
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Section 23 05 29
Page 2
2016-01-13
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with
manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements:
.1
.3
Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with
manufacturer's name, address.
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
.1
Design Requirements:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
2.2
Construct pipe hanger and support to manufacturer's recommendations utilizing
manufacturer's regular production components, parts and assemblies.
Base maximum load ratings on allowable stresses prescribed by ASME B31.1 or
MSS SP 58.
Ensure that supports, guides, anchors do not transmit excessive quantities of heat
to building structure.
Design hangers and supports to support systems under conditions of operation,
allow free expansion and contraction, prevent excessive stresses from being
introduced into pipework or connected equipment.
Provide for vertical adjustments after erection and during commissioning. Amount
of adjustment in accordance with MSS SP 58.
GENERAL
.1
Fabricate hangers, supports and sway braces in accordance with MSS SP 58 and ASME
B31.1.
.2
Use components for intended design purpose only. Do not use for rigging or erection
purposes.
2.3
PIPE HANGERS
.1
Finishes:
.1
.2
.3
.2
Pipe hangers and supports: galvanized after manufacture.
Use hot dipped galvanizing process.
Ensure steel hangers in contact with copper piping are epoxy coated.
Upper attachment structural: suspension from lower flange of I-Beam:
.1
Cold piping NPS 2 maximum: malleable iron C-clamp with hardened steel cup
point setscrew, locknut and carbon steel retaining clip.
.1
Rod: 9 mm UL listed.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
.3
.2
.2
Trapeze hanger assemblies: As indicated on drawings.
Steel brackets: As indicated on drawings.
Ensure that hanger rods are subject to tensile loading only.
Provide linkages where lateral or axial movement of pipework is anticipated.
Do not use 22 mm or 28 mm rod.
Pipe attachments: material to MSS SP 58:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.8
Ceiling: carbon steel welded eye rod, clevis plate, clevis pin and cotters with
weldless forged steel eye nut. Ensure eye 6 mm minimum greater than rod
diameter.
Concrete inserts: wedge shaped body with knockout protector plate UL listed to
MSS SP 69.
Hanger rods: threaded rod material to MSS SP 58:
.1
.2
.3
.7
Cold piping NPS 2 maximum: ductile iron top-of-beam C-clamp with hardened
steel cup point setscrew, locknut and carbon steel retaining clip, UL listed.
Cold piping NPS 2 1/2 or greater, hot piping: malleable iron top-of-beam
jaw-clamp with hooked rod, spring washer, plain washer and nut UL listed.
Shop and field-fabricated assemblies:
.1
.2
.6
Cold piping NPS 2 1/2 or greater, hot piping: malleable iron beam clamp, eye rod,
jaws and extension with carbon steel retaining clip, tie rod, nuts and washers, UL
listed.
Upper attachment to concrete:
.1
.5
Section 23 05 29
Page 3
2016-01-13
Upper attachment structural: suspension from upper flange of I-Beam:
.1
.4
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Attachments for steel piping: carbon steel galvanized.
Attachments for copper piping: copper plated black steel.
Use insulation shields for hot pipework.
Oversize pipe hangers and supports.
Adjustable clevis: material to MSS SP 69 UL listed, clevis bolt with nipple spacer and
vertical adjustment nuts above and below clevis.
.1
Ensure "U" has hole in bottom for rivetting to insulation shields.
.9
Yoke style pipe roll: carbon steel yoke, rod and nuts with cast iron roll, to MSS SP 69.
.10
U-bolts: carbon steel to MSS SP 69 with 2 nuts at each end to ASTM A563.
.1
.2
.11
2.4
Finishes for steel pipework: galvanized.
Finishes for copper, glass, brass or aluminum pipework: galvanized, with formed
portion plastic coated epoxy coated.
Pipe rollers: cast iron roll and roll stand with carbon steel rod to MSS SP 69.
RISER CLAMPS
.1
Steel or cast iron pipe: galvanized carbon steel to MSS SP 58, type 42, UL listed and FM
approved.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
.2
Copper pipe: carbon steel copper plated to MSS SP 58, type 42.
.3
Bolts: to ASTM A307.
.4
Nuts: to ASTM A563.
2.5
Section 23 05 29
Page 4
2016-01-13
INSULATION PROTECTION SHIELDS
.1
Insulated cold piping:
.1
.2
Insulated hot piping:
.1
2.6
64 kg/m³ density insulation plus insulation protection shield to: MSS SP 69,
galvanized sheet carbon steel. Length designed for maximum 3 m span.
Curved plate 300 mm long, with edges turned up, welded-in centre plate for pipe
sizes NPS 12 and over, carbon steel to comply with MSS SP 69.
CONSTANT SUPPORT SPRING HANGERS
.1
Springs: alloy steel to ASTM A125, shot peened, magnetic particle inspected, with +/-5%
spring rate tolerance, tested for free height, spring rate, loaded height and provided with
Certified Mill Test Report (CMTR).
.2
Load adjustability: 10% minimum adjustability each side of calibrated load. Adjustment
without special tools. Adjustments not to affect travel capabilities.
.3
Provide upper and lower factory set travel stops.
.4
Provide load adjustment scale for field adjustments.
.5
Total travel to be actual travel + 20%. Difference between total travel and actual travel 25
mm minimum.
.6
Individually calibrated scales on each side of support calibrated prior to shipment,
complete with calibration record.
2.7
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
.1
2.8
Fabricate equipment supports not provided by equipment manufacturer from structural
grade steel meeting requirements of Section 05 12 23. Submit calculations with shop
drawings.
EQUIPMENT ANCHOR BOLTS AND TEMPLATES
.1
2.9
Provide templates to ensure accurate location of anchor bolts.
HOUSE-KEEPING PADS
.1
Provide 100 mm high concrete housekeeping pads for base-mounted equipment; size pads
50 mm larger than equipment; chamfer pad edges.
.2
Concrete: to Section 03 30 00.
2.10
OTHER EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
.1
Fabricate equipment supports from structural grade steel meeting requirements of Section
05 12 23.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Submit structural calculations with shop drawings.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
.1
3.2
Section 23 05 29
Page 5
2016-01-13
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications,
including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and
datasheet.
INSTALLATION
.1
Install in accordance with:
.1
.2
Clamps on riser piping:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.3
Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
Support independent of connected horizontal pipework using riser clamps and
riser clamp lugs welded to riser.
Bolt-tightening torques to industry standards.
Steel pipes: install below coupling or shear lugs welded to pipe.
Cast iron pipes: install below joint.
Clevis plates:
.1
Attach to concrete with 4 minimum concrete inserts, one at each corner.
.4
Provide supplementary structural steelwork where structural bearings do not exist or where
concrete inserts are not in correct locations.
.5
Use approved constant support type hangers where:
.1
.2
.6
Use variable support spring hangers where:
.1
.2
3.3
Vertical movement of pipework is 13 mm or more,
Transfer of load to adjacent hangers or connected equipment is not permitted.
Transfer of load to adjacent piping or to connected equipment is not critical.
Variation in supporting effect does not exceed 25 % of total load.
HANGER SPACING
.1
Plumbing piping: to National Plumbing Code.
.2
Fire protection: to National Fire Code and requirements of authority having jurisdiction.
.3
Gas piping: up to NPS 1/2: every 1.8 m.
.4
Copper piping: up to NPS 1/2: every 1.5 m.
.5
Flexible joint roll groove pipe: in accordance with table below for steel, but not less than
one hanger at joints. Table listings for straight runs without concentrated loads and where
full linear movement is not required.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.6
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Within 300 mm of each elbow.
Maximum Pipe
Size : NPS
up to 1-1/4
1-1/2
2
2-1/2
3
3-1/2
4
5
6
8
10
12
.7
3.4
Section 23 05 29
Page 6
2016-01-13
Maximum
Spacing Steel
2.4 m
3.0 m
3.0 m
3.7 m
3.7 m
3.7 m
3.7 m
4.3 m
4.3 m
4.3 m
4.9 m
4.9 m
Maximum
Spacing Copper
1.8 m
2.4 m
2.4 m
3.0 m
3.0 m
3.3 m
3.6 m
Pipework greater than NPS 12: to MSS SP 69.
HANGER INSTALLATION
.1
Install hanger so that rod is vertical under operating conditions.
.2
Adjust hangers to equalize load.
.3
Support from structural members. Where structural bearing does not exist or inserts are not
in suitable locations, provide supplementary structural steel members.
3.5
HORIZONTAL MOVEMENT
.1
Angularity of rod hanger resulting from horizontal movement of pipework from cold to hot
position not to exceed 4 degrees from vertical.
.2
Where horizontal pipe movement is less than 13 mm, offset pipe hanger and support so that
rod hanger is vertical in the hot position.
3.6
FINAL ADJUSTMENT
.1
Adjust hangers and supports:
.1
.2
.2
Adjustable clevis:
.1
.2
.3
Tighten hanger load nut securely to ensure proper hanger performance.
Tighten upper nut after adjustment.
C-clamps:
.1
.4
Ensure that rod is vertical under operating conditions.
Equalize loads.
Follow manufacturer's recommended written instructions and torque values when
tightening C-clamps to bottom flange of beam.
Beam clamps:
.1
Hammer jaw firmly against underside of beam.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
3.7
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Section 23 05 29
Page 7
2016-01-13
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Site Tests: conduct following tests in accordance with Section 01 45 00 and submit report
as described in PART 1 - ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS.
.2
Manufacturer's Field Services:
.1
.2
.3
3.8
Obtain written report from manufacturer verifying compliance of Work, in
handling, installing, applying, protecting and cleaning of product and submit
Manufacturer's Field Reports as described in PART 1 - ACTION AND
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS.
Provide manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations
and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
Schedule site visits, to review Work, as directed in PART 1 - QUALITY
ASSURANCE.
CLEANING
.1
Clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.1
.2
Remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.
Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with
Section 01 74 20.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
VIBRATION CONTROLS
FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
.1
.2
1.2
Section 23 05 48
Page 1
2016-01-13
NFPA 13-2009, Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
National Building Code of Canada (NBC) 2010.
SHOP DRAWINGS
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Provide system shop drawings complete with performance and product data.
1.3
WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.2
Divert unused metal and wiring materials from landfill to metal recycling facility
approved by Departmental Representative.
.3
Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities.
.4
Dispose of corrugated cardboard, polystyrene, plastic packaging material in appropriate
on-site bin for recycling in accordance with site waste management program.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
.1
2.2
Size and shape of bases type and performance of vibration isolation to be as indicated.
ELASTOMERIC PADS
.1
Type EP1 - neoprene waffle or ribbed; 9 mm minimum thick; 50 durometer; maximum
loading 350 kPa.
.2
Type EP2 - rubber waffle or ribbed; 9 mm minimum thick; 30 durometer natural rubber;
maximum loading 415 kPa.
.3
Type EP3 - neoprene-steel-neoprene; 9 mm minimum thick neoprene bonded to 1.71 mm
steel plate; 50 durometer neoprene, waffle or ribbed; holes sleeved with isolation
washers; maximum loading 350 kPa.
.4
Type EP4 - rubber-steel-rubber; 9 mm minimum thick rubber bonded to 1.71 mm steel
plate; 30 durometer natural rubber, waffle or ribbed; holes sleeved with isolation
washers; maximum loading 415 kPa.
.5
Type EP5 – sound control underlayment 8mm minimum thick open cellular rubber mat
reinforced with solid rubber particles bonded to fibreglass/cellulose backing with a
density of 22lbs/cu.ft. and a minimum tensile strength of 45lbs.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
2.3
VIBRATION CONTROLS
FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Section 23 05 48
Page 2
2016-01-13
ELASTOMERIC MOUNTS
.1
2.4
Type M1 - colour coded; neoprene in shear; maximum durometer of 60; threaded insert
and two bolt-down holes; ribbed top and bottom surfaces.
SPRINGS
.1
Design stable springs: ratio of lateral to axial stiffness is equal to or greater than 1.2 times
ratio of static deflection to working height. Select for 50% travel beyond rated load. Units
complete with levelling devices.
.2
Ratio of height when loaded to diameter of spring between 0.8 to 1.0.
.3
Cadmium plate for outdoor installations.
.4
Colour code springs.
2.5
SPRING MOUNT
.1
Zinc or cadmium plated hardware; housings coated with rust resistant paint.
.2
Type M2 - stable open spring: support on bonded 6 mm minimum thick ribbed neoprene
or rubber friction and acoustic pad.
.3
Type M3 - stable open spring: 6 mm minimum thick ribbed neoprene or rubber friction
and acoustic pad, bonded under isolator and on isolator top plate; levelling bolt for rigidly
mounting to equipment.
.4
Type M4 - restrained stable open spring: supported on two layers of bonded 6 mm
minimum thick ribbed neoprene acoustic pads; built-in resilient limit stops, removable
spacer plates.
.5
Type M5 - enclosed spring mounts with snubbers for isolation up to 950 kg maximum.
.6
Type M6 - restrained stable open spring: supported on three (3) layers of bonded 20 mm
minimum thick rubber waffle pads; built-in resilient limit stops, removable spacer plates.
Each spring shall be sized to limit a 20% compression. Hold down bolds for springs
shall include a thick neoprene grommet at the bolt hole. Minimum length is 150mm
with an allowable compression of 25mm, elongation of 16mm traverse movement of
16mm.
.7
Performance: as indicated.
2.6
FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
.1
2.7
Double sphere EPDM connector and expansion joint; multi-layerd tire cord fabric
reinforcement with peroxide cured EPDM cover. Split baked enamel ductile iron
floating flanges rated for 17Bar.
HANGERS
.1
Colour coded springs, rust resistant, painted box type hangers. Arrange to permit hanger
box or rod to move through a 30 degrees arc without metal to metal contact.
.2
Type H1 - neoprene - in-shear, moulded with rod isolation bushing which passes through
hanger box.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
VIBRATION CONTROLS
FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Section 23 05 48
Page 3
2016-01-13
.3
Type H2 - stable spring, elastomeric washer, cup with moulded isolation bushing which
passes through hanger box.
.4
Type H3 - stable spring, elastomeric element, cup with moulded isolation bushing which
passes through hanger box.
.5
Type H4 - stable spring, elastomeric element with precompression washer and nut with
deflection indicator.
.6
Performance: as indicated.
2.8
ACOUSTIC BARRIERS FOR ANCHORS AND GUIDES
.1
2.9
Acoustic barriers: between pipe and support, consisting of 25 mm minimum thick heavy
duty duck and neoprene isolation material.
HORIZONTAL THRUST RESTRAINT
.1
Spring and elastomeric element housed in box frame; assembly complete with rods and
angle brackets for equipment and ductwork attachment; provision for adjustment to limit
maximum start and stop movement to 9 mm.
.2
Arrange restraints symmetrically on either side of unit and attach at centerline of thrust.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install vibration isolation equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and
adjust mountings to level equipment.
.2
Ensure piping, ducting and electrical connections to isolated equipment do not reduce
system flexibility and that piping, conduit and ducting passage through walls and floors
do not transmit vibrations.
.3
Unless indicated otherwise, support piping connected to isolated equipment with spring
mounts or spring hangers with 25 mm minimum static deflection as follows:
.1
.2
Up to NPS4: first 3 points of support. NPS5 to NPS8: first 4 points of support.
NPS10 and Over: first 6 points of support.
First point of support shall have a static deflection of twice deflection of isolated
equipment, but not more than 50 mm.
.4
Where isolation is bolted to floor use vibration isolation rubber washers.
.5
Block and shim level bases so that ductwork and piping connections can be made to a
rigid system at the operating level, before isolator adjustment is made. Ensure that there
is no physical contact between isolated equipment and building structure.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
.1
.2
CAN/CGSB-1.60-97, Interior Alkyd Gloss Enamel.
CAN/CGSB-24.3-92, Identification of Piping Systems.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
.1
.2
1.2
CAN/CSA-B149.1-10, Natural Gas and Propane Installation Code.
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)
.1
.2
.3
Section 23 05 53.01
Page 1
2016-01-13
NFPA 13-2010, Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
NFPA 14-2010, Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems.
SUBMITTALS
.1
Product Data: submit product data for each item specified.
.2
Submittals: in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.3
Product data to include paint colour chips, other products specified in this section.
.4
Samples:
.1
.2
1.3
Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
Samples to include nameplates, labels, tags, lists of proposed legends.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Quality assurance submittals: submit following in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Health and Safety:
.1
1.4
Do construction occupational health and safety in accordance with Section
01 35 29.06.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
.1
Packing, shipping, handling and unloading:
.1
.2
.2
Deliver, store and handle in accordance with Section 01 61 00.
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions.
Waste Management and Disposal:
.1
.2
.3
Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal: separate waste
materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
Dispose of unused paint material at official hazardous material collections site.
Do not dispose of unused paint material into sewer system, into streams, lakes,
onto ground or in locations where it will pose health or environmental hazard.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURER'S EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES
Section 23 05 53.01
Page 2
2016-01-13
.1
Metal or plastic laminate nameplate mechanically fastened to each piece of equipment by
manufacturer.
.2
Lettering and numbers raised or recessed.
.3
Information to include, as appropriate:
.1
.2
2.2
Equipment: manufacturer's name, model, size, serial number, capacity.
Motor: voltage, Hz, phase, power factor, duty, frame size.
SYSTEM NAMEPLATES
.1
Colours:
.1
.2
.2
Construction:
.1
.3
.2
Conform to following table:
Size # mm Sizes (mm) No. of
Lines
Height of
Letters
(mm)
1
10 x 50
1
3
2
13 x 75
1
5
3
13 x 75
2
3
4
20 x 100 1
8
5
20 x 100 2
5
6
20 x 200 1
8
7
25 x 125 1
12
8
25 x 125 2
8
9
35 x 200 1
20
Use maximum of 25 letters/numbers per line.
Locations:
.1
.2
.5
3 mm thick laminated plastic, matte finish, with square corners, letters accurately
aligned and machine engraved into core.
Sizes:
.1
.4
Hazardous: red letters, white background.
Elsewhere: black letters, white background (except where required otherwise by
applicable codes).
Terminal cabinets, control panels: use size #5.
Equipment in Mechanical Rooms: use size #9.
Identification for PWGSC Preventive Maintenance Support System (PMSS):
.1
.2
Use arrangement of Main identifier, Source identifier, Destination identifier.
Equipment in Mechanical Room:
.1
Main identifier: size #9.
.2
Source and Destination identifiers: size #6.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.3
2.3
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
Section 23 05 53.01
Page 3
2016-01-13
.3
Terminal cabinets, control panels: size #5.
Equipment elsewhere: sizes as appropriate.
EXISTING IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS
.1
Apply existing identification system to new work.
.2
Where existing identification system does not cover for new work, use identification
system specified this section.
.3
Before starting work, obtain written approval of identification system from Departmental
Representative.
2.4
PIPING SYSTEMS GOVERNED BY CODES
.1
Identification:
.1
.2
.3
2.5
Natural gas: to CAN/CSA-B149.1
Sprinklers: to NFPA 13.
Standpipe and hose systems: to NFPA 14.
IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS
.1
Identify contents by background colour marking, pictogram (as necessary), legend;
direction of flow by arrows. To CAN/CGSB-24.3 except where specified otherwise.
.2
Pictograms:
.1
.3
Legend:
.1
.4
.2
.3
Outside diameter of pipe or insulation less than 75 mm: 100 mm long x 50 mm
high.
Outside diameter of pipe or insulation 75 mm and greater: 150 mm long x 50 mm
high.
Use double-headed arrows where flow is reversible.
Extent of background colour marking:
.1
.2
.6
Block capitals to sizes and colours listed in CAN/CGSB-24.3.
Arrows showing direction of flow:
.1
.5
Where required: Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)
regulations.
To full circumference of pipe or insulation.
Length to accommodate pictogram, full length of legend and arrows.
Materials for background colour marking, legend, arrows:
.1
.2
Pipes and tubing 20 mm and smaller: waterproof and heat-resistant pressure
sensitive plastic marker tags.
Other pipes: pressure sensitive vinyl with protective overcoating, waterproof
contact adhesive undercoating, suitable for ambient of 100% RH and continuous
operating temperature of 150°C and intermittent temperature of 200°C.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.7
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
Section 23 05 53.01
Page 4
2016-01-13
Colours and Legends:
.1
.2
Where not listed, obtain direction from Departmental Representative.
Colours for legends, arrows: to following table:
Background colour: Legend, arrows:
Yellow
BLACK
Green
WHITE
Red
WHITE
.3
Background colour marking and legends for piping systems:
Contents
Background colour Legend
Marking
Hot water heating supply
Yellow
HEATING SUPPLY
Hot water heating return
Yellow
HEATING RETURN
Domestic hot water supply
Green
DOM. HW SUPPLY
Dom. HWS recirculation
Green
DOM. HW CIRC
Domestic cold water supply Green
DOM. CWS
Sanitary
Green
SAN
Plumbing vent
Green
SAN. VENT
Refrigeration suction
Yellow
REF. SUCTION
Refrigeration liquid
Yellow
REF. LIQUID
Refrigeration hot gas
Yellow
REF. HOT GAS
Natural gas
to Codes
Gas regulator vents
to Codes
Fire protection water
Red
FIRE PROT. WTR
Sprinklers
Red
SPRINKLERS
2.6
IDENTIFICATION DUCTWORK SYSTEMS
.1
50 mm high stencilled letters and directional arrows 150 mm long x 50 mm high.
.2
Colours: black, or co-ordinated with base colour to ensure strong contrast.
2.7
VALVES, CONTROLLERS
.1
Brass tags with 12 mm stamped identification data filled with black paint.
.2
Include flow diagrams for each system, of approved size, showing charts and schedules
with identification of each tagged item, valve type, service, function, normal position,
location of tagged item.
2.8
CONTROLS COMPONENTS IDENTIFICATION
.1
Identify all systems, equipment, components, controls, sensors with system nameplates
specified in this section.
.2
Inscriptions to include function and (where appropriate) fail-safe position.
2.9
LANGUAGE
.1
Identification in English.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
.1
3.2
Section 23 05 53.01
Page 5
2016-01-13
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications,
including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and
datasheet.
TIMING
.1
3.3
Provide identification only after painting specified Section 09 91 23 has been completed.
INSTALLATION
.1
Perform work in accordance with CAN/CGSB-24.3 except as specified otherwise.
.2
Provide ULC and CSA registration plates as required by respective agency.
.3
Identify systems, equipment to conform to PWGSC PMSS.
3.4
NAMEPLATES
.1
Locations:
.1
.2
Standoffs:
.1
.3
Provide for nameplates on hot and/or insulated surfaces.
Protection:
.1
3.5
In conspicuous location to facilitate easy reading and identification from operating
floor.
Do not paint, insulate or cover.
LOCATION OF IDENTIFICATION ON PIPING AND DUCTWORK SYSTEMS
.1
On long straight runs in open areas in boiler rooms, equipment rooms, galleries, tunnels: at
not more than 17 m intervals and more frequently if required to ensure that at least one is
visible from any one viewpoint in operating areas and walking aisles.
.2
Adjacent to each change in direction.
.3
At least once in each small room through which piping or ductwork passes.
.4
On both sides of visual obstruction or where run is difficult to follow.
.5
On both sides of separations such as walls, floors, partitions.
.6
Where system is installed in pipe chases, ceiling spaces, galleries, confined spaces, at entry
and exit points, and at access openings.
.7
At beginning and end points of each run and at each piece of equipment in run.
.8
At point immediately upstream of major manually operated or automatically controlled
valves, and dampers. Where this is not possible, place identification as close as possible,
preferably on upstream side.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.9
Section 23 05 53.01
Page 6
2016-01-13
Identification easily and accurately readable from usual operating areas and from access
points.
.1
3.6
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
Position of identification approximately at right angles to most convenient line of
sight, considering operating positions, lighting conditions, risk of physical damage
or injury and reduced visibility over time due to dust and dirt.
VALVES, CONTROLLERS
.1
Valves and operating controllers, except at plumbing fixtures, radiation, or where in plain
sight of equipment they serve: Secure tags with non-ferrous chains or closed "S" hooks.
.2
Install one copy of flow diagrams, valve schedules mounted in frame behind non-glare
glass where directed by Departmental Representative. Provide one copy (reduced in size if
required) in each operating and maintenance manual.
.3
Number valves in each system consecutively.
3.7
CLEANING
.1
Proceed in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.2
Upon completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials,
excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Section 23 05 93
Region Project
Page 1
Number R.069124.001
2016-01-13
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL
.1
TAB means to test, adjust and balance to perform in accordance with requirements of
Contract Documents and to do other work as specified in this section.
.2
Scope of work includes new and existing systems and equipment.
1.2
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
.1
1.3
Section 23 05 93.13 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Fume Hoods
QUALIFICATIONS OF TAB PERSONNEL
.1
Names of personnel it is proposed to perform TAB to be submitted to and approved by
Departmental Representative within 60 days of award of contract.
.2
Personnel to be member in good standing of AABC and/or NEBB.
.3
Provide documentation confirming qualifications, successful experience.
1.4
PURPOSE OF TAB
.1
Test to verify proper and safe operation, determine actual point of performance, evaluate
qualitative and quantitative performance of equipment, systems and controls at design,
average and low loads using actual or simulated loads
.2
Adjust and regulate equipment and systems so as to meet specified performance
requirements and to achieve specified interaction with other related systems under normal
and emergency loads and operating conditions.
.3
Balance systems and equipment to regulate flow rates to match load requirements over full
operating ranges.
1.5
EXCEPTIONS
.1
1.6
TAB of systems and equipment regulated by codes, standards to be to satisfaction of
authority having jurisdiction.
CO-ORDINATION
.1
Schedule time required for TAB (including repairs, re-testing) into project construction
and completion schedule so as to ensure completion before acceptance of project.
.2
Do TAB of each system independently and subsequently, where interlocked with other
systems, in unison with those systems.
1.7
PRE-TAB REVIEW
.1
Review contract documents before project construction is started and confirm in writing to
Departmental Representative adequacy of provisions for TAB and other aspects of design
and installation pertinent to success of TAB.
PWGSC Ontario
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Section 23 05 93
Region Project
Page 2
Number R.069124.001
2016-01-13
.2
Review specified standards and report to Departmental Representative in writing all
proposed procedures which vary from standard.
.3
During construction, co-ordinate location and installation of TAB devices, equipment,
accessories, measurement ports and fittings.
1.8
SITE VISITS
.1
Total of 2 site visits shall be made to be coordinated with the general contractor and client.
After each site visit, a written report shall be submitted to the Contractor and Consultant.
.2
A review of the installation and access to all valves, dampers, and equipment shall be made
at the specified site visits and any additional dampers or valves required for proper
balancing shall be forwarded in writing to be reviewed by the Consultant.
.3
Allow for 2 visits to site to adjust systems for seasonal changes during warranty.
Coordinate time of visits with the Owner. Submit reports to Consultant.
.4
Begin balancing after equipment start-up and testing and after systems have been
completed and are in full working order. Place systems and equipment into full operation
and continue operation during each working day of balancing.
1.9
START-UP
.1
Follow start-up procedures as recommended by equipment manufacturer unless specified
otherwise.
.2
Follow special start-up procedures specified elsewhere in Division 23.
1.10
OPERATION OF SYSTEMS DURING TAB
.1
1.11
Operate systems for length of time required for TAB and as required by Departmental
Representative for verification of TAB reports.
SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide required information in accordance with Section 01 30 00 – Administrative
Requirements and Section 01 70 00 – Execution.
.2
Provide proof of membership in the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC), National
Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB). Submit, prior to commencement of TAB:
.1
Proposed methodology and procedures for performing TAB if different from
referenced standard.
.3
Informational Submittals: Provide the following submittals electronically during the
course of the work:
.4
Balancing Agenda:
.1
.2
Submit balancing agenda to the Consultant review at least sixty (60) days prior to
the start of balancing work. Start balancing work only after agenda has been
approved. Include descriptive data, procedure data, and sample forms in agenda.
Descriptive Data: General description of each system including associated
equipment and different operation cycles, listing of flow and terminal
measurements to be performed.
PWGSC Ontario
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Section 23 05 93
Region Project
Page 3
Number R.069124.001
2016-01-13
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
1.12
Procedure Data: Procedures for converting test measurements to establish
compliance with requirements, specify type of instrument to be used, method of
instrument application (by sketch) and correction factors.
Sample Forms: Form showing application of procedures to typical systems.
Prior to commencement of work on site, the balancing agent shall arrange with the
Consultant, a pre-determined test area on site. This is to determine the accuracy of
test equipment and to review the balancing methods outlined in the written,
pre-approved balancing procedures.
At the completion of balancing the first major air system the balancing agent shall
notify the Consultant to re-visit the site to evaluate work completed to this time.
Provide the Consultant with 5 days written notice, prior to request for site visit.
Balance Report:
.1
Submit electronic copies of rough balancing reports to the Consultant for
review, prior to on-site verification and acceptance of Project.
.2
Provide four (4) copies of final reports to contractor for inserting in
Owner's Operating and Maintenance Manuals as described in
Section 20 01 00.
.3
Include types, serial number, and dates of calibration of instruments in the
reports.
START OF TAB
.1
Notify Departmental Representative 7 days prior to start of TAB.
.2
Start TAB when building is essentially completed, including:
.3
Installation of ceilings, doors, windows, other construction affecting TAB.
.4
Application of weatherstripping, sealing, caulking.
.5
All pressure, leakage, other tests specified elsewhere in Division 23.
.6
All provisions for TAB installed and operational.
.7
Start-up, verification for proper, normal and safe operation of mechanical and associated
electrical and control systems affecting TAB including but not limited to:
.1
.2
Proper thermal overload protection in place for electrical equipment.
Air systems:
.1
Filters in place, clean.
.2
Duct systems clean.
.3
Ducts, air shafts, ceiling plenums are airtight to within specified
tolerances.
.4
Correct fan rotation.
.5
Fire, smoke, volume control dampers installed and open.
.6
Coil fins combed, clean.
.7
Access doors, installed, closed.
.8
Outlets installed, volume control dampers open.
PWGSC Ontario
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Section 23 05 93
Region Project
Page 4
Number R.069124.001
2016-01-13
.3
1.13
Liquid systems:
.1
Flushed, filled, vented.
.2
Strainers in place, baskets clean.
.3
Isolating and balancing valves installed, open.
.4
Calibrated balancing valves installed, at factory settings.
.5
Chemical treatment systems complete, operational.
INSTRUMENTS
.1
Prior to TAB, submit to Departmental Representative list of instruments used together with
serial numbers.
.2
Calibrate in accordance with requirements of most stringent of referenced standard for
either applicable system or HVAC system.
.3
Calibrate within 3 months of TAB. Provide certificate of calibration to Consultant.
1.14
APPLICATION TOLERANCES
.1
Do TAB to following tolerances of design values:
.1
.2
1.15
Office and support space HVAC systems: plus 5%, minus 5 %.
Hydronic systems: plus or minus 10%.
ACCURACY TOLERANCES
.1
1.16
Measured values to be accurate to within plus or minus 2% of actual values.
INSTRUMENTS
.1
Prior to TAB, submit to Departmental Representative list of instruments to be used
together with serial numbers.
.2
Calibrate in accordance with requirements of most stringent of referenced standard for
either applicable system or HVAC system.
.3
Calibrate within 3 months of TAB. Provide certificate of calibration to Departmental
Representative.
1.17
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit, prior to commencement of TAB:
.2
Proposed methodology and procedures for performing TAB if different from referenced
standard.
.3
Submit preliminary TAB Report and final TAB Report as indicated below.
1.18
PRELIMINARY TAB REPORT
.1
Submit for checking and approval of Departmental Representative, prior to submission of
formal TAB report, sample of rough TAB sheets. Include:
.1
.2
Date testing work is performed.
Details of instruments used.
PWGSC Ontario
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Section 23 05 93
Region Project
Page 5
Number R.069124.001
2016-01-13
.3
.4
.5
1.19
Details of TAB procedures employed.
Calculations procedures.
Summaries.
TAB REPORT
.1
Format in accordance with referenced standard.
.2
TAB report to show results in SI units and to include:
.1
.2
.3
1.20
Project record drawings.
System schematics.
Submit 6 copies of TAB Report to Consultant for verification and approval, in English, in
D-ring binders, complete with index tabs.
SYSTEM DATA
.1
Air Handling Equipment
Design Data:
Total air flow rate;
Fan total static pressure;
System static pressure;
Motor kWHP, r/min, amps, Volts, Phase;
Outside air flow rate L/s (cfm);
Fan r/min;
Fan/kWHP;
Inlet and outlet, dry and wet bulb temperatures.
Installation Data:
Manufacturer and model;
Size;
Arrangement discharge and class;
Motor type, kWHP, r/min, voltage, phase, cycles, and load amperage;
Location and local identification data.
Recorded Data:
Supply Air Fan
 Fan 100% Outside Air
Air flow rate;
Fan total static pressure;
System static pressure;
 Fan Full Return/Min O/A
Air flow rate;
Fan total static pressure;
System static pressure;
Return Air Fan
 Fan 100% Exhaust Air
PWGSC Ontario
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Section 23 05 93
Region Project
Page 6
Number R.069124.001
2016-01-13
Air flow rate;
Fan total static pressure;
System static pressure;
 Fan Full Return
Air flow rate;
Fan total static pressure;
System static pressure;
System static pressure;
 At every fan section
Fan r/min;
For Axial Fans, note blade pitch angle;
Motor operating amperage;
Inlet and outlet, dry and wet bulb temperatures.
.2
Air Terminal Devices (VAV and Zone boxes):
Outlet identification location and designation;
Manufacturers catalogue identification and type;
*Application factors;
Air flow at minimum position;
Air flow at maximum position
Air flow at purge mode
.3
Air Inlet and Outlets:
Outlet identification location and designation;
Manufacturers catalogue identification and type;
*Application factors;
Design and recorded velocities;
Design and recorded air flow rates;
Deflector vane or diffuser cone settings.
* (Refer to 3.1.3 for supporting information)
.4
Air Heating and Cooling Equipment
Design Data:
Heat transfer rate;
Liquid and air flow rates;
Liquid pressure drop;
Air static pressure drop;
Entering and leaving liquid temperatures;
Entering and leaving air dry and wet bulb temperatures.
Installation Data:
Manufacturer, model, type;
Entering and leaving fluid flow and temperatures;
Entering and leaving air flow and temperatures;
Fluid and air side pressure drops.
PWGSC Ontario
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Section 23 05 93
Region Project
Page 7
Number R.069124.001
2016-01-13
Recorded Data:
Element type and identification (location and designation);
Entering and leaving air dry and wet bulb temperatures;
Entering and leaving water temperatures;
Liquid pressure drop;
Air static pressure drop;
Air and Liquid flow rates;
Adjusted temperature rise or drop.
Measure heating water supply/return water flows at point of tie-in before and after
balancing of new system. Provide new balancing valve (fully open) to
accommodate flow reading.
1.21
VERIFICATION
.1
Reported results subject to verification by Departmental Representative.
.2
Provide manpower and instrumentation to verify up to 30% of reported results.
.3
Number and location of verified results to be at discretion of Departmental Representative.
.4
Bear costs to repeat TAB as required to satisfaction of Departmental Representative.
1.22
SETTINGS
.1
After TAB is completed to satisfaction of Departmental Representative, replace drive
guards, close access doors, lock devices in set positions, ensure sensors are at required
settings.
.2
Permanently mark settings to allow restoration at any time during life of facility. Markings
not to be eradicated or covered in any way.
1.23
COMPLETION OF TAB
.1
1.24
TAB to be considered complete when final TAB Report received and approved by
Departmental Representative.
OTHER TAB REQUIREMENTS
.1
General requirements applicable to work specified this paragraph:
.1
.2
.2
Smoke management systems:
.1
1.25
Qualifications of TAB personnel: as for air systems specified this section.
Quality assurance: as for air systems specified this section.
Test for proper operation of all smoke and fire dampers, sensors, and detectors,
installed as component parts of air systems specified or modified within the scope
of work.
POST- OCCUPANCY TAB
.1
Participate in systems checks twice during Warranty Period - #1 approximately 3 months
after acceptance and #2 within 3 months of termination of Warranty Period.
PWGSC Ontario
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Section 23 05 93
Region Project
Page 8
Number R.069124.001
2016-01-13
Part 2
PRODUCTS
.1
Not Used.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL PROCEDURE
.1
Permanently mark, by stick-on labels and/or fluorescent paint, settings on valves, splitters,
dampers, and other adjustment devices
.2
Subsequent to correctional work, take measurements to verify balance has not been
disrupted or that any such disruption has been rectified.
.3
Where vane anemometer is used to measure supply, return or exhaust air grilles, AK
factors shall be determined as follows:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Determine and tabulate similar sized grilles being balanced for AK schedule.
Traverse all ducts serving grilles (outlined in AK schedule) to verify AK factors.
AK factor from schedule, must be approved by Departmental Representative
during initial review with balancer on site. (Balancer shall include written
procedure for determination of AK factors).
No flow hoods are to be used for measurement of exhaust or return air grilles.
.4
Balancing contractor shall advise mechanical contractor of required revised pulleys,
sheaves and impellor shavings to allow proper balancing of systems
.5
Where axial fans require blade pitch changes, this shall be the responsibility of the
balancing contractor
3.2
AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE
.1
Perform balancing, adjusting, and testing with building doors and windows in their normal
operation position.
.2
The following procedure shall be adopted for central systems:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.3
When balancing air outlets:
.1
.2
.4
Ensure dampers or volume control devices are in fully open position
Balance central apparatus to ±5% air flow
Balance branches and mains as stated previously
Recheck central apparatus
Balance all terminal air outlets as stated previously
Re-balance central apparatus to ±5%
Recheck all air outlets.
Perform acoustical measurements.
Rough balance furthest outlets and then balance sequentially back to source.
Fine balance furthest outlet back to source.
Take static pressure readings and air supply temperature readings at 10 points on each
system.
PWGSC Ontario
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Section 23 05 93
Region Project
Page 9
Number R.069124.001
2016-01-13
.5
Make air quantity measurements in ducts by "Pitot Tube" traverse of entire cross sectional
area. Take minimum of 4 for rectangular ducts, and 2 on each vertical and horizontal axis
for round ducts, traverse readings. If readings are inconsistent across duct, try to obtain
straight run of six (6) diameters widths upstream and re-do traverse. Measure air quantities
on each system.
.6
Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extent that adjustments do not
create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control only by duct internal
devices such as dampers and splitters
.7
Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Vary branch air quantities by
damper regulation.
.8
Verify all terminal unit factory settings for maximum air flow (and minimum if
applicable). Adjust terminal unit controller if required. Record adjusted units.
.9
The final balanced condition of each area shall include testing and adjusting of pressure
conditions. Test and record building pressurization levels in variable volume systems
throughout full range of fan delivery rates, under both heating and cooling conditions.
Front doors, exits, elevator shafts, should be checked for air flow so that exterior conditions
do not cause excessive or abnormal pressure conditions. Document abnormal building
leakage conditions noted.
.10
Complete balancing to achieve positive building pressure unless otherwise instructed. A
positive pressure relative to outside of 10 Pa minimum and 20 Pa maximum shall be
achieved, measured with negligible outside wind velocity
3.3
FIRE DAMPER VERIFICATION
.1
Visually inspect all fire dampers
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Installation is straight
Wall angles properly installed
Duct has break away connection
Fire stopping material where used is properly installed
Adequate access
Clearance between sleeve and wall
.2
Inspect all fire damper blades and tracks prior to test firing. Sheet metal trade to clean all
dirty dampers and tracks to satisfaction of balancer.
.3
Manually remove each fusible link to ensure damper blade drops properly, then reset
damper. Mark dropped fire damper with black felt marker.
.4
If fire damper does not close properly, sheet metal trade to repair installation and balancing
agency to retest.
.5
All fire damper tests shall be witnessed by two parties, certified by Contractor and
endorsed by the testing personnel.
3.4
FIRE DAMPER/FIRE STOP FLAP VERIFICATION
.1
Visually inspect all fire dampers and fire stop flaps:
.1
Installation is straight.
PWGSC Ontario
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Section 23 05 93
Region Project
Page 10
Number R.069124.001
2016-01-13
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Wall angles properly installed.
Duct has break away connection.
Fire stopping material where used is properly installed.
Adequate access.
Clearance between sleeve and wall.
.2
Inspect all fire damper blades and tracks prior to test firing. Sheet metal trade to clean all
dirty dampers and tracks to satisfaction of balancer.
.3
Manually remove each fusible link to ensure damper blade drops properly, then reset
damper. Mark dropped fire damper with black felt marker.
.4
If fire damper does not close properly, sheet metal trade to repair installation and balancing
agency to retest.
.5
All fire damper tests shall be witnessed by two parties, certified by Contractor and
endorsed by the testing personnel.
3.5
BALANCING OF HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
.1
Open all (excepting pressure bypass must be closed) valves to fully open position
including balancing valves, isolation valves, and control valves.
.2
Execute air balance prior to initiating hydronic balance (if coils are provided)
.3
Remove temporary strainers and install permanent sheaves prior to commencing balancing
of hydronic systems.
.4
Check and adjust flows and temperatures at inlet side of coils.
.5
Position and mark all automatic valves, hand valves and balancing cocks for design flow
through all coils, connectors, and all items in system requiring circulation of liquid.
.6
Upon completion of flow readings and coil adjustments, mark setting and record data.
.7
Ensure all bypass valves are tightly closed.
.8
After making all terminal unit adjustments, re-check settings at pumps. Re-adjust as
required.
.9
Calibrate all pressure and temperatures gauges.
.10
Verify pressure drops and flows through 3-way pressure control bypass valves at full
operating range.
3.6
BALANCING REPORT
.1
Submit draft copies of rough balancing reports prior to final acceptance of project.
.2
Include types, serial number and dates of calibration of instruments.
.3
Record test data on a sepia made from the latest available revised set of mechanical
drawings and submit three (3) copies upon completion of the balancing contract for
inclusion in equipment and maintenance manuals.
.4
Submit with report, fan and pump curves with operating conditions plotted. Submit grille
and diffuser shop drawings and diffusion factors.
PWGSC Ontario
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Section 23 05 93
Region Project
Page 11
Number R.069124.001
2016-01-13
.5
Report shall be indexed as follows:
Air
Summary
Procedure
Instrumentation
Drawings
Equipment Summary
Fan Sheets
Fan Curves
Fan Profile Data
Static Data
Air Monitoring Station Data
Traverse Data and Schedule
Terminal Unit Summary
Outlet Data Summary and Schematics (per system)
Building Pressurization Data
Weather Conditions at Time of Test
Liquid
Summary
Procedure
Instrumentation
Drawings
Flow Stations
Coils
Equipment Data
Element Data Summary and Schematics (per system)
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
PRESSURE TESTING OF DUCTED AIR SYSTEMS
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL
.1
1.2
Section 23 05 94
Page 1
2016-01-13
Ducts over 5 m in length, forming part of a supply, return or exhaust ductwork system
directly or indirectly connected to air handling equipment or fans to be pressure tested for
leaks.
TIMING
.1
Ducts to be tested before installation of insulation or any other form of concealments.
.2
Test after seals have cured.
.3
Test when ambient temperature will not affect effectiveness of seals, gaskets, etc.
1.3
EXCLUSIONS
.1
1.4
Flexible connections to VAV boxes.
REFERENCES
.1
1.5
SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual, 2012.
TEST PROCEDURES
.1
Maximum lengths of ducts to be tested to be consistent with capacity of test equipment.
.2
Section of duct to be tested to include:
.1
Fittings, branch ducts, tap-ins.
.3
Repeat tests until specified pressures are attained. Bear costs for repairs and repetition to
tests.
.4
Base partial system leakage calculations on Reference Standard.
.5
Seal leaks that can be heard or felt, regardless of their contribution to total leakage.
1.6
TESTING AGENCY
.1
1.7
Installing Contractor.
TEST INSTRUMENTS
.1
Testing agency to provide instruments for tests.
.2
Test apparatus to include:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
Fan capable of producing required static pressure.
Duct section with calibrated orifice plate mounted and accurately located pressure
taps.
Flow measuring instrument compatible with the orifice plate.
Calibration curves for orifice plates used.
Flexible duct for connecting to ductwork under test.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.6
PRESSURE TESTING OF DUCTED AIR SYSTEMS
Section 23 05 94
Page 2
2016-01-13
Smoke bombs for visual inspections.
.3
Test apparatus to be accurate to within +/- 3 % of flow rate and pressure.
.4
Submit details of test instruments to be used to Departmental Representative at least one
month before anticipated start date.
.5
Test instruments to be calibrated and certificate of calibration deposited with Departmental
Representative no more than 28 days before start of tests.
.6
Instruments to be re-calibrated every six months thereafter.
1.8
SYSTEM LEAKAGE TOLERANCES
.1
System leakage tolerances specified herein are stated as a percentage of total flow rate
handled by the system. Therefore, when testing sections of ductwork this acceptable
leakage shall be pro-rated to entire system. Leakage for sections of duct systems shall not
exceed the total allowable leakage.
.2
Leakage tests on following systems not to exceed specified leakage rates.
.1
.2
.3
.4
.3
1.9
Small duct systems up to 250 Pa: Leakage 2 %.
Terminal box and duct on downstream side of terminal box: Leakage 2 %.
Large low pressure duct systems up to 500 Pa: Leakage 2 %.
HP duct systems up to 1000 Pa pressure classification, including upstream side of
VAV boxes: Leakage 1 %.
Evaluation of test results to use surface area of duct and pressure in duct as basic
parameters.
EQUIPMENT LEAKAGE TOLERANCES
.1
1.10
Equipment and system components such as VAV boxes, duct heating Leakage: 5%.
REPORT FORMS
.1
1.11
Submit proposed report form and test report format to Departmental Representative for
approval at least one months before proposed date of first series of tests. Do not start tests
until approval received in writing from Departmental Representative.
PRESSURE TEST REPORTS
.1
Prepare report of results and submit to Departmental Representative within 24 hours of
completion of tests. Include:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.2
Schematic of entire system.
Schematic of section under test showing test site.
Required and achieved static pressures.
Orifice differential pressure at test sites.
Permissible and actual leakage flow rate (L/s) for test sites.
Witnessed certification of results.
Include test reports in final TAB report.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
PRESSURE TESTING OF DUCTED AIR SYSTEMS
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Part 3
Section 23 05 94
Page 3
2016-01-13
Not Used.
EXECUTION
.1
Contractor to bear the cost of remedial repair measures and additional testing if results do
not meet tolerances stated in the specifications.
.2
Testing results to be included in Operations and Maintenance manual in accordance with
section 01 78 00.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
DUCT INSULATION
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Definitions:
.1
.2
.2
Section 23 07 13
Page 1
2016-01-13
For purposes of this section:
.1
"CONCEALED" - insulated mechanical services and equipment in
suspended ceilings and non-accessible chases and furred-in spaces.
.2
"EXPOSED" - means "not concealed" as previously defined.
.3
Insulation systems - insulation material, fasteners, jackets, and other
accessories.
TIAC Codes:
.1
CRD: Code Round Ductwork,
.2
CRF: Code Rectangular Finish.
Reference Standards:
.1
.2
.3
.4
American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers
(ASHRAE)
.1
ANSI/ASHRAE/IES 90.1-2010, SI; Energy Standard for Buildings
Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.
ASTM International Inc.
.1
ASTM B209M-10, Standard Specification for Aluminum and
Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate (Metric).
.2
ASTM C335-10e1, Standard Test Method for Steady State Heat Transfer
Properties of Pipe Insulation.
.3
ASTM C411-11, Standard Test Method for Hot-Surface Performance of
High-Temperature Thermal Insulation.
.4
ASTM C449-07, Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber-HydraulicSetting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement.
.5
ASTM C547-11, Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation.
.6
ASTM C553-11, Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket
Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications.
.7
ASTM C612-10, Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and
Board Thermal Insulation.
.8
ASTM C795-08, Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in
Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel.
.9
ASTM C921-10, Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of
Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation.
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)
.1
CGSB 51-GP-52Ma-89, Vapour Barrier, Jacket and Facing Material for
Pipe, Duct and Equipment Thermal Insulation.
Green Seal Environmental Standards (GSES)
.1
Standard GS-36-00, Commercial Adhesives.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.5
.6
.7
1.2
DUCT INSULATION
Section 23 07 13
Page 2
2016-01-13
South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD), California State
.1
SCAQMD Rule 1168-A2005, Adhesive and Sealant Applications.
Thermal Insulation Association of Canada (TIAC): National Insulation Standards
(2005).
Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC)
.1
CAN/ULC-S102-10, Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning
Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies.
.2
CAN/ULC-S701-11, Standard for Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene,
Boards and Pipe Covering.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product Data:
.1
.3
Samples:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Submit for approval: complete assembly of each type of insulation system,
insulation, coating, and adhesive proposed.
Mount sample on 12 mm plywood board.
Affix typewritten label beneath sample indicating service.
Manufacturers' Instructions:
.1
1.3
Provide manufacturer's printed product literature and datasheets for duct
insulation, and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size,
finish and limitations.
.1
Description of equipment giving manufacturer's name, type, model, year
and capacity.
.2
Details of operation, servicing and maintenance.
.3
Recommended spare parts list.
Provide manufacture's written duct insulation jointing recommendations, special
handling criteria, installation instructions, and cleaning procedures.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Qualifications:
.1
1.4
Installer: specialist in performing work of this section, and have at least 3 years
successful experience in this size and type of project, member of TIAC.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle in accordance with Section 01 61 00.
.2
Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name,
and ULC markings.
.3
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
DUCT INSULATION
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
FIRE AND SMOKE RATING
.1
To CAN/ULC-S102:
.1
.2
2.2
Section 23 07 13
Page 3
2016-01-13
Maximum flame spread rating: 25.
Maximum smoke developed rating: 50.
INSULATION
.1
Mineral fibre: as specified includes glass fibre, rock wool, slag wool.
.2
Thermal conductivity ("k" factor) not to exceed specified values at 24°C mean temperature
when tested in accordance with ASTM C335.
.3
TIAC Code C-1: Rigid mineral fibre board to ASTM C612, with factory applied vapour
retarder jacket to CGSB 51-GP-52Ma (as scheduled in Part 3 of this Section).
.4
TIAC Code C-2: Mineral fibre blanket to ASTM C553 faced with factory applied vapour
retarder jacket to CGSB 51-GP-52Ma (as scheduled in Part 3 of this section).
.1
.2
.3
2.3
Mineral fibre: to ASTM C553.
Jacket: to CGSB 51-GP-52Ma.
Maximum "k" factor: to ASTM C553.
JACKETS
.1
Canvas:
.1
.2
Lagging adhesive: compatible with insulation.
.1
.3
Maximum VOC limit to GSES GS-36.
Aluminum:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
2.4
220 gm/m² cotton, plain weave, treated with dilute fire retardant lagging adhesive
to ASTM C921.
To ASTM B209M with moisture barrier as scheduled in Part 3 of this section.
Thickness: 0.50 mm sheet.
Finish: Smooth.
Jacket banding and mechanical seals: 12 mm wide, 0.5 mm thick stainless steel.
.1
Stainless steel:
Type: 316.
Thickness: 0.25 mm sheet.
Finish: Smooth.
Jacket banding and mechanical seals: 12 mm wide, 0.5 mm thick stainless steel.
ACCESSORIES
.1
Vapour retarder lap adhesive:
.1
Water based, fire retardant type, compatible with insulation.
.1
Maximum VOC limit to GSES GS-36.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
DUCT INSULATION
Indoor Vapour Retarder Finish:
.1
Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation.
.3
Insulating Cement: hydraulic setting on mineral wool, to ASTM C449.
.4
ULC Listed Canvas Jacket:
.1
.5
220 gm/m² cotton, plain weave, treated with dilute fire retardant lagging adhesive
to ASTM C921.
Outdoor Vapour Retarder Mastic:
.1
.2
Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation.
Reinforcing fabric: Fibrous glass, untreated 305 g/m².
.6
Tape: self-adhesive, aluminum, 50 mm wide minimum.
.7
Contact adhesive: quick-setting
.1
.8
Section 23 07 13
Page 4
2016-01-13
Maximum VOC limit to GSES GS-36.
Canvas adhesive: washable.
.1
Maximum VOC limit to GSES GS-36.
.9
Tie wire: 1.5 mm stainless steel.
.10
Banding: 12 mm wide, 0.5 mm thick stainless steel.
.11
Facing: 25 mm stainless steel hexagonal wire mesh stitched on both faces of insulation.
.12
Fasteners: 2 mm diameter pins with 35 mm diameter clips, length to suit thickness of
insulation.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATION
.1
3.2
Manufacturer's Instructions: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations,
including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and
datasheets.
PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
.1
Pressure test ductwork systems complete, witness and certify.
.2
Ensure surfaces are clean, dry, free from foreign material.
3.3
INSTALLATION
.1
Install in accordance with TIAC National Standards.
.2
Apply materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and as indicated.
.3
Use 2 layers with staggered joints when required nominal thickness exceeds 75 mm.
.4
Maintain uninterrupted continuity and integrity of vapour retarder jacket and finishes.
.1
Ensure hangers, and supports are outside vapour retarder jacket.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.5
3.4
Section 23 07 13
Page 5
2016-01-13
Hangers and supports in accordance with Section 23 05 29.
.1
.6
DUCT INSULATION
Apply high compressive strength insulation where insulation may be compressed
by weight of ductwork.
Fasteners: install at 300 mm on centre in horizontal and vertical directions, minimum 2
rows each side.
DUCTWORK INSULATION SCHEDULE
.1
Insulation types and thicknesses: conform to following table:
TIAC Code
Rectangular cold C-1
and dual
temperature
supply air ducts
Round cold and C-2
dual temperature
supply air ducts
Rectangular warmC-1
air ducts
Round warm air C-1
ducts
Supply, return
and exhaust
ducts exposed in
space being
served
Outside air
C-1
ducts to mixing
plenum
Mixing plenums C-1
Exhaust duct
C-1
between dampers
and louvres
Rectangular
C-1
ducts outside
Round ducts
C-1
outside
Acoustically
none
lined ducts
3.5
Vapour Retarder Thickness (mm)
yes
50
yes
50
no
25
no
25
none
none
yes
25
yes
no
25
25
special
50
special
50
CLEANING
.1
Clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.1
.2
Remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.
Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with
Section 01 74 20.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes:
.1
1.2
Section 23 07 15
Page 1
2016-01-13
Thermal insulation for piping and piping accessories in commercial type
applications.
REFERENCES
.1
American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
.1
.2
American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM)
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.3
.2
CGSB 51-GP-52Ma-89, Vapour Barrier, Jacket and Facing Material for Pipe,
Duct and Equipment Thermal Insulation.
CAN/CGSB-51.53-95, Poly (Vinyl Chloride) Jacketing Sheet, for Insulated Pipes,
Vessels and Round Ducts.
Department of Justice Canada (Jus)
.1
.2
.3
.5
ASTM B209M-1, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy
Sheet and Plate (Metric).
ASTM C335/C335M-10e1, Standard Test Method for Steady State Heat Transfer
Properties of Horizontal Pipe Insulation.
ASTM C411-11, Standard Test Method for Hot-Surface Performance of
High-Temperature Thermal Insulation.
ASTM C449-07, Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber-Hydraulic-Setting
Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement.
ASTM C533-07, Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe
Thermal Insulation.
ASTM C547-07e1, Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation.
ASTM C795-08, Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact
with Austenitic Stainless Steel.
ASTM C921-10, Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing
Materials for Thermal Insulation.
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)
.1
.4
ASHRAE Standard 90.1-2010, Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise
Residential Buildings (ANSI approved; IESNA co-sponsored.
Canadian Environmental Assessment Act (CEAA), 1992, c. 37.
Canadian Environmental Protection Act (CEPA), 1999, c. 33.
Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act (TDGA), 1992, c. 34.
Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)
.1
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.6
Thermal Insulation Association of Canada (TIAC): Mechanical Insulation Best
Practice Guide(Revised 2005).
Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada (ULC)
.1
.2
.3
.4
1.3
Section 23 07 15
Page 2
2016-01-13
Manufacturer's Trade Associations
.1
.7
THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING
CAN/ULC-S102-10, Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics
of Flooring, Floor Coverings, and Miscellaneous Materials and Assemblies.
CAN/ULC-S701-11, Standard for Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene, Boards and
Pipe Covering.
CAN/ULC-S702-09, Thermal Insulation, Mineral Fibre, for Buildings
ULC-S702.2-10, Standard for Thermal Insulation, Mineral Fibre, for Buildings,
Part 2: Application Guidelines.
DEFINITIONS
.1
For purposes of this section:
.1
.2
.2
TIAC ss:
.1
.2
1.4
"CONCEALED" - insulated mechanical services in suspended ceilings and
non-accessible chases and furred-in spaces.
"EXPOSED" - will mean "not concealed" as specified.
CRF: Code Rectangular Finish.
CPF: Code Piping Finish.
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submittals: in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product Data:
.1
.3
Shop Drawings:
.1
.4
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
Samples:
.1
.5
Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet in
accordance with Section 01 33 00. Include product characteristics, performance
criteria, and limitations.
.1
Submit two copies of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information
System (WHMIS) Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
Quality assurance submittals: submit following in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.1
.2
Certificates: submit certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that materials
comply with specified performance characteristics and physical properties.
Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
.1
Departmental Representative will make available 1 copy of systems
supplier's installation instructions.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
1.5
THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING
Section 23 07 15
Page 3
2016-01-13
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Qualifications:
.1
.2
Health and Safety:
.1
1.6
Installer: specialist in performing work of this Section, and have at least 3 years
successful experience in this size and type of project, member of TIAC.
Do construction occupational health and safety in accordance with Section
01 35 29.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Packing, shipping, handling and unloading:
.1
.2
.3
.2
Storage and Protection:
.1
.2
.3
.3
Deliver, store and handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions
and Section 01 61 00.
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions.
Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with
manufacturer's name, address.
Protect from weather, construction traffic.
Protect against damage.
Store at temperatures and conditions required by manufacturer.
Waste Management and Disposal:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal: separate waste
materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
Place excess or unused insulation and insulation accessory materials in designated
containers.
Divert unused metal materials from landfill to metal recycling facility approved by
Departmental Representative.
Dispose of unused adhesive material at official hazardous material collections site
approved by Departmental Representative.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
FIRE AND SMOKE RATING
.1
In accordance with CAN/ULC-S102.
.1
.2
Maximum flame spread rating: 25.
Maximum smoke developed rating: 50.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
2.2
THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING
Section 23 07 15
Page 4
2016-01-13
INSULATION
.1
.2
.3
Cold Piping: Formed fine fibrous glass or formed mineral fibre pipe insulation meeting
requirements of ULC S702; with factory applied vapour barrier jacket, factory moulded to
conform to piping and as follows:
.1
K Value: Maximum 0.033 W/mC at 24C
.2
Service Temperature: 4C to 100C
Hot Piping: Formed fine fibrous glass or mineral fibre pipe insulation meeting
requirements of ULC S702; with factory applied general purpose jacket, factory moulded
to conform to piping and as follows:
.1
K Value: Maximum 0.033 W/mC at 24C
.2
Service Temperature: Up to 150C
Refrigerant Piping: Foamed plastic of closed cell structure or closed cell elastomer
meeting requirements of ULC S704 and as follows:
.1
.2
.4
2.3
K Value: Maximum 0.04 W/mC at 24C
Maximum Water Vapour Transmission Rating:
.1
Unjacketed: 0.1 perm
.2
Jacketed: 0.1 perm
Fire Retardant Insulation for PVC Piping: Formed fine fibrous glass or mineral fibre pipe
insulation with cover material having flame spread 0 and smoke developed rating of 35 or
less, plenum rated where exposed in return air installations or exposed ceiling installations.
EQUIPMENT INSULATION
.1
Hot Equipment: Rigid fibrous glass or mineral fibre insulation meeting requirements of
ULC S702 and as follows:
.1
.2
2.4
K Value: Maximum 0.033 W/mC at 24C
Service Temperature: -14C to 200C
INSULATION SECUREMENT
.1
Tape: self-adhesive, aluminum, 50 mm wide minimum.
.2
Contact adhesive: quick setting.
.3
Canvas adhesive: washable.
.4
Tie wire: 1.5 mm diameter stainless steel.
.5
Bands: stainless steel, 19 mm wide, 0.5 mm thick.
2.5
CEMENT
.1
Thermal insulating and finishing cement:
.1
2.6
Hydraulic setting on mineral wool, to ASTM C449.
VAPOUR RETARDER LAP ADHESIVE
.1
Water based, fire retardant type, compatible with insulation.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
2.7
THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING
Section 23 07 15
Page 5
2016-01-13
INDOOR VAPOUR RETARDER FINISH
.1
2.8
Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation.
OUTDOOR VAPOUR RETARDER FINISH
.1
Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation.
.2
Reinforcing fabric: fibrous glass, untreated 305 g/m².
2.9
JACKETS
.1
.2
Canvas: 220 g/m² cotton, plain weave, treated with dilute fire retardant lagging adhesive in
accordance with ASTM C921. Wheat or vegetable based adhesives will not be permitted.
Gauge Number
MSG Nominal Steel
Core Thickness
Nominal Sheet
Aluminum Thickness
8
4.2 mm
--
10
3.4 mm
--
12
2.7 mm
2.1 mm
14
1.9 mm
1.6 mm
16
1.5 mm
1.3 mm
18
1.2 mm
1.0 mm
20
0.9 mm
0.8 mm
22
0.8 mm
0.6 mm
24
0.6 mm
0.5 mm
26
0.5 mm
--
28
0.4 mm
--
29
0.35 mm
--
30
0.30 mm
--
Aluminum: Meeting requirements of ASTM B209 and as follows:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Thickness:
.1
Piping: Nominal 0.5 mm sheet
.2
Equipment, Valves and Fittings: Nominal 0.8 mm sheet
.3
Installations in Close Proximity to Occupied Areas: Nominal 0.8 mm
sheet
Finish: Smooth.
Joining: Longitudinal and circumferential slip joints with 50 mm laps.
Fittings: 0.5 mm thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective
liner.
Metal Jacket Banding and Mechanical Seals: Stainless steel, 19 mm wide, 0.5 mm
thick at 300 mm spacing.
Exterior Installations: Include integral moisture barrier and weatherproof lap seals
and fastenings.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.3
.4
Section 23 07 15
Page 6
2016-01-13
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC): One-piece moulded type and sheet meeting requirements of
CGSB-51.53 with pre-formed shapes as required and as follows:
.1
Colours: Match adjacent finish paint
.2
.3
.4
.5
Service Temperature Range: -20C to 65C
Moisture Vapour Transmission: 0.02 perm
Thickness: 0.35 mm
Fastenings:
.1
Solvent weld adhesive compatible with insulation for lap and joint seals
.2
Tacks
.3
Pressure sensitive vinyl tape of matching colour
.4
Interior: UV rated materials in areas exposed to fluorescent fixtures
.5
Exterior: UV rated material minimum 0.5 mm thick
ABS Plastic: One-piece moulded type and sheet with pre-formed shapes as required and as
follows:
.1
Colours: Match adjacent finish paint
.2
.3
.4
.5
Service Temperature Range: -40C to 82C
Moisture Vapour Transmission: 0.012 perm
Thickness: 0.750 mm
Fastenings:
.1
Solvent weld adhesive compatible with insulation for lap and joint seals
.2
Tacks
Locations: Exterior use only
.6
.5
THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING
REMOVABLE INSULATION COVERS
.1
General:
.1
All Covers shall be sewn, stapled or” hog-ringed” covers shall not be
acceptable.
.2
Covers shall conform to the configuration of the items being insulated.
.3
Covers shall include openings for all protrusions such as pipes, packing
glands on valves and expansion joints, hangers, supports, instrument lines,
and other appurtenances.
.4
Covers shall be designed so that no force bending or folding of the cover is
necessary for installation.
.5
Minimum 50mm wide flaps at terminal ends are to be provided to overlap
adjacent covers to ensure a good heat seal.
.6
Parting seems shall be at the installed low points (gravitational bottom) of
the cover to allow drainage without the use of weep tubes or grommets.
.7
Valve bonnets are to be covered, but packing glands shall remain exposed.
.8
Valve covers are to be designed such that the bonnet section is sewn to the
body section. For larger valves, the cover may be fabricated in two
sections, each section containing one half of the valve body and bonnet.
.9
Covers with a weight of 18.1 Kg or less are to be fabricated in one piece.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING
.10
.2
.3
.4
.5
Section 23 07 15
Page 7
2016-01-13
Covers with a weight of more than 18.1 Kg are to be fabricated in more
than one piece.
Insulation Core:
.1
The insulation core shall be fabricated in one piece, wherever possible.
.2
To prevent insulation settlement, the insulation core shall be secured
within the jacket through the weather barrier (outer jacketing), the
insulation, and the liner (inner jacketing).
.3
Insulating cores with more than one piece shall have staggered joints to
prevent hot spots and heat loss. The joint edges shall be butted together
and extra securement provided at those edges.
.4
Insulation core shall be comprised of 50mm thick fiberglass insulation of
non-combustible wool with resilient inorganic glass fibers bonded with a
thermosetting resin. Insulation density to be 38 Kg/m³. Insulation thermal
conductivity to be 0.044W/m.°C at a mean temperature of 100°C.
Jacket:
.1
The jacket shall be fabricated in one piece, wherever possible.
.2
Gusset walls shall be required for covers with core insulation thickness in
excess of 25mm.
.3
All seams, except the final closing seam, shall be inside seams. The
jackets are to be sewn inside out, then turned correct side out before
inserting the insulation core. The final closing seam shall be sewn on the
exterior of the jacket. Seams shall be sewn coated fiberglass thread or
coated stainless steel thread.
.4
Machine stitching shall be used for all sewing. Sewing shall be 6-8 stitches
per centimeter.
.5
Draw cords are to be placed along the outer edge of the flap and the outer
edge of the flap then rolled back inside and double stitched.
.6
Draw cords are to be of sufficient length to allow 150mm of cord to
protrude from each side of the flap.
.7
The inner and outer jacket shall be comprised of a fiberglass fabric
impregnated with silicone rubber. The silicone rubber shall be flame
retardant and suitable for high temperature usage. Outer jacket density
shall be 595 gms/m².
Securement devices:
.1
The securement belts and D-ring belts shall be of the same material as the
weather barrier (exterior jacket).
.2
The belts shall be placed 50mm back from the parting seams and on
150mm centers.
.3
Fire retardant fastening shall be used to secure belt to the weather barrier
after the belt passed through the Stainless Steel D-rings.
Identification tags:
.1
Each cover shall be identified by a permanently attached stainless steel
tag.
.2
An identification legend shall be mechanically embossed into the tag.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
2.10
Section 23 07 15
Page 8
2016-01-13
The tags shall be located in the same areas on similar type covers.
Should a cover require more than one piece for its construction, each piece
to be identified and numbered (i.e. 1of 3).
Each tag shall include at least the following information, but may also
include any pertinent information required by the end user.
.1
Type of item being covered.
.2
Location of item.
.3
Recording and tracking information.
Warranty:
.1
Provide a 5-year product Warranty
Acceptable manufacturers:
.1
Advanced Industrial Systems Inc., Thermo Help Canada Inc.,
Advanced Thermal Corp.
WEATHERPROOF CAULKING FOR JACKETS INSTALLED OUTDOORS
.1
2.11
Caulking to: Section 07 92 10.
ACCESSORIES
.1
Canvas Lagging Adhesive: Compatible with insulation and compliant with requirements
for ULC listed dilute fire retardant lagging adhesive, washable type.
.2
Tape: Self-adhesive, aluminum, reinforced, 50 mm wide minimum
.3
Contact Adhesive: Quick setting type
.4
Tie wire: 1.5 mm diameter stainless steel
.5
Bands: Stainless steel, 19 mm wide, 0.6 mm thick
.6
Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement: Hydraulic setting or Air drying for use on
mineral wool meeting requirements of ASTM C449.
.7
Vapour Retarder Lap Adhesive: Water based, fire retardant type, compatible with
insulation.
.8
Interior Vapour Retarder Finish: Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation.
.9
Exterior Vapour Retarder Finish: Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation;
fibrous glass reinforcing fabric; untreated 305 g/m2.
.10
Sealants: Joint and weatherproofing sealants of type compatible with adjacent materials
and as specified in Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
.1
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications,
including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and
datasheet.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
3.2
THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING
Section 23 07 15
Page 9
2016-01-13
PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENT
.1
Pressure testing of piping systems and adjacent equipment to be complete, witnessed and
certified.
.2
Surfaces clean, dry, free from foreign material.
3.3
INSTALLATION
.1
Install insulation and recovery jacket in accordance with TIAC Best Practices Guide,
manufacturer’s written instructions and requirements of this specification.
.2
Install insulation so that it is continuous through inside walls; pack around pipes with
fireproof self-supporting insulation material, properly sealed in accordance with
Section 07 84 00.
.3
Use two layers with staggered joints when required nominal wall thickness exceeds
75 mm.
.4
Maintain uninterrupted continuity and integrity of vapour retarder jacket and finishes;
hangers and supports must be outside vapour retarder jacket.
.5
Apply high compressive strength insulation, suitable for service, at oversized saddles and
shoes where insulation saddles have not been provided at supports and hanger locations.
.6
Cold systems:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.7
Insulate complete system including, but not limited to:
.1
Piping
.2
Fittings
.3
Valves
.4
Unions
.5
Flanges
.6
Victaulic Couplings and fittings
.7
and strainers
Piping: Seal lap joints with 100% coverage of vapour barrier adhesive; seal butt
joints with 50 mm wide strips of vapour barrier sealed with vapour barrier
adhesive; apply hydraulic insulating cement for fittings and valves or apply
factory fabricated insulation half shells, seal all laps and joints.
Do not insulate flexible connections and expansion joints.
For piping 25mm or smaller, insulation is not required on strainers, control valves
and balancing valves.
Terminate insulation bevelled to the pipe and sealed.
Hot systems:
.1
Insulate:
.1
Piping
.2
Fittings
.3
Valves
.4
Victaulic pipe fittings such as tees and elbows
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
.3
.4
.5
THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING
Section 23 07 15
Page 10
2016-01-13
Do not insulate:
.1
Unions
.2
Flanges (except on flanged valves)
.3
Strainers
.4
Flexible connections
.5
Expansion joints;
.6
Victaulic couplings directly connected to equipment to facilitate
equipment replacement or removal.
For piping 25mm or smaller, insulation is not required on strainers, control valves
and balancing valves.
Terminate insulation beveled to the pipe and sealed.
Piping: Apply hydraulic insulating cement or apply factory fabricated insulation
half shells for fittings and valves; flare-out staples may be used to secure jacket
laps on hot systems applied on 100 mm centres.
.1
Insulate Victaulic couplings with pre-formed removable insulation.
.8
Refrigerant Piping: Cover fittings and valves with equivalent thickness of pipe insulation
material; apply with edges tightly butted; seal joints with sealant.
.9
Equipment: Apply insulation with edges tightly butted, joints staggered and secured in
place by metal bands and as follows:
.1
.2
.3
.4
3.4
Weld on suitable anchors where necessary.
Provide sufficient clearance around openings for normal operation of equipment.
Finish surface of cold equipment insulation with vapour barrier jacket sealed with
vapour barrier adhesive.
Make uneven surfaces smooth with insulating cement.
FINISHING
.1
Finish insulation neatly at hangers, supports and other protrusions.
.2
Provide recovering jackets on exposed insulation throughout, including equipment rooms:
.3
Interior Exposed Finishing Applications, in accordance with TIAC CPF/1:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.4
Apply factory integral service jacket to receive treated fabric jacket applied using
recommended fabric adhesive.
Cover fittings, valves and strainers not finished with PVC covers with a hard coat
cement and finished with treated fitting fabric applied with using recommended
fabric adhesive.
Locate insulation seams in least visible locations.
Finish fabric with one (1) coat of fabric coating.
Interior Concealed Finishing Applications in accordance with TIAC CPF/2:
.1
.2
.3
Leave insulation on concealed piping left as factory finished with no further finish
required.
Apply pipe insulation with an integral all service jacket.
Secure jacket using appropriate fastenings on 100 mm centres.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.4
.5
.6
.5
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Locate insulation seams on piping on side of the pipe visible to access point of
concealed space, such as: underside of pipe in concealed ceiling applications.
Cover longitudinal and circumferential joints with jacket finishing tape neatly
applied or secure jacketing using integral self-sealing lap and self-sealing
circumferential joint strips depending on system used.
Cover fittings, valves and strainers not finished with PVC covers with a hard coat
cement and finish with treated fitting fabric applied with fabric adhesive.
Apply aluminum jacket over the pipe insulation using necessary fastenings
on 150 mm centres.
Apply metal jacket or preformed metal fittings over insulated fittings, valve
bodies, valve bonnets, strainers and flanges to provide a complete jacket system.
Lap circumferential joints 50 mm minimum and seal with compatible waterproof
lap cement
Lock form longitudinal joints and seal.
Locate metal jacket seams in least visible locations.
Secure with recommended fastenings.
Interior/Exterior Exposed Finishing Applications (PVC Recovery Jacket), in accordance
with TIAC CPF/4:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.7
Section 23 07 15
Page 11
2016-01-13
Exterior Exposed Finishing Applications (Metal Recovery Jacket), in accordance with
TIAC CPF/3:
.1
.6
THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING
Apply PVC Jacket over the pipe insulation using necessary fastenings on 100 mm
centres.
Cover longitudinal and circumferential joints with finishing tape neatly applied.
Apply PVC jacket or preformed PVC fitting covers over insulated fittings, valve
bodies, valve bonnets, strainers and flanges to provide a complete jacket system.
Locate PVC jacket seams in least visible locations.
Secure with appropriate fastenings and jacket finishing tape.
Exterior Concealed, in accordance with TIAC CPF/5: Apply 2 ply weatherproof coating to
insulated surfaces:
.1
.2
.3
First Ply: Apply minimum 1 litre per 1.5 m length of pipe weatherproof coating
applied to insulated surfaces, increase application rate based on pipe diameter and
manufacture’s recommendations.
Embed a layer of reinforcing membrane while still wet.
Second Ply: Apply minimum 1 litre per 1.5 m length of pipe weatherproof coating
applied to insulated surfaces, increase application rate based on pipe diameter and
manufacture’s recommendations.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING
Section 23 07 15
Page 12
2016-01-13
3.5
INSULATION INSTALLATION THICKNESS SCHEDULE
.1
Insulation thicknesses shall confirm with ASHRAE 90.1 2010 or at a minimum be as
follows;
.1
Insulation thicknesses listed below are based on based on Maximum K Value of
least efficient insulation materials such as glass fibre and mineral fibre; thickness
can be decreased for higher efficiency insulation materials such as polyurethane
while maintaining overall K Value for the installation:
Insulation
Recovery
Thickness
Piping or Equipment
Pipe Sizes mm
Jacket
mm
Aluminum
(exterior)
13 to 25
25
Domestic Cold Water
Canvas (shafts)
Piping
32 and over
38
PVC (exposed
areas)
Canvas (shafts)
Domestic Hot Water
13 to 32
25
Supply and
PVC (exposed
40 and over
38
Recirculation Piping
areas)
Hot Water Heating
Canvas (shafts)
Piping; Do not insulate
13 to 30
25
within Radiation
PVC (exposed
40 and Over
50
Enclosures except for
areas)
mains
Aluminum
13 to 20
25
(exterior)
25 to 150
25
Canvas (shafts)
Refrigerant Piping
200 and Over
38
PVC (exposed
areas)
Note: Pipe insulation for piping installed in partitions within conditioned
spaces can be reduced by 25mm but not to thickness below 25mm.
3.6
REMOVABLE INSULATION COVERS
.1
Installation to permit movement of expansion joint and to permit periodic removal and
replacement without damage to adjacent insulation.
.1
3.7
Removable insulation covers shall be provided for the following:
.1
Hydronic heating system flex connections, expansion joints.
CLEANING
.1
Proceed in accordance with Section 01 74 11 - Cleaning.
.2
Upon completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials,
excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
CLEANING AND START-UP OF MECHANICAL
PIPING SYSTEMS
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials
.1
1.2
Section 23 08 02
Page 1
2016-01-13
ASTM E202-10, Standard Test Methods for Analysis of Ethylene Glycols and
Propylene Glycols.
WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.2
Dispose of unused cleaning solutions at official hazardous material collections site
approved by the Departmental Representative.
.3
Do not dispose of unused cleaning solutions into sewer system, into streams, lakes, onto
ground or in other locations where it will pose health or environmental hazard.
.4
Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities.
.5
Dispose of corrugated cardboard, polystyrene, plastic packaging material in appropriate
on-site bin for recycling in accordance with site waste management program.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
CLEANING SOLUTIONS
.1
Tri-sodium phosphate: 0.40 kg per 100 L water in system.
.2
Sodium carbonate: 0.40 kg per 100 L water in system.
.3
Low-foaming detergent: 0.01 kg per 100 L water in system.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
CLEANING HYDRONIC AND STEAM SYSTEMS
.1
Timing
.1
.2
Systems to be operational, hydrostatically tested and with safety devices
functional, before cleaning is carried out.
Cleaning Agency:
.1
Retain qualified water treatment specialist to perform system cleaning.
.3
Install instrumentation such as flow meters, orifice plates, pitot tubes, flow metering valves
only after cleaning is certified as complete by water treatment specialist.
.4
Cleaning procedures:
.1
Provide detailed report outlining proposed cleaning procedures at least 4 weeks
prior to proposed starting date. Report to include:
.1
Cleaning procedures, flow rates, elapsed time.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
CLEANING AND START-UP OF MECHANICAL
PIPING SYSTEMS
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.5
.3
.4
.5
When cleaning is completed, submit report, complete with certificate of
compliance with specifications of cleaning component supplier.
Hydronic Systems:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
3.2
Systems to be free from construction debris, dirt and other foreign material.
Control valves to be operational, fully open to ensure that terminal units can be
cleaned properly.
Strainers to be clean prior to initial fill.
Install temporary filters on pumps not equipped with permanent filters.
Install pressure gauges on strainers to detect plugging.
Report on Completion of Cleaning
.1
.7
Chemicals and concentrations to be used.
Inhibitors and concentrations.
Specific requirements for completion of work.
Special precautions for protecting piping system materials and
components.
Complete analysis of water to be used to ensure water will not damage
systems or equipment.
Conditions at time of cleaning of systems
.1
.2
.6
Section 23 08 02
Page 2
2016-01-13
Fill system with water, ensure air is vented from system.
Fill expansion tanks 1/3 to 1/2 full, charge system with compressed air to at least
35 kPa (does not apply to diaphragm type expansion tanks).
Use water metre to record volume of water in system to +/- 0.5%.
Add chemicals under direct supervision of chemical treatment supplier.
Closed loop systems: circulate system cleaner at 60° C for at least 36 h. Drain as
quickly as possible. Refill with water and inhibitors. Test concentrations and
adjust to recommended levels.
Flush velocity in system mains and branches so as to ensure removal of debris.
System pumps may be used for circulating cleaning solution provided that
velocities are adequate.
Add chemical solution to system.
Establish circulation, raise temperature slowly to maximum design. Circulate for
12 h, ensuring flow in all circuits. Remove heat, continue to circulate until
temperature is below 38° C. Drain as quickly as possible. Refill with clean water.
Circulate for 6 h at design temperature. Drain and repeat procedures specified
above. Flush through low point drains in system. Refill with clean water adding to
sodium sulphite (test for residual sulphite).
START-UP OF HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
.1
After cleaning is completed and system is filled:
.1
.2
.3
Establish circulation and expansion tank level, set pressure controls.
Ensure air is removed.
Clean out strainers repeatedly until system is clean.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
.13
.14
.15
.16
.17
CLEANING AND START-UP OF MECHANICAL
PIPING SYSTEMS
Section 23 08 02
Page 3
2016-01-13
Check water level in expansion tank with cold water with circulating pumps OFF
and again with pumps ON.
Repeat with water at design temperature.
Check pressurization to ensure proper operation and to prevent water hammer,
flashing, cavitation. Eliminate water hammer and other noises.
Bring system up to design temperature and pressure slowly over a 48 hour period.
Perform TAB as specified in Section 23 05 93.
Adjust pipe supports, hangers, springs as necessary.
Monitor pipe movement, performance of expansion joints, loops, guides, anchors.
If sliding type expansion joints bind or if bellows type expansion joints flex
incorrectly, shut down system, re-align, repeat start-up procedures.
Re-tighten bolts, etc. using torque wrench, to compensate for heat-caused
relaxation. Repeat several times during commissioning.
Check operation of drain valves.
Adjust valve stem packing as systems settle down.
Fully open all balancing valves (except those that are factory-set).
Check operation of over-temperature protection devices on circulating pumps.
Adjust alignment of piping at pumps to ensure flexibility, adequacy of pipe
movement, absence of noise or vibration transmission.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
.1
.2
.3
.4
.2
.3
.4
ASTM A47/A47M-99(R2009), Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings.
ASTM A53/A53M-10, Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc
Coated, Welded and Seamless.
ASTM B32-08, Specification for Solder Metal.
ASTM B75M-99(R2011), Specification for Seamless Copper Tube (Metric).
Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
.1
.2
1.2
ANSI/ASME B16.5-2009, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
ANSI/ASME B16.18-2012, Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
ANSI/ASME B16.22-2001(R2010), Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy
Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings.
ANSI/ASME B18.2.1-2010, Square, Hex, Heavy Hex, and Askew Head Bolts and
Hex, Heavy Hex, Hex Flange, Lobed Head, and Lag Screws.
ASTM International
.1
.2
.3
Section 23 11 23
Page 1
2016-01-13
CSA W47.1-09, Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel
Structures.
CAN/CSA-B149.1-10, Natural Gas Installation Code.
PRODUCT DATA
.1
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Indicate on manufacturers catalogue literature following: valves.
1.3
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
.1
1.4
Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00.
WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.2
Collect and separate plastic, paper packaging and corrugated cardboard in accordance with
Waste Management Plan.
.3
Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPE
.1
Steel pipe: to ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 40, seamless as follows:
.1
.2
.2
2.2
Section 23 11 23
Page 2
2016-01-13
NPS 1/2 to 2, screwed.
NPS2 1/2 and over, plain end.
Copper tube: to ASTM B75M.
JOINTING MATERIAL
.1
Screwed fittings: pulverized lead paste.
.2
Welded fittings: to CSA W47.1.
.3
Flange gaskets: nonmetallic flat.
.4
Soldered: to ASTM B32-08, tin antimony.
2.3
FITTINGS
.1
Steel pipe fittings, screwed, flanged or welded:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.2
Copper pipe fittings, screwed, flanged or soldered:
.1
.2
2.4
Malleable iron: screwed, banded, Class 150.
Steel pipe flanges and flanged fittings: to ANSI/ASME B16.5.
Welding: butt-welding fittings.
Unions: malleable iron, brass to iron, ground seat, to ASTM A47/A47M.
Bolts and nuts: to ANSI/ASME B18.2.1.
Nipples: schedule 40, to ASTM A53/A53M.
Cast copper fittings: to ANSI/ASME B16.18.
Wrought copper fittings: to ANSI/ASME B16.22.
VALVES
.1
2.5
Provincial Code approved, lubricated plug type.
GAS CHECK METER
.1
Meter shall be complete with pulse capable reader for tie in to the buildings digital master
metering sation. Unit shall be complete with functional manual reader register,
temperature compensated and shall read in cubic meters. Battery register type meters will
not be accepted.
.2
Install check meter on gas line serving new RTU-7, on roof.
.3
Check meter shall be rated for outdoor installation.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
PIPING
Section 23 11 23
Page 3
2016-01-13
.1
Install in accordance with Section 23 05 01, supplemented as specified herein.
.2
Install in accordance with applicable Provincial/Territorial Codes.
.3
Install in accordance with CAN/CSA B149.1.
.4
Install drip points:
.1
.2
3.2
At low points in piping system.
At connections to equipment.
VALVES
.1
Install valves with stems upright or horizontal unless otherwise approved by Departmental
Representative.
.2
Install valves at branch take-offs to isolate pieces of equipment, and as indicated.
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
3.4
Test system in accordance with CAN/CSA B149.1 and requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
PURGING
.1
3.5
Purge after pressure test in accordance with CAN/CSA B149.1.
PRE-START-UP INSPECTIONS
.1
Check vents from regulators, control valves, terminate outside building in approved
location, protected against blockage, damage.
.2
Check gas trains, entire installation is approved by authority having jurisdiction.
3.6
CLEANING AND START-UP
.1
In accordance with Section 23 08 02, supplemented as specified herein.
.2
In accordance with requirements of CAN/CSA B149.1, supplemented as specified herein.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
REFRIGERANT PIPING
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
ASME
.1
.2
.3
.4
.2
.2
CSA B52-13, Mechanical Refrigeration Code.
Environment Canada (EC)
.1
1.2
ASTM A307-12, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, and
Threaded Rod 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength.
ASTM B280-13, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air
Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service.
CSA Group
.1
.4
ASME B16.22-12, Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder - Joint Pressure
Fittings.
ASME B16.24-11, Cast Copper Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Class 150,
300, 600, 900, 1500 and 2500.
ASME B16.26-11, Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes.
ASME B31.5-10, Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components.
ASTM International
.1
.3
Section 23 23 00
Page 1
2016-01-13
EPS 1/RA/1-96, Environmental Code of Practice for the Elimination of
Fluorocarbon Emissions from Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Systems.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product Data:
.1
.2
Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for
refrigerant piping, fittings and equipment and include product characteristics,
performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.
Submit 1 copy of WHMIS MSDS. Indicate VOC's for adhesive and solvents
during application and curing.
.3
Test Reports: submit certified test reports from approved independent testing laboratories
indicating compliance with specifications for specified performance characteristics and
physical properties.
.4
Certificates: submit certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that materials comply
with specified performance characteristics and physical properties.
1.3
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 00.
.2
Operation and Maintenance Data: submit operation and maintenance data for refrigerant
piping for incorporation into manual.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.3
1.4
REFRIGERANT PIPING
Section 23 23 00
Page 2
2016-01-13
Submit copies of operation and maintenance information for inclusion in manual.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with
manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory
packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address.
.3
Storage and Handling Requirements:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Store materials indoors and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations
in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.
Store and protect refrigerant piping, fittings and equipment from nicks, scratches,
and blemishes.
Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of
pallets, crates, padding and packaging materials as specified in Section 01 74 20.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
TUBING
.1
Processed for refrigeration installations, deoxidized, dehydrated and sealed.
.1
.2
2.2
Hard copper: to ASTM B280, type ACR.
Annealed copper: to ASTM B280, with minimum wall thickness as per CSA B52
and ASME B31.5.
FITTINGS
.1
Service: design pressure 2070 kPa and temperature 121 degrees C.
.2
Brazed:
.1
.2
.3
Flanged:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Bronze or brass, to ASME B16.24, Class 150 and Class 300.
Gaskets: suitable for service.
Bolts, nuts and washers: to ASTM A307, heavy series.
Flared:
.1
2.3
Fittings: wrought copper to ASME B16.22.
Joints: silver solder, 15% Ag-80% Cu-5%P and non-corrosive flux.
Bronze or brass, for refrigeration, to ASME B16.26.
PIPE SLEEVES
.1
Hard copper or steel, sized to provide 6 mm clearance around between sleeve and
uninsulated pipe or between sleeve and insulation.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
2.4
REFRIGERANT PIPING
Section 23 23 00
Page 3
2016-01-13
VALVES
.1
22 mm and under: Class 500, 3.5 Mpa, globe or angle non-directional type, diaphragm,
packless type, with forged brass body and bonnet, moisture proof seal for below freezing
applications, brazed connections.
.2
Over 22 mm: Class 375, 2.5 Mpa, globe or angle type, diaphragm, packless type,
back-seating, cap seal, with cast bronze body and bonnet, moisture proof seal for below
freezing applications, brazed connections.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Verification of Conditions: verify that site conditions are acceptable for refrigerant piping
installation in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
.1
.2
.3
3.2
Visually inspect area of installation.
Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately
upon discovery.
Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied.
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
.1
3.3
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications,
including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and
datasheet.
GENERAL
.1
3.4
Install in accordance with CSA B52, EPS1/RA/1 and ASME B31.5 Section 23 05 05.
BRAZING PROCEDURES
.1
Bleed inert gas into pipe during brazing.
.2
Remove valve internal parts, solenoid valve coils, sight glass.
.3
Do not apply heat near expansion valve and bulb.
3.5
PIPING INSTALLATION
.1
General:
.1
.2
Hard drawn copper tubing: do not bend. Minimize use of fittings.
Hot gas lines:
.1
.2
.3
Pitch at least 1:240 down in direction of flow to prevent oil return to compressor
during operation.
Provide trap at base of risers greater than 2400 mm high and at each 7600 mm
thereafter.
Provide inverted deep trap at top of risers.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.4
.5
3.6
REFRIGERANT PIPING
Section 23 23 00
Page 4
2016-01-13
Provide double risers for compressors having capacity modulation.
.1
Large riser: install traps as specified.
.2
Small riser: size for 5.1 m3 /s at minimum load. Connect upstream of traps
on large riser.
Provide sufficient refrigerant charge as required.
PRESSURE AND LEAK TESTING
.1
Close valves on factory charged equipment and other equipment not designed for test
pressures.
.2
Leak test to CSA B52 before evacuation to 2 MPa and 1 MPa on high and low sides
respectively.
.3
Test procedure: build pressure up to 35 kPa with refrigerant gas on high and low sides.
Supplement with nitrogen to required test pressure. Test for leaks with electronic or halide
detector. Repair leaks and repeat tests.
3.7
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Site Tests/Inspection:
.1
Close service valves on factory charged equipment.
.2
Ambient temperatures to be at least 13 degrees C for at least 12 hours before and during
dehydration.
.3
Use copper lines of largest practical size to reduce evacuation time.
.4
Use two-stage vacuum pump with gas ballast on 2nd stage capable of pulling 5 Pa absolute
and filled with dehydrated oil.
.5
Measure system pressure with vacuum gauge. Take readings with valve between vacuum
pump and system closed.
.6
Triple evacuate system components containing gases other than correct refrigerant or
having lost holding charge as follows:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.7
Twice to 14 Pa absolute and hold for 4 hours.
Break vacuum with refrigerant to 14 kPa.
Final to 5 Pa absolute and hold for at least 12 hours.
Isolate pump from system, record vacuum and time readings until stabilization of
vacuum.
Submit test results to Departmental Representative.
Charging:
.1
.2
.3
Charge system through filter-drier and charging valve on high side. Low side
charging not permitted.
With compressors off, charge only amount necessary for proper operation of
system. If system pressures equalize before system is fully charged, close charging
valve and start up. With unit operating, add remainder of charge to system.
Re-purge charging line if refrigerant container is changed during charging process.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.8
.2
Make checks and measurements as per manufacturer's operation and maintenance
instructions.
Record and report measurements to Departmental Representative.
Manufacturer's Field Services:
.1
.2
.3
3.8
Section 23 23 00
Page 5
2016-01-13
Checks:
.1
.9
REFRIGERANT PIPING
Have manufacturer of products, supplied under this Section, review Work
involved in the handling, installation/application, protection and cleaning, of its
products and submit written reports, in acceptable format, to verify compliance of
Work with Contract.
Provide manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations
and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
.1
Upon completion of the Work, after cleaning is carried out.
Obtain reports, within 3 days of review, and submit, immediately, to Departmental
Representative.
DEMONSTRATION
.1
Instructions:
.1
3.9
Post instructions in frame with glass cover in accordance with Section 01 78 00
and CSA B52.
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.1
Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
.2
Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment
in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.3
Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with
Section 01 74 20.
.1
Remove recycling containers and bins from site and dispose of materials at
appropriate facility.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
METAL DUCTS - LOW PRESSURE TO 500 PA Section 23 31 13.01
Page 1
2016-01-13
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
.2
ASTM International
.1
.2
.3
.3
Green Seal Environmental Standards (GS)
.1
.4
SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, 2005.
SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual, 2012.
IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings Under Construction 2007.
South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD), California State, Regulation
XI. Source Specific Standards
.1
1.2
NFPA 90A-15, Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating
Systems.
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA)
.1
.2
.3
.6
GS-36-11, Standard for Adhesives for Commercial Use.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
.1
.5
ASTM A480/A480M-13b, Standard Specification for General Requirements for
Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip.
ASTM A635/A635M-13, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip,
Heavy-Thickness Coils, Hot-Rolled, Alloy, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength
Low-Alloy, and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, General
Requirements for.
ASTM A653/A653M-13, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated
(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
SCAQMD Rule 1168-A2005, Adhesives and Sealants Applications.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product Data:
.1
.3
Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for
metal ducts and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical
size, finish and limitations.
Test and Evaluation Reports:
.1
Certification of Ratings:
.1
Catalogue or published ratings to be those obtained from tests carried out
by manufacturer or independent testing agency signifying adherence to
codes and standards.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
1.3
METAL DUCTS - LOW PRESSURE TO 500 PA Section 23 31 13.01
Page 2
2016-01-13
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with
manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory
packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address.
.3
Storage and Handling Requirements:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Store materials off ground, indoors, in dry location, and in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.
Store and protect metal ducts from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.
Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets,
crates, padding and packaging materials as specified Section 01 35 21.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
SEAL CLASSIFICATION
.1
Classification as follows:
Maximum Pressure Pa SMACNA Seal Class
500
B
.2
Seal classification:
.1
2.2
Class B: longitudinal seams, transverse joints and connections made airtight with
sealant.
SEALANT
.1
Low VOC Characteristics:
.1
.2
.2
2.3
Adhesives and sealants: in accordance with Section 07 92 00.
Adhesives and sealants: VOC limit to GS-36.
Sealant: synthetic latex emulsion water based type with a service temperature of -17oC to
105oC.
DUCT LEAKAGE
.1
2.4
In accordance with SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.
FITTINGS
.1
Fabrication: to SMACNA.
.2
Radiused elbows:
.1
.2
Rectangular: standard radius with centreline radius: 1.5 times width of duct.
Round: smooth radius with, centreline radius: 1.5 times diameter of duct.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.3
Mitred elbows, rectangular:
.1
.2
.4
Short radiused elbows, or as indicated on drawings.
Obstruction deflectors: maintain full cross-sectional area.
.1
2.5
Diverging: 20 degrees maximum included angle.
Converging: 30 degrees maximum included angle.
Offsets:
.1
.7
Rectangular main and branch: with radius on branch 1.5 times width of duct.
Round main and branch: enter main duct at 45 degrees [with conical connection].
Provide volume control damper in branch duct near connection to main duct.
Main duct branches: with splitter damper.
Transitions:
.1
.2
.6
To 400 mm: with single thickness turning vanes.
Over 400 mm: with double thickness turning vanes.
Branches:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
METAL DUCTS - LOW PRESSURE TO 500 PA Section 23 31 13.01
Page 3
2016-01-13
Maximum included angles: as for transitions.
FIRE STOPPING
.1
Provide 50 mm x 50 mm x 3 mm retaining angles ready for and firestops and smokeseals.
.2
Retaining angles around duct, on both sides of fire separation in accordance with Section
07 84 00.
.3
Fire stopping material and installation must not distort duct.
2.6
GALVANIZED STEEL
.1
Steel Sheet: Tension levelled, Forming Steel (FS) designation, Type A, Grade 230 in
accordance with ASTM A653/A653M.
.2
Thickness: Minimum base metal thickness as noted for specific configuration or thicker as
required to meet design loads.
.3
Galvanizing Designation: Z350 applied evenly to both sides.
.4
Thickness, Fabrication and Reinforcement: to SMACNA requirements.
.5
Joints: to meet SMACNA requirements.
.6
Finish in exposed areas shall be ready for painting, ductwork to match ceiling finish.
Refer to floor plans for extent of ductwork to be exposed.
2.7
STAINLESS STEEL
.1
Type: 316 meeting the requirements of ASTM A167.
.2
Finish: ready for painting, ductwork to match ceiling finish.
.3
Thickness, Fabrication and Reinforcement: to SMACNA requirements.
.4
Joints: to meet welded SMACNA requirements.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
2.8
METAL DUCTS - LOW PRESSURE TO 500 PA Section 23 31 13.01
Page 4
2016-01-13
PRE-MANUFACTURED FLEXIBLE DUCTS:
.1
Low Pressure:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.2
Medium and High Pressure:
.1
.2
.3
.4
2.9
Location: Use flexible air duct where shown on Drawings.
Length: Not greater than 600 mm.
Composition: CPE liner banded to steel wire helix, wrapped with fibreglass
insulation and outer fibreglass reinforced metalized vapour barrier jacket.
Velocity Rating: Flexible duct rated for 12 m/s velocity and pressure rated
for 500 Pa positive and 500 Pa negative.
Location: Use flexible air duct to connect terminal units to metal ductwork.
Length: Not greater than 300 mm.
Composition: Woven and vinyl coated fibreglass liner bonded to a steel wire helix;
furnish flexible air duct with fibreglass insulation and outer fibreglass reinforced
metalized vapour barrier jacket where flexible air duct is attached to metal
insulated duct.
Velocity Rating: Flexible duct rated for 30 m/s velocity and pressure rated
for 4.0 kPa positive and 500 Pa negative.
FASTENERS
.1
2.10
Use rivets and bolts throughout; sheet metal screws accepted on low pressure ducts; weld
fume hood exhaust ducts.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
.1
Hangers and Supports: in accordance with Section 23 05 29.
.1
.2
.3
.4
Strap hangers: of same material as duct but next sheet metal thickness heavier than
duct.
.1
Maximum size duct supported by strap hanger: 500.
Hanger configuration: to SMACNA.
Hangers: galvanized steel angle with galvanized steel rods to the following table:
Duct Size
Angle Size
Rod Size
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
up to 750
25 x 25 x 3
6
751 to 1050
40 x 40 x 3
6
1051 to 1500 40 x 40 x 3
10
1501 to 2100 50 x 50 x 3
10
2101 to 2400 50 x 50 x 5
10
2401 and over 50 x 50 x 6
10
Upper hanger attachments:
.1
For concrete: manufactured concrete inserts.
.2
For steel joist: manufactured joist clamp.
.3
For steel beams: manufactured beam clamps:
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
METAL DUCTS - LOW PRESSURE TO 500 PA Section 23 31 13.01
Page 5
2016-01-13
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Verification of Conditions: verify that conditions are acceptable for metal duct installation
in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
.1
.2
.3
.4
3.2
Visually inspect elements to which ductwork hangers will be attached.
Visually inspect elements which will be penetrated by ductwork.
Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately
upon discovery.
Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied.
GENERAL
.1
Do work in accordance with NFPA 90A, SMACNA, and drawings as indicated.
.2
Do not break continuity of insulation vapour barrier with hangers or rods.
.1
Insulate strap hangers 100 mm beyond insulated duct.
.3
Support risers in accordance with SMACNA as indicated.
.4
Install breakaway joints in ductwork on sides of fire separation.
.5
Install proprietary manufactured flanged duct joints in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
.6
Manufacture duct in lengths and diameter to accommodate installation of acoustic duct
lining.
.7
Where acoustic duct lining is noted, ductwork sizing stated on drawings represents clear
inside dimensions.
3.3
CONSTRUCTION
.1
Construct ductwork from site measurements and not from plans and shop drawings
exclusively; failure to do so will not constitute an extra to the Contract.
.2
Complete metal ducts within themselves with no single partition between ducts; cross
brace ducts for rigidity where width of duct exceeds 450 mm; open corners are not
acceptable.
.3
Lap metal ducts in direction of air flow; hammer down edges and slips to leave interior of
duct smooth.
.4
Construct ductwork using materials in thicknesses indicated; reinforced and sealed for
pressure class indicated, and as follows:
.1
Increase duct size gradually, not exceeding 15 divergence wherever possible; do
not exceed 30 divergence upstream of equipment; do not exceed 45 convergence
downstream of equipment.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
METAL DUCTS - LOW PRESSURE TO 500 PA Section 23 31 13.01
Page 6
2016-01-13
Construct tees, bends and elbows with radius of not less than 1.5 times the width of
duct on centreline; provide double wall air foil type turning vanes where turning
radius is not possible and where rectangular elbows are specified; provide turning
vanes of perforated metal type with fibreglass inside, where acoustical lining is
provided.
.5
Rigidly construct metal ducts with joints mechanically tight, substantially airtight, braced
and stiffened so as not to breathe, rattle, vibrate or sag; caulk duct joints and connections
using sealant as ducts are being assembled; seal seams on fresh air and exhaust ducts
watertight with mastic or high velocity duct sealant.
.6
Weld stainless steel ductwork and ensure a smooth finish on all interiors.
.7
Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings two gauge thicknesses heavier
than duct gauges indicated in SMACNA Standard.
.8
Set plenum doors 150 mm above floor; arrange door swings so that fan static holds door in
closed position.
.9
All supply and return ductwork shall be galvanized as per section 2.
3.4
HANGERS
.1
Strap hangers: install in accordance with SMACNA.
.2
Angle hangers: complete with locking nuts and washers.
.3
Hanger spacing: in accordance with SMACNA, or as follows, whichever is more stringent:
Duct Size
(mm)
to 1500
1501 and over
3.5
Spacing
(mm)
3000
2500
DUCT SEALING
.1
Seal all supply, return and exhaust duct joints, longitudinal as well as transverse, using the
following:
.1
Low Pressure Ductwork:
.1
Slip Joints: Apply heavy brush-on high pressure duct sealant. Apply
second application after the first application has completely dried out.
Where metal clearance exceeds 1.519 mm use heavy mastic type sealant.
.2
Flanged Joints: Soft elastomer butyl or extruded form of sealant between
flanges followed by an application of heavy brush-on high pressure duct
sealant.
.3
Other Joints: Heavy mastic type sealant.
.2
Medium and High Pressure Ductwork: Combination of woven fabrics and sealing
compound followed by an application of high pressure duct sealant.
.2
Duct tapes as sealing method are not permitted.
.3
Surfaces to receive sealant should be free from oil, dust, dirt, moisture, rust and other
substances that inhibit or prevent bonding.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
METAL DUCTS - LOW PRESSURE TO 500 PA Section 23 31 13.01
Page 7
2016-01-13
.4
Prior to sealing all ductwork, demonstrate sealing of a section of each type of duct and
obtain approval from the Consultant.
.5
Do not insulate any section of the ductwork until it has been inspected and approved of
duct sealant application.
.6
All existing ductwork to remain shall be sealed with sprayable water based duct sealant.
Sealant shall be indoor grade, listed for up to 15”w.g., flame and smoke development shall
be 0/5.
.1
.2
.3
3.6
Sealant shall be a synthetic latex emulsion water based type with a service
temperature from 0F to 220F.
Standard of acceptance: ProSeal Spray by Ductmate Industries Inc.
Pressure test of ductwork existing ductwork shall be carried out prior to making
connections to new distribution system.
LEAKAGE TESTS
.1
Refer to Section 23 05 94.
.2
In accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Leakage Test Manual.
.3
Do leakage tests in sections.
.4
Make trial leakage tests as instructed to demonstrate workmanship.
.5
Do not install additional ductwork until trial test has been passed.
.6
Test section minimum of 30 m long with not less than three branch takeoffs and two 90
degrees elbows.
.7
Complete test before performance insulation or concealment Work.
3.7
INSTALLATION
.1
Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operation and
maintenance activities.
.2
Coordinate the location of duct access doors as specified in Section 23 33 00.
.3
Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and
controllers.
.4
Provide pitot tube openings where required for testing of systems, including metal cap with
spring device or screw to prevent air leakage; install insulation material inside a metal ring
where openings are provided in insulated ductwork.
.5
Interrupt duct linings at fire, balancing, backdraft and smoke dampers so as not to interfere
with operation of devices; provide sheet metal edge protection over linings on both side of
damper device.
.6
Shield ductwork from dust and construction material during construction; clean any
ductwork found to be dirty at no extra cost to the Contract.
.7
Install ducts associated with fans subject to forced vibration with flexible connections
immediately adjacent to equipment, refer to Section 23 33 00.
.8
Do not use flexible duct to change direction.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
METAL DUCTS - LOW PRESSURE TO 500 PA Section 23 31 13.01
Page 8
2016-01-13
.9
Provide a minimum of three (3) duct diameters of straight metal duct between box inlet and
flexible connector.
.10
Connect diffusers or troffer boots to low pressure ducts with 300 mm maximum stretched
length of flexible duct; hold in place with sealant, and strap or clamp.
.11
Prove that ductwork is substantially air tight before covering or concealing.
.12
Clean duct systems and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust.
To obtain sufficient air, clean half the system at a time. Protect equipment that may be
harmed by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass during cleaning.
3.8
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.1
Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
.2
Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment
in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.3
Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with
Section 01 74 20.
.1
Remove recycling containers and bins from site and dispose of materials at
appropriate facility.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
DAMPERS - BALANCING
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National Association (SMACNA)
.1
1.2
Section 23 33 14
Page 1
2016-01-13
SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible-2013.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product Data:
.1
1.3
Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for
dampers and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size,
finish and limitations.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 00.
.2
Operation and Maintenance Data: submit operation and maintenance data for dampers for
incorporation into manual.
1.4
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with
manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory
packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address.
.3
Storage and Handling Requirements:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Store materials off ground, indoors, in dry location and in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.
Store and protect dampers from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.
Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets,
crates, padding and packaging materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
.1
2.2
Manufacture to SMACNA standards.
SPLITTER DAMPERS
.1
Fabricate from same material as duct but one sheet metal thickness heavier, with
appropriate stiffening.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
DAMPERS - BALANCING
.2
Single thickness construction.
.3
Control rod with locking device and position indicator.
.4
Rod configuration to prevent end from entering duct.
.5
Pivot: piano hinge.
.6
Folded leading edge.
2.3
Section 23 33 14
Page 2
2016-01-13
SINGLE BLADE DAMPERS
.1
Fabricate from same material as duct, but one sheet metal thickness heavier. V-groove
stiffened.
.2
Size and configuration to recommendations of SMACNA, except maximum height as
indicated.
.3
Locking quadrant with shaft extension to accommodate insulation thickness.
.4
Inside and outside nylon end bearings.
.5
Channel frame of same material as adjacent duct, complete with angle stop.
2.4
MULTI-BLADED DAMPERS
.1
Factory manufactured of material compatible with duct.
.2
Opposed blade: configuration, metal thickness and construction to recommendations of
SMACNA.
.3
Maximum blade height: as indicated.
.4
Bearings: self-lubricating nylon.
.5
Linkage: shaft extension with locking quadrant.
.6
Channel frame of same material as adjacent duct, complete with angle stop.
.7
Maximum leakage: 21 L/s/m2 at 250 Pa.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Verification of Conditions: verify that site conditions are acceptable for damper
installation in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
.1
.2
.3
3.2
Visually inspect site conditions in area where dampers are to be installed.
Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately
upon discovery.
Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied.
INSTALLATION
.1
Install where indicated.
.2
Install in accordance with recommendations of SMACNA and in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
DAMPERS - BALANCING
Section 23 33 14
Page 3
2016-01-13
.3
Locate balancing dampers in each branch duct, for supply, return and exhaust systems.
.4
Runouts to registers and diffusers: install single blade damper located as close as possible
to main ducts.
.5
Dampers: vibration free.
.6
Ensure damper operators are observable and accessible.
.7
Corrections and adjustments conducted by Departmental Representative.
3.3
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.1
Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
.2
Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment
in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.3
Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with
Section 01 74 20.
.1
Remove recycling containers and bins from site and dispose of materials at
appropriate facility.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
DAMPERS - FIRE AND SMOKE
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
.1
.2
NFPA 90A-12, Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating
Systems.
Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC)
.1
.2
.3
1.2
Section 23 33 16
Page 1
2016-01-13
CAN/ULC-S112-10, Standard Test Method of Fire Test of Fire Damper
Assemblies.
CAN/ULC-S112.2-07, Standard Method of Fire Test of Ceiling Fire Stop Flap
Assemblies.
ULC-S505-1974, Standard for Fusible Links for Fire Protection Service.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product Data:
.1
.2
1.3
Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for
fire and smoke dampers and include product characteristics, performance criteria,
physical size, finish and limitations.
Indicate the following:
.1
Fire dampers.
.2
Smoke dampers.
.3
Fire stop flaps.
.4
Operators.
.5
Fusible links.
.6
Design details of break-away joints.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 00.
.2
Operation and Maintenance Data: submit operation and maintenance data for fire and
smoke dampers for incorporation into manual.
1.4
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Extra Materials:
.1
1.5
Submit maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with
manufacturer's written instructions.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
DAMPERS - FIRE AND SMOKE
Section 23 33 16
Page 2
2016-01-13
.2
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory
packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address.
.3
Storage and Handling Requirements:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Store materials off ground, indoors, and in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.
Store and protect fire and smoke dampers from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.
Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets,
crates, padding and packaging materials in accordance with Section 1 74 20.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
FIRE DAMPERS
.1
Fire dampers: arrangement Type B, and bear label of ULC, meet requirements of NFPA
90A and authorities having jurisdiction. Fire damper assemblies fire tested in accordance
with CAN/ULC-S112.
.2
Mild steel, factory fabricated for fire rating requirement to maintain integrity of fire wall
and/or fire separation.
.1
.2
Fire dampers: 1-1/2 hour fire rated unless otherwise indicated.
Fire dampers: automatic operating type and have dynamic rating suitable for
maximum air velocity and pressure differential to which it will be subjected.
.3
Top hinged: offset single damper, square, guillotine type, sized to maintain full duct cross
section, for size of duct as indicated on drawings.
.4
Fusible link actuated, weighted to close and lock in closed position when released or
having negator-spring-closing operator for multi-leaf type or roll door type in horizontal
position with vertical air flow.
.5
40 x 40 x 3 mm retaining angle iron frame, on full perimeter of fire damper, on both sides
of fire separation being pierced.
.6
Equip fire dampers with steel sleeve or frame installed disruption ductwork or impair
damper operation.
.7
Equip sleeves or frames with perimeter mounting angles attached on both sides of wall or
floor opening. Construct ductwork in fire-rated floor-ceiling or roof-ceiling assembly
systems with air ducts that pierce ceiling to conform with ULC.
.8
Design and construct dampers to not reduce duct or air transfer opening cross-sectional
area.
.9
Dampers shall be installed so that the centerline of the damper depth or thickness is located
in the centerline of the wall, partition of floor slab depth or thickness.
.10
Unless otherwise indicated, the installation details given in SMACNA Install Fire Damp
HVAC and in manufacturer's instructions for fire dampers shall be followed.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
2.2
DAMPERS - FIRE AND SMOKE
Section 23 33 16
Page 3
2016-01-13
FIRE STOP FLAPS
.1
Fire smoke flaps: ULC listed and labelled and fire tested in accordance with
CAN/ULC-S112.2.
.2
Construct of minimum 1.5 mm thick sheet steel with 1.6 mm thick non-asbestos ULC
listed insulation and corrosion-resistant pins and hinges.
.3
Flaps held open with fusible link conforming to ULC-S505 and close at 74 degrees C.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Verification of Conditions: verify that site conditions s are acceptable for fire and smoke
damper installation in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
.1
.2
.3
3.2
Visually inspect the area where the fire and smoke dampers are to be installed.
Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately
upon discovery.
Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied.
INSTALLATION
.1
Install in accordance with NFPA 90A and in accordance with conditions of ULC listing.
.2
Maintain integrity of fire separation.
.3
After completion and prior to concealment obtain approvals of complete installation from
authority having jurisdiction.
.4
Install access door adjacent to each damper. See Section 23 33 00.
.5
Co-ordinate with installer of fire stopping.
.6
Ensure access doors/panels, fusible links, damper operators are easily observed and
accessible.
.7
Install break-away joints of approved design on each side of fire separation.
3.3
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.1
Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
.2
Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment
in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.3
Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with
Section 01 74 20.
.1
Remove recycling containers and bins from site and dispose of materials at
appropriate facility.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
FLEXIBLE DUCTS
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
Section 23 33 46
Page 1
2016-01-13
.1
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.
(ASHRAE)
.2
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
.1
.3
Sheet Metal and Air-Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA)
.1
.2
.4
UL 181-2005, Standard for Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors.
Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada (ULC)
.1
1.2
SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, 2005.
SMACNA IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings under Construction, 2005.
Underwriters' Laboratories (UL)
.1
.5
NFPA 90A-12, Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating
Systems.
CAN/ULC-S110-2007, Standard Methods of Tests for Air Ducts.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product Data:
.1
.2
.3
Test and Evaluation Reports:
.1
1.3
Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for
flexible ducts and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical
size, finish and limitations.
Indicate:
.1
Thermal properties.
.2
Friction loss.
.3
Acoustical loss.
.4
Leakage.
.5
Fire rating.
Catalogue or published ratings to be those obtained from tests carried out by
manufacturer or independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and
standards.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with
manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory
packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.3
Section 23 33 46
Page 2
2016-01-13
Storage and Handling Requirements:
.1
.2
.3
.4
FLEXIBLE DUCTS
Store materials off ground, indoors and in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.
Store and protect flexible ducts from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.
Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets,
crates, padding and packaging materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
.1
Factory fabricated to CAN/ULC-S110.
.2
Pressure drop coefficients listed below are based on relative sheet metal duct pressure drop
coefficient of 1.00.
.3
Flame spread rating not to exceed 25. Smoke developed rating not to exceed 50.
2.2
NON-METALLIC - UNINSULATED
.1
Type 3: non-collapsible, aluminum foil/mylar type, mechanically bonded to, and helically
supported by, external steel wire, as indicated.
.2
Performance:
.1
.2
2.3
Factory tested to 2.5 kPa without leakage.
Maximum relative pressure drop coefficient: 3.
NON-METALLIC - INSULATED
.1
Type 4: non-collapsible, coated aluminum foil/mylar type mechanically bonded to, and
helically supported by, external steel wire with factory applied, 37 mm thick flexible
mineral fibre thermal insulation with vapour barrier and vinyl reinforced mylar/neoprene
laminate jacket, as indicated.
.2
Performance:
.1
.2
.3
Factory tested to 2.5 kPa without leakage.
Maximum relative pressure drop coefficient: 3.
Thermal loss/gain: 1.6 RSI.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Verification of Conditions: verify that site conditions are acceptable for flexible ducts
installation in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
.1
Visually inspect area where flexible ducts are to be installed.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
.3
3.2
FLEXIBLE DUCTS
Section 23 33 46
Page 3
2016-01-13
Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately
upon discovery.
Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied.
DUCT INSTALLATION
.1
3.3
Install in accordance with: CAN/ULC-S110, UL 181, NFPA 90A, and SMACNA.
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.1
Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
.2
Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment
in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.3
Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with
Section 01 74 20.
.1
Remove recycling containers and bins from site and dispose of materials at
appropriate facility.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American National Standards Institute/Air Movement and Control Association
(ANSI/AMCA)
.1
.2
UL 181-2005(R2008), Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors.
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
.1
1.2
NFPA 90A-12, Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating
Systems.
Underwriter's Laboratories (UL)
.1
.5
ISO 3741-2010, Acoustics-Determination of Sound Power Levels of Noise
Sources Using Sound Pressure - Precision Methods for Reverberation Rooms.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
.1
.4
ANSI/AMCA Standard 210-2007/(ANSI/ASHRAE 51-07), Laboratory Methods
of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating.
International Organization of Standardization (ISO)
.1
.3
Section 23 36 00
Page 1
2016-01-13
ASHRAE 130-2008, Methods of Testing Air Terminal Units
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product Data:
.1
.3
Shop Drawings:
.1
.4
Indicate the following:
.1
Capacity.
.2
Pressure drop.
.3
Noise rating.
.4
Leakage.
.5
Electrical connection requirements.
Test and Evaluation Reports:
.1
1.3
Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for
air terminal units and include product characteristics, performance criteria,
physical size, electrical connection information, finish and limitations.
Test data: to procedures documented by ASHRAE 130
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 00.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
1.4
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
Section 23 36 00
Page 2
2016-01-13
Operation and Maintenance Data: submit operation and maintenance data for air terminal
units for incorporation into manual.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with
manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory
packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address.
.3
Storage and Handling Requirements:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Store materials off ground, indoors, and in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.
Store and protect air terminal units from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.
Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets,
crates, padding and packaging materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
.1
Performance Requirements:
.1
2.2
Catalogued or published ratings for manufactured items: obtained from tests
carried out by manufacturer or those ordered by manufacturer from certified
ADC (Air Diffusion Council) testing agency signifying adherence to codes and
standards.
MANUFACTURED UNITS
.1
Terminal units of the same type to be product of one manufacturer.
.2
Terminal units shall be procured through Environment Canada. Coordinate with Facilities
Staff.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Verification of Conditions: verify that site conditions are acceptable for air terminal units
installation in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
.1
.2
.3
Visually inspect area where air terminal units are to be installed.
Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately
upon discovery.
Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
3.2
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
Section 23 36 00
Page 3
2016-01-13
INSTALLATION
.1
Install in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
.2
Support equipment independently of ductwork.
.3
Install with at least 1000 mm of flexible inlet ducting and minimum of four duct
diameters of straight inlet duct, same size as inlet.
.4
Locate controls, dampers and access panels for easy access.
3.3
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.1
Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
.2
Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment
in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.3
Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with
Section 01 74 20.
.1
Remove recycling containers and bins from site and dispose of materials at
appropriate facility.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product Data:
.1
.2
1.2
Section 23 37 13
Page 1
2016-01-13
Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for
diffusers, registers and grilles and include product characteristics, performance
criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.
Indicate following:
.1
Capacity.
.2
Throw and terminal velocity.
.3
Noise criteria.
.4
Pressure drop.
.5
Neck velocity.
.6
Dimensions.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Extra Materials:
.1
.2
1.3
Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00.
Include:
.1
Keys for volume control adjustment.
.2
Keys for air flow pattern adjustment.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with
manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory
packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address.
.3
Storage and Handling Requirements:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Store materials off ground, indoors and in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.
Store and protect diffuser, registers and grilles from nicks, scratches, and
blemishes.
Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets,
crates, padding and packaging materials as in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
.1
Performance Requirements:
.1
2.2
Section 23 37 13
Page 2
2016-01-13
Catalogued or published ratings for manufactured items: obtained from tests
carried out by manufacturer or those ordered by manufacturer from independent
testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards.
GENERAL
.1
To meet capacity, pressure drop, terminal velocity, throw, noise level, neck velocity as
indicated.
.2
Frames:
.1
.2
.3
Full perimeter gaskets.
Frames where set into gypsum board and as indicated on drawings.
Concealed fasteners.
.3
Concealed manual volume control damper operators.
.4
Colour: as indicated on drawings.
2.3
MANUFACTURED UNITS
.1
2.4
Grilles, registers and diffusers of same generic type, products of one manufacturer.
SUPPLY GRILLES AND REGISTERS
.1
2.5
As indicated on drawings.
RETURN AND EXHAUST GRILLES AND REGISTERS
.1
2.6
As indicated on drawings.
DIFFUSERS
.1
As indicated on drawings.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Verification of Conditions: verify that site conditions are acceptable for diffuser, register
and grille installation in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
.1
.2
.3
Visually inspect area where the diffuser, grille, or register is to be installed.
Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately
upon discovery.
Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
3.2
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES
Section 23 37 13
Page 3
2016-01-13
INSTALLATION
.1
Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
.2
Install with screws in countersunk holes where fastenings are visible.
.3
Bolt grilles, registers and diffusers, in place, in areas which may be subject to accidental
impact.
3.3
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.1
Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
.2
Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment
in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.3
Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with
Section 01 74 20.
.1
Remove recycling containers and bins from site and dispose of materials at
appropriate facility.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
Part 1
PACKAGED OUTDOOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
Section 23 74 00
Page 1
2016-01-13
GENERAL
.1
Section 23 05 93 – Testing, Adjusting And Balancing For HVAC
.2
Section 25 01 11 - EMCS Start-up, Verification And Commissioning
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Air Conditioning and Refrigeration
Institute (ARI)
.1
.2
ANSI/ARI 210/240-2008, Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump
Equipment.
ARI 270-2009, Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment.
.2
ANSI/UL 465-1984, Air Conditioners, Central Cooling.
.3
Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
.1
.2
CSA B52-05 SMART, Mechanical Refrigeration Code.
CSA C22.1 HB-12, Canadian Electrical Code, Handbook.
.4
National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA)
.5
National Fire Protection Association
.1
1.3
NFPA 90A-12, Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
SHOP DRAWINGS
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Indicate:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
Equipment, piping, and connections, together with control assemblies, and
hardware, and recommended ancillaries which are mounted, wired and piped
ready for final connection to building system, its size and recommended bypass
connections.
Piping, valves, fitting shipped loose showing final location in assembly.
Control equipment shipped loose, showing final location in assembly.
Dimensions, internal and external construction details, recommended method of
installation with proposed structural steel support, mounting curb details, sizes and
location of mounting bolt holes; include mass distribution drawings showing point
loads.
Detailed composite wiring diagrams for control systems showing factory installed
wiring and equipment on packaged equipment or required for controlling devices
or ancillaries, accessories, controllers.
Fan performance curves.
Details of vibration isolation.
Estimate of sound levels to be expected across individual octave bands in dB
referred to A rating.
Type of refrigerant used.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.10
.11
1.4
PACKAGED OUTDOOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
Section 23 74 00
Page 2
2016-01-13
Roof curb detail and dimensions.
Performance data.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00.
.2
Indicate:
.1
Brief description of unit, indexed, with details of function, operation, control, and
service for components.
.3
Manufacturer's installation instructions shall govern and unless otherwise noted, operation,
maintenance and service of items. Include names and addresses of spare part suppliers.
.4
Include following:
.1
1.5
Provide for units, manufacturer's name, type, year, number of units, and capacity.
WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.2
Collect and separate plastic, paper packaging and corrugated cardboard in accordance with
Waste Management Plan.
.3
Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.
1.6
WARRANTY
.1
For refrigeration compressors, the 12 months warranty period prescribed in GC3.13 of
General Conditions is extended to 5 years.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
.1
This section applies to the new Roof Top Unit.
.2
Roof mounted, self-contained single zone unit with gas burner and DX refrigeration and
bear label of CSA, FM and ULC.
.3
Units to consist of cabinet and frame, supply fan, heat exchanger, burner control, air filter,
refrigerant cooling coil, compressor, condenser coil and fans, motorized outside air
damper, return damper, gravity exhaust damper.
.4
Prefabricated roof curb to conform to requirements of National Roofing Contractors
Association (NRCA), minimum height 450 mm.
.5
Conform to ASHRAE 90.1 - 2010
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
2.2
PACKAGED OUTDOOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
Section 23 74 00
Page 3
2016-01-13
CABINET
.1
Panels and access doors shall be constructed as a 1-inch (25-mm) nominal thick, thermal
broke double wall assembly, injected with foam insulation for an R-value of not less than
R-7. The outer casing shall be constructed of galvanized steel, phosphatized and painted
with a polyester resin topcoat with a natural beige color. Finished panel surfaces must
withstand a minimum 750-hour salt spray test in accordance with ASTM B117 standard for
salt spray resistance.
.2
Unit base shall overhang the roof curb for water runoff and shall have a formed recess that
seats on the roof curb gasketing to provide a positive weather tight seal.
.3
Service doors shall be provided for the fan section, filter section, control panel section, and
heating vestibule in order to provide user access to unit components. All service access
doors shall be mounted on multiple, stainless steel hinges and shall be secured by a latch
system. Removable service panels secured by multiple mechanical fasteners are not
acceptable.
.4
Unit cabinet shall be designed to operate at total static pressures up to 5 inches w.g.
2.3
FANS
.1
Supply and exhaust fans shall be single width, single inlet centrifugal Airfoil. The fan
wheel shall be Class II construction with aluminum fan blades that are continuously
welded to the hub plate and end rim. Fans shall be direct drive to eliminate all belt
maintenance issues.
.2
Fan assemblies shall be statically and dynamically balanced for quiet operation. Provide
slide out rails for servicing and maintenance of the fan.
.3
The fan motor shall be a totally enclosed EC motor that is speed controlled by the rooftop
unit controller. Motor safeties shall include thermal overload protection and phase failure
protection. Motors shall be premium efficiency.
2.4
AIR FILTERS
.1
MERV 8 30% efficiency, metal framed.
.2
To meet NFPA 90A, air filter requirements type Class 1.
2.5
HEAT EXCHANGERS AND BURNERS
.1
The rooftop unit shall include a natural gas heating section consisting of a tubular design
with in-shot gas burners. The heat exchanger tubes shall be constructed of stainless steel.
.2
The heat exchanger shall be complete with furnace controller and control valve capable of
minimum 10:1 modulating control.
.3
The module shall have an induced draft fan that will maintain a negative pressure in the
heat exchanger tubes for the removal of the flue gases. An airflow safety switch shall
prevent the heating module from turning on in the event of no airflow in the flue chamber.
.4
Gas heat sections shall include two flame roll-out safety protection switches and a high
temperature limit switch that will shut the gas valve off upon detection of improper burner
manifold operation.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
2.6
PACKAGED OUTDOOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
Section 23 74 00
Page 4
2016-01-13
REFRIGERATION
.1
Conform to CSA B52 and ANSI/UL 465 requirements.
.2
Compressor/condenser section:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.3
Outdoor coils shall have seamless copper tubes, mechanically bonded to
aluminum plate-type fins. The fins shall have full drawn collars to completely
cover the tubes. A sub-cooling coil shall be an integral part of the main outdoor air
coil.
Fan motors shall be ECM type. The rooftop controller shall proportionally control
the speed of the condenser fan motors to maintain the head pressure of the
refrigerant circuit within acceptable limits. Mechanical cooling shall be provided
to 0º F. Motor safeties shall include thermal overload protection and phase failure
protection.
The condenser fan shall be dynamically designed for low noise generation with
low tip speeds. Fan blade shall be of a composite material.
The unit shall have multiple scroll compressors. One of the compressors shall be
inverter driven and the unit controller must control the speed of the compressor to
maintain the discharge air temperature.
The refrigeration circuit shall have both low and high pressure safety switches.
Temperature sensors shall be provided for measuring suction and discharge
temperature of the refrigerant.
Refrigerant circuit shall have a bypass valve between the suction and discharge
refrigerant lines for compressor startup under low head pressure conditions. When
there is a call for mechanical cooling the bypass valve shall open to equalizing the
suction and discharge pressures. When pressures are equalized the bypass valve
shall close and the compressor shall be allowed to start.
Each circuit shall be dehydrated and factory charged with Refrigerant 410A and
oil.
Evaporator:
.1
.2
.3
Cooling coil scheduled performance is based on UNIT entering and leaving air
temperatures including outside air but not fan heat. Manufacturer shall add fan
heat to LAT on draw thru designs.
Evaporator coils shall be multi-row type fabricated from seamless copper tubing
mechanically bonded to high efficiency aluminum plate fins. Each evaporator coil
refrigerant circuit shall be fed with an electronically controlled expansion valve.
All cooling coils shall have an interlaced coil circuiting that keeps the full coil face
area active at all load conditions.
Provide a stainless steel sloped primary drain pan under the cooling coil and
beyond the leaving side of the coil and underneath the cooling coil connections.
The drain pan shall have a minimum slope of 1/8" per foot and be connected to a
stainless steel drain connection extending through the base. Polymer drain pans
will not be accepted.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
2.7
PACKAGED OUTDOOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
Section 23 74 00
Page 5
2016-01-13
ECONOMIZER
.1
Unit shall be provided with an outdoor air economizer section. The economizer shall
include outdoor, return, and exhaust air dampers. The outdoor air hood shall be factory
installed and constructed from galvanized steel finished with the same durable paint finish
as the main unit. The hood shall include moisture eliminator filters to drain water away
from the entering air stream
.2
The economizer operation shall be fully integral to the mechanical cooling and allow up to
100% of mechanical cooling if needed to maintain the cooling discharge air temperature.
The outside and return air dampers shall be sized to handle 100% of the supply air volume.
The dampers shall be opposed blade design. Damper blades shall be gasketed with side
seals to provide an air leakage rate of 4 cfm / square foot of damper area at 1” differential
pressure per ASHRAE 90.1 Energy Standard.
.3
A barometric exhaust damper shall be provided to exhaust air out of the back of the unit. A
bird screen shall prevent infiltration of rain and foreign materials. Exhaust damper blades
shall be lined with vinyl gasketing on contact edges.
.4
Control of the dampers shall be by a factory installed direct coupled actuator. Damper
actuator shall be of the modulating, spring return type. A comparative enthalpy control
shall be provided to sense and compare enthalpy in both the outdoor and return air streams
to determine if outdoor air is suitable for “free” cooling. If outdoor air is suitable for “free”
cooling, the outdoor air dampers shall modulate in response to the unit’s temperature
control system.
2.8
ROOF CURB
.1
Provide insulated roof curb.
.2
Minimum height of roof curb as specified.
2.9
ELECTRICAL
.1
Each unit shall be wired and tested at the factory before shipment. Wiring shall comply
with CSA standards. All wiring shall be number coded per the electrical wiring diagrams.
All electrical components shall be labeled according to the electrical diagram and be CSA
recognized.
.2
A terminal block shall be provided for the main power connection and a terminal board
shall be provided for the low voltage control wiring. Knockouts shall be provided in the
bottom of the main control panel for field wiring entrance. Branch short circuit protection,
115-volt control circuit transformer and fuse, system switches, and a high temperature
sensor shall also be provided with the unit.
.3
Each compressor and condenser fan motor shall be furnished with contactors and internal
thermal overload protection. Supply fan motors shall be supplied with external overload
protection.
.4
Provide a disconnect switch to cut power to the entire unit before the control panel door can
be opened.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
2.10
PACKAGED OUTDOOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
Section 23 74 00
Page 6
2016-01-13
CONTROLS
.1
Each unit shall be equipped with a microprocessor based control system. The unit control
system shall include all required temperature and pressure sensors, input/output boards,
main microprocessor and operator interface. The unit control system shall perform all unit
control functions including scheduling, unit diagnostics and safeties.
.2
The DDC control system shall permit starting and stopping of the unit locally or remotely.
A set of contacts shall be provided for outside air damper actuation, emergency shutdown,
remote heat enable/disable, remote cool enable/disable, heat indication, cool indication,
and fan operation.
.3
The unit control system shall have the ability to communicate with an independent
Building Management System (BMS) via a direct BACnet Ethernet or BACnet MSTP
communication connection. The independent BMS system shall have access to “read only’
variables and “read & and write” variables. Communications shall not require field
mounting of any additional sensors or devices at the unit. The BMS system shall be capable
of interacting with the individual rooftop controllers in the following ways:
Monitor controller inputs, outputs, set points, parameters and alarms
Set controller set points and parameters
Clear alarms
Reset the cooling and heating discharge air temperature set point
Set the heat/cool changeover temperature
Set the representative zone temperature
It will be the responsibility of the Systems Integrating Contractor to integrate the
rooftop data into the BMS control logic and interface stations.
.4
The controller shall have a 4 line x 20 character display with all information and
instructions shown in plain English. A keypad shall allow information and controls to be
accessed. The microprocessor shall have a programmable time clock, store current and past
alarm conditions.
.5
The display shall provide the following information:
Unit status including # of stages or % capacity for fans, heating, cooling and
economizer.
Supply, return, outdoor, and space air temperature
Duct and building static pressure; the control contractor is responsible for providing
and installing sensing tubes
Inverter compressor speed and refrigeration circuit pressures and temperatures
Outside air damper position and economizer mode
Cooling and heating changeover status
Occupied, unoccupied, and dirty filter status
Date and time schedules
Alarm faults
.6
The following set points shall be adjustable:
Control mode (Off / Auto / Cool Only / Fan Only / Heat Only)
Occupancy mode (Auto / Tenant Override / Occupied / Unoccupied)
Changeover mode (return air, space temperature or network signal)
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
PACKAGED OUTDOOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
Section 23 74 00
Page 7
2016-01-13
Cooling and heating discharge air temperature control
Compressor lockouts and timers
Economizer changeover (enthalpy or dry bulb)
Scheduling
Building static pressure control
.7
The unit DDC controller shall provide building static pressure control. The unit controller
shall provide proportional control of the exhaust fans from 25% to 100% of the supply air
fan designed airflow to maintain the adjustable building pressure set point.
.8
Supply air reset options shall include; return air temperature, outdoor air temperature,
space temperature, airflow (VAV), network signal, external signal (1-5 vdc or 0-20 mA)
.9
The controller shall be complete with night setback control. The controller shall use its
internal time clock for scheduling and have an adjustable override timer. (The unit shall be
supplied with a wall mounted space sensor with an override button for field installation).
2.11
CAPACITY
.1
Refer to schedules
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install as per manufacturers' instructions on roof curbs provided by manufacturer as
indicated.
.2
Manufacturer to certify installation, supervise start-up and commission unit.
.3
Run drain line from cooling coil condensate drain pan to discharge over roof drain.
3.2
START-UP
.1
Verify accessibility, serviceability of components including motorized dampers, filters
coils, fans, motors, operators, sensors, electrical disconnects.
.2
Verify accessibility, cleanability, drainage of drain pans for coils.
3.3
TRAINING
.1
In accordance with Section 01 79 00, supplemented as specified herein.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
AIR SOURCE UNITARY HEAT PUMPS
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
Section 23 81 40
Page 1
2016-01-13
.1
Acceptable Materials: Where materials are specified by trade name refer to the General
Instructions to Bidders for procedure to be followed in applying for approval: SACC
Manual Clause ID R2410T for GI14 Approval of Alternative Materials, or, SACC Manual
Clause ID R2710T for GI16 Approval of Alternate Materials.
.2
Section 23 23 00 –Refrigerant Piping
.3
Section 23 07 15 – Thermal insulation for Piping
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
American National Standards Institute/Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
(ANSI/ARI)
.1
.2
CSA International
.1
.2
.3
.2
EPS 1/RA/2-1996, Code of Practice for Elimination of Fluorocarbons Emissions
from Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Systems.
Environment Canada-1994, Ozone-Depleting Substances Alternatives and
Suppliers List.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
.1
1.3
CAN/CSA-C656-05(R2010), Performance Standard for Split-System and Single
Package Central Air Conditioners and Heat Pumps.
CAN/CSA- B52-05 (R2009), Mechanical Refrigeration Code.
Environment Canada, (EC) / Environmental Protection Services (EPS)
.1
.4
ANSI/ARI 210/240-2008, Unitary Air Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump
Equipment.
NFPA 90A-12, Standard for Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating
Systems.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Product Data:
.1
.2
Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for:
.1
Indoor Fan Coil Units
.2
Air-Source Outdoor Units
.3
Refrigerant Piping Accessories
.4
Control Devices and Wiring Diagrams
Shop Drawings:
.1
Indicate on drawings:
.1
Unit Tag Identification
.2
Dimensions and Weights
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
1.4
AIR SOURCE UNITARY HEAT PUMPS
Section 23 81 40
Page 2
2016-01-13
.3
Performance Characteristics and Operating Conditions
.4
Colour and Finish
.5
Electrical Characteristics
.6
Required Field Coordination
.7
Equipment Connections
.8
Total Refrigerant Charge
Air-cooled VRF system manufacturer to provide complete piping layout and
system schematic for review. Layout to be completed with manufacturer’s
selection software and drawn on floor plans provided by Department
Representative.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 00.
.2
Operation and Maintenance Data: submit operation and maintenance data for incorporation
into manual.
.3
Manufacturer’s limited warranty.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with
manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory
packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address.
.3
Storage and Handling Requirements:
.1
.2
.3
.4
1.6
Store materials off ground, indoors, in dry location and in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.
Store and protect equipment from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.
Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets,
crates, padding and packaging materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
WARRANTY
.1
All equipment shall be provided with a limited manufacturer’s warranty for a period of one
year after the date of installation or 18 months from date of delivery, whichever is shorter.
.2
An optional extended warranty including 1 additional year parts and 5 additional years
compressor shall be provided upon submission to the manufacturer and acceptance by the
manufacturer of proper installation with documentation including:
.1
.2
.3
Selection output and layout of the VRF system.
60 minutes of operation history upon commissioning from the VRF service tool.
Completed commissioning report as per the VRF equipment manufacturer.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
AIR SOURCE UNITARY HEAT PUMPS
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
DESCRIPTION
Section 23 81 40
Page 3
2016-01-13
.1
System shall be a VRF (Variable Refrigerant Flow) capable of cooling and heating. System
shall be air cooled as indicated on mechanical drawings and equipment schedules.
.2
System shall consist of outdoor units, indoor units, and controls by the equipment
manufacturer. Equipment controls shall be capable of operating as a stand alone system.
.3
System shall be capable of providing heating or cooling. When more than one indoor unit
is connected to a single outdoor unit, a single thermostat shall be selected to provide master
control for mode of operation (heating/cooling)
2.2
ACCEPTABLE MATERIAL
.1
LG, Multi V, manufactured by LG, 1-(888)-542-2623, fax: 1-(647)-724-0083,
www.lgvrf.ca, distributed by O’Dell Associates Inc 1-(519)-772-0386, fax:
1-(519)-772-1029, www.odellassoc.com
.2
Daikin, Multi-spit System, manufactured by Daikin AC (Americas), Inc., 1-(212)
340-7400, fax: 1-(212) 779-5925, www.diakin.com, distributed by HTS Engineering,
1-(519)-748-1860, fax: 1-(519) 784-9466, www.htseng.com
.3
Mitsubishi Electric, Mr.Slim P-Series, manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric, 1-(905)
475-7728, fax: 1-(905) 475-6897, www.mitsubishielectric.ca, distributed by Mits
Airconditioning Inc., 1-(800)-567-2221, fax: (905) 564-2205, www.mitsair.com
2.3
REFRIGERANTS
.1
2.4
Type of Refrigerant: R-410a.
AIR-SOURCE HEAT PUMP
.1
General:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
Four component VRF unit consisting of outdoor unit, indoor fan coils,
manufacturer refrigerant piping and components, and controls.
System components shall be from a single manufacturer.
Unit control boards shall perform all functions required to effectively and
efficiently operate the VRF system and communicate from outdoor unit to indoor
units.
Outdoor unit shall be completely factory assembled, piped and wired. Each
outdoor unit shall be run tested at the factory.
Outdoor unit shall have the ability to operate with an elevation difference of up to
50m above or 40m below the indoor units.
The outdoor unit shall be capable of operating in heating only mode down to -20°C
and up to 16°C ambient wet bulb without additional low ambient controls.
The outdoor unit shall be capable of operating in cooling only mode down to -28°C
and up to 48°C ambient dry bulb.
The outdoor unit shall have an oil separator for the compressor and controls to
ensure sufficient oil supply is maintained for the compressor.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.9
.10
AIR SOURCE UNITARY HEAT PUMPS
Field installed refrigerant piping between outdoor and indoor units to be insulated
as specified in section 23 07 15 or as per manufacturer recommendations,
whichever is more stringent.
Refrigerant pipe sizes to be as per manufacturers recommendations.
.2
Performance data: as indicated in mechanical schedules.
.3
Frame:
.1
.4
.2
.3
.3
.2
.3
.4
The outdoor coil shall be of nonferrous construction with louvered fins on copper
tubing.
The coil fins shall have a factory applied corrosion resistant, hydrophilic coating.
The coil shall be protected with an integral metal guard.
Refrigerant flow from the outdoor unit shall be controlled by means of a digitally
controlled inverter driven rotary compressor.
Refrigeration piping:
.1
.2
.3
.8
Condenser fans shall be direct drive, variable speed.
All fan motors shall have inherent protection, have permanently lubricated
bearings and be variable speed.
All fans shall be provided with a raised guard to limit contact with moving parts.
Coil:
.1
.7
Welded hermetic digitally controlled inverter driven rotary compressor. Crankcase
heater shall be factory mounted on the compressor. Compressor shall be mounted
to avoid the transmission of vibration.
Compressor shall have an inverter to modulate capacity.
Other components to include:
.1
Accumulator
.2
High pressure safety switch
.3
Over-current protection
.4
Subcooling heat exchanger
.5
Internal thermal overload
Fan:
.1
.2
.6
Shall be constructed with galvanized steel, bonderized and be finished with
powder coat baked enamel paint.
Compressor:
.1
.5
Section 23 81 40
Page 4
2016-01-13
Between outdoor unit, compressor section and indoor coil, complete with
refrigerant metering devices and valves.
Refrigerant gas and liquid pipe sizes to be as per manufacturer’s recommendation.
Refer to Section 23 23 00.
Electrical:
.1
.2
Unit to be capable of operation within voltage limits of +/- 10% rated voltage.
Outdoor unit shall be controlled by integral microprocessors.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.3
.9
Section 23 81 40
Page 5
2016-01-13
The control circuit between the indoor units and the outdoor unit shall be 24VDC.
Communication shall be using 2-conductor, stranded, shield cable for RS485 daisy
chain.
Controls
.1
2.5
AIR SOURCE UNITARY HEAT PUMPS
Controls:
.1
Individual indoor units connected to air cooled condensing unit shall be
controlled with individual remote mounted thermostats.
.2
Thermostats shall be supplied by VRF equipment manufacturer.
CEILING CASSETTE INDOOR UNIT
.1
General:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.2
Indoor Unit
.1
.2
.3
.4
.3
Return air shall be filtered with a factory supplied removable, washable filter.
Fan:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.6
The unit cabinet shall be ceiling concealed and ducted.
Filter:
.1
.5
Shall be factory assembled, wired and run tested.
The indoor unit shall be factory wired and piped with its own electronic expansion
device, control circuit board, fan and motor.
The indoor unit shall have a self-diagnostic function and auto restart function.
The indoor unit shall be filled with a dry nitrogen gas charge from the factory.
Unit Cabinet and Grille
.1
.4
Ceiling cassette indoor unit shall mount flush to the ceiling.
Shall be designed for use with R410a refrigerant.
Shall be of the same manufacturer of heating and cooling heat pump VRF systems.
Shall communicate with the outdoor unit and heat recovery units using daisy chain
communication.
Field installed refrigerant piping between outdoor units, and indoor units to be
insulated as specified in section 23 07 15 or as per manufacturer recommendations,
whichever is more stringent.
The indoor unit fan shall be no more than one assembly with two fans direct driven
by a single motor.
The indoor fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced.
Motor shall have permanently lubricated bearings.
Provided fan settings shall be Low, Med, High, Power Cool (Cooling Mode), and
Auto.
Coil:
.1
.2
The indoor unit coil shall be nonferrous with louvered fins on copper tubing.
The tubing shall have inner grooves.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.3
.4
.7
.2
Coils shall be pressure tested at the factory.
A condensate drain pan shall be factory installed below the coil.
The unit shall include a factory installed condensate pump that will be able to raise
drain water 675mm above the ceiling cassette face.
Condensate pump power shall be 24V.
Electrical:
.1
.2
.9
Refer to drawing for electrical requirements.
The indoor unit shall be capable of operation within the voltage limits of +/- 10%
of the rated voltage.
Controls:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Unit shall use controls provided by the manufacture to perform all functions
necessary to operate the system effectively and efficiently and communicate with
the outdoor unit over a daisy chain RS485 communication system.
Provide a wired thermostat controller for each indoor unit. Where more than one
indoor unit is connected to a single outdoor unit, one thermostat shall provide
master heating/cooling override control.
Wired thermostat shall have the following capabilities and functions:
.1
Display operating condition
.2
Set Temperature
.3
Set Fan Speed
.4
On/Off
.5
Select Operation Mode
.6
7 day programmable heating and cooling schedule
Unit shall be installed with low ambient cooling kit.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Verification of Conditions: verify that conditions of substrate previously installed under
other Sections or Contracts are acceptable for VRF system installation in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions.
.1
.2
.3
3.2
Section 23 81 40
Page 6
2016-01-13
Condensate Pump:
.1
.8
AIR SOURCE UNITARY HEAT PUMPS
Visually inspect substrate in presence of Departmental Representative.
Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately
upon discovery.
Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied
and after receipt of written approval to proceed from Departmental Representative.
INSTALLATION
.1
Install where indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
AIR SOURCE UNITARY HEAT PUMPS
Section 23 81 40
Page 7
2016-01-13
.2
Install air source outdoor units on exterior concrete pad.
.3
Secure with hold-down bolts in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
.4
Make duct connections through flexible connections.
.5
Level unit with fans running. Align duct work flexible connections. Misalignment with fan
stopped not to strain or damage flexible connection.
.6
Make piping connections.
.7
Nothing to obstruct ready access to components or to prevent removal of components for
servicing.
.8
Mount remote wired thermostats. Program thermostats with operational and temperature
settings as provided by Departmental Representative.
3.3
DRAIN PANS
.1
Install so that no water can accumulate. Arrange easy access for cleaning.
.2
Include internal or external trap for proper draining.
3.4
START-UP AND COMMISSIONING
.1
Have manufacturer certify installation.
.2
Have manufacturer present tests and start up units and certify performance.
.3
Submit written start-up and commissioning reports to Departmental Representative.
3.5
CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
.1
3.6
Manufacturer to deliver verbal and written instructions to operating personnel.
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.1
Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
.2
Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment
in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.3
Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with
Section 01 74 20.
.1
3.7
Remove recycling containers and bins from site and dispose of materials at
appropriate facility.
PROTECTION
.1
Protect installed products and components from damage during construction.
.2
Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by VRF system installation.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
EMCS: START-UP, VERIFICATION
AND COMMISSIONING
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes.
.1
.2
Methods and procedures for start-up, verification and commissioning, for
building Energy Monitoring and Control System (EMCS) and includes:
.1
Start-up testing and verification of systems.
.2
Check out demonstration or proper operation of components.
.3
On-site operational tests.
Related Sections.
.1
.2
1.2
Section 25 01 11
Page 1
2016-01-13
Section 01 79 00 - Demonstration and Training.
Section 25 05 01 - EMCS: General Requirements.
DEFINITIONS
.1
For additional acronyms and definitions refer to Section 25 05 01.
.2
AEL: ratio between total test period less any system downtime accumulated within that
period and test period.
.3
Downtime: results whenever EMCS is unable to fulfill required functions due to
malfunction of equipment defined under responsibility of EMCS contractor. Downtime is
measured by duration, in time, between time that Contractor is notified of failure and
time system is restored to proper operating condition. Downtime not to include
following:
.1
.2
.3
1.3
Outage of main power supply in excess of back-up power sources, provided that:
.1
Automatic initiation of back-up was accomplished.
.2
Automatic shut-down and re-start of components was as specified.
Failure of communications link, provided that:
.1
Controller automatically and correctly operated in stand-alone mode.
.2
Failure was not due to failure of any specified EMCS equipment.
Functional failure resulting from individual sensor inputs or output devices,
provided that:
.1
System recorded said fault.
.2
Equipment defaulted to fail-safe mode.
.3
AEL of total of all input sensors and output devices is at least 99%
during test period.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
.1
Confirm with Departmental Representative that Design Criteria and Design Intents are
still applicable.
.2
Commissioning personnel to be fully aware of and qualified to interpret Design Criteria
and Design Intents.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
1.4
EMCS: START-UP, VERIFICATION
AND COMMISSIONING
Section 25 01 11
Page 2
2016-01-13
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Final Report: submit report to Departmental Representative.
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
1.5
Include measurements, final settings and certified test results.
Bear signature of commissioning technician and supervisor
Report format to be approved by Departmental Representative before
commissioning is started.
Revise "as-built" documentation, commissioning reports to reflect changes,
adjustments and modifications to EMCS as set during commissioning and submit
to Departmental Representative in accordance with Section 01 78 00.
Recommend additional changes and/or modifications deemed advisable in order
to improve performance, environmental conditions or energy consumption.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide documentation, O&M Manuals, and training of O&M personnel for review of
Departmental Representative before interim acceptance in accordance with Section
01 78 00.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
EQUIPMENT
.1
Provide sufficient instrumentation to verify and commission the installed system. Provide
two-way radios.
.2
Instrumentation accuracy tolerances: higher order of magnitude than equipment or system
being tested.
.3
Locations to be approved, readily accessible and readable.
.4
Application: to conform to normal industry standards.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
PROCEDURES
.1
Test each system independently and then in unison with other related systems.
.2
Commission each system using procedures prescribed by the Commissioning Manager
and Departmental Representative.
.3
Commission integrated systems using procedures prescribed by Commissioning Manager
and Departmental Representative.
.4
Debug system software.
.5
Optimize operation and performance of systems by fine-tuning PID values and modifying
CDLs as required.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.6
3.2
EMCS: START-UP, VERIFICATION
AND COMMISSIONING
Section 25 01 11
Page 3
2016-01-13
Test full scale emergency evacuation and life safety procedures including operation and
integrity of smoke management systems under normal and emergency power conditions
as applicable.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Pre-Installation Testing.
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.2
General: consists of field tests of equipment just prior to installation.
Testing may be on site or at Contractor's premises as approved by Departmental
Representative.
Configure major components to be tested in same architecture as designed
system. Include BECC equipment and 2 sets of Building Controller's including
MCU's, LCU's, and TCU's.
Equip each Building Controller with sensor and controlled device of each type
(AI, AO, DI, DO).
Additional instruments to include:
.1
DP transmitters.
.2
VAV supply duct SP transmitters.
.3
DP switches used for dirty filter indication and fan status.
In addition to test equipment, provide inclined manometer, digital micromanometer, milli-amp meter, source of air pressure infinitely adjustable between
0 and 500 Pa, to hold steady at any setting and with direct output to milli-amp
meter at source and to BECC.
After setting, test zero and span in 10% increments through entire range while
both increasing and decreasing pressure.
Departmental Representative to mark instruments tracking within 0.5% in both
directions as "approved for installation".
Transmitters above 0.5% error will be rejected.
DP switches to open and close within 2% of setpoint.
Completion Testing.
.1
.2
General: test after installation of each part of system and after completion of
mechanical and electrical hook-ups, to verify correct installation and functioning.
Include following activities:
.1
Test and calibrate field hardware including stand-alone capability of each
controller.
.2
Verify each A-to-D convertor.
.3
Test and calibrate each AI using calibrated digital instruments.
.4
Test each DI to ensure proper settings and switching contacts.
.5
Test each DO to ensure proper operation and lag time.
.6
Test each AO to ensure proper operation of controlled devices. Verify
tight closure and signals.
.7
Test operating software.
.8
Test application software and provide samples of logs and commands.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
EMCS: START-UP, VERIFICATION
AND COMMISSIONING
.9
.10
.11
.3
.4
Section 25 01 11
Page 4
2016-01-13
Verify each CDL including energy optimization programs.
Debug software.
Blow out flow measuring and static pressure stations with high pressure
air at 700 kPa.
.12
Provide point verification list in table format including point identifier,
point identifier expansion, point type and address, low and high limits
and engineering units. Include space on commissioning technician and
Departmental Representative. This document will be used in final startup
testing.
Final Startup Testing: Upon satisfactory completion of tests, perform point-bypoint test of entire system under direction of Departmental Representative and
PWGSC Commissioning Manager and provide:
.1
2 technical personnel capable of re-calibrating field hardware and
modifying software.
.2
Detailed daily schedule showing items to be tested and personnel
available.
.3
Departmental Representative's acceptance signature to be on executive
and applications programs.
.4
Commissioning to commence during final startup testing.
.5
O&M personnel to assist in commissioning procedures as part of
training.
.6
Commissioning to be supervised by qualified supervisory personnel and
Departmental Representative.
.7
Commission systems considered as life safety systems before affected
parts of the facility are occupied.
.8
Operate systems as long as necessary to commission entire project.
.9
Monitor progress and keep detailed records of activities and results.
Final Operational Testing: to demonstrate that EMCS functions in accordance
with contract requirements.
.1
Prior to beginning of 30 day test demonstrate that operating parameters
(setpoints, alarm limits, operating control software, sequences of
operation, trends, graphics and CDL's) have been implemented to ensure
proper operation and operator notification in event of off-normal
operation.
.1
Repetitive alarm conditions to be resolved to minimize reporting
of nuisance conditions.
.2
Test to last at least 30 consecutive 24 hour days.
.3
Tests to include:
.1
Demonstration of correct operation of monitored and controlled
points.
.2
Operation and capabilities of sequences, reports, special control
algorithms, diagnostics, software.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
EMCS: START-UP, VERIFICATION
AND COMMISSIONING
Section 25 01 11
Page 5
2016-01-13
.4
.5
3.3
System will be accepted when:
.1
EMCS equipment operates to meet overall performance
requirements. Downtime as defined in this Section must not
exceed allowable time calculated for this site.
.2
Requirements of Contract have been met.
.5
In event of failure to attain specified AEL during test period, extend test
period on day-to-day basis until specified AEL is attained for test period.
.6
Correct defects when they occur and before resuming tests.
Commissioning Manager and Departmental Representative to verify reported
results.
ADJUSTING
.1
3.4
Final adjusting: upon completion of commissioning as reviewed by Departmental
Representative, set and lock devices in final position and permanently mark settings.
DEMONSTRATION
.1
Demonstrate to Departmental Representative operation of systems including sequence of
operations in regular and emergency modes, under normal and emergency conditions,
start-up, shut-down interlocks and lock-outs in accordance with Section 01 79 00.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
EMCS: TRAINING
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes.
.1
.2
Requirements and procedures for training program, instructors and training
materials, for building Energy Monitoring and Control System (EMCS) Work.
Related Sections.
.1
1.2
Section 25 01 12
Page 1
2016-01-13
Section 25 05 01 - EMCS: General Requirements.
DEFINITIONS
.1
CDL - Control Description Logic.
.2
For additional acronyms and definitions refer to Section 25 05 01.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00, supplemented and modified by
requirements of this Section.
.2
Submit training proposal complete with hour-by-hour schedule including brief overview of
content of each segment to Departmental Representative 30 days prior to anticipated date
of beginning of training.
.1
.2
.3
1.4
List name of trainer, and type of visual and audio aids to be used.
Show co-ordinated interface with other EMCS mechanical and electrical training
programs.
Submit reports within one week after completion of training program that training has been
satisfactorily completed.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Provide competent instructors thoroughly familiar with aspects of EMCS installed in
facility.
.2
Departmental Representative reserves right to approve instructors.
1.5
INSTRUCTIONS
.1
Provide instruction to designated personnel in adjustment, operation, maintenance and
pertinent safety requirements of EMCS installed.
.2
Training to be project-specific.
1.6
TIME FOR INSTRUCTION
.1
Number of days of instruction to be as specified in this section (1 day = 8 hours including
two 15 minute breaks and excluding lunch time).
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
1.7
EMCS: TRAINING
Section 25 01 12
Page 2
2016-01-13
TRAINING MATERIALS
.1
Provide equipment, visual and audio aids, and materials for classroom training.
.2
Supply manual for each trainee, describing in detail data included in each training program.
.1
1.8
Review contents of manual in detail to explain aspects of operation and
maintenance (O&M).
TRAINING PROGRAM
.1
Refer to Section 01 79 00.
.2
Include training for:
.1
.2
.3
.4
1.9
Train O&M personnel in functional operations and procedures to be employed for
system operation.
Supplement with on-the-job training during 30 day test period.
Include overview of system architecture, communications, operation of computer
and peripherals, report generation.
Include detailed training on operator interface functions for control of mechanical
systems, CDL's for each system, and elementary preventive maintenance.
ADDITIONAL TRAINING
.1
1.10
List courses offered by name, duration and approximate cost per person per week. Note
courses recommended for training supervisory personnel.
MONITORING OF TRAINING
.1
Departmental Representative to monitor training program and may modify schedule and
content.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
EMCS: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
.1
Related Sections:
.1
.2
.3
1.2
Section 25 05 01
Page 1
2016-01-13
Section 25 05 02 - EMCS: Shop Drawings, Product Data and Review Process.
Section 25 05 54 - EMCS: Identification.
Section 25 90 01 - EMCS: Site Requirements Applications and Systems
Sequences of Operation.
REFERENCES
.1
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/The Instrumentation, Systems and
Automation Society (ISA).
.1
.2
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/ Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers (IEEE).
.1
.3
EEMAC 2Y-1-1958, Light Gray Colour for Indoor Switch Gear.
Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS).
.1
.9
Canadian Environmental Assessment Act (CEAA), 1995, c. 37.
Canadian Environmental Protection Act (CEPA), 1999, c. 33.
Electrical and Electronic Manufacturers Association (EEMAC).
.1
.8
CEA-709.1-B-2002, Control Network Protocol Specification.
Department of Justice Canada (Jus).
.1
.2
.7
CAN/CSA-Z234.1-89(R1995), Canadian Metric Practice Guide.
Consumer Electronics Association (CEA).
.1
.6
ASHRAE STD 135-R2001, BACNET - Data Communication Protocol for
Building Automation and Control Network.
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).
.1
.5
ANSI/IEEE 260.1-1993, American National Standard Letter Symbols Units of
Measurement (SI Units, Customary Inch-Pound Units, and Certain Other Units).
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.
(ASHRAE).
.1
.4
ANSI/ISA 5.5-1985, Graphic Symbols for Process Displays.
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
Transport Canada (TC).
.1
Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act (TDGA), 1992, c. 34.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
1.3
EMCS: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS
.1
Acronyms used in EMCS:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
.13
.14
.15
.16
.17
.18
.19
.20
.21
.22
.23
.24
.25
.26
.27
.28
.29
.30
.31
.32
.33
.34
.35
.36
.37
.38
AEL - Average Effectiveness Level.
AI - Analog Input.
AIT - Agreement on International Trade.
AO - Analog Output.
BACnet - Building Automation and Control Network.
BC(s) - Building Controller(s).
BECC - Building Environmental Control Center.
CAD - Computer Aided Design.
CDL - Control Description Logic.
CDS - Control Design Schematic.
COSV - Change of State or Value.
CPU - Central Processing Unit.
DI - Digital Input.
DO - Digital Output.
DP - Differential Pressure.
ECU - Equipment Control Unit.
EMCS - Energy Monitoring and Control System.
HVAC - Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning.
IDE - Interface Device Equipment.
I/O - Input/Output.
ISA - Industry Standard Architecture.
LAN - Local Area Network.
LCU - Local Control Unit.
MCU - Master Control Unit.
NAFTA - North American Free Trade Agreement.
NC - Normally Closed.
NO - Normally Open.
OS - Operating System.
O&M - Operation and Maintenance.
OWS - Operator Work Station.
PC - Personal Computer.
PCI - Peripheral Control Interface.
PCMCIA - Personal Computer Micro-Card Interface Adapter.
PID - Proportional, Integral and Derivative.
RAM - Random Access Memory.
SP - Static Pressure.
ROM - Read Only Memory.
TCU - Terminal Control Unit.
Section 25 05 01
Page 2
2016-01-13
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.39
.40
1.4
EMCS: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 25 05 01
Page 3
2016-01-13
USB - Universal Serial Bus.
VAV - Variable Air Volume.
DEFINITIONS
.1
Point: may be logical or physical.
.1
.2
.2
Point Name: composed of two parts, point identifier and point expansion.
.1
.2
.3
.3
AI (analog input).
AO (analog output).
DI (digital input).
DO (digital output).
Pulse inputs.
Symbols and engineering unit abbreviations utilized in displays: to ANSI/ISA S5.5.
.1
.2
1.5
Point identifier: comprised of three descriptors, "area" descriptor, "system"
descriptor and "point" descriptor, for which database to provide 25 character field
for each point identifier. "System" is system that point is located on.
.1
Area descriptor: building or part of building where point is located.
.2
System descriptor: system that point is located on.
.3
Point descriptor: physical or logical point description. For point identifier
"area", "system" and "point" will be shortforms or acronyms. Database
must provide 25 character field for each point identifier.
Point expansion: comprised of three fields, one for each descriptor. Expanded
form of shortform or acronym used in "area", "system" and "point" descriptors is
placed into appropriate point expansion field. Database must provide 32 character
field for each point expansion.
Bilingual systems to include additional point identifier expansion fields of equal
capacity for each point name for second language.
.1
System to support use of numbers and readable characters including
blanks, periods or underscores to enhance user readability for each of the
above strings.
Point Object Type: points fall into following object types:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.4
Logical points: values calculated by system such as setpoints, totals, counts,
derived corrections and may include, but not limited to result of and statements in
CDL's.
Physical points: inputs or outputs which have hardware wired to controllers which
are measuring physical properties, or providing status conditions of contacts or
relays which provide interaction with related equipment (stop, start) and valve or
damper actuators.
Printouts: to ANSI/IEEE 260.1.
Refer also to Section 25 05 54.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
.1
Refer to control schematics for system architecture.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
Building Controllers.
Control devices as listed in I/O point summary tables.
OWS(s).
Data communications equipment necessary to effect EMCS data transmission
system.
Field control devices.
Software/Hardware complete with full documentation.
Complete operating and maintenance manuals.
Training of personnel.
Acceptance tests, technical support during commissioning, full documentation.
Wiring interface co-ordination of equipment supplied by others.
Miscellaneous work as specified in these sections and as indicated.
Design Requirements:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.4
Section 25 05 01
Page 4
2016-01-13
Work covered by sections referred to above consists of fully operational EMCS, including,
but not limited to, following:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.3
EMCS: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Design and provide conduit and wiring linking elements of system.
Supply sufficient programmable controllers of types to meet project requirements.
Quantity and points contents as reviewed by Departmental Representative prior to
installation.
Location of controllers as reviewed by Departmental Representative prior to
installation.
Provide utility power to EMCS and local UPS to all field and master control
panels.
Metric references: in accordance with CAN/CSA Z234.1.
All wiring to be run in conduits, refer to division 26 for conduit requirements.
All low voltage wiring shall be supplied and installed by Division 25. All line
voltage wiring shall be supplied and installed by Division 26.
Language Operating Requirements:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Provide English operator selectable access codes.
Use non-linguistic symbols for displays on graphic terminals. Other information to
be in English.
Operating system executive: provide primary hardware-to-software interface
specified as part of hardware purchase with associated documentation to be in
English.
System manager software: include in English system definition point database,
additions, deletions or modifications, control loop statements, use of high level
programming languages, report generator utility and other OS utilities used for
maintaining optimal operating efficiency.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.5
1.6
EMCS: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 25 05 01
Page 5
2016-01-13
Include, in English:
.1
Input and output commands and messages from operator-initiated
functions and field related changes and alarms as defined in CDL's or
assigned limits (i.e. commands relating to day-to-day operating functions
and not related to system modifications, additions, or logic
re-definements).
.2
Graphic "display" functions, point commands to turn systems on or off,
manually override automatic control of specified hardware points. To be
in [French] [and] [English] at specified OWS and to be able to operate one
terminal in English and second in French. Point name expansions in both
languages.
.3
Reporting function such as trend log, trend graphics, alarm report logs,
energy report logs, maintenance generated logs.
SUBMITTALS
.1
Make submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 and 25 05 02.
.2
Submit for review:
.1
.3
Quality Control:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
1.7
List existing field control devices to be re-used within 60 days of award of
contract.
Provide equipment and material from manufacturer's regular production, CSA
certified, manufactured to standard quoted plus additional specified requirements.
Where CSA certified equipment is not available submit such equipment to
inspection authorities for special inspection and approval before delivery to site.
Submit proof of compliance to specified standards with shop drawings and product
data in accordance with Section 25 05 02. Label or listing of specified organization
is acceptable evidence.
In lieu of such evidence, submit certificate from testing organization, approved by
Departmental Representative, certifying that item was tested in accordance with
their test methods and that item conforms to their standard/code.
For materials whose compliance with organizational
standards/codes/specifications is not regulated by organization using its own
listing or label as proof of compliance, furnish certificate stating that material
complies with applicable referenced standard or specification.
Permits and fees: in accordance with general conditions of contract.
Submit certificate of acceptance from authority having jurisdiction to
Departmental Representative.
Existing devices intended for re-use: submit test report.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Ensure qualified supervisory personnel continuously direct and monitor Work and attend
site meetings.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
1.8
EMCS: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 25 05 01
Page 6
2016-01-13
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Material Delivery Schedule: provide Departmental Representative with schedule within 2
weeks after award of Contract.
.2
Waste Management and Disposal:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
1.9
Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section
01 74 20.
Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling
facilities.
Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard,
packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with
Waste Management Plan.
Separate for reuse and recycling and place in designated containers Steel, Plastic
waste in accordance with Waste Management Plan.
Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic in designated containers.
Handle and dispose of hazardous materials in accordance with CEPA, TDGA,
Regional and Municipal, regulations.
Label location of salvaged material's storage areas and provide barriers and
security devices.
Ensure emptied containers are sealed and stored safely.
Divert unused metal materials from landfill to metal recycling facility as approved
by Departmental Representative.
Fold up metal and plastic banding, flatten and place in designated area for
recycling.
EXISTING CONTROLS SYSTEM
.1
The existing control system is a Delta Controls System. Existing controllers are located
through-out the facility
.2
As part of this project the contractor shall provide a control system fully integrated into and
compatible with the existing system. All new controls points shall communicate
seamlessly with the existing system.
.3
The existing graphic interface on the existing operator work station shall be updated to
reflect all new control points and parameter.
.4
New alarm points and schedules shall be visible, annunciated and modified via the existing
controls interface.
1.10
EXISTING CONDITIONS - CONTROL COMPONENTS
.1
Replace all existing control and devices related to equipment within the scope of work of
this project.
.2
Replace all field control devices within the scope of work of this project.
.1
Do not modify original design of existing devices without written permission from
Departmental Representative.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
.3
Section 25 05 01
Page 7
2016-01-13
Provide for new, properly designed device where re-usability of components is
uncertain.
Inspect and test existing devices intended for re-use within 30 days of award of contract,
and prior to installation of new devices.
.1
.2
.4
EMCS: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Furnish test report within 40 days of award of contract listing each component to
be re-used and indicating whether it is in good order or requires repair by
Departmental Representative.
Failure to produce test report will constitute acceptance of existing devices by
contractor.
Non-functioning items:
.1
.2
Provide with report specification sheets or written functional requirements to
support findings.
Departmental Representative will repair or replace existing items judged defective
yet deemed necessary for EMCS.
.5
Submit written request for permission to disconnect controls and to obtain equipment
downtime before proceeding with Work.
.6
Assume responsibility for controls to be incorporated into EMCS after written receipt of
approval from Departmental Representative.
.1
.2
.3
.7
Be responsible for items repaired or replaced by Departmental Representative.
Be responsible for repair costs due to negligence or abuse of equipment.
Responsibility for existing devices terminates upon final acceptance of EMCS
applicable portions of EMCS as approved by Departmental Representative.
Remove existing controls not re-used or not required. Place in approved storage for
disposition as directed.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
EQUIPMENT
.1
Control Network Protocol and Data Communication Protocol: ASHRAE STD 135.
.2
Complete list of equipment and materials to be used on project and forming part of bid
documents by adding manufacturer's name, model number and details of materials, and
submit for approval.
2.2
ADAPTORS
.1
Provide adaptors between metric and imperial components.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS
.1
Installation: to manufacturer's recommendations.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
3.2
EMCS: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 25 05 01
Page 8
2016-01-13
PAINTING
.1
Painting: in accordance with Section 09 91 23, supplemented as follows:
.1
.2
.3
.4
3.3
Clean and touch up marred or scratched surfaces of factory finished equipment to
match original finish.
Restore to new condition, finished surfaces too extensively damaged to be primed
and touched up to make good.
Clean and prime exposed hangers, racks, fastenings, and other support
components.
Paint unfinished equipment installed indoors to EEMAC 2Y-1.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Verification requirements include:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
Materials and resources.
Storage and collection of recyclables.
Construction waste management.
Resource reuse.
Recycled content.
Local/regional materials.
Certified Wood.
Low-emitting materials.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
EMCS: SUBMITTALS AND REVIEW PROCESS
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes.
.1
.2
Methods and procedures for shop drawings submittals, preliminary and detailed
review process including review meetings, for building Energy Monitoring and
Control System (EMCS).
Related Sections.
.1
.2
1.2
Section 25 05 02
Page 1
2016-01-13
Section 25 05 01 - EMCS: General Requirements.
Section 25 01 11 - EMCS: Start-up, Verification and Commissioning.
DEFINITIONS
.1
1.3
Acronyms and definitions: refer to Section 25 05 01.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
.1
Preliminary Design Review: to contain following contractor and systems information.
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
.13
1.4
Location of office.
Description and location of installing and servicing technical staff.
Location and qualifications of programming design and programming support
staff.
List of spare parts.
Location of spare parts stock.
Names of sub-contractors and site-specific key personnel.
Sketch of site-specific system architecture.
Specification sheets for each item including memory provided, programming
language, speed, type of data transmission.
Descriptive brochures.
Sample CDL and graphics (systems schematics).
Response time for each type of command and report.
Item-by-item statement of compliance.
Proof of demonstrated ability of system to communicate utilizing BACnet.
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 and coordinate with requirements in this
Section.
.2
Shop Drawings to consist of 3 hard copies and 1 soft copy of design documents, shop
drawings, product data and software.
.3
Hard copy to be completely indexed and coordinated package to assure compliance with
contract requirements and arranged in same sequence as specification and cross-referenced
to specification section and paragraph number.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.4
1.5
EMCS: SUBMITTALS AND REVIEW PROCESS
Section 25 05 02
Page 2
2016-01-13
Soft copy to be in PDF format, structured using menu format for easy loading and retrieval
on OWS.
PRELIMINARY SHOP DRAWING REVIEW
.1
Submit preliminary shop drawings within 30 working days of award of contract and
include following:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
1.6
Specification sheets for each item. To include manufacturer's descriptive
literature, manufacturer's installation recommendations, specifications, drawings,
diagrams, performance and characteristic curves, catalogue cuts, manufacturer's
name, trade name, catalogue or model number, nameplate data, size, layout,
dimensions, capacity, other data to establish compliance.
Detailed system architecture showing all points associated with each controller
including, signal levels, pressures where new EMCS ties into existing control
equipment.
Spare point capacity of each controller by number and type.
Controller locations.
Auxiliary control cabinet locations.
Single line diagrams showing cable routings, conduit sizes, spare conduit capacity
between control centre, field controllers and systems being controlled.
Valves: complete schedule listing including following information: designation,
service, manufacturer, model, point ID, design flow rate, design pressure drop,
required Cv, Valve size, actual Cv, spring range, pilot range, required torque,
actual torque and close off pressure (required and actual).
Dampers: sketches showing module assembly, interconnecting hardware, operator
locations, operator spring range, pilot range, required torque, actual torque.
DETAIL SHOP DRAWING REVIEW
.1
Submit detailed shop drawings within 60 working days after award of contract and before
start of installation and include following:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
Corrected and updated versions (hard copy only) of submissions made during
preliminary review.
Wiring diagrams.
Piping diagrams and hook-ups.
Interface wiring diagrams showing termination connections and signal levels for
equipment to be supplied by others.
Shop drawings for each input/output point, sensors, transmitters, showing
information associated with each particular point including:
.1
Sensing element type and location.
.2
Transmitter type and range.
.3
Associated field wiring schematics, schedules and terminations.
.4
Complete Point Name Lists.
.5
Setpoints, curves or graphs and alarm limits (high and low, 3 types critical,
cautionary and maintenance), signal range.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
EMCS: SUBMITTALS AND REVIEW PROCESS
Section 25 05 02
Page 3
2016-01-13
.6
.7
.8
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
.13
.14
.15
1.7
Software and programming details associated with each point.
Manufacturer's recommended installation instructions and procedures.
Input and output signal levels or pressures where new system ties into
existing control equipment.
Control schematics, narrative description, CDL's fully showing and describing
automatic and manual procedure required to achieve proper operation of project,
including under complete failure of EMCS.
Graphic system schematic displays of air and water systems with point identifiers
and textual description of system, and typical floor plans as specified.
Complete system CDL's including companion English language explanations on
same sheet but with different font and italics. CDL's to contain specified energy
optimization programs.
Listing and example of specified reports.
Listing of time of day schedules.
Mark up to-scale construction drawing to detail control room showing location of
equipment and operator work space.
Type and size of memory with statement of spare memory capacity.
Full description of software programs provided.
Sample of "Operating Instructions Manual" to be used for training purposes.
Outline of proposed start-up and verification procedures. Refer to Section
25 01 11.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Preliminary Design Review Meeting: Convene meeting within 45 working days of award
of contract to:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Undertake functional review of preliminary design documents, resolve
inconsistencies.
Resolve conflicts between contract document requirements and actual items (e.g.:
points list inconsistencies).
Review interface requirements of materials supplied by others.
Review "Sequence of Operations".
.2
Contractor's programmer to attend meeting.
.3
Departmental Representative retains right to revise sequence or subsequent CDL prior to
software finalization without cost to Departmental Representative.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
EMCS: SUBMITTALS AND REVIEW PROCESS
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
Section 25 05 02
Page 4
2016-01-13
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
EMCS: PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes.
.1
.2
Requirements and procedures for final control diagrams and operation and
maintenance (O&M) manual, for building Energy Monitoring and Control System
(EMCS) Work.
Related Sections.
.1
.2
.3
.4
1.2
Section 25 05 03
Page 1
2016-01-13
Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.
Section 25 05 01 - EMCS: General Requirements.
Section 25 05 02 - EMCS: Submittals and Review Process.
Section 25 01 11 - EMCS: Start-up, Verification and Commissioning.
DEFINITIONS
.1
BECC - Building Environmental Control Centre.
.2
OWS - Operator Work Station.
.3
For additional acronyms and definitions refer to Section 25 05 01.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submittals in accordance with Section 01 78 00, supplemented and modified by
requirements of this Section.
.2
Submit As-built drawings, Operation and Maintenance Manual to Departmental
Representative in English.
.3
Provide soft copies and hard copies in hard-back, 50 mm 3 ring, D-ring binders.
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
1.4
Binders to be 2/3 maximum full.
Provide index to full volume in each binder.
Identify contents of each manual on cover and spine.
Provide Table of Contents in each manual.
Assemble each manual to conform to Table of Contents with tab sheets placed
before instructions covering subject.
AS-BUILTS
.1
Provide 1 copy of detailed shop drawings generated in Section 25 05 02 and include:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Changes to contract documents as well as addenda and contract extras.
Changes to interface wiring.
Routing of conduit, wiring and control air lines associated with EMCS installation.
Locations of obscure devices to be indicated on drawings.
Listing of alarm messages.
Panel/circuit breaker number for sources of normal/emergency power.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.7
.8
.9
EMCS: PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
Section 25 05 03
Page 2
2016-01-13
Names, addresses, telephone numbers of each sub-contractor having installed
equipment, local representative for each item of equipment, each system.
Test procedures and reports: provide records of start-up procedures, test
procedures, checkout tests and final commissioning reports as specified in Section
25 01 11.
Basic system design and full documentation on system configuration.
.2
Submit for final review by Departmental Representative.
.3
Provide before acceptance 1 soft copy incorporating changes made during final review.
1.5
O&M MANUALS
.1
Custom design O&M Manuals (both hard and soft copy) to contain material pertinent to
this project only, and to provide full and complete coverage of subjects referred to in this
Section.
.2
Provide 3 complete sets of hard and soft copies prior to system or equipment tests
.3
Include complete coverage in concise language, readily understood by operating personnel
using common terminology of functional and operational requirements of system. Do not
presume knowledge of computers, electronics or in-depth control theory.
.4
Functional description to include:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.5
System operation to include:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.6
Functional description of theory of operation.
Design philosophy.
Specific functions of design philosophy and system.
Full details of data communications, including data types and formats, data
processing and disposition data link components, interfaces and operator tests or
self-test of data link integrity.
Explicit description of hardware and software functions, interfaces and
requirements for components in functions and operating modes.
Description of person-machine interactions required to supplement system
description, known or established constraints on system operation, operating
procedures currently implemented for implementation in automatic mode.
Complete step-by-step procedures for operation of system including required
actions at each OWS.
Operation of computer peripherals, input and output formats.
Emergency, alarm and failure recovery.
Step-by-step instructions for start-up, back-up equipment operation, execution of
systems functions and operating modes, including key strokes for each command
so that operator need only refer to these pages for keystroke entries required to call
up display or to input command.
Software to include:
.1
.2
Documentation of theory, design, interface requirements, functions, including test
and verification procedures.
Detailed descriptions of program requirements and capabilities.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.3
.4
.5
.6
EMCS: PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
Section 25 05 03
Page 3
2016-01-13
Data necessary to permit modification, relocation, reprogramming and to permit
new and existing software modules to respond to changing system functional
requirements without disrupting normal operation.
Software modules, fully annotated source code listings, error free object code files
ready for loading via peripheral device
Complete program cross reference plus linking requirements, data exchange
requirements, necessary subroutine lists, data file requirements, other information
necessary for proper loading, integration, interfacing, program execution.
Software for each Controller and single section referencing Controller common
parameters and functions.
.7
Maintenance: document maintenance procedures including inspection, periodic preventive
maintenance, fault diagnosis, repair or replacement of defective components, including
calibration, maintenance, repair of sensors, transmitters, transducers, controller and
interface firmware's, plus diagnostics and repair/replacement of system hardware.
.8
System configuration document:
.1
.2
.9
Provisions and procedures for planning, implementing and recording hardware
and software modifications required during operating lifetime of system.
Information to ensure co-ordination of hardware and software changes, data link or
message format/content changes, sensor or control changes in event that system
modifications are required.
Programmer control panel documentation: provide where panels are independently
interfaced with BECC, including interfacing schematics, signal identification, timing
diagrams, fully commented source listing of applicable driver/handler.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
EMCS: IDENTIFICATION
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes.
.1
.2
Requirements and procedures for identification of devices, sensors, wiring tubing,
conduit and equipment, for building Energy Monitoring and Control System
(EMCS) Work and nameplates materials, colours and lettering sizes.
Related Sections.
.1
1.2
Section 25 05 54
Page 1
2016-01-13
Section 25 05 01 - EMCS: General Requirements.
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).
.1
1.3
CSA C22.1-09, The Canadian Electrical Code, Part I (21st Edition), Safety
Standard for Electrical Installations.
DEFINITIONS
.1
1.4
For acronyms and definitions refer to Section 25 05 01.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
.1
1.5
Language Operating Requirements: provide identification for control items in English.
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 supplemented and modified by
requirements of this Section.
.2
Submit to Departmental Representative for approval samples of nameplates, identification
tags and list of proposed wording.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
NAMEPLATES FOR PANELS
.1
Identify by 3 mm thick Melamine, matt white finish, black core, square corners, lettering
accurately aligned and engraved into core.
.2
Sizes: 25 x 67 mm minimum.
.3
Lettering: minimum 7 mm high, black.
.4
Inscriptions: machine engraved to identify function.
2.2
NAMEPLATES FOR FIELD DEVICES
.1
Identify by plastic encased cards attached by chain.
.2
Sizes: 50 x 100 mm minimum.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
EMCS: IDENTIFICATION
Section 25 05 54
Page 2
2016-01-13
.3
Lettering: minimum 5 mm high produced from laser printer in black.
.4
Data to include: point name and point address.
.5
Companion cabinet: identify interior components using plastic enclosed cards with point
name and point address.
2.3
NAMEPLATES FOR ROOM SENSORS
.1
Identify by stick-on labels using point identifier.
.2
Location: as directed by Departmental Representative.
.3
Letter size: to suit, clearly legible.
2.4
WARNING SIGNS
.1
Equipment including motors, starters under remote automatic control: supply and install
orange coloured signs warning of automatic starting under control of EMCS.
.2
Sign to read: "Caution: This equipment is under automatic remote control of EMCS" as
reviewed by Departmental Representative.
2.5
WIRING
.1
Supply and install numbered tape markings on wiring at panels, junction boxes, splitters,
cabinets and outlet boxes.
.2
Colour coding: to CSA C22.1. Use colour coded wiring in communications cables,
matched throughout system.
.3
Power wiring: identify circuit breaker panel/circuit breaker number inside each EMCS
panel.
2.6
CONDUIT
.1
Colour code EMCS conduit.
.2
Pre-paint box covers and conduit fittings.
.3
Coding: use fluorescent orange paint and confirm colour with Departmental
Representative during "Preliminary Design Review".
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
NAMEPLATES AND LABELS
.1
3.2
Ensure that manufacturer's nameplates, CSA labels and identification nameplates are
visible and legible at all times.
EXISTING PANELS
.1
Correct existing nameplates and legends to reflect changes made during Work.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
EMCS: WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes.
.1
.2
Section 25 05 01 - EMCS: General Requirements.
References.
.1
.2
1.2
Requirements and procedures for warranty and activities during warranty period
and service contracts, for building Energy Monitoring and Control System
(EMCS).
Related Sections.
.1
.3
Section 25 08 20
Page 1
2016-01-13
Canada Labour Code (R.S. 1985, c. L-2)/Part I - Industrial Relations.
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).
.1
CSA Z204-94(R1999), Guidelines for Managing Indoor Air Quality in
Office Buildings.
DEFINITIONS
.1
BC(s) - Building Controller(s).
.2
OWS - Operator Work Station.
.3
For additional acronyms and definitions refer to Section 25 05 01.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Submit detailed preventative maintenance schedule for system components to
Departmental Representative.
.3
Submit detailed inspection reports to Departmental Representative.
.4
Submit dated, maintenance task lists to Departmental Representative and include the
following sensor and output point detail, as proof of system verification:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
Point name and location.
Device type and range.
Measured value.
System displayed value.
Calibration detail
Indication if adjustment required,
Other action taken or recommended.
.5
Submit network analysis report showing results with detailed recommendations to correct
problems found.
.6
Records and logs: in accordance with Section 01 78 00.
.1
Maintain records and logs of each maintenance task on site.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
.3
.7
1.4
EMCS: WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE
Section 25 08 20
Page 2
2016-01-13
Organize cumulative records for each major component and for entire EMCS
chronologically.
Submit records to Departmental Representative, after inspection indicating that
planned and systematic maintenance have been accomplished.
Revise and submit to Departmental Representative in accordance with Section 01 78 00
"As-built drawings" documentation and commissioning reports to reflect changes,
adjustments and modifications to EMCS made during warranty period.
MAINTENANCE SERVICE DURING WARRANTY PERIOD
.1
Provide services, materials, and equipment to maintain EMCS for specified warranty
period. Provide detailed preventative maintenance schedule for system components as
described in Submittal article.
.2
Emergency Service Calls:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
Initiate service calls when EMCS is not functioning correctly.
Qualified control personnel to be available during warranty period to provide
service to "CRITICAL" components whenever required at no extra cost.
Furnish Departmental Representative with telephone number where service
personnel may be reached at any time.
Service personnel to be on site ready to service EMCS within 2 hours after
receiving request for service.
Perform Work continuously until EMCS restored to reliable operating condition.
.3
Operation: foregoing and other servicing to provide proper sequencing of equipment and
satisfactory operation of EMCS based on original design conditions and as recommended
by manufacturer.
.4
Work requests: record each service call request, when received separately on approved
form and include:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.5
Serial number identifying component involved.
Location, date and time call received.
Nature of trouble.
Names of personnel assigned.
Instructions of work to be done.
Amount and nature of materials used.
Time and date work started.
Time and date of completion.
Provide system modifications in writing.
.1
No system modification, including operating parameters and control settings, to be
made without prior written approval of Departmental Representative.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
EMCS: WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Section 25 08 20
Page 3
2016-01-13
Not Used.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Perform as minimum (3) three minor inspections and one major inspection (more often if
required by manufacturer) per year. Provide detailed written report to Departmental
Representative as described in Submittal article.
.2
Perform inspections during regular working hours, 0800 to 1630 h, Monday through
Friday, excluding statutory holidays.
.3
Following inspections are minimum requirements and should not be interpreted to mean
satisfactory performance:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Minor inspections to include, but not limited to:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
Perform calibrations using test equipment having traceable, certifiable accuracy at
minimum 50% greater than accuracy of system displaying or logging value.
Check and Calibrate each field input/output device in accordance with Canada
Labour Code - Part I and CSA Z204.
Provide dated, maintenance task lists, as described in Submittal article, as proof of
execution of complete system verification.
Perform visual, operational checks to BC's, peripheral equipment, interface
equipment and other panels.
Check equipment cooling fans as required.
Visually check for mechanical faults, air leaks and proper pressure settings on
pneumatic components.
Review system performance with Departmental Representative to discuss
suggested or required changes.
Major inspections to include, but not limited to:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Minor inspection.
Clean OWS(s) peripheral equipment, BC(s), interface and other panels,
micro-processor interior and exterior surfaces.
Check signal, voltage and system isolation of BC(s), peripherals, interface and
other panels.
Verify calibration/accuracy of each input and output device and recalibrate or
replace as required.
Provide mechanical adjustments, and necessary maintenance on printers.
Run system software diagnostics as required.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.7
EMCS: WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE
Section 25 08 20
Page 4
2016-01-13
Install software and firmware enhancements to ensure components are operating at
most current revision for maximum capability and reliability.
.1
Perform network analysis and provide report as described in Submittal
article.
.6
Rectify deficiencies revealed by maintenance inspections and environmental checks.
.7
Continue system debugging and optimization.
.8
Testing/verification of occupancy and seasonal-sensitive systems to take place during four
(4) consecutive seasons, after facility has been accepted, taken over and fully occupied.
.1
Test weather-sensitive systems twice: first at near winter design conditions and
secondly under near summer design conditions.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
EMCS: LOCAL AREA NETWORK (LAN)
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes:
.1
.2
System requirements for Local Area Network (LAN) for Building Energy
Monitoring and Control System (EMCS).
Related Sections:
.1
1.2
Section 25 10 01
Page 1
2016-01-13
Section 25 05 01 - EMCS: General Requirements.
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).
.1
.2
.2
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)/Standard for Information
technology - Telecommunications and information exchange between systems - Local and
metropolitan area networks - Specific requirements.
.1
.3
.2
TIA/EIA-568-March 2004, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
Standards Set, Part 1 General Requirements Part 2 Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling
Components Part 3 Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard.
TIA/EIA-569-A-December 2001, Commercial Building Standard for
Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces.
Treasury Board Information Technology Standard (TBITS).
.1
1.3
IEEE Std 802.3TM -2002, Part 3: Carrier sense multiple access with collision
detection (CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specifications.
Telecommunications Industries Association (TIA)/Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA)
.1
.4
CSA T529-95(R2000), Telecommunications Cabling Systems in Commercial
Buildings (Adopted ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-A with modifications).
CSA T530-99(R2004), Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications
Pathways and Spaces (Adopted ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A with modifications).
TBITS 6.9-2000, Profile for the Telecommunications Wiring System in
Government Owned and Leased Buildings - Technical Specifications.
DEFINITIONS
.1
1.4
Acronyms and definitions: refer to Section 25 05 01.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
.1
Data communication network to link Operator Workstations and Master Control Units
(MCU) in accordance with CSA T529, TIA/EIA-568 and CSA T530 TIA/EIA-569-A and
TBITS 6.9.
.1
Provide reliable and secure connectivity of adequate performance between
different sections (segments) of network.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
.2
Section 25 10 01
Page 2
2016-01-13
Allow for future expansion of network, with selection of networking technology
and communication protocols.
Data communication network to include, but not limited to:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
1.5
EMCS: LOCAL AREA NETWORK (LAN)
EMCS-LAN.
Modems.
Network interface cards.
Network management hardware and software.
Network components necessary for complete network.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
.1
EMCS Local Area Network (EMCS-LAN).
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.2
Dynamic Data Access.
.1
.2
.3
High speed, high performance, local area network over which MCUs and existing
OWSs communicate with each other directly on peer to peer basis in accordance
with IEEE 802.3/Ethernet Standard.
EMCS-LAN to: BACnet, Proprietary Protocol.
Each EMCS-LAN to be capable of supporting at least 50 devices.
Support of combination of MCUs and OWSs directly connected to EMCS-LAN.
High speed data transfer rates for alarm reporting, quick report generation from
multiple controllers, upload/download information between network devices. Bit
rate to be 10 Megabits per second minimum.
Detection and accommodation of single or multiple failures of either OWSs,
MCUs or network media. Operational equipment to continue to perform
designated functions effectively in event of single or multiple failures.
Commonly available, multiple sourced, networking components and protocols to
allow system to co-exist with other networking applications including office
automation.
LAN to provide capabilities for OWSs, either network resident or connected
remotely, to access point status and application report data or execute control
functions for other devices via LAN.
Access to data to be based upon logical identification of building equipment.
Network Medium.
.1
Network medium: compatible with network protocol to be used within buildings.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
EMCS: LOCAL AREA NETWORK (LAN)
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
Section 25 10 01
Page 3
2016-01-13
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
EMCS: BUILDING CONTROLLERS
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
.1
Related Sections:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
1.2
Section 25 30 01
Page 1
2016-01-13
Section 25 05 01 - EMCS: General Requirements.
Section 25 05 02 - EMCS: Shop Drawings, Product Data and Review Process.
Section 25 05 03 - EMCS: Project Record Documents.
Section 25 30 02 - EMCS: Field Control Devices.
Section 25 90 01 - EMCS: Site Requirements Applications and Systems
Sequences of Operation.
REFERENCES
.1
American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.
(ASHRAE).
.1
.2
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).
.1
.3
IEEE C37.90.1-02, Surge Withstand Capabilities (SWC) Tests for Relays and
Relay Systems Associated with Electric Power Apparatus.
Public Works and Government Services Canada (PWGSC)/Real Property
Branch/Architectural and Engineering Services.
.1
1.3
CSA C22.2 No.205-M1983(R2009), Signal Equipment.
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).
.1
.4
ASHRAE 2003, Applications Handbook, SI Edition.
MD13800-September 2000, Energy Management and Control Systems (EMCS)
Design Manual. English: ftp://ftp.pwgsc.gc.ca/rps/docentre/mechanical/
me214-e.pdf
DEFINITIONS
.1
1.4
Acronyms and definitions: refer to Section 25 05 01.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
.1
General: Network of controllers comprising of MCU('s), LCU('s), ECU('s) or TCU('s) to
be provided as indicated in System Architecture Diagram to support building systems and
associated sequence(s) of operations as detailed in these specifications.
.1
.2
.2
Provide sufficient controllers to meet intents and requirements of this section.
Controller quantity, and point contents to be approved by Departmental
Representative at time of preliminary design review.
Controllers: stand-alone intelligent Control Units.
.1
Incorporate programmable microprocessor, non-volatile program memory, RAM,
power supplies, as required to perform specified functions.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
.3
.4
.3
Section 25 30 01
Page 2
2016-01-13
Incorporate communication interface ports for communication to LANs to
exchange information with other Controllers.
Capable of interfacing with operator interface device.
Execute its logic and control using primary inputs and outputs connected directly
to its onboard input/output field terminations or slave devices, and without need to
interact with other controller. Secondary input used for reset such as outdoor air
temperature may be located in other Controller(s).
.1
Secondary input used for reset such as outdoor air temperature may be
located in other Controller(s).
Interface to include provisions for use of dial-up modem for interconnection with remote
modem.
.1
.2
1.5
EMCS: BUILDING CONTROLLERS
Dial-up communications to use 56 Kbit modems and voice grade telephone lines.
Each stand-alone panel may have its own modem or group of stand-alone panels
may share modem.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
.1
To include:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
Scanning of AI and DI connected inputs for detection of change of value and
processing detection of alarm conditions.
Perform On-Off digital control of connected points, including resulting required
states generated through programmable logic output.
Perform Analog control using programmable logic, (including PID) with
adjustable dead bands and deviation alarms.
Control of systems as described in sequence of operations.
Execution of optimization routines as listed in this section.
.2
Total spare capacity for MCUs and LCUs: at least 25% of each point type distributed
throughout the MCUs and LCUs.
.3
Field Termination and Interface Devices:
.1
.2
.3
To: CSA C22.2 No.205.
Electronically interface sensors and control devices to processor unit.
Include, but not be limited to, following:
.1
Programmed firmware or logic circuits to meet functional and technical
requirements.
.2
Power supplies for operation of logics devices and associated field
equipment.
.3
Lockable wall cabinet.
.4
Required communications equipment and wiring (if remote units).
.5
Leave controlled system in "fail-safe" mode in event of loss of
communication with, or failure of, processor unit.
.6
Input Output interface to accept as minimum AI, AO, DI, DO functions as
specified.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
EMCS: BUILDING CONTROLLERS
Section 25 30 01
Page 3
2016-01-13
.7
.4
.5
.6
.7
Wiring terminations: use conveniently located screw type or spade lug
terminals.
AI interface equipment to:
.1
Convert analog signals to digital format with 10 bit analog-to-digital
resolution.
.2
Provide for following input signal types and ranges:
.1
4- 20mA;
.2
0 - 10V DC;
.3
100/1000 ohm RTD input;
.3
Meet IEEE C37.90.1 surge withstand capability.
.4
Have common mode signal rejection greater than 60 dB to 60 Hz.
.5
Where required, dropping resistors to be certified precision devices which
complement accuracy of sensor and transmitter range specified.
AO interface equipment:
.1
Convert digital data from controller processor to acceptable analog output
signals using 8 bit digital-to-analog resolution.
.2
Provide for following output signal types and ranges:
.1
4 - 20 mA.
.2
0 - 10 V DC.
.3
Meet IEEE C37.90.1 surge withstand capability.
DI interface equipment:
.1
Able to reliably detect contact change of sensed field contact and transmit
condition to controller.
.2
Meet IEEE C37.90.1 surge withstand capability.
.3
Accept pulsed inputs up to 2 kHz.
DO interface equipment:
.1
Respond to controller processor output, switch respective outputs. Each
DO hardware to be capable of switching up to 0.5 amps at 24 V AC.
.2
Switch up to 5 amps at 220V AC using optional interface relay.
.4
Controllers and associated hardware and software: operate in conditions of 0°C to 44°C
and 20 % to 90 % non-condensing RH.
.5
Controllers (MCU, LCU): mount in wall mounted cabinet with hinged, keyed-alike locked
door.
.1
.2
.3
Provide for conduit entrance from top, bottom or sides of panel.
ECUs and TCUs to be mounted in equipment enclosures or separate enclosures.
Mounting details as approved by Departmental Representative for ceiling
mounting.
.6
Cabinets to provide protection from water dripping from above, while allowing sufficient
airflow to prevent internal overheating.
.7
Provide surge and low voltage protection for interconnecting wiring connections.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
1.6
EMCS: BUILDING CONTROLLERS
Section 25 30 01
Page 4
2016-01-13
SUBMITTALS
.1
Make submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 and Section 25 05 02.
.1
1.7
Submit product data sheets for each product item proposed for this project.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
.1
Provide manufacturers recommended maintenance procedures for insertion in Section
25 05 03.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
MASTER CONTROL UNIT (MCU)
.1
General: primary function of MCU is to provide co-ordination and supervision of
subordinate devices in execution of optimization routines such as demand limiting or
enthalpy control.
.2
Include high speed communication LAN Port for Peer to Peer communications with
OWS(s) and other MCU level devices.
.1
.3
MCU local I/O capacity as follows:
.1
.2
.4
MCU must support BACnet.
MCU I/O points as allocated in I/O Summary Table referenced in MD13800.
LCUs may be added to support system functions.
Central Processing Unit (CPU).
.1
.2
.3
.4
Processor to consist of minimum 16 bit microprocessor capable of supporting
software to meet specified requirements.
CPU idle time to be more than 30% when system configured to maximum input
and output with worst case program use.
Minimum addressable memory to be at manufacturer's discretion but to support at
least performance and technical specifications to include but not limited to:
.1
Non-volatile EEPROM to contain operating system, executive,
application, sub-routine, other configurations definition software. Tape
media not acceptable.
.2
Battery backed (72 hour minimum capacity) RAM (to reduce the need to
reload operating data in event of power failure) to contain CDLs,
application parameters, operating data or software that is required to be
modifiable from operational standpoint such as schedules, setpoints, alarm
limits, PID constants and CDL and hence modifiable on-line through
operator panel or remote operator's interface. RAM to be downline
loadable from OWS.
Include uninterruptible clock accurate to plus or minus 5 secs/month, capable of
deriving year/month/day/hour/minute/second, with rechargeable batteries for
minimum 72 hour operation in event of power failure.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.5
Section 25 30 01
Page 5
2016-01-13
Local Operator Terminal (OT): Provide OT for each MCU unless otherwise specified in
Section 25 90 01.
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
2.2
EMCS: BUILDING CONTROLLERS
Mount access/display panel in MCU or in suitable enclosure beside MCU as
approved by Departmental Representative.
Support operator's terminal for local command entry, instantaneous and historical
data display, programs, additions and modifications.
Display simultaneously minimum of 16 point identifiers to allow operator to view
single screen dynamic displays depicting entire mechanical systems. Point
identifiers to be in English.
Functions to include, but not be limited to, following:
.1
Start and stop points.
.2
Modify setpoints.
.3
Modify PID loop parameters.
.4
Override PID control.
.5
Change time/date.
.6
Add/modify/start/stop weekly scheduling.
.7
Add/modify setpoint weekly scheduling.
.8
Enter temporary override schedules.
.9
Define holiday schedules.
.10
View analog limits.
.11
Enter/modify analog warning limits.
.12
Enter/modify analog alarm limits.
.13
Enter/modify analog differentials.
Provide access to real and calculated points in controller to which it is connected or
to other controller in network. This capability not to be restricted to subset of
predefined "global points" but to provide totally open exchange of data between
OT and other controller in network.
Operator access to OTs: same as OWS user password and password changes to
automatically be downloaded to controllers on network.
Provide prompting to eliminate need for user to remember command format or
point names. Prompting to be consistent with user's password clearance and types
of points displayed to eliminate possibility of operator error.
Identity of real or calculated points to be consistent with network devices. Use
same point identifier as at OWS's for access of points at OT to eliminate
cross-reference or look-up tables.
LOCAL CONTROL UNIT (LCU)
.1
Provide multiple control functions for typical built-up and package HVAC systems,
hydronic systems and electrical systems.
.2
Minimum of 16 I/O points of which minimum be 4 AOs, 4 AIs, 4 DIs, 4 DOs.
.3
Points integral to one Building System to be resident on only one controller.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.4
Section 25 30 01
Page 6
2016-01-13
Microprocessor capable of supporting necessary software and hardware to meet specified
requirements as listed in previous MCU article with following additions:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
2.3
EMCS: BUILDING CONTROLLERS
Include minimum 2interface ports for connection of local computer terminal.
Design so that shorts, opens or grounds on input or output will not interfere with
other input or output signals.
Physically separate line voltage (70V and over) circuits from DC logic circuits to
permit maintenance on either circuit with minimum hazards to technician and
equipment.
Include power supplies for operation of LCU and associated field equipment.
In event of loss of communications with, or failure of, MCU, LCU to continue to
perform control. Controllers that use defaults or fail to open or close positions not
acceptable.
Provide conveniently located screw type or spade lug terminals for field wiring.
TERMINAL/EQUIPMENT CONTROL UNIT (TCU/ECU)
.1
Microprocessor capable of supporting necessary software and hardware to meet TCU/ECU
functional specifications.
.1
TCU/ECU definition to be consistent with those defined in ASHRAE HVAC
Applications Handbook section 45.
.2
Controller to communicate directly with EMCS through EMCS LAN and provide access
from EMCS OWS for setting occupied and unoccupied space temperature setpoints, flow
setpoints, and associated alarm values, permit reading of sensor values, field control values
(% open) and transmit alarm conditions to EMCS OWS.
.3
VAV Terminal Controller.
.1
.2
.3
.4
2.4
Microprocessor based controller with integral flow transducer, including software
routines to execute PID algorithms, calculate airflow for integral flow transducer
and measure temperatures as per I/O Summary required inputs. Sequence of
operation to ASHRAE HVAC Applications Handbook.
Controller to support point definition; in accordance with Section 25 05 01.
Controller to operate independent of network in case of communication failure.
Controller to include damper actuator and terminations for input and output
sensors and devices.
SOFTWARE
.1
General.
.1
.2
.3
Include as minimum: operating system executive, communications, application
programs, operator interface, and systems sequence of operation - CDL's.
Include "firmware" or instructions which are programmed into ROM, EPROM,
EEPROM or other non-volatile memory.
Include initial programming of Controllers, for entire system.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
.2
.2
Operating and control functions include:
.1
Multi-level password access protection to allow user/manager to limit
workstation control.
.2
Alarm management: processing and messages.
.3
Operator commands.
.4
Reports.
.5
Displays.
.6
Point identification.
Pseudo or calculated points.
.1
.2
.6
Program Control Description Logic software (CDL) using English like or
graphical, high level, general control language.
Structure software in modular fashion to permit simple restructuring of program
modules if future software additions or modifications are required. GO TO
constructs not allowed unless approved by Departmental Representative.
Operator Terminal interface.
.1
.5
Store executive programs and site configuration data in ROM, EEPROM or other
non-volatile memory.
Maintain CDL and operating data including setpoints, operating constants, alarm
limits in battery-backed RAM or EEPROM for display and modification by
operator.
Programming languages.
.1
.4
Section 25 30 01
Page 7
2016-01-13
Program and data storage.
.1
.3
EMCS: BUILDING CONTROLLERS
Software to provide access to value or status in controller or other networked
controller in order to define and calculate pseudo point. When current pseudo point
value is derived, normal alarm checks must be performed or value used to totalize.
Inputs and outputs for process: include data from controllers to permit
development of network-wide control strategies. Processes also to permit operator
to use results of one process as input to number of other processes (e.g. cascading).
Control Description Logic (CDL):
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
Capable of generating on-line project-specific CDLs which are software based,
programmed into RAM or EEPROM and backed up to OWS. Owner must have
access to these algorithms for modification or to be able to create new ones and to
integrate these into CDLs on BC(s) from OWS.
Write CDL in high level language that allows algorithms and interlocking
programs to be written simply and clearly. Use parameters entered into system
(e.g. setpoints) to determine operation of algorithm. Operator to be able to alter
operating parameters on-line from OWS and BC(s) to tune control loops.
Perform changes to CDL on-line.
Control logic to have access to values or status of points available to controller
including global or common values, allowing cascading or inter-locking control.
Energy optimization routines including enthalpy control, supply temperature reset,
to be LCU or MCU resident functions and form part of CDL.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.6
.7
.8
.9
EMCS: BUILDING CONTROLLERS
Section 25 30 01
Page 8
2016-01-13
MCU to be able to perform following pre-tested control algorithms:
.1
Two position control.
.2
Proportional Integral and Derivative (PID) control.
Control software to provide ability to define time between successive starts for
each piece of equipment to reduce cycling of motors.
Provide protection against excessive electrical-demand situations during start-up
periods by automatically introducing time delays between successive start
commands to heavy electrical loads.
Power Fail Restart: upon detection of power failure system to verify availability of
Emergency Power as determined by emergency power transfer switches and
analyze controlled equipment to determine its appropriate status under Emergency
power conditions and start or stop equipment as defined by I/O Summary. Upon
resumption of normal power as determined by emergency power transfer switches,
MCU to analyze status of controlled equipment, compare with normal occupancy
scheduling, turn equipment on or off as necessary to resume normal operation.
.7
Event and Alarm management: use management by exception concept for Alarm
Reporting. This is system wide requirement. This approach will insure that only principal
alarms are reported to OWS. Events which occur as direct result of primary event to be
suppressed by system and only events which fail to occur to be reported. Such event
sequence to be identified in I/O Summary and sequence of operation. Examples of above
are, operational temperature alarms limits which are exceeded when main air handler is
stopped, or General Fire condition shuts air handlers down, only Fire alarm status shall be
reported. Exception is, when air handler which is supposed to stop or start fails to do so
under event condition.
.8
Energy management programs: include specific summarizing reports, with date stamp
indicating sensor details which activated and or terminated feature.
.1
.2
.3
MCU in coordination with subordinate LCU, TCU, ECU to provide for the
following energy management routines:
.1
Time of day scheduling.
.2
Calendar based scheduling.
.3
Holiday scheduling.
.4
Temporary schedule overrides.
.5
Optimal start stop.
.6
Night setback control.
.7
Enthalpy (economizer) switchover.
.8
Peak demand limiting.
.9
Temperature compensated load rolling.
.10
Fan speed/flow rate control.
Programs to be executed automatically without need for operator intervention and
be flexible enough to allow customization.
Apply programs to equipment and systems as specified or requested by the
Departmental Representative.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.9
Section 25 30 01
Page 9
2016-01-13
Function/Event Totalization: features to provide predefined reports which show daily,
weekly, and monthly accumulating totals and which include high rate (time stamped) and
low rate (time stamped) and accumulation to date for month.
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
2.5
EMCS: BUILDING CONTROLLERS
MCUs to accumulate and store automatically run-time for binary input and output
points.
MCU to automatically sample, calculate and store consumption totals on daily,
weekly or monthly basis for user-selected analog or binary pulse input-type points.
MCU to automatically count events (number of times pump is cycled off and on)
daily, weekly or monthly basis.
Totalization routine to have sampling resolution of 1 min or less for analog inputs.
Totalization to provide calculations and storage of accumulations up to 99,999.9
units (eg. kWH, litres, tonnes, etc.).
Store event totalization records with minimum of 9,999,999 events before reset.
User to be able to define warning limit and generate user-specified messages when
limit reached.
LEVELS OF ADDRESS
.1
Upon operator's request, EMCS to present status of any single 'point', 'system' or point
group, entire 'area', or entire network on printer or OWS as selected by operator.
.1
.2
.3
.4
2.6
Display analog values digitally to 1 place of decimals with negative sign as
required.
Update displayed analog values and status when new values received.
Flag points in alarm by blinking, reverse video, different colour, bracketed or other
means to differentiate from points not in alarm.
Updates to be change-of-value (COV)-driven or if polled not exceeding 2 second
intervals.
POINT NAME SUPPORT
.1
Controllers (MCU, LCU) to support PWGSC point naming convention as defined in
Section 25 05 01.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
LOCATION
.1
3.2
Location of Controllers to be approved by Departmental Representative.
INSTALLATION
.1
Install Controllers in secure locking enclosures as directed by Departmental
Representative.
.2
Provide necessary power from local 120 V branch circuit panel for equipment.
.3
Install tamper locks on breakers of circuit breaker panel.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.4
EMCS: BUILDING CONTROLLERS
Section 25 30 01
Page 10
2016-01-13
Use uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) and emergency power when equipment must
operate in emergency and co-ordinating mode.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
EMCS: FIELD CONTROL DEVICES
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
.1
Related Sections:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
1.2
Section 25 30 02
Page 1
2016-01-13
Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping.
Section 23 33 15 - Dampers - Operating.
Section 25 01 11 - EMCS: Start-Up, Verification and Commissioning.
Section 25 05 01 - EMCS: General Requirements.
Section 25 05 02 - EMCS: Shop Drawings, Product Data and Review Process.
Section 25 05 54 - EMCS: Identification.
Section 25 90 01 - EMCS: Site Requirements Applications and Systems
Sequences of Operation.
Section 26 05 01 - Common Work Results - Electrical.
Section 26 27 10 - Modular Wiring System.
Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices.
REFERENCES
.1
American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
.1
.2
.2
American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM).
.1
.3
AMCA Standard 500-D-98, Laboratory Method of Testing Dampers For Rating.
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).
.1
1.3
NEMA 250-03, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
Air Movement and Control Association, Inc. (AMCA).
.1
.5
ASTM B148-97(03), Standard Specification for Aluminum-Bronze Sand
Castings.
National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA).
.1
.4
ANSI C12.7-1993(R1999), Requirements for Watthour Meter Sockets.
ANSI/IEEE C57.13-08, Standard Requirements for Instrument Transformers.
CAN/CSA-C22.1-12, Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1 (22nd Edition), Safety
Standard for Electrical Installations.
DEFINITIONS
.1
1.4
Acronyms and Definitions: refer to Section 25 05 01.
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit shop drawings and manufacturer's installation instructions in accordance with
Section 25 05 02.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
Submit samples at random from equipment shipped, as requested by Departmental
Representative, for testing before installation. Replace devices not meeting
specified performance and accuracy.
Manufacturer's Instructions:
.1
1.5
Section 25 30 02
Page 2
2016-01-13
Pre-Installation Tests.
.1
.3
EMCS: FIELD CONTROL DEVICES
Submit manufacturer's installation instructions for specified equipment and
devices.
EXISTING CONDITIONS
.1
Cutting and Patching: in accordance with Section 01 73 03 supplemented as specified
herein.
.2
Repair surfaces damaged during execution of Work.
.3
Turn over to Departmental Representative existing materials removed from Work not
identified for re-use.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
.1
Control devices of each category to be of same type and manufacturer.
.2
External trim materials to be corrosion resistant. Internal parts to be assembled in
watertight, shockproof, vibration-proof, heat resistant, assembly.
.3
Operating conditions: 0 - 32°C with 10 - 90% RH (non-condensing) unless otherwise
specified.
.4
Terminations: use standard conduit box with slot screwdriver compression connector block
unless otherwise specified.
.5
Transmitters and sensors to be unaffected by external transmitters including walkie talkies.
.6
Account for hysteresis, relaxation time, maximum and minimum limits in applications of
sensors and controls.
.7
Outdoor installations: use weatherproof construction in NEMA 4 enclosures.
.8
Devices installed in user occupied space not exceed Noise Criteria (NC) of 35. Noise
generated by any device must not be detectable above space ambient conditions.
.9
Range: including temperature, pressure, as indicated in I/O summary in Section 25 90 01.
2.2
TEMPERATURE SENSORS
.1
General: except for room sensors to be resistance or thermocouple type to following
requirements:
.1
.2
Thermocouples: limit to temperature range of 200 °C and over.
RTD's: 100 or 1000 ohm at 0°C (plus or minus 0.2 ohms) platinum element with
strain minimizing construction, 3 integral anchored leadwires. Coefficient of
resistivity: 0.00385ohms/ohm °C.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.3
.4
.5
.6
.2
.2
Temperature sensing and display wall module.
.1
LCD display to show space temperature and temperature setpoint.
.2
Buttons for occupant selection of temperature setpoint and
occupied/unoccupied mode.
.3
Jack connection for plugging in laptop personal computer contractor
supplied zone terminal unit for access to zone bus.
.4
Integral thermistor sensing element 10,000 ohm at 24 °.
.5
Accuracy 0.2°C over range of 0 to 70°C.
.6
Stability 0.02°C drift per year.
.7
Separate mounting base for ease of installation.
General purpose duct type: suitable for insertion into ducts at various orientations,
insertion length 460 mm.
Averaging duct type: incorporates numerous sensors inside assembly which are
averaged to provide one reading. Minimum insertion length 6000 mm. Bend probe
at field installation time to 100 mm radius at point along probe without degradation
of performance.
Outdoor air temperature sensors:
.1
2.3
Sensing element: hermetically sealed.
Stem and tip construction: copper or type 304 stainless steel.
Time constant response: less than 3 seconds to temperature change of 10 °C.
Immersion wells: NPS 3/4, stainless steel spring loaded construction, with heat
transfer compound compatible with sensor. Insertion length 150 mm as indicated.
Duct temperature sensors:
.1
.4
Section 25 30 02
Page 3
2016-01-13
Room temperature sensors and display wall modules.
.1
.3
EMCS: FIELD CONTROL DEVICES
Outside air type: complete with probe length 100 - 150 mm long, non-corroding
shield to minimize solar and wind effects, threaded fitting for mating to 13 mm
conduit, weatherproof construction in NEMA 4 enclosure.
TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS
.1
Requirements:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
Input circuit: to accept 3-lead, 100 or 1000 ohm at 0 °C, platinum resistance
detector type sensors.
Power supply: 24 V DC into load of 575 ohms. Power supply effect less than
0.01°C per volt change.
Output signal: 4 - 20 mA into 500 ohm maximum load.
Input and output short circuit and open circuit protection.
Output variation: less than 0.2% of full scale for supply voltage variation of plus or
minus 10%.
Combined non-linearity, repeatability, hysteresis effects: not to exceed plus or
minus 0.5% of full scale output.
Maximum current to 100 or 1000 ohm RTD sensor: not to exceed 25 mA.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.8
.9
.10
.11
2.4
EMCS: FIELD CONTROL DEVICES
Section 25 30 02
Page 4
2016-01-13
Integral zero and span adjustments.
Temperature effects: not to exceed plus or minus 1.0% of full scale/ 50 °C.
Long term output drift: not to exceed 0.25% of full scale/ 6 months.
Transmitter ranges: select narrowest range to suit application from following:
.1
Minus 50 °C to plus 50 °C, plus or minus 0.5 °C.
.2
0 to 100 °C, plus or minus 0.5 °C.
.3
0 to 50 °C, plus or minus 0.25 °C.
.4
0 to 25 °C, plus or minus 0.1 °C.
.5
10 to 35 °C, plus or minus 0.25 °C.
PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS
.1
Requirements:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
2.5
Combined sensor and transmitter measuring pressure.
.1
Internal materials: suitable for continuous contact with industrial standard
instrument air, compressed air, water, steam, as applicable.
Output signal: 4 - 20 mA into 500 ohm maximum load.
Output variations: less than 0.2% full scale for supply voltage variations of plus or
minus 10%.
Combined non-linearity, repeatability, and hysteresis effects: not to exceed plus or
minus 0.5% of full scale output over entire range.
Temperature effects: not to exceed plus or minus 1.5% full scale/ 50 °C.
Over-pressure input protection to at least twice rated input pressure.
Output short circuit and open circuit protection.
Accuracy: plus or minus 1% of Full Scale.
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS
.1
Requirements:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
Internal materials: suitable for continuous contact with industrial standard
instrument air, compressed air, water, steam, as applicable.
Output signal: 4 - 20 mA into 500 ohm maximum load.
Output variations: less than 0.2% full scale for supply voltage variations of plus or
minus 10%.
Combined non-linearity, repeatability, and hysteresis effects: not to exceed plus or
minus 0.5% of full scale output over entire range.
Integral zero and span adjustment.
Temperature effects: not to exceed plus or minus 1.5% full scale/50 °C.
Over-pressure input protection to at least twice rated input pressure.
Output short circuit and open circuit protection.
Unit to have 12.5 mm N.P.T. conduit connection. Enclosure to be integral part of
unit.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
2.6
EMCS: FIELD CONTROL DEVICES
Section 25 30 02
Page 5
2016-01-13
STATIC PRESSURE SENSORS
.1
Requirements:
.1
.2
2.7
Multipoint element with self-averaging manifold.
.1
Maximum pressure loss: 160 Pa at 10 m/s. (Air stream manifold).
Accuracy: plus or minus 1% of actual duct static pressure.
STATIC PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS
.1
Requirements:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
2.8
Output signal: 4 - 20 mA linear into 500 ohm maximum load.
Calibrated span: not to exceed 150% of duct static pressure at maximum flow.
Accuracy: 0.4% of span.
Repeatability: within 0.5% of output.
Linearity: within 1.5% of span.
Deadband or hysteresis: 0.1% of span.
External exposed zero and span adjustment.
Unit to have 12.5 mm N.P.T. conduit connection. Enclosure to be integral part of
unit
VELOCITY PRESSURE SENSORS
.1
Requirements:
.1
.2
.3
2.9
Multipoint static and total pressure sensing element with self-averaging manifold
with integral air equalizer and straightener section.
Maximum pressure loss: 37 Pa at 1000 m/s.
Accuracy: plus or minus 1% of actual duct velocity.
VELOCITY PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS
.1
Requirements:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
Output signal: 4 - 20 mA linear into 500 ohm maximum load.
Calibrated span: not to exceed 125% of duct velocity pressure at maximum flow.
Accuracy: 0.4% of span.
Repeatability: within 0.1% of output.
Linearity: within 0.5% of span.
Deadband or hysteresis: 0.1% of span.
External exposed zero and span adjustment.
Unit to have 12.5 mm N.P.T. conduit connection. Enclosure to be integral part of
unit.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
2.10
EMCS: FIELD CONTROL DEVICES
Section 25 30 02
Page 6
2016-01-13
PRESSURE AND DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES
.1
Requirements:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
2.11
Internal materials: suitable for continuous contact with compressed air, water,
steam, etc., as applicable.
Adjustable setpoint and differential.
Switch: snap action type, rated 24 V DC.
Switch assembly: to operate automatically and reset automatically when
conditions return to normal. Over-pressure input protection to at least twice rated
input pressure.
Accuracy: within 2% repetitive switching.
Provide switches with isolation valve and snubber, where code allows, between
sensor and pressure source.
Switches on steam and high temperature hot water service: provide pigtail syphon.
TEMPERATURE SWITCHES
.1
Requirements:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
2.12
Operate automatically. Reset automatically, except as follows:
.1
Low temperature detection: manual reset.
.2
High temperature detection: manual reset.
Adjustable setpoint and differential.
Accuracy: plus or minus 1 °C.
Snap action rating: 24V DC as required. Switch to be DPST for hardwire and
EMCS connections.
Type as follows:
.1
Duct, general purpose: insertion length = 460 mm.
.2
Thermowell: stainless steel, with compression fitting for NPS 3/4
thermowell. Immersion length: 100 mm.
.3
Low temperature detection: continuous element with 6000 mm insertion
length, duct mounting, to detect coldest temperature in any 30 mm length.
.4
Strap-on: with helical screw stainless steel clamp.
SOLENOID CONTROL AIR VALVES
.1
Coil: 24V DC.
.2
Capacity: to pass a minimum of 0.15 l/s air at 140 kPa differential.
2.13
AIR PRESSURE GAUGES
.1
Diameter: 38 mm minimum.
.2
Range: zero to two times operating pressure of measured pressure media or nearest
standard range.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
2.14
EMCS: FIELD CONTROL DEVICES
Section 25 30 02
Page 7
2016-01-13
ELECTROMECHANICAL RELAYS
.1
Requirements:
.1
.2
.3
.4
2.15
Double voltage, DPDT, plug-in type with termination base.
Coils: rated for 120V AC or 24V DC. Other voltage: provide transformer.
Contacts: rated at 5 amps at 120 V AC.
Relay to have visual status indication
SOLID STATE RELAYS
.1
General:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.2
Input:
.1
.2
.3
.3
Control voltage, 3 to 32 VDC.
Drop out voltage, 1.2 VDC.
Maximum input current to match AO (Analog Output) board.
Output.
.1
2.16
Relays to be socket or rail mounted.
Relays to have LED Indicator.
Input and output Barrier Strips to accept 14 to 28 AWG wire.
Operating temperature range to be -20°C to 70°C.
Relays to be CSA Certified.
Input/output Isolation Voltage to be 4000 VAC at 25°C for 1 second maximum
duration.
Operational frequency range, 45 to 65 HZ.
AC or DC Output Model to suit application.
CURRENT TRANSDUCERS
.1
Requirements:
.2
Purpose: combined sensor/transducer, to measure line current and produce proportional
signal in one of following ranges:
.1
.2
.3
.4
4-20 mA DC.
0-1 volt DC.
0-10 volts DC.
0-20 volts DC.
.3
Frequency insensitive from 10 - 80 hz.
.4
Accuracy to 0.5% full scale.
.5
Zero and span adjustments. Field adjustable range to suit motor applications.
.6
Adjustable mounting bracket to allow for secure/safe mounting inside MCC.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
2.17
EMCS: FIELD CONTROL DEVICES
Section 25 30 02
Page 8
2016-01-13
CURRENT SENSING RELAYS
.1
Requirements:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
2.18
Suitable to detect belt loss or motor failure.
Trip point adjustment, output status LED.
Split core for easy mounting.
Induced sensor power.
Relay contacts: capable of handling 0.5 amps at 30 VAC / DC. Output to be NO
solid state.
Suitable for single or 3 phase monitoring. For 3-Phase applications: provide for
discrimination between phases.
Adjustable latch level.
CONTROL DAMPERS
.1
2.19
Refer to section 23 33 15.
ELECTRONIC CONTROL DAMPER ACTUATORS
.1
Requirements:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
2.20
Direct mount proportional type as indicated.
Spring return for "fail-safe" in Normally Open or Normally Closed position as
indicated.
Operator: size to control dampers against maximum pressure and dynamic
closing/opening pressure, whichever is greater.
Power requirements: 5 VA maximum at 24 V AC.
Operating range: 0 - 10 V DC or 4 - 20 mA DC.
For VAV box applications floating control type actuators may be used.
Damper actuator to drive damper from full open to full closed in less than 120
seconds.
CONTROL VALVES
.1
Body: characterized ball.
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
Flow characteristic as indicated on control valve schedule: equal percentage, quick
opening.
Flow factor (KV) as indicated on control valve schedule: CV in imperial units.
Normally open for heating and Normally closed for cooling.
Two and Three port, as indicated.
Leakage rate ANSI class IV, 0.01% of full open valve capacity.
Packing easily replaceable.
Stem, stainless steel.
Plug and seat, stainless steel.
Disc, replaceable, material to suit application.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.10
.11
.2
Section 25 30 02
Page 9
2016-01-13
NPS 2 and under:
.1
Screwed National Pipe Thread (NPT) tapered female connections.
.2
Valves to ANSI Class 250, valves to bear ANSI mark.
.3
Rangeability 50:1 minimum.
NPS 2½ and larger:
.1
Flanged connections.
.2
Valves to ANSI Class 150 or 250 as indicated, valves to bear ANSI mark.
.3
Rangeability 100:1 minimum.
Butterfly Valves NPS 2 and larger:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
.13
2.21
EMCS: FIELD CONTROL DEVICES
Body: for chilled water ANSI Class 150 cast iron lugged body installed in
locations as indicated. For steam and heating water ANSI Class 150 carbon steel
lugged body.
End connections to suit flanges that are ANSI Class 150.
Extended stem neck to provide adequate clearance for flanges and insulation.
Pressure limit: bubble tight sealing to 170 kilopascals.
Disc/vane: 316 stainless steel, aluminum bronze to ASTM B 148.
Seat: for service on chilled water PTFE (polytetrafluoroethylene).
Stem: 316 stainless steel.
Flow factor (KV) as indicated on control valve schedule: CV in imperial units.
Flow characteristic linear.
Maximum flow requirement as indicated on control valve schedule.
Maximum pressure drop as indicated on control valve schedule: pressure drop not
to exceed one half of inlet pressure.
Normally open for heating and Normally closed for cooling.
Valves are to be provided complete with mounting plate for installation of
actuators.
ELECTRONIC / ELECTRIC VALVE ACTUATORS
.1
Requirements:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
Construction: steel, cast iron, aluminum.
Control signal: 0-10V DC or 4-20 mA DC.
Positioning time: to suit application. 90 sec maximum.
Fail to normal position as indicated.
Scale or dial indication of actual control valve position.
Size actuator to meet requirements and performance of control valve
specifications.
For interior and perimeter terminal heating and cooling applications floating
control actuators are acceptable.
Minimum shut-off pressure: refer to control valve schedule.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
2.22
EMCS: FIELD CONTROL DEVICES
Section 25 30 02
Page 10
2016-01-13
PANELS
.1
wall mounted enamelled steel cabinets with hinged and key-locked front door.
.2
Multiple panels as required to handle requirements with additional space to accommodate
25% additional capacity as required by Departmental Representative without adding
additional cabinets.
.3
Panels to be lockable with same key.
2.23
WIRING
.1
In accordance with Division 26.
.2
All wiring to run in conduit.
.3
Wiring must be continuous without joints.
.4
Sizes:
.1
.2
Field wiring to digital device: 20AWG stranded twisted pair.
Analog input and output: shielded #20 minimum stranded twisted pair.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install equipment, components so that manufacturer's and CSA labels are visible and
legible after commissioning is complete.
.2
Install field control devices in accordance with manufacturers recommended methods,
procedures and instructions.
.3
Temperature transmitters, current-to-pneumatic transducers, solenoid air valves,
controllers, relays: install in NEMA I enclosure or as required for specific applications.
Provide for electrolytic isolation in cases when dissimilar metals make contact.
.4
Support field-mounted panels, transmitters and sensors on pipe stands or channel brackets.
.5
Fire stopping: provide space for fire stopping in accordance with Section 07 84 00.
Maintain fire rating integrity.
.6
Electrical:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Complete installation in accordance with Division 21.
Modify existing starters to provide for EMCS as indicated in I/O Summaries and
as indicated.
Refer to electrical control schematics included as part of control design schematics
on drawings. Trace existing control wiring installation and provide updated wiring
schematics including additions, deletions to control circuits for review by
Departmental Representative before beginning Work.
Terminate wires with screw terminal type connectors suitable for wire size, and
number of terminations.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.5
.7
Install communication wiring in conduit.
.1
Provide complete conduit system to link Building Controllers, field panels
and OWS(s).
.2
Conduit sizes to suit wiring requirements and to allow for future
expansion capabilities specified for systems.
.3
Maximum conduit fill not to exceed 40%.
.4
Design drawings do not show conduit layout.
.5
Do not run exposed conduits in normally occupied spaces unless
otherwise indicated or unless impossible to do otherwise. Departmental
Representative to review before starting Work. Wiring in mechanical
rooms, wiring in service rooms and exposed wiring must be in conduit.
Pipe Taps.
Wells and Control Valves.
Air flow stations, dampers, and other devices.
VAV Terminal Units: supply, install and adjust as required.
.1
.2
.3
3.2
Section 25 30 02
Page 11
2016-01-13
Mechanical: supply and install in accordance with Section 23 09 43.
.1
.2
.3
.8
EMCS: FIELD CONTROL DEVICES
Air probe, actuator and associated VAV controls.
Tubing from air probe to dp sensor as well as installation and adjustment of air
flow sensors and actuators.
Co-ordinate air flow adjustments with balancing trade.
TEMPERATURE SENSORS
.1
Stabilize to ensure minimum field adjustments or calibrations.
.2
Readily accessible and adaptable to each type of application to allow for quick easy
replacement and servicing without special tools or skills.
.3
Outdoor installation:
.1
.2
.4
Duct installations:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.5
Protect from solar radiation and wind effects by non-corroding shields.
Install in NEMA 4 enclosures.
Do not mount in dead air space.
Locate within sensor vibration and velocity limits.
Securely mount extended surface sensor used to sense average temperature.
Thermally isolate elements from brackets and supports to respond to air
temperature only.
Support sensor element separately from coils, filter racks.
Averaging duct type temperature sensors.
.1
Install averaging element horizontally across the ductwork starting 300 mm from
top of ductwork. Each additional horizontal run to be no more than 300 mm from
one above it. Continue until complete cross sectional area of ductwork is covered.
Use multiple sensors where single sensor does not meet required coverage.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
.3
.4
.6
Section 25 30 02
Page 12
2016-01-13
Wire multiple sensors in series for low temperature protection applications.
Wire multiple sensors separately for temperature measurement.
Use software averaging algorithm to derive overall average for control purposes.
Thermowells: install for piping installations.
.1
.2
.3
3.3
EMCS: FIELD CONTROL DEVICES
Locate well in elbow where pipe diameter is less than well insertion length.
Thermowell to restrict flow by less than 30%.
Use thermal conducting paste inside wells.
PANELS
.1
Arrange for conduit and tubing entry from top, bottom or either side.
.2
Wiring and tubing within panels: locate in trays or individually clipped to back of panel.
.3
Identify wiring and conduit clearly.
3.4
MAGNEHELIC PRESSURE INDICATORS
.1
Install adjacent to fan system static pressure sensor and duct system velocity pressure
sensor as reviewed by Departmental Representative.
.2
Locations: as specified.
3.5
PRESSURE AND DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES AND SENSORS
.1
Install isolation valve and snubber on sensors between sensor and pressure source where
code allows.
.1
3.6
Protect sensing elements on steam and high temperature hot water service with
pigtail syphon between valve and sensor.
I/P TRANSDUCERS
.1
3.7
Install air pressure gauge on outlet.
AIR PRESSURE GAUGES
.1
Install pressure gauges on pneumatic devices, I/P, pilot positioners, motor operators,
switches, relays, valves, damper operators, valve actuators.
.2
Install pressure gauge on output of auxiliary cabinet pneumatic devices.
3.8
IDENTIFICATION
.1
3.9
Identify field devices in accordance with Section 25 05 54.
AIR FLOW MEASURING STATIONS
.1
3.10
Protect air flow measuring assembly until cleaning of ducts is completed.
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
.1
Calibrate and test field devices for accuracy and performance in accordance with Section
25 01 11.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
EMCS: SITE REQUIREMENTS, APPLICATIONS
AND SYSTEMS SEQUENCES OF OPERATION
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes:
.1
1.2
Section 25 90 01
Page 1
2016-01-13
At minimum detailed narrative description of Sequence of Operation of each
system including ramping periods and reset schedules.
.1
Control Description Logic (CDL) for each system.
.2
Input/Output Point Summary Tables for each system.
.3
System Diagrams consisting of the following; EMCS System architectural
diagram, Control Design Schematic for each system (as viewed on OWS),
System flow diagram for each system with electrical ladder diagram for
MCC starter interface.
REFERENCES
.1
Public Works and Government Services Canada (PWGSC) / Real Property Branch /
Architectural and Engineering Services.
.1
1.3
MD13800-September 2000, Energy Management and Control Systems (EMCS)
Design Manual. English: ftp://ftp.pwgsc.gc.ca/rps/docentre/mechanical/
me214-e.pdf
SEQUENCING
.1
Present sequencing of operations for systems, in accordance with MD13800 - Energy
Management and Control Systems (EMCS) Design Manual.
.2
Sequencing of operations for system as follows:
.1
Refer to mechanical drawings
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
COMMON WORK RESULTS - FOR ELECTRICAL
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Definitions:
.1
.2
Electrical and electronic terms: unless otherwise specified or indicated, terms
used in these specifications, and on drawings, are those defined by IEEE SP1122.
Reference Standards:
.1
.2
1.2
Section 26 05 00
Page 1
2016-01-13
CSA Group
.1
CSA C22.1-15, Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1 (23rd Edition), Safety
Standard for Electrical Installations.
.2
CAN3-C235-83(R2015), Preferred Voltage Levels for AC Systems, 0 to
50,000 V.
Institute of Electrical and Electronics (IEEE)/National Electrical Safety Code
Product Line (NESC)
.1
IEEE SP1122-2000, The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE Standards
Terms, 7th Edition.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product Data:
.1
.3
Shop drawings:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.4
Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets and
include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and
limitations.
Submit wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed
location, layout and arrangement, control panels, accessories, piping, ductwork,
and other items that must be shown to ensure co-ordinated installation.
Identify on wiring diagrams circuit terminals and indicate internal wiring for
each item of equipment and interconnection between each item of equipment.
Indicate of drawings clearances for operation, maintenance, and replacement of
operating equipment devices.
Submit drawings and product data to inspection authorities.
If changes are required, notify Departmental Representative of these changes
before they are made.
Certificates:
.1
.2
.3
Provide CSA certified equipment and material.
Where CSA certified equipment and material is not available, submit such
equipment and material to authority having jurisdiction inspection authorities for
special approval before delivery to site.
Submit test results of installed electrical systems and instrumentation.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.4
.5
.6
.5
1.3
COMMON WORK RESULTS - FOR ELECTRICAL
Section 26 05 00
Page 2
2016-01-13
Permits and fees: in accordance with General Conditions of contract.
Submit, upon completion of Work, load balance report as described in PART 3 LOAD BALANCE.
Submit certificate of acceptance from authority having jurisdiction upon
completion of Work to Departmental Representative.
Manufacturer's Field Reports: submit to Departmental Representative manufacturer's
written report, within 3 days of review, verifying compliance of Work and electrical
system and instrumentation testing, as described in PART 3 - FIELD QUALITY
CONTROL.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 00.
.2
Operation and Maintenance Data: submit operation and maintenance data for
incorporation into manual.
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
1.4
Provide for each system and principal item of equipment as specified in technical
sections for use by operation and maintenance personnel.
Operating instructions to include following:
.1
Wiring diagrams, control diagrams, and control sequence for each
principal system and item of equipment.
.2
Start up, proper adjustment, operating, lubrication, and shutdown
procedures.
.3
Safety precautions.
.4
Procedures to be followed in event of equipment failure.
.5
Other items of instruction as recommended by manufacturer of each
system or item of equipment.
Print or engrave operating instructions and frame under glass or in approved
laminated plastic.
Post instructions where directed.
For operating instructions exposed to weather, provide weather-resistant
materials or weatherproof enclosures.
Ensure operating instructions will not fade when exposed to sunlight and are
secured to prevent easy removal or peeling.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with
manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory
packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address.
.3
Storage and Handling Requirements:
.1
.2
Store materials indoors and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations
in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.
Store and protect from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.3
COMMON WORK RESULTS - FOR ELECTRICAL
Section 26 05 00
Page 3
2016-01-13
Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
.4
Develop Construction Waste Management Plan and Waste Reduction Workplan related
to Work of this Section and in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.5
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets,
crates, padding and packaging materials as specified in Construction Waste Management
Plan and Waste Reduction Workplan in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
.1
Operating voltages: to CAN3-C235.
.2
Motors, electric heating, control and distribution devices and equipment to operate
satisfactorily at 60 Hz within normal operating limits established by above standard.
.1
Equipment to operate in extreme operating conditions established in above
standard without damage to equipment.
.3
Language operating requirements: provide identification nameplates and labels for
control items in English and French.
.4
Use one nameplate or label for each language.
2.2
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
.1
Provide material and equipment in accordance with Section 01 61 00.
.2
Material and equipment to be CSA certified. Where CSA certified material and
equipment are not available, obtain special approval from authority having jurisdiction
before delivery to site and submit such approval as described in PART 1 - ACTION
AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS.
.3
Factory assemble control panels and component assemblies.
2.3
ELECTRIC MOTORS, EQUIPMENT AND CONTROLS
.1
Verify installation and co-ordination responsibilities related to motors, equipment and
controls, as indicated.
.2
Control wiring and conduit: in accordance with 26 05 34 except for conduit, wiring and
connections below 50 V which are related to control systems specified in mechanical
sections and as indicated on mechanical drawings.
2.4
WARNING SIGNS
.1
Warning Signs: in accordance with requirements of authority having jurisdiction,
inspection authorities and Departmental Representative.
.2
Decal signs, minimum size 175 x 250 mm.
2.5
WIRING TERMINATIONS
.1
Ensure lugs, terminals, screws used for termination of wiring are suitable for either
copper or aluminum conductors.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
2.6
COMMON WORK RESULTS - FOR ELECTRICAL
Section 26 05 00
Page 4
2016-01-13
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
.1
Identify electrical equipment with nameplates and labels as follows:
.1
.2
.3
Nameplates: lamicoid, matt white finish face, black core, lettering accurately
aligned and engraved into core mechanically attached with self tapping screws.
Nameplates for Critical Power Panels: same as above, except with blue lamicoid
Sizes as follows:
NAMEPLATE SIZES
Size 1
10 x 50 mm
1 line
3 mm high letters
Size 2
12 x 70 mm
1 line
5 mm high letters
Size 3
12 x 70 mm
2 lines
3 mm high letters
Size 4
20 x 90 mm
1 line
8 mm high letters
Size 5
20 x 90 mm
2 lines
5 mm high letters
Size 6
25 x 100 mm
1 line
12 mm high letters
Size 7
25 x 100 mm
2 lines
6 mm high letters
.2
Labels: embossed plastic labels with 6 mm high letters unless specified otherwise.
.3
Wording on nameplates and labels to be approved by Departmental Representative prior
to manufacture.
.4
Allow for minimum of twenty-five (25) letters per nameplate and label.
.5
Nameplates for terminal cabinets and junction boxes to indicate system and/or voltage
characteristics.
.6
Identify equipment with Size 3 labels engraved "ASSET INVENTORY NO. [______]"
as directed by Departmental Representative.
.7
Disconnects, starters and contactors: indicate equipment being controlled and voltage.
.8
Terminal cabinets and pull boxes: indicate system and voltage.
.9
Transformers: indicate capacity, primary and secondary voltages.
2.7
WIRING IDENTIFICATION
.1
Identify wiring with permanent indelible identifying markings, coloured plastic tapes, on
both ends of phase conductors of feeders and branch circuit wiring.
.2
Maintain phase sequence and colour coding throughout.
.3
Colour coding: to CSA C22.1.
.4
Use colour coded wires in communication cables, matched throughout system.
2.8
CONDUIT AND CABLE IDENTIFICATION
.1
Colour code conduits, boxes and metallic sheathed cables.
.2
Code with plastic tape or paint at points where conduit or cable enters wall, ceiling, or
floor, and at 15 m intervals.
.3
Colours: 25 mm wide prime colour and 20 mm wide auxiliary colour.
up to 250 V
Prime
Yellow
Auxiliary
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
COMMON WORK RESULTS - FOR ELECTRICAL
up to 600 V
Yellow
up to 5 kV
Yellow
Telephone
Green
Other
Green
Communication
Systems
Fire Alarm
Red
Emergency
Red
Voice
Other
Red
Security
Systems
2.9
Section 26 05 00
Page 5
2016-01-13
Green
Blue
Blue
Blue
Yellow
FINISHES
.1
Shop finish metal enclosure surfaces by application of rust resistant primer inside and
outside, and at least two coats of finish enamel.
.1
.2
2.10
Paint outdoor electrical equipment "equipment green" finish.
Paint indoor switchgear and distribution enclosures light gray.
SERVICE INTERRUPTIONS
.1
Coordinate all service interruptions in advance with the Departmental Representative, in
accordance with 01 14 00 Work Restrictions and provide:
.1
.2
.3
List of all scheduled interruptions
Areas and equipment affected by each interruption
Duration of each interruption
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Verification of Conditions: verify that conditions of substrate previously installed under
other Sections or Contracts are acceptable for installation in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions.
.1
.2
.3
3.2
Visually inspect substrate in presence of Departmental Representative.
Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately
upon discovery.
Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied
and after receipt of written approval to proceed from Departmental
Representative.
INSTALLATION
.1
Do complete installation in accordance with CSA C22.1 except where specified
otherwise.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
3.3
COMMON WORK RESULTS - FOR ELECTRICAL
Section 26 05 00
Page 6
2016-01-13
NAMEPLATES AND LABELS
.1
3.4
Ensure manufacturer's nameplates, CSA labels and identification nameplates are visible
and legible after equipment is installed.
CONDUIT AND CABLE INSTALLATION
.1
Install conduit and sleeves prior to pouring of concrete.
.1
.2
3.5
Sleeves through concrete: schedule 40 steel pipe, sized for free passage of
conduit, and protruding 50 mm.
Install cables, conduits and fittings embedded or plastered over, close to building
structure so furring can be kept to minimum.
LOCATION OF OUTLETS
.1
Locate outlets in accordance with Section 26 05 32.
.2
Do not install outlets back-to-back in wall; allow minimum 150 mm horizontal clearance
between boxes.
.3
Change location of outlets at no extra cost or credit, providing distance does not exceed
3000 mm, and information is given before installation.
.4
Locate light switches on latch side of doors.
.1
3.6
Locate disconnect devices in mechanical and elevator machine rooms on latch
side of floor.
MOUNTING HEIGHTS
.1
Mounting height of equipment is from finished floor to centreline of equipment unless
specified or indicated otherwise.
.2
If mounting height of equipment is not specified or indicated, verify before proceeding
with installation.
.3
Install electrical equipment at following heights unless indicated otherwise.
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
Local switches: 1200 mm.
Wall receptacles:
.1
General: 400 mm.
.2
Above top of continuous baseboard heater: 200 mm.
.3
Above top of counters or counter splash backs: 175 mm.
.4
In mechanical rooms: 1200 mm.
.5
TV height: 1600mm.
Panelboards: as required by Code or as indicated.
Telephone and interphone outlets: 400 mm.
Wall mounted telephone and interphone outlets: 1200 mm.
Fire alarm stations: 1200 mm.
Fire alarm horn/strobe: 2300 mm.
Television outlets: 400 mm.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.9
.10
.11
3.7
COMMON WORK RESULTS - FOR ELECTRICAL
Section 26 05 00
Page 7
2016-01-13
Wall mounted speakers: 2100 mm.
Clocks: 2100 mm.
Door bell pushbuttons: 1200 mm.
CO-ORDINATION OF PROTECTIVE DEVICES
.1
3.8
Ensure circuit protective devices such as overcurrent trips, relays and fuses are installed
to required values and settings.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Load Balance:
.1
.2
.3
.2
Measure phase current to panelboards with normal loads (lighting) operating at
time of acceptance; adjust branch circuit connections as required to obtain best
balance of current between phases and record changes.
Measure phase voltages at loads and adjust transformer taps to within 2% of
rated voltage of equipment.
Provide upon completion of work, load balance report as directed in PART 1 ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS, phase and neutral currents
on panelboards, dry-core transformers and motor control centres, operating under
normal load, as well as hour and date on which each load was measured, and
voltage at time of test.
Conduct following tests in accordance with Section 01 45 00.
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
Circuits originating from branch distribution panels.
Lighting and its control.
Motors, heaters and associated control equipment including sequenced operation
of systems where applicable.
Systems: fire alarm, communications.
Insulation resistance testing:
.1
Megger circuits, feeders and equipment up to 350 V with a 500 V
instrument.
.2
Megger 350-600 V circuits, feeders and equipment with a 1000 V
instrument.
.3
Check resistance to ground before energizing.
.3
Carry out tests in presence of Departmental Representative.
.4
Provide instruments, meters, equipment and personnel required to conduct tests during
and at conclusion of project.
.5
Manufacturer's Field Services:
.1
Obtain written report from manufacturer verifying compliance of Work, in
handling, installing, applying, protecting and cleaning of product and submit
Manufacturer's Field Reports as described in PART 1 - ACTION AND
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
3.9
COMMON WORK RESULTS - FOR ELECTRICAL
Section 26 05 00
Page 8
2016-01-13
Provide manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations
and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
SYSTEM STARTUP
.1
Instruct Departmental Representative and operating personnel in operation, care and
maintenance of systems, system equipment and components.
.2
Arrange and pay for services of manufacturer's factory service engineer to supervise startup of installation, check, adjust, balance and calibrate components and instruct operating
personnel.
.3
Provide these services for such period, and for as many visits as necessary to put
equipment in operation, and ensure that operating personnel are conversant with aspects
of its care and operation.
3.10
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.1
Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
.2
Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment
in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.3
Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with
Section 01 74 20.
.1
Remove recycling containers and bins from site and dispose of materials at
appropriate facility.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
WIRE AND BOX CONNECTORS (0-1000V)
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
.1
1.2
Section 26 05 20
Page 1
2016-01-13
Section 26 05 00.
REFERENCES
.1
CSA International
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.2
1.3
CSA C22.2 No.18.1-13, Metallic outlet boxes (Tri-national standard, with UL
514A and ANCE NMX- J-023/1).
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.18.2-06(R2011), Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes.
CSA C22.2 No.18.3-12, Conduit, tubing, and cable fittings (Tri-national standard,
with ANCE NMX-J-017 and UL 514B).
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.18.4-15, Hardware for the Support of Conduit, Tubing, and
Cable (Bi-National standard, with UL 2239).
CSA C22.2 No. 18.5-13, Positioning devices (Bi-national standard, with UL
1565).
CSA C22.2 NO. 65-13, Wire connectors (Tri- national standard, with UL
486A-486B and NMX-J-543-ANCE).
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product Data:
.1
1.4
Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for
wire and box connectors and include product characteristics, performance criteria,
physical size, finish and limitations.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 00.
.2
Operation and Maintenance Data: submit operation and maintenance data for wire and box
connectors for incorporation into manual.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with
manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory
packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address.
.3
Storage and Handling Requirements:
.1
Store materials indoors and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations
in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
.3
WIRE AND BOX CONNECTORS (0-1000V)
Section 26 05 20
Page 2
2016-01-13
Store and protect wire and box connectors from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.
Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
.4
Develop Construction Waste Management Plan and Waste Reduction Workplan related to
Work of this Section and in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.5
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets,
crates, padding and packaging materials as specified in Construction Waste Management
Plan and Waste Reduction Workplan in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Pressure type wire connectors to: CSA C22.2 No.65, with current carrying parts of copper
sized to fit copper conductors as required.
.2
Fixture type splicing connectors to: CSA C22.2 No.65, with current carrying parts of
copper sized to fit copper conductors 10 AWG or less.
.3
Bushing stud connectors: to EEMAC 1Y-2 or NEMA to consist of:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.4
Connector body and stud clamp for stranded, round copper conductors.
Clamp for stranded, round copper conductors.
Stud clamp bolts.
Bolts for copper conductors.
Sized for conductors as indicated.
Clamps or connectors for armoured cable, TECK cable, aluminum sheathed cable, flexible
conduit, as required to: CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.18.4.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Verification of Conditions: verify that conditions of substrate previously installed under
other Sections or Contracts are acceptable for wire and box connectors installation in
accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
.1
.2
.3
3.2
Visually inspect substrate in presence of Departmental Representative.
Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately
upon discovery.
Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied
and after receipt of written approval to proceed from Departmental Representative.
INSTALLATION
.1
Remove insulation carefully from ends of conductors and cables and:
.1
Apply coat of zinc joint compound on aluminum conductors prior to installation of
connectors.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
.3
.4
3.3
WIRE AND BOX CONNECTORS (0-1000V)
Section 26 05 20
Page 3
2016-01-13
Install mechanical pressure type connectors and tighten screws with appropriate
compression tool recommended by manufacturer. Installation shall meet
secureness tests in accordance with CSA C22.2 No.65.
Install fixture type connectors and tighten to CSA C22.2 No.65. Replace insulating
cap.
Install bushing stud connectors in accordance with NEMA.
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.1
Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
.2
Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment
in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.3
Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with
Section 01 74 20.
.1
Remove recycling containers and bins from site and dispose of materials at
appropriate facility.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
WIRES AND CABLES (0-1000V)
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
PRODUCT DATA
.1
1.2
Section 26 05 21
Page 1
2016-01-13
Provide product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets,
crates, paddling, and packaging materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
BUILDING WIRES
.1
Conductors: stranded for 10 AWG and larger. Minimum size: 12 AWG.
.2
Copper conductors: size as indicated, with 600 V insulation of cross-linked thermosetting
polyethylene material rated RW90 XLPE.
.3
Conductors:
.1
.2
.4
Grounding conductor: copper.
Circuit conductors: copper, size as indicated.
Insulation:
.1
.2
Cross-linked polyethylene XLPE.
Rating: , 600 V.
.5
Inner jacket: polyvinyl chloride material.
.6
Overall covering: thermoplastic polyvinyl chloride, compliant to applicable Building Code
classification for this project.
2.2
ARMOURED CABLES
.1
Conductors: insulated, copper, size as indicated.
.2
Type: AC90 - lead sheath over cable assembly and under armour.
.3
Armour: interlocking type fabricated from aluminum strip.
.4
Type: PVC jacket over thermoplastic armour and compliant to applicable Building Code
classification for this project.
.5
Connectors: anti short connectors.
2.3
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE CABLES
.1
Variable Frequency (Speed) Drive Cables: Provide variable frequency drive cables
meeting the requirements of CSA C22.2 No. 123 and CSA C22.2 No. 174 from all VFD’s
to each designated motor load, comprised as follows:
.1
Sectored ground design consisting of 3 bare bonding conductors
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
.3
.4
WIRES AND CABLES (0-1000V)
Section 26 05 21
Page 2
2016-01-13
1000 volt rated cross linked polyethylene insulated phase conductors
FT4 rated PVC outer jacket
Sized to suit project requirements
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Perform tests in accordance with Section 26 05 00.
.2
Perform tests using method appropriate to site conditions and to approval of Departmental
Representative and local authority having jurisdiction over installation.
.3
Perform tests before energizing electrical system.
3.2
GENERAL CABLE INSTALLATION
.1
Terminate cables in accordance with Section 26 05 20.
.2
Cable Colour Coding: to Section 26 05 00.
.3
Conductor length for parallel feeders to be identical.
.4
Lace or clip groups of feeder cables at distribution centres, pull boxes, and termination
points.
.5
Wiring in walls: typically drop or loop vertically from above to better facilitate future
renovations. Generally wiring from below and horizontal wiring in walls to be avoided
unless indicated.
.6
Branch circuit wiring for surge suppression receptacles and permanently wired computer
and electronic equipment to be 2-wire circuits only, i.e. common neutrals not permitted.
.7
Provide numbered wire collars for control wiring. Numbers to correspond to control shop
drawing legend. Obtain wiring diagram for control wiring.
3.3
INSTALLATION OF BUILDING WIRES
.1
Install wiring as follows:
.1
3.4
In conduit systems in accordance with Section 26 05 34.
INSTALLATION OF TECK90 CABLE (0 -1000 V)
.1
Group cables wherever possible on channels.
.2
Install cable securely supported by hangers.
3.5
INSTALLATION OF ARMOURED CABLES
.1
3.6
Group cables wherever possible on channels.
INSTALLATION OF VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
.1
Install and connect to all variable frequency drives (VFD’s) supplied with mechanical
equipment, and in accordance with VFD cable manufacturers installation requirements.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
WIRES AND CABLES (0-1000V)
Section 26 05 21
Page 3
2016-01-13
Provide input power supply to VFD’s; provide VFD cable from VFD to designated motor.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
Section 26 05 29
Page 1
2016-01-13
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.2
Remove from site and dispose of all packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities.
.3
Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard,
packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with Waste
Management Plan.
.4
Divert unused metal materials from landfill to metal recycling facility as approved by
Departmental Representative.
.5
Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
SUPPORT CHANNELS
.1
U shape, size 41 x 41 mm, 2.5 mm thick, surface mounted or suspended.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Secure equipment to hollow and solid masonry, tile and plaster surfaces with lead anchors
or nylon shields.
.2
Secure equipment to poured concrete with expandable inserts.
.3
Secure equipment to hollow masonry walls or suspended ceilings with toggle bolts.
.4
Secure surface mounted equipment with twist clip fasteners to inverted T bar ceilings.
Ensure that T bars are adequately supported to carry weight of equipment specified before
installation.
.5
Support equipment, conduit or cables using clips, spring loaded bolts, cable clamps
designed as accessories to basic channel members.
.6
Fasten exposed conduit or cables to building construction or support system using straps.
.1
.2
.3
.7
One-hole steel straps to secure surface conduits and cables 50 mm and smaller.
Two-hole steel straps for conduits and cables larger than 50 mm.
Beam clamps to secure conduit to exposed steel work.
Suspended support systems.
.1
.2
Support individual cable or conduit runs with 6 mm dia threaded rods and spring
clips.
Support 2 or more cables or conduits on channels supported by 6 mm dia threaded
rod hangers where direct fastening to building construction is impractical.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Section 26 05 29
Page 2
2016-01-13
.8
For surface mounting of two or more conduits use channels at 3 m on centre spacing.
.9
Provide metal brackets, frames, hangers, clamps and related types of support structures
where indicated or as required to support conduit and cable runs.
.10
Ensure adequate support for raceways and cables dropped vertically to equipment where
there is no wall support.
.11
Do not use wire lashing or perforated strap to support or secure raceways or cables.
.12
Do not use supports or equipment installed for other trades for conduit or cable support
except with permission of other trade and approval of Departmental Representative.
.13
Install fastenings and supports as required for each type of equipment cables and conduits,
and in accordance with manufacturer's installation recommendations.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
SPLITTERS, JUNCTION, PULL BOXES
AND CABINETS
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International)
.1
1.2
Section 26 05 31
Page 1
2016-01-13
CSA C22.1-15, Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, 23rd Edition.
SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product Data:
.1
.3
Provide shop drawings: in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.1
1.3
Provide manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet and
include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and
limitations.
Provide drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or
licensed in Province of Ontario, Canada.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Waste Management and Disposal:
.1
Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section
01 74 20.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
SPLITTERS
.1
Construction: sheet metal enclosure, welded corners and formed hinged cover suitable for
locking in closed position.
.2
Terminations: main and branch lugs to match required size and number of incoming and
outgoing conductors as indicated.
.3
Spare Terminals: minimum three spare terminals or lugs on each connection or lug block
sized less than 400 A.
2.2
JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES
.1
Construction: welded steel enclosure.
.2
Covers Flush Mounted: 25 mm minimum extension all around.
.3
Covers Surface Mounted: screw-on flat covers.
2.3
CABINETS
.1
Construction: welded sheet steel as indicated hinged door, handle, latch, lock with 2 keys
and catch
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
SPLITTERS, JUNCTION, PULL BOXES
AND CABINETS
Section 26 05 31
Page 2
2016-01-13
.2
Type E Empty: surface return flange mounting.
.3
Type T Terminal: surface return flange containing 19 mm fire retardant treated plywood
backboard.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
SPLITTER INSTALLATION
.1
Mount plumb, true and square to building lines.
.2
Extend splitters full length of equipment arrangement except where indicated otherwise.
3.2
JUNCTION, PULL BOXES AND CABINETS INSTALLATION
.1
Install pull boxes in inconspicuous but accessible locations.
.2
Mount cabinets with top not higher than 2 m above finished floor except where indicated
otherwise.
.3
Install terminal block as indicated in Type T cabinets.
.4
Only main junction and pull boxes are indicated. Install additional pull boxes as required
by CSA C22.1.
3.3
IDENTIFICATION
.1
Equipment Identification: to Section 26 05 00.
.2
Identification Labels: size 2 indicating system name, voltage and phase or as indicated.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
OUTLET BOXES, CONDUIT BOXES
AND FITTINGS
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International)
.1
1.2
Section 26 05 32
Page 1
2016-01-13
CSA C22.1-15, Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, 23rd Edition.
SUBMITTALS
.1
1.3
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00.
.2
Waste Management and Disposal:
.1
Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section
01 74 20.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
OUTLET AND CONDUIT BOXES GENERAL
.1
Size boxes in accordance with CSA C22.1.
.2
102 mm square or larger outlet boxes as required.
.3
Gang boxes where wiring devices are grouped.
.4
Blank cover plates for boxes without wiring devices.
.5
Combination boxes with barriers where outlets for more than one system are grouped.
.6
Shallow depth boxes where required for flush mounting within shallow furring, coordinate
all outlet boxes with architectural drawings
2.2
GALVANIZED STEEL OUTLET BOXES
.1
One-piece electro-galvanized construction.
.2
Single and multi-gang flush device boxes for flush installation, minimum size 76 x 50 x 38
mm or as indicated. 102 mm square outlet boxes when more than one conduit enters one
side with extension and plaster rings as required.
.3
Utility boxes for outlets connected to surface-mounted EMT conduit, minimum size 102 x
54 x 48 mm.
.4
102 mm square or octagonal outlet boxes for lighting fixture outlets.
.5
Extension and plaster rings for flush mounting devices in finished plaster or tile walls.
2.3
MASONRY BOXES
.1
Electro-galvanized steel masonry single and multi-gang boxes for devices flush mounted
in exposed block walls.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
2.4
OUTLET BOXES, CONDUIT BOXES
AND FITTINGS
Section 26 05 32
Page 2
2016-01-13
CONCRETE BOXES
.1
2.5
Electro-galvanized sheet steel concrete type boxes for flush mount in concrete with
matching extension and plaster rings as required.
CONDUIT BOXES
.1
2.6
Cast FS or FD aluminum boxes with factory-threaded hubs and mounting feet for surface
wiring of devices.
OUTLET BOXES FOR NON-METALLIC SHEATHED CABLE
.1
2.7
Electro-galvanized, sectional, screw ganging steel boxes, minimum size 76 x 50 x 63 mm
with two double clamps to take non-metallic sheathed cables.
FITTINGS - GENERAL
.1
Bushing and connectors with nylon insulated throats.
.2
Knock-out fillers to prevent entry of debris.
.3
Conduit outlet bodies for conduit up to 35mm and pull boxes for larger conduits.
.4
Double locknuts and insulated bushings on sheet metal boxes.
2.8
SERVICE FITTINGS
.1
'High tension' receptacle fitting made of 2 piece stainless steel or die-cast aluminum with
brushed aluminum housing finish for 1 single, 1 duplex and two duplex receptacles.
Bottom plate with two knockouts for centered or offset installation. 12 x 102 mm extension
piece as indicated or as required.
.2
Pedestal type 'low tension' fitting made of 2 piece stainless steel or die cast aluminum with
brushed aluminum housing finish to accommodate one and two amphenol jack connectors.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Support boxes independently of connecting conduits.
.2
Fill boxes with paper, sponges or foam or similar approved material to prevent entry of
debris during construction. Remove upon completion of work.
.3
For flush installations mount outlets flush with finished wall using plaster rings to permit
wall finish to come within 6 mm of opening.
.4
Provide correct size of openings in boxes for conduit, mineral insulated and armoured
cable connections. Do not install reducing washers.
.5
Vacuum clean interior of outlet boxes before installation of wiring devices.
.6
Identify systems for outlet boxes as required.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
CONDUITS, CONDUIT FASTENINGS AND
CONDUIT FITTINGS
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International)
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
1.2
Section 26 05 34
Page 1
2016-01-13
CSA C22.2 NO. 18.1-13, Metallic Outlet Boxes.
CAN/CSA-C22.2 NO. 18.2-06(R2011), Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes.
CSA C22.2 No. 18.3-12, Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings (Tri-National
standard, with ANCE NMX-J-017 and UL 514B).
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 18.4-04(R2013), Hardware for the Support of Conduit,
Tubing, and Cable.
CSA C22.2 No. 45.1-07(R2012), Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit - Steel
(Tri-National standard, with UL 6 and NMX-J-534-ANCE-2007).
CSA C22.2 No. 56-13, Flexible Metal Conduit and Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal
Conduit
CSA C22.2 No. 83-M1985(R2013), Electrical Metallic Tubing.
CSA C22.2 No. 211.2-06(R2011), Rigid PVC (Unplasticized) Conduit.
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 227.3-05(R2010), Nonmetallic Mechanical Protection
Tubing (NMPT), A National Standard of Canada (February 2006).
SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product data: submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and
datasheets.
.1
.3
Quality assurance submittals:
.1
.2
.3
1.3
Submit cable manufacturing data.
Test reports: submit certified test reports.
Certificates: submit certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that materials
comply with specified performance characteristics and physical properties.
Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
.1
Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.2
Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers.
.3
Ensure emptied containers are sealed and stored safely for disposal away from children.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
CONDUITS
.1
Rigid metal conduit: to CSA C22.2 No. 45, galvanized steel threaded.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
CONDUITS, CONDUIT FASTENINGS AND
CONDUIT FITTINGS
Section 26 05 34
Page 2
2016-01-13
.2
Epoxy coated conduit: to CSA C22.2 No. 45, with zinc coating and corrosion resistant
epoxy finish inside and outside.
.3
Electrical metallic tubing (EMT): to CSA C22.2 No. 83, with couplings with expanded
ends.
.4
Rigid pvc conduit: to CSA C22.2 No. 211.2.
.5
Flexible metal conduit: to CSA C22.2 No. 56, liquid-tight flexible metal.
.6
Flexible pvc conduit: to CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 227.3.
2.2
CONDUIT FASTENINGS
.1
One hole steel straps to secure surface conduits NPS 2 50 mm and smaller.
.1
Two hole steel straps for conduits larger than NPS 2 50 mm.
.2
Beam clamps to secure conduits to exposed steel work.
.3
Channel type supports for two or more conduits at 3 m on centre.
.4
Threaded rods, 6 mm diameter, to support suspended channels.
2.3
CONDUIT FITTINGS
.1
Fittings: to CSA C22.2 No. 18.3 and CAN/CSA- C22.2 No. 18.4, manufactured for use
with conduit specified. Coating: same as conduit.
.2
Ensure factory "ells" where 90 degrees bends for NPS 1 25 mm and larger conduits.
.3
Watertight connectors and couplings for EMT.
.1
2.4
Set-screws are not acceptable.
EXPANSION FITTINGS FOR RIGID CONDUIT
.1
Weatherproof expansion fittings with internal bonding assembly suitable for 100 mm
linear expansion.
.2
Watertight expansion fittings with integral bonding jumper suitable for linear expansion
and 19 mm deflection.
.3
Weatherproof expansion fittings for linear expansion at entry to panel.
2.5
FISH CORD
.1
Polypropylene.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
.1
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications,
including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and
datasheets.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
3.2
CONDUITS, CONDUIT FASTENINGS AND
CONDUIT FITTINGS
Section 26 05 34
Page 3
2016-01-13
INSTALLATION
.1
Install conduits to conserve headroom in exposed locations and cause minimum
interference in spaces through which they pass.
.2
Conceal conduits except in mechanical and electrical service rooms and in other unfinished
areas.
.3
Surface mount conduits except as indicated.
.4
Use rigid galvanized steel threaded conduit except where specified otherwise.
.5
Use epoxy coated conduit in corrosive areas, including acid room.
.6
Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT) except in cast concrete above 2.4 m not subject to
mechanical injury.
.7
Use flexible metal conduit for connection to motors in dry areas, connection to surface or
recessed fluorescent fixtures and work in movable metal partitions.
.8
Use liquid tight flexible metal conduit for connection to motors or vibrating equipment in
damp, wet or corrosive locations.
.9
Use explosion proof flexible connection for connection to explosion proof motors.
.10
Install conduit sealing fittings in hazardous areas.
.1
Fill with compound.
.11
Minimum conduit size for lighting and power circuits: NPS ¾ 19 mm.
.12
Bend conduit cold:
.1
Replace conduit if kinked or flattened more than 1/10th of its original diameter.
.13
Mechanically bend steel conduit over 19 mm diameter.
.14
Field threads on rigid conduit must be of sufficient length to draw conduits up tight.
.15
Install fish cord in empty conduits.
.16
Run 2-NPS 1 25 mm spare conduits up to ceiling space and 2-NPS 1 25 mm spare conduits
down to ceiling space from each flush panel.
.1
.17
Remove and replace blocked conduit sections.
.1
.18
3.3
Terminate these conduits in 152 x 152 x 102 mm junction boxes in ceiling space or
in case of an exposed concrete slab, terminate each conduit in surface type box.
Do not use liquids to clean out conduits.
Dry conduits out before installing wire.
SURFACE CONDUITS
.1
Run parallel or perpendicular to building lines.
.2
Locate conduits behind infrared or gas fired heaters with 1.5 m clearance.
.3
Run conduits in flanged portion of structural steel.
.4
Group conduits wherever possible on suspended or surface channels.
.5
Do not pass conduits through structural members except as indicated.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.6
3.4
CONDUITS, CONDUIT FASTENINGS AND
CONDUIT FITTINGS
Section 26 05 34
Page 4
2016-01-13
Do not locate conduits less than 75 mm parallel to steam or hot water lines with minimum
of 25 mm at crossovers.
CONCEALED CONDUITS
.1
Run parallel or perpendicular to building lines.
.2
Do not install horizontal runs in masonry walls.
.3
Do not install conduits in terrazzo or concrete toppings.
3.5
CONDUITS UNDERGROUND
.1
Slope conduits to provide drainage.
.2
Waterproof joints (pvc excepted) with heavy coat of bituminous paint.
3.6
CLEANING
.1
Proceed in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.2
On completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials,
excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
PANELBOARDS BREAKER TYPE
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
.1
Section 26 05 29 Hangers And Supports For Electrical Systems
.2
26 05 34 Conduits, Conduit Fastenings And Conduit Fittings
1.2
Section 26 24 16.01
Page 1
2016-01-13
REFERENCES
.1
CSA International
.1
1.3
CSA C22.2 No.29-11, Panelboards and Enclosed Panelboards.
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product Data:
.1
.3
Shop Drawings:
.1
.2
.4
Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or
licensed in Province of Ontario, Canada.
Include on drawings:
.1
Electrical detail of panel, branch breaker type, quantity, ampacity and
enclosure dimension.
Sustainable Design Submittals:
.1
1.4
Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for
panelboards and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical
size, finish and limitations.
Construction Waste Management:
.1
Submit project Waste Reduction Workplan highlighting recycling and
salvage requirements.
.2
Submit calculations on end-of-project recycling rates, salvage rates, and
landfill rates demonstrating that 75% of construction wastes were
recycled or salvaged.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 00.
.2
Operation and Maintenance Data: submit operation and maintenance data for panelboards
for incorporation into manual.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with
manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory
packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.3
PANELBOARDS BREAKER TYPE
Section 26 24 16.01
Page 2
2016-01-13
Storage and Handling Requirements:
.1
.2
.3
Store materials indoors and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations
in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.
Store and protect panelboards from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.
Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
.4
Develop Waste Reduction Workplan related to Work of this Section and in accordance
with Section 01 35 21.
.5
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets,
crates, padding and packaging materials as specified Waste Reduction Workplan in
accordance with Section 01 74 20.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
PANELBOARDS
.1
Panelboards: to CSA C22.2 No.29 and product of one manufacturer.
.1
.2
Install circuit breakers in panelboards before shipment.
In addition to CSA requirements manufacturer's nameplate must show fault
current that panel including breakers has been built to withstand.
.2
120/208V panelboards: bus and breakers rated for 25kA (symmetrical) interrupting
capacity or as indicated.
.3
600V panelboards: bus and breakers rated for 18kA (symmetrical) interrupting capacity
or as indicated.
.4
Sequence phase bussing with odd numbered breakers on left and even on right, with each
breaker identified by permanent number identification as to circuit number and phase.
.5
Panelboards: mains, number of circuits, and number and size of branch circuit breakers as
indicated.
.6
Enclosure: sprinkler proof hood
.7
All 120/208V branch circuit panelboards shall be single tub design.
.8
Minimum of 2 flush locks for each panel board.
.9
Two keys for each panelboard and key panelboards alike.
.10
Copper bus with neutral of same ampere rating of mains.
.11
Mains: suitable for bolt-on breakers.
.12
Trim with concealed front bolts and hinges.
.13
Trim and door finish: baked enamel.
.14
Isolated ground bus.
.15
Include grounding busbar with 3 of terminals for bonding conductor equal to breaker
capacity of the panel board.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
2.2
PANELBOARDS BREAKER TYPE
Section 26 24 16.01
Page 3
2016-01-13
BREAKERS
.1
Breakers: to Section 26 28 16.02.
.2
Breakers with thermal and magnetic tripping in panelboards except as indicated
otherwise.
.3
Main breaker: separately mounted on top or bottom of panel to suit cable entry. When
mounted vertically, down position should open breaker.
.4
Lock-on devices for 10% of 15 to 30 A breakers installed as indicated. Turn over unused
lock-on devices to Departmental Representative.
.5
Lock-on devices for fire alarm, exit and night light circuits.
.6
Two and 3 pole breakers shall have common simultaneous trip.
2.3
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
.1
Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 26 05 00.
.2
All panelboard tags indicated on drawings are for design coordination only. All
panelboards to be tagged according to local distribution nomenclature. Obtain
Departmental Representative approval for all proposed panelboard tags.
.3
Nameplate for each panelboard size 4 engraved.
.4
Nameplate for each circuit in distribution panelboards size 2 engraved.
.5
Complete circuit directory with typewritten legend showing location and load of each
circuit, mounted in plastic envelope at inside of panel door.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Verification of Conditions: verify that conditions of substrate previously installed under
other Sections or Contracts are acceptable for panelboards installation in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions.
.1
.2
.3
3.2
Visually inspect substrate in presence of Departmental Representative.
Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately
upon discovery.
Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied.
INSTALLATION
.1
Locate panelboards as indicated and mount securely, plumb, true and square, to adjoining
surfaces.
.2
Mount panelboards to height specified in Section 26 05 00 or as indicated.
.3
Connect loads to circuits.
.4
Connect neutral conductors to common neutral bus.
.5
Provide all mounting brackets, busbar drillings and filler pieces for spaces.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
3.3
PANELBOARDS BREAKER TYPE
Section 26 24 16.01
Page 4
2016-01-13
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.1
Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
.2
Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment
in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.3
Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with
Section 01 74 20
.1
3.4
Remove recycling containers and bins from site and dispose of materials at
appropriate facility.
PROTECTION
.1
Protect installed products and components from damage during construction.
.2
Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by panelboards installation.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
CSA International (CSA)
.1
1.2
Section 26 28 16.02
Page 1
2016-01-13
CSA C22.2 No. 5-09, Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and
Circuit-Breaker Enclosures (Tri-national standard with UL 489, and
NMX-J-266-ANCE-2010).
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Product Data:
.1
Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for
circuit breakers and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical
size, finish and limitations.
.2
Include time-current characteristic curves for breakers with ampacity of 100 A and over or
with interrupting capacity of 22,000 A symmetrical (rms) and over at system voltage.
.3
Certificates:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Prior to installation of circuit breakers in either new or existing installation,
Contractor must submit 3 copies of a production certificate of origin from the
manufacturer. Production certificate of origin must be duly signed by factory and
local manufacturer's representative certifying that circuit breakers come from this
manufacturer and are new and meet standards and regulations.
.1
Production certificate of origin must be submitted to Departmental
Representative for approval.
Delay in submitting production of certificate of origin will not justify any
extension of contract and additional compensation.
Any work of manufacturing, assembly or installation to begin only after
acceptance of production certificate of origin by Departmental Representative.
Unless complying with this requirement, Departmental Representative reserves
the right to mandate manufacturer listed on circuit breakers to authenticate new
circuit breakers under the contract, and to Contractor's expense.
Production certificate of origin must contain:
.1
Manufacturer's name and address and person responsible for
authentication. Person responsible must sign and date certificate.
.2
Licensed dealer's name and address and person of distributor responsible
for Contractor's account.
.3
Contractor's name and address and person responsible for project.
.4
Local manufacturer's representative name and address. Local
manufacturer's representative must sign and date certificate.
.5
Name and address of building where circuit breakers will be installed:
.1
Project title:
.2
End user's reference number:
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
.3
1.3
Section 26 28 16.02
Page 2
2016-01-13
List of circuit breakers:
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with
manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory
packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address.
.3
Storage and Handling Requirements:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Store circuit breakers indoors in dry location and in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.
Store and protect circuit breakers from [nicks, scratches, and blemishes.
Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets,
crates, padding and packaging materials as specified in Construction Waste Management
Plan and Waste Reduction Workplan in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
BREAKERS GENERAL
.1
Moulded-case circuit breakers and ground-fault circuit-interrupters: to CSA C22.2 No. 5
.2
Bolt-on moulded case circuit breaker: quick- make, quick-break type, for manual and
automatic operation with temperature compensation for 40 degrees C ambient.
.3
Plug-in moulded case circuit breakers: quick- make, quick-break type, for manual and
automatic operation with temperature compensation for 40°C ambient.
.4
Common-trip breakers: with single handle for multi-pole applications.
.5
Magnetic instantaneous trip elements in circuit breakers to operate only when value of
current reaches setting.
.1
Trip settings on breakers with adjustable trips to range from 3-8 times current
rating.
.6
Circuit breakers with interchangeable trips as indicated.
.7
Circuit breakers to have minimum 22kA symmetrical rms interrupting capacity rating.
2.2
THERMAL MAGNETIC BREAKERS DESIGN A
.1
2.3
Moulded case circuit breaker to operate automatically by means of thermal and magnetic
tripping devices to provide inverse time current tripping and instantaneous tripping for
short circuit protection.
ENCLOSURE
.1
NEMA 2.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Verification of Conditions: verify that conditions of substrate previously installed under
other Sections or Contracts are acceptable for installation in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions.
.1
.2
.3
3.2
Section 26 28 16.02
Page 3
2016-01-13
Visually inspect substrate in presence of Departmental Representative.
Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately
upon discovery.
Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied
and after receipt of written approval to proceed from Departmental Representative.
INSTALLATION
.1
3.3
Install circuit breakers as indicated.
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.1
Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
.2
Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment
in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.3
Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with
Section 01 74 20.
.1
Remove recycling containers and bins from site and dispose of materials at
appropriate facility.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
DISCONNECT SWITCHES - FUSED AND
NON-FUSED
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
PRODUCT DATA
.1
1.2
Section 26 28 23
Page 1
2016-01-13
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
.1
Non-fusible, horsepower rated disconnect switch in CSA Enclosure, size as indicated.
.2
Provision for padlocking in on-off switch position by three locks.
.3
Mechanically interlocked door to prevent opening when handle in ON position.
.4
Quick-make, quick-break action.
.5
ON-OFF switch position indication on switch enclosure cover.
.6
Weatherproof enclosure where installed outdoors
2.2
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
.1
Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 26 05 00.
.2
Indicate name of load controlled on size 4 nameplate.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install disconnect switches complete with fuses if applicable.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
MOTOR STARTERS TO 600 V INSTALLATION ONLY Section 26 29 10
Region Project
Page 1
Number R.069124.001
2016-01-13
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)
.1
IEC 60947-4-1-2009, Low-voltage switchgear and control gear - Part 4-1:
Contactors and motor-starters - Electromechanical contactors and motor-starters.
1.2
ACTION
.1
All starters shall be supplied by Mechanical contractor. Electrical contractor shall
install all starters with the exception of the integral starters with the mechanical
equipment. Include all required labor and material to facilitate this work. Refer to
other Sections for all relevant work.
1.3
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
.1
1.4
Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Take possession, store and handle in accordance with Section 01 61 00.
.2
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets,
crates, paddling, and packaging materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
2.2
Starters: to IEC 60947-4-1 with AC4 utilization category by Others.
MOTOR STARTERS NOT INCLUDING INTEGRAL STARTERS
.1
2.3
Shall be supplied by Mechanical contractor to be installed by Electrical contractor.
CONTROL TRANSFORMER
.1
2.4
Shall be supplied and installed by Mechanical contractor utilizing line voltage power
supply provided by Electrical contractor. Provide line voltage where required. Coordinate
this work on site.
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
.1
Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 26 05 00.
.2
Manual starter designation label, white plate, black letters, size 1, engraved as indicated.
.3
Magnetic starter designation label, white plate, black letters, size 1 engraved as indicated.
PWGSC Ontario
MOTOR STARTERS TO 600 V INSTALLATION ONLY Section 26 29 10
Region Project
Page 2
Number R.069124.001
2016-01-13
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install starters and line voltage control devices in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions. All low voltage control devices c/w associated wiring shall be installed by
others. Refer to mechanical drawings for locations of starters.
.2
All line voltage wiring on line side and load side of starter and/or VFD by electrical
contractor.
.3
Install and wire starters and line voltage controls as indicated.
.4
Ensure correct fuses installed.
.5
Confirm motor nameplate and adjust overload device to suit.
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Perform tests in accordance with Section 26 05 00 and manufacturer's instructions.
.2
Operate switches and contactors to verify correct functioning.
.3
Perform starting and stopping sequences of contactors and relays.
.4
Check that sequence controls, interlocking with other separate related starters, equipment,
control devices, operate as indicated.
3.3
CLEANING
.1
Clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.1
.2
Remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.
Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with
Section 01 74 20.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
LIGHTING
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
.1
.2
.2
UL1598, Standard for Safety of Luminaires
Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA)
.1
.2
.3
1.2
CAN/CSA E598-Series-98, Luminaires
Underwriters’ Laboratories of Canada (ULC)
.1
.6
ASTM F1137-00(2006), Standard Specification for Phosphate/Oil and
Phosphate/Organic Corrosion Protective Coatings for Fasteners.
Canadian Standards Association (CSA):
.1
.5
ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1991, Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in
Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.
ASTM International Inc.
.1
.4
ANSI C82.1-2004, American National Standard for Lamp Ballasts - Line
Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts.
ANSI C82.4-2002, American National Standard for Ballasts for High-Intensity
Discharge and Low-Pressure Sodium (LPS) Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type).
American National Standards Institute/Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
(ANSI/IEEE)
.1
.3
Section 26 50 00
Page 1
2016-01-13
IESNA LM-79, Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State Lighting
Products
IESNA LM-80, Approved Method for Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED
Light Sources
IESNA TM-21, Luminaire Classification System for Indoor Luminaires
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product Data:
.1
.2
.3
Provide manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet and
include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and
limitations.
Provide complete photometric data prepared by independent testing laboratory for
luminaires where specified, for review by Departmental Representative.
Photometric data to include: VCP Table where applicable and spacing criterion.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.3
Section 26 50 00
Page 2
2016-01-13
Quality assurance submittals: provide following in accordance with Section 01 45 00.
.1
1.3
LIGHTING
Manufacturer's instructions: provide manufacturer's written installation
instructions and special handling criteria, installation sequence, cleaning
procedures and processes.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
1.4
Provide mock-ups in accordance with Section 01 45 00.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00.
.2
Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name,
address.
.3
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets,
crates, paddling and packaging materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.4
Divert unused metal materials from landfill to metal recycling facility.
.5
Disposal and recycling of fluorescent lamps as per local regulations.
.6
Disposal of old PCB filled ballasts.
1.5
COORDINATION
.1
Confirm compatibility and interface with other materials with luminaire and ceiling
system, and report discrepancies to the Departmental Representative; defer ordering
materials until discrepancies are clarified.
.2
Supply plaster frames, trim rings, and back boxes to other trades, as the work requires.
.3
Coordinate with mechanical subcontractor to avoid conflicts between luminaires, supports
and fittings with mechanical equipment; do not suspend fixtures from mechanical
equipment, pipes or ducts.
1.6
WARRANTY
.1
Replace completely free of charge:
.1
.2
Fluorescent lamps burning out within 12 months of takeover.
Ballasts that fail or exceed their original noise level rating within 12 months of
takeover.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
.1
Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
.2
Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent
warping and sagging.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.3
2.2
LIGHTING
Section 26 50 00
Page 3
2016-01-13
Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under
operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to
prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally
during relamping and when secured in operating position.
DIFFUSERS AND GLOBES:
1.
2.
2.3
Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing
and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.
.1
Lens Thickness: At least 3.175 mm minimum unless otherwise indicated.
.2
UV stabilized.
Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.
RECESSED FIXTURES
.1
Supply recessed fixtures complete with trim type required for ceiling system installed.
.2
Before ordering, confirm the ceiling construction details and architectural finish for each
area.
.3
Recessed pot-light style fixtures: Provide pre-wired type with junction box forming an
integral part of the assembly with satisfactory access complete with necessary plaster rings,
supports, and other required accessories for complete installation.
.4
Recessed fluorescent fixtures: Maintain maximum 150 mm depth, including mounting
yokes or bridges with distance from back face of fixture or lens to centre of lamp
minimum 65 mm; design reflector and lamp positions to provide high efficiency, even
brightness and lack of lamp lines.
2.4
SUSPENDED FIXTURES
.1
2.5
Coordinate supply of ceiling support for fixtures so that they are suitable for ceiling system
installed.
DRIVERS FOR LED FIXTURES
.1
Electronic Driver for LED Fixtures: Comply with UL 1310 Class 2 requirements for dry
and damp locations.
.2
Rated for 50,000 hours of life, unless otherwise noted.
.3
Sound Rating: Class A.
.4
Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: 20 percent or less.
.5
Current Crest Factor: 1.5 or less.
.6
Drivers shall typically operate one luminaire, unless noted otherwise on the light fixture
schedule.
.7
Driver shall operate from 50/60 Hz input source of 120 volts, and sustained variations of ±
10% (Voltage & Frequency) with no damage to the driver or solid state circuitry.
.8
Operating Temperature:
.1
Interior: 15C to 30C
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
LIGHTING
Section 26 50 00
Page 4
2016-01-13
Exterior: -40C to 35C
.9
Surge Protection: Automatic, withstand line transients as defined in ANSI C62.41,
Category A
.10
Dimming:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.11
2.6
Dimming shall be compatible with lighting control system, typically 0 - 10V low
voltage dimming
Dimming range shall be 1% - 100% of full light output
Drivers shall be dimmable to 1% minimum flicker free and shall meet IEC 60929
Annex E for max mA draw of 2mA.
Drivers and dimmers to be fully matched and compatible for the quantity of
fixtures being dimmed.
Any substitution to the dimming driver control mechanism which requires extra
wiring or materials for the lighting control system to operate shall be paid for by
the fixture manufacturer.
Drivers shall have a Power Factor greater than 0.98.
BALLASTS
.1
Programmed Start T8 Ballasts: Ballasts shall operated one or more T8 lamps as indicated
in the lighting fixture schedule:
.1
.2
Ballast shall have a minimum Rh/Rc of 4.00 each time the lamps are started.
Ballast shall have a maximum ionization current (Glow Current) of 10 mAmps
during the preheating interval.
.3
.4
Ballast shall have a minimum start temperature of -18C.
Ballasts shall operate from a 50/60 Hz input source of 120 through 347 Volts, and
sustained variations of ± 10% (Voltage & Frequency) with no damage to the
ballasts; refer to fixture schedule for voltage.
Ballasts shall be high frequency electronic type, and operate lamps at a frequency
above 42 kHz to minimize interference with infrared control systems.
Lamp Current Crest Factor (ratio of peak to RMS current) shall be 1.7 or less in
accordance with lamp manufacturer recommendation and ANSI C82.11.
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
.13
Ballasts shall tolerate operation in ambient temperatures up to 40C without
damage.
Ballasts shall comply with FCC Part 18 Non-Consumer Equipment for
EMI (power line conducted) and RFI (Radiated).
Ballasts shall provide transient immunity as recommended by ANSI C62.41,
Location A2.
Ballasts shall operate lamps with no visible flicker (<3% flicker index).
Ballasts shall tolerate sustained open circuit and short circuit output conditions
without damage.
Ballasts shall be Underwriters Laboratory (UL 935) listed, Class P, Type 1
Outdoor, and CSA certified where applicable.
Ballast shall have a Ballast factor greater than 0.85, per ANSI C82.11.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.14
.15
.16
2.7
LIGHTING
Section 26 50 00
Page 5
2016-01-13
Input current Total Harmonic Distortion shall not exceed 10%.
Ballasts shall have a Power Factor greater than 0.98, for primary application.
Mounting: integral with luminaire.
LAMPS
.1
Fluorescent lamps to be - T8, 32 Watt, programmed-start, colour temperature as specified,
40,000 hour lamp life, 2800 initial lumens, CRI of Minimum 85; Low Mercury TCLP
compliant
.2
LED Light Sources
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
2.8
Photometrics of fixture to be tested according to LM79 requirements
Minimum L70 lamp life within the fixture of 50,000 as measured according to
LM80 and TM21
CRI >= 82; R9 >= 35
Colour temperature range from 2700 - 5000 K, as noted on the luminaire schedule;
Binning to +/- 200K
Interior LEDs (within luminaires) suitable for an ambient temperature range of
15C to 30C
FINISHES
.1
2.9
Light fixture finish and construction to meet ULC listings and CSA certifications related to
intended installation.
LUMINAIRES
.1
As indicated in luminaire schedule.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
SUPPORTS
.1
Recessed Fixtures:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
In areas without suspended ceilings, support fluorescent fixtures directly from the
building structure by rod hangers and inserts
Provide plaster frames or plaster trim as required and turn same over to the ceiling
section for installation
Support fixtures equal to or larger than 610 mm in width by four hangers per
fixture, minimum, independent of ceiling supports or T-bars
Support fixtures smaller than 610 mm in width by two hangers per fixture,
minimum, independent of ceiling supports or T-bars
Install recessed fixtures to permit removal from below, to gain access to outlet or
pre-wired fixture box.
Connect recessed fixtures to boxes with flexible conduit and approved fixture
wire.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
Section 26 50 00
Page 6
2016-01-13
Suspended Fixtures:
.1
.2
.3
3.2
LIGHTING
Install suspended linear fluorescent fixtures with airplane cable and fittings having
field adjustable length.
Fixtures shall be installed level unless specifically noted otherwise on Drawings,
with less than 10 mm variation over 2440 mm.
Fixtures shall be mounted at the same height above the floor unless specifically
noted otherwise on Drawings.
LUMINAIRE WIRING
.1
3.3
Connect recessed luminaires to outlet boxes with flexible conduit using 90C wire.
LUMINAIRE ALIGNMENT
.1
Align luminaires mounted in continuous rows to form straight uninterrupted line.
.2
Align luminaires mounted individually parallel or perpendicular to building grid lines.
3.4
CLEANING
.1
Specular reflector protection to remain in place through construction
.2
Align luminaries and clean diffusers, baskets and remove reflector protection prior to final
acceptance.
.3
Clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.1
.4
Remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.
Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with
Section 01 74 20.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
EXIT LIGHTS
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International)
.1
.2
.2
NFPA 101-2012, Life Safety Code.
Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC)
.1
.2
1.2
CSA C22.2 No.141-10, Unit Equipment for Emergency Lighting.
CAN/CSA-C860-11, Performance of Internally Lighted Exit Signs.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
.1
.3
Section 26 53 00
Page 1
2016-01-13
ULC/ORD-924-02, Standard for Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment.
CAN/ULC-S572-10, First Edition Standard for Photoluminescent and
Self-Luminous Exit Signs and Path Marking Systems.
SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product Data:
.1
Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet and
include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and
limitations.
.3
Submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets.
.4
Quality Assurance Submittals: submit following in accordance with Section 01 45 00.
.1
1.3
Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions and special handling
criteria, installation sequence, and cleaning procedures.
WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
.1
Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
STANDARD UNITS
.1
Exit lights: to CSA C22.2 No.141 and CSA C860.
.2
Housing: extruded aluminum
.3
Mounting: Recessed base
.4
Face and back plates: low profile edge-lit acrylic panel. Double face panels standard with
capability to modify on site for us in single-face or double-face applications
.5
Lamps: LED, 120V
.6
Operation: designed for 50,000 hours of continuous operation without relamping.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.7
EXIT LIGHTS
Type: Running man to suit National Building Code
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
.1
3.2
Section 26 53 00
Page 2
2016-01-13
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications,
including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and
datasheets.
INSTALLATION
.1
Install exit lights to manufacturer's recommendations, listing requirements, NFPA standard
and local regulatory requirements.
.2
Connect fixtures to exit light circuits.
.3
Ensure that exit light circuit breaker is locked in on position.
3.3
CLEANING
.1
Proceed in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.2
On completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials,
excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Product Data:
.1
1.2
Section 27 05 28
Page 1
2016-01-13
Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for
communication raceway systems and include product characteristics, performance
criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with
manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory
packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address.
.3
Storage and Handling Requirements:
.1
Store materials in dry location and in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.
.2
Store and protect communication raceway systems and wiring from nicks,
scratches, and blemishes.
.3
Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
.4
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets,
crates, padding and packaging materials as specified in Waste Reduction Workplan in
accordance with Section 01 74 20.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
.1
2.2
Telecommunications raceways system consists rough-in with conduits stubs to accessible
ceiling space, including outlet boxes, cover plates, conduits, sleeves and caps, and fish
wires.
MATERIAL
.1
Conduits: in accordance with Section 26 05 34.
.2
Outlet boxes, conduit boxes, and fittings: in accordance with Section 26 05 31 and
26 05 32.
.3
Fish wire: polypropylene type.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Verification of Conditions: verify that conditions of substrate previously installed under
other Sections or Contracts are acceptable for communication raceway systems installation
in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
.1
.2
.3
3.2
Section 27 05 28
Page 2
2016-01-13
Visually inspect substrate in presence of Departmental Representative.
Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately
upon discovery.
Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied
and after receipt of written approval to proceed from Departmental Representative.
INSTALLATION
.1
Install raceway system, outlet boxes, pull boxes, cover plates, conduit, sleeves and caps,
miscellaneous and positioning material to constitute complete system.
.2
Install fish wire within empty conduits
3.3
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.1
Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
.2
Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment
in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.3
Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with
Section 01 74 20.
.1
3.4
Remove recycling containers and bins from site and dispose of materials at
appropriate facility.
PROTECTION
.1
Protect installed products and components from damage during construction.
.2
Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by pathways for communications systems
installation.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
SOUND MASKING SYSTEM
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
.1
1.2
Section 27 51 19
Page 1
2016-01-13
This Section includes requirements for supply and installation of a fully addressable
networked sound masking system controllable from a single control panel with future
options to connect a central computer.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
.1
Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical
.2
Section 26 05 32 - Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes and Fittings
.3
Section 26 05 34 – Conduits, Conduit Fastenings And Conduit Fittings
.4
Section 26 05 21 – Wires And Cables (0-1000V)
1.3
REFERENCE STANDARDS
.1
American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
.1
.2
.2
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
.1
.2
.3
.4
1.4
ANSI S1.4-1983 (R2001), American National Standard Specification for Sound
Level Meters
ANSI/ASA S1.11-2004 (R2009, American National Standard Specification for
Octave-Band and Fractional-Octave-Band Analog and Digital Filters
ASTM 1130-08, Standard Test Method for Objective Measurement of Speech
Privacy in Open Plan Spaces Using Articulation Index
ASTM E1374-06(2011), Standard Guide for Open Office Acoustics and
Applicable ASTM Standards
ASTM E1433-04, Standard Guide for Selection of Standards on Environmental
Acoustics
ASTM E1573-09, Standard Test Method for Evaluating Masking Sound in Open
Offices Using A-Weighted and One-Third Octave Band Sound Pressure Levels
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
.1
Scheduling: Schedule work of this Section so that installation, testing, adjusting, and
balancing is performed after above ceiling mechanical and electrical work, suspended
acoustic tile ceiling are complete , and as follows:
.1
1.5
Schedule installation, testing, tuning, and balancing after normal working hours
of users in occupied facilities.
SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide required information in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal
Procedures.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
.2
Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data identifying components used
for the project.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating proposed quantity and location
of system components and related wiring and accessories.
Informational Submittals: Provide the following submittals during the course of the work:
.1
1.6
Section 27 51 19
Page 2
2016-01-13
Action Submittals: Provide the following submittals before starting any work of this
Section:
.1
.3
SOUND MASKING SYSTEM
Design Submittals: Provide network design schematics indicating general layout
and types of equipment proposed for use for Departmental Representative’s
review and comment before preparing finalized shop drawings listed in this
Section.
PROJECT CLOSEOUT SUBMISSIONS
.1
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer’s written instructions for
operations and maintenance procedures; include name of original installer and contact
information in accordance with Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals.
.2
Record Documentation: Submit as constructed information in accordance with Section
01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals including copy of final sound pressure level readings,
accurate description of reading locations and test methods and equipment used.
.3
Spare Tools and Software: Submit unique tools and software in accordance with Section
01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals.
1.7
QUALIFICATIONS
.1
Regulatory Requirements: Provide electrical components, devices and accessories,
controls and wiring conforming to CSA Standards and CSA labelled in accordance with
requirements of Authority Having Jurisdiction.
.2
Qualifications: Provide proof of qualifications when requested by Departmental
Representative:
.1
.2
1.8
Manufacturer: Use manufacturer that can provide required network design in
advance of providing shop drawings and site representation during set-up, testing
and commissioning, and that has capacity to provide all network components and
devices from a single point of responsibility.
Installer: Use installer that is qualified or approved by component manufacturer
having experienced personnel installing and adjusting sound masking systems of
similar extent and complexity as required by this Section.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original
unopened and undamaged packaging with labels intact and legible.
.2
Storage and Handling Requirements: Store in dry locations and handle in accordance
with manufacturer’s written instructions.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
1.9
SOUND MASKING SYSTEM
Section 27 51 19
Page 3
2016-01-13
WARRANTY
.1
Manufacturer Warranty: Submit manufacturer’s warranty stating installed are free from
defects in parts or assembly for period of five (5) years from date of Substantial
Performance for the Project and will be replaced or repaired at no expense during the
warranty period without disruption to use of the installed system.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
SYSTEM DESIGN
.1
2.2
Design Requirements: Design network and prepare schematics of network showing
quantity and location of network components and related cabling and accessories used to
establish bid price before submitting shop drawings; obtain Departmental Representative
approval for any changes in quantity or location of sound masking units after shop
drawings have been reviewed and accepted.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
.1
Sound Masking Performance: Provide systems using digital signal processing (DSP)
technology to generate masking sound and adjustment of masking signals and as follows:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.2
Masking Sound: Random with no noticeable repetitive pattern
Equalizer: Primary network devices capable of equalizing in 1/3 octave
increments for masking signal and capable of equalizing zones in groups of 1 to 3
speakers.
Masking Volume: Digitally adjustable in 0.5 dBA increments at each primary
network device and grouping of speakers over a range of 35 dBA to 85 dBA
measured 1 metre from source
Muting: Muting masking volume control at each primary network device.
Spatial Uniformity: Provide system capable of achieving spatial uniformity of 
0.5 dBA for masking volume with furnishings in place after adjustment.
Timer Performance: Provide system having timer function allowing masking volume
levels to adjust automatically according to programmed schedule and as follows:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Time Scheduling: Calendar based programmable timer function; assigned to
individual or group of primary network devices and allowing for the following:
.1
Allow independent timer schedules for each day of the week
.2
Allow variable rates of volume adjustment
.3
Allow exception timer schedules for calendar days requiring different
schedule from the normal
.4
Allow programmed system activation date
Daylight Savings: Automatic daylight saving time adjustments
Acclimation Period: Automatic acclimation process that increases masking
volume over a period of time according to programmed schedule; allowing for
independent acclimatization schedules for each timer zone.
Timer Zones: Allow for up to nine independent timer zones per control
panel/programmable timer.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
SOUND MASKING SYSTEM
Section 27 51 19
Page 4
2016-01-13
.3
Diagnostic Performance: Provide system capable of providing expected number of
primary network devices and communicating correctly with network control panel and
that provides failure indication of identifying primary network devices that fail to
communicate properly over the network.
.4
Reporting Performance: Provide system network control panel capable of reading and
displaying current settings for all primary network devices and generating detailed
reports of system settings down to level of individual primary network devices.
.5
Security Performance: Provide locked metal enclosure for network control panel with
access to control functions password protected and no physical controls located on
system loudspeakers or primary network devices and that allows for settings to be backed
up on an electronic storage medium with performance monitoring at each network
component.
2.3
COMPONENTS
.1
Provide fully networked decentralized sound masking system comprised of
manufacturer’s fully addressable components including; but not limited to, the following:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
Primary Network Device: Include sound masking generator; equalizer for
masking; individual volume control for masking; network communication
components; and audio amplifier.
Secondary Network Devices: Provide loudspeaker connections; and signal
connections to or from other primary and secondary devices.
Loudspeakers: System matched and enclosed in acoustically dampened
enclosure; suspension chain, connections to network devices; and tool-less onsite adjustment of upward or downward speaker orientation.
Network Control Panel: Include required network communication components;
control electronics for sound masking and timer functions; connections to audio
inputs, network devices, control panels and computer; Ethernet connection and IP
addressable.
PC Network Control Software Capable: System must have software that allows
for control of system adjustments from a dedicated computer including: network
set-up; sound masking volume and equalization adjustment; sound masking timer
programs; and programmable keypad set-up. Software not in contract.
Keypads: Fully programmable, network compatible having visual display for
function and volume adjustments; infrared remote control receiver and sized to
fit within a single gang box.
Accessories: Provide accessories required for a complete and functioning system
including; but not limited to: cable assemblies for power, audio and control
signals; audio input modules for microphone, telephone and auxiliary audio
sources; mounting adaptors; and power supplies.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
SOUND MASKING SYSTEM
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Verification of Conditions: Verify that plenum heights and power source, and other
manufacturer prerequisites are met before beginning of installation of products specified
in this Section.
.1
3.2
Section 27 51 19
Page 5
2016-01-13
Installation of products specified in this Section will denote acceptance of site
conditions.
INSTALLATION
.1
3.3
Install system components in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and
with components placed as indicated on accepted shop drawings.
CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
.1
Start-up and Adjusting: Perform system start-up in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommended procedures and as follows:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.2
Demonstration and Training: Provide demonstration and training for operating system as
required by Section 01 79 00 – Demonstration and Training and as follows:
.1
.2
.3
Calibrate measuring microphone and related test equipment prior to start-up and
adjusting and as follows:
Balance system with mechanical system and other noise generating equipment
shut down, and spaces unoccupied in areas receiving sound masking for duration
of start-up operations.
Adjust system until sound spectrum and levels meet required performance
requirements; relocate units where required.
Confirm consistency of masking volume and quality.
Demonstrate operational system by walking the space and indicating nominal
operating conditions
Demonstrate functionality of system to facilities personnel; train assigned
personnel to maintain system
Commissioning: Provide verification and commissioning services as follows using
manufacturer’s trained technical representative to measure and report on sound masking
system acoustical performance requirements in accordance with ASTM E1573 and as
follows:
.1
.2
Performance verification will be performed after Substantial Performance of the
Work.
Move sound generating units or replace where commissioning process shows that
adjustments are required.
END OF SECTION
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
Part 1
GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
1.2
Section 28 31 00
Page 1
2016-01-13
Materials and installation for fire alarm systems.
Manual alarm stations.
Automatic alarm initiating devices.
Audible signal devices.
Visual alarm signal devices.
Ancillary devices.
Verification.
REFERENCES
.1
National Building Code (NBC)
.1
.2
Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)
.1
.3
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada (ULC)
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.4
National Building Code of Canada 2010
CAN/ULC-S524-06, Standard for the Installation of Fire Alarm Systems.
CAN/ULC-S525-07, Audible Signal Device for Fire Alarm Systems.
CAN/ULC-S526-07, Visual Signal Devices for Fire Alarm Systems.
CAN/ULC-S527-11, Control Units.
CAN/ULC-S528-14, Manual Pull Stations for Fire Alarm Systems.
CAN/ULC-S529-09, Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm Systems.
CAN/ULC-S530-M91, Heat Actuated Fire Detectors for Fire Alarm Systems.
CAN/ULC-S531-14, Standard for Smoke Alarms.
CAN/ULC-S537-13, Standard for Verification of Fire Alarm Systems.
CAN/ULC-S1001-11, Standard for Integrated Systems Testing of Fire Protection
and Life Safety Systems.
National Fire Protection Agency
.1
.2
NFPA 72-2007, National Fire Alarm Code.
NFPA 90A-2012, Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
1.3
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
Section 28 31 00
Page 2
2016-01-13
SUBMITTALS
.1
Product Data:
.1
.2
Shop Drawings:
.1
.3
Include:
.1
Layout of equipment.
.2
Zoning.
.3
Complete wiring diagram, including schematics of modules.
Quality assurance submittals: submit following in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.1
.2
.3
.4
Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet in
accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.1
Submit two copies of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information
System (WHMIS) Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) in accordance
with Section 01 33 00.
Certificates: submit certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that materials
comply with specified performance characteristics and physical properties.
Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
Manufacturer's Field Reports: manufacturer's field reports specified.
Closeout Submittals:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Submit maintenance and engineering data for incorporation into manual specified
in Section 01 78 00.
Authority of Jurisdiction will delegate authority for review and approval of
submittals required by this Section.
Submit to Authority of Jurisdiction 2 sets of approved submittals and drawings
immediately after approval but no later than 15 working days to prior to final
inspection.
Submit following:
.1
Manufacturer's Data for:
.1
Control panel and modules.
.2
Manual pull stations.
.3
Heat detectors.
.4
Open-area smoke detectors.
.5
Duct smoke detectors.
.6
Alarm bells.
.7
Wiring.
.8
Conduit.
.9
Outlet boxes.
.10
Fittings for conduit and outlet boxes.
Mark data which describe more than one type of item to indicate
.11
which type will be provided.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
Section 28 31 00
Page 3
2016-01-13
.12
.2
.3
.4
.5
1.4
Submit 1 original for each item and clear, legible, first-generation
photocopies for remainder of specified copies.
System wiring diagrams:
.1
Submit complete wiring diagrams of system showing points of
connection and terminals used for electrical connections in the
system.
Design data: Power Calculations:
.1
Submit design calculations for existing system to substantiate that
battery capacity exceeds supervisory and alarm power
requirements.
.2
Show comparison of detector power requirements per zone versus
control panel smoke detector power output per zone in both
standby and alarm modes.
.3
Show comparison of notification appliance circuit alarm power
requirements with rated circuit power output.
Schedules:
.1
Conductor wire marker schedule.
Test Reports:
.1
Open-area 2-wire smoke detectors.
.2
Preliminary testing:
.1
Final acceptance testing.
.2
Submit for inspections and tests specified under Field
Quality Control.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Qualifications:
.1
Installer: company or person specializing in fire alarm system installations with 5
-years documented experience approved by manufacturer.
.2
Provide services of representative or technician from manufacturer of system, experienced
in installation and operation of type of system being provided, to supervise installation,
adjustment, preliminary testing, and final testing of system and to provide instruction to
project personnel.
.3
Extra Materials:
.1
.2
.4
Maintenance Service:
.1
1.5
Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00.
Include:
.1
Two spare glass rods for manual pull box stations if applicable.
Provide one year's free maintenance on new parts.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
.1
Packing, shipping, handling and unloading:
.1
Deliver, store and handle in accordance with Section 01 61 00.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.2
.2
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
Section 28 31 00
Page 4
2016-01-13
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions.
Waste Management and Disposal:
.1
Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal: separate waste
materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
Part 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
All equipment and devices: ULC listed and labelled, to match existing manufacturer:
Edwards
.2
Audible signal devices: to CAN/ULC-S525.
.3
Visual signal devices: to CAN/ULC-S526.
.4
Manual pull stations: to CAN/ULC-S528.
.5
Thermal detectors: to CAN/ULC-S530.
.6
Smoke detectors: to CAN/ULC-S529.
.7
Smoke alarms: to CAN/ULC-S531.
2.2
SYSTEM OPERATION
.1
Provide fire alarm new devices and connect to existing fire alarm system
.2
Utilize separate circuits from control panel for each zone of initiating devices.
Transmission of signals from more than one zone over common circuit to control panel is
prohibited.
.3
Determine existing zoning configuration and connect all new devices to the correct zone.
2.3
MANUAL ALARM STATIONS
.1
Provide non-coded single action type with mechanical reset features.
.1
.2
.2
Non-coded single pole normally open contact for single stage.
General alarm key switch for two stage system.
Stations: surface mounted and interior type as indicated.
.1
.2
For surface mounting provide station manufacturer's approved back box.
Back box finish to match station finish.
.3
Equip each station with terminal strip with contacts of proper number and type to perform
functions required.
.4
Stations: type not subject to operation by jarring or vibration.
.1
Break-glass-front stations are not permitted;
.5
Station colour: red.
.6
Provide station with visible indication of operation.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.7
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
Section 28 31 00
Page 5
2016-01-13
Restoration to require use of key.
.1
Keys: identical throughout system for stations and control panel(s).
.8
Mount stations with operating lever not more than 1.2 m above finished floor.
.9
Where weatherproof stations are required, provide stations with cast metal, weatherproof
housings with hinged access doors.
.1
2.4
Finish housings with red enamel paint and provide permanently bilingual English
French signage indicating "FIRE ALARM" with white letters of 19 mm high.
AUTOMATIC ALARM INITIATING DEVICES
.1
Heat detectors: provide heat detectors designed for detection of fire by combination fixed
temperature rate-of-rise principle.
.2
Combination Fixed Temperature Rate-Of-Rise Detectors (Spot Type): designed for
surface or semi-flush outlet box mounting and supported independently of conduit, tubing
or wiring connections.
.1
.2
.3
.3
Open-Area Smoke Detectors: provide detectors designed for detection of abnormal smoke
densities by photoelectric principle.
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.4
Detectors: wire type to match existing
Provide necessary control and power modules required for operation integral with
control panel.
Detectors and associated modules: compatible with control panel and suitable for
use in supervised circuit.
Malfunction of electrical circuits to detector or its control or power units to result
in operation of system trouble signals.
Equip each detector with visible indicator lamp that will flash when detector is in
normal standby mode and glow continuously when detector is activated.
Provide remote indicator lamps for each detector that is located above suspended
ceilings.
Each detector: plug-in type with tab-lock or twist-lock, quick disconnect head and
separate base in which detector base contains screw terminals for making wiring
connections.
Detector head: removable from its base without disconnecting wires. Removal of
detector head from its base to cause activation of system trouble signals.
Screen each detector to prevent entrance of insects into detection chamber(s).
Photoelectric Detectors: operate on light scattering principle using LED light source.
.1
.5
Contacts: self-resetting after response to rate-of-rise actuation
Operation under fixed temperature actuation to result in external indication.
Detector units located in boiler rooms, showers, or other areas subject to abnormal
temperature changes to operate on fixed temperature principle only.
Detector: respond to both flaming and smoldering fires.
Locate detectors in accordance with their listing by ULC, except provide at least 2
detectors in rooms of 54 square meters or larger in area.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
Section 28 31 00
Page 6
2016-01-13
.6
Mount detectors at underside of ceiling or deck above unless otherwise indicated.
.7
Ensure detectors, located in areas subject to moisture or exterior atmospheric conditions or
hazardous locations are approved for such locations.
.8
Provide detectors with terminal screw type connections.
.9
Removal of detector head from its base to cause activation of system trouble signals if
detectors are provided with separable heads and bases.
2.5
ALARM INITIATING DEVICE SPACING AND LOCATION
.1
Detector spacing and location: in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
.2
Provide at least 2 detectors in rooms of 54 square meters or larger.
.3
Spacing: not to exceed 9m by 9m per detector, and 9 linear m per detector along corridors.
.4
Locate detectors minimum 900m from air discharge or return grille, and not closer than
450 mm to lighting fixtures.
.5
In areas without finished ceilings, mount detectors at underside of deck above unless
otherwise indicated.
2.6
DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS
.1
Provide detectors installed in ducts of photoelectric type and listed by ULC duct
installation.
.2
Provide integral control and power modules required for operation with main control
panel.
.3
Ensure detectors and associated modules are compatible with main control panel and
suitable for use in supervised circuit.
.4
Detector circuits: 4-wire type where detector operating power is transmitted over
conductors separate from initiating circuit. Malfunction of electrical circuits to detector or
its control or power modules to cause operation of system trouble signals.
.5
Provide a separate, fused power circuit for each smoke detection initiating circuit.
.6
Failure of power circuit: indicated as a trouble condition on corresponding initiating
circuit.
.7
Provide duct detectors with approved duct housing, mounted exterior to duct, with
perforated sampling tubes extending across width of duct.
.8
Activation of duct detectors to cause shutdown of associated air handling unit,
annunciation at control panel and tripping of master box and sounding of building
evacuation alarms.
.9
Provide detectors with visible indicator lamp that flashes when detector is in normal
standby mode and glows continuously when detector is activated.
.10
Provide remote indicator lamp for each detector.
.11
Permanently label remote indicator with tag of associated air handling unit(s).
.12
Provide each detector with remote test switch. Mount switch not more than 1.8 m above
finished floor.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
.13
2.7
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
Section 28 31 00
Page 7
2016-01-13
Permanently label test switch with tag of associated air handling unit(s).
AUDIBLE SIGNAL DEVICES
.1
Audible device(s):
.1
Horns: 95 db, flush mounting, 24 V dc.
.2
Do not exceed 80 percent of listed rating in amperes of notification appliance circuit.
Provide additional circuits above those shown if required to meet this requirement.
.3
Provide appliances specifically listed for outdoor use in locations exposed to weather.
.4
Finish appliances in red enamel.
.5
For surface mounting provide appliance manufacturer's approved back box. Back box
finish to match appliance finish.
2.8
VISUAL ALARM SIGNAL DEVICES
.1
Flush-mounted assembly of stroboscopic type suitable for use in electrically supervised
circuit and powered from notification appliance circuit.
.2
Appliances: minimum of 110 candela measured as approved by ULC, but not less than
effective intensity required by National Building Code of Canada for appliance spacing
and location.
.3
Protect lamps with thermoplastic lens and labelled "FIRE" in letters 12 mm high.
.4
Provide visible appliances within 300 mm of each audible appliance as indicated.
.5
Visible appliances may be part of audio-visual assembly, where more than two appliances
are located in same room or corridor.
2.9
CONDUIT
.1
Rigid Steel Conduit:
.1
.2
Zinc-Coated.
Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC):
.1
Zinc-coated steel only.
.3
Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)
.4
Surface Metal Raceway and Fittings:
.1
.2
2.10
Two-piece painted steel.
Totally enclosed snap-cover type.
WIRING
.1
Wire for 120 V circuits: No. 12 AWG minimum solid copper conductor.
.2
Wire for low voltage DC circuits: No. 14 AWG minimum solid copper conductor
.3
Wire to remote annunciators: No. 18 AWG minimum solid copper conductor.
.4
Wire for connection to base telegraphic alarm loop: No. 12 AWG minimum solid copper
conductor.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
Section 28 31 00
Page 8
2016-01-13
.5
Insulation 75 °C minimum with nylon jacket.
.6
For underground or wet allocations cable from control panel to master box and to
telegraphic loop: type UF.
.7
Colour code wiring.
2.11
AS-BUILT RISER DIAGRAM
.1
2.12
Fire alarm system riser diagram: on black lamicoid sheet with bevelled edges, white
lettering and designations, minimum size 600 x 600 mm.
ANCILLARY DEVICES
.1
Remote relay unit to initiate fan shutdown.
Part 3
EXECUTION
3.1
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
.1
3.2
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications,
including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and
datasheet.
INSTALLATION
.1
Install systems in accordance with CAN/ULC-S524 and TB OSH Chapter 3-04.
.2
Locate and install manual alarm stations and connect to alarm circuit wiring.
.3
Locate and install detectors and connect to alarm circuit wiring. Do not mount detectors
within 0.9 m of air outlets. Maintain at least 450 mm radius clear space on ceiling, below
and around detectors. Locate duct type detectors in straight portions of ducts.
.4
Connect alarm circuits to main control panel.
.5
Locate and install horns and visual signal devices and connect to signalling circuits.
.6
Connect signalling circuits to main control panel.
.7
Install end-of-line devices at end of alarm and signalling circuit.
.8
Locate and install remote relay units to control fan shut down.
.9
All devices to be installed on the correct zones. Confirm zoning with Departmental
Representative.
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Site Tests:
.1
.2
Perform tests in accordance with Section 26 05 00 and CAN/ULC-S537.
Fire alarm system:
.1
Test each device and alarm circuit to ensure manual stations, thermal and
smoke detectors transmit alarm to control panel and actuate alarm.
.2
Check annunciator panels to ensure zones are shown correctly.
PWGSC Ontario
Region Project
Number R.069124.001
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
.3
.4
.5
.2
Simulate grounds and breaks on alarm and signalling circuits to ensure
proper operation of system.
Class A circuits.
.1
Test each conductor on circuits for capability of providing alarm
signal on each side of single open-circuit fault condition imposed
near midmost point of circuit. Reset control unit after each alarm
function and correct imposed fault after completion of each test.
.2
Test each conductor on circuits for capability of providing alarm
signal during ground-fault condition imposed near midmost point
of circuit. Reset control unit after each alarm function and correct
imposed fault after completion of each test.
Class B circuits.
.1
Test each conductor on circuits for capability of providing alarm
signal on line side of single open-circuit fault condition imposed
at electrically most remote device on circuit. Reset control unit
after each alarm function and correct imposed fault after
completion of each test.
.2
Test each conductor on circuits for capability of providing alarm
signal during ground-fault condition imposed at electrically most
remote device on circuit. Reset control unit after each alarm
function and correct imposed fault after completion of each test.
Manufacturer's Field Services:
.1
.2
.3
3.4
Section 28 31 00
Page 9
2016-01-13
Obtain written report from manufacturer verifying compliance of Work, in
handling, installing, applying, protecting and cleaning of product and submit
Manufacturer's Field Reports as described in PART 1 - SUBMITTALS.
Provide manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations
and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
Schedule site visits, to review Work, as directed in PART 1 - QUALITY
ASSURANCE.
TRAINING
.1
3.5
Arrange and pay for on-site lectures and demonstrations by fire alarm equipment
manufacturer to train operational personnel in use and maintenance of fire alarm system.
CLEANING
.1
Proceed in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
.2
Upon completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials,
excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.
END OF SECTION
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement